Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
A VED I C zREADER
FOR STUDENTS
ARTHUR ANTHONY MACDONELLM.A. , PH .D.
BODEN PROFESSOR OF SANSKRIT
FELLOW OF BALLI OL COLLEGE ; FE LLOW OF THE BRITISH ACADEM Y
FELLOW OF THE ROYAL DANISH ACADEMY
CONTAINING THIRTY HYMNS OF THE RIGVEDA IN
THE ORIGINAL SAMHITA AND PADA TEXTS, WITH
TRANSLITERATION, TRANSLATION, EXPLANATORY
NOTES, INTRODUCTION, VOCABULARY
OXFORD
AT THE CLARENDON PRESS
1917
OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
LONDON ED INBURGH GLASGOW NEW YORK
TORONTO MELBOURNE CAPE TOWN BOMBAY
HUMPHREY MI L FORDPUBLISHER TO THE UNIVERSITY
PREFACE
THIS Reader is meant to be a compan ion volume to my Vedic
Grammar for Students . It contains thirty hymns comprising just
under 300 stanzas . These hymns have been taken exclusively from
the Rigveda, not only because that Veda represents the earl iest and
most important phase Of the sacred language and l iterature of India,
but because the addition O f specimens from the later Vedic l iterature
With their divergences in speech and thought would tend to confuse
the learner beginning the study O f the Oldest period . All the books
Of the Rigveda have been drawn upon except the ninth . The reason
O f th is exception is that,though the whole of the ninth book
practically consists of hymns addressed to Soma only, the hymn
Which in my opinion represents that deity best occurs in another
(the eighth ) book . Al l the most important metres are represented,
though no specimens O f the rare and complex stroph ic measurescould be given because none Of the hymns composed in them seemed
to be suitable for the Reader. I have also considered l iterary merit
as far as possible in making the selection . As regards subject-matter ,each of the more important deities is represented by one hymn
,Agni
alone by two. There are bes ides a few hymns Of a different type .
One is concerned with social li fe (x . one with magical ideas
(vn . two with cosmogony (x. 90 . and three with eschatology
(x . 14. 15 . The selection thus forms a brief_ _
epitome of the
Rigveda, the earliest monument Of Indian thought. The arrange
ment O f the hymns follows their order in the text O f the Rigveda as
shown, together with their respective deities and subjects , in the
vi PREFACE
table Of contents (p. ix) . As the latter l ist is so short,the name O f
the deity addressed in any selected hymn can be found at once,but
it also appears in its alphabetical order in the General Index .
Unl ike al l Sanskrit and Vedic chrestomathies known to me,the
presentwork is intended primari ly for students who, wh i le acquainted
with Classical Sanskrit, are beginners of Vedic lack i ng the aid O f a
teacher with an adequate knowledge O f the earl iest period of the
language and l iterature O f India . It will moreover, I think , be found
to contain much detailed information useful even to more advanced
students . Hence difficult and Obscure stanzas have never been
omitted from any O f the selected hymns,because the notes here
afford an Opportunity O f i l lustrating the methods of critical interpre
tation (see , for instance, pages 36, 47 , 139—40 , 152, 166,In conjunction wi th my Vedic Grammar f or Students, the Reader
a ims at supplying al l that is required for the complete understanding
O f the selections without reference to any other book . Each hymn
is preceded by a special introduction describing briefly the deity
or the subject with which it deals . The text of every stanza is
printed in three different forms . The first is the Samh it'
a text, in
Devanagari characters , exactly as handed down by tradition , without
change or emendation . But each Pada or metrical l ine is printed
separately so as to . exhibit to the eye the versification of the stanza .
Then cOmes on theright half Of the page the traditional Pada text inwh ich each word O f the Samhita text is given separately without
Sandhi,and in which compounds and certain derivatives and case
forms are analysed . This is an important addition because the Pada
text, as nearly contemporary in origin with the Samhita text, fur
nishes us wi th the earl iest interpretations , with in the sphere O f
phonetics and word -formation,O f the Rigveda . Next fol lows the
transl iterated Samh ita text, in wh ich by the removal O f vowel
contractions,the resolution O f sem ivowels, and the replacement of
a , the original metre O f the Rigveda is restored and,by the use
O f punctuation ,the sense i s made clearer . The translation , which
fol lows,is close
,accounting for every word O f the original , and is
PREFACE vii
based on the cr itical method O f interpretation . The notes furnish
m inute explanations of al l matters concerned with grammar,metre
,
accent,syntax ,
and exeges is . The general introduction gives a
concise account of the form and matter O f the Rigveda, describing in
outline its arrangement,i ts language and metre
,its religion and
mythology, besides the critical method here appl ied to the inter
pretation—O f its hymns . The vocabulary supplements the translation
and notes by giving the derivation O f every word and adding in
brackets the most Obvious cognates from the other Indo-European
languages al lied to Sanskrit,especially Avestic, Greek, Latin, and
Engl ish . I have added a copious general Index for the purpose
of enabl ing the student to uti l ize to the ful l the summary of Vedic
philology which this book contains . Any one who has worked h is
way carefully through the pages of theReader ought thus to have laid
a sol id foundation in Vedic scholarship , and to be prepared for
further studies on independent l ines.
Freedom from serious m isprints i s a matter O f great importance in
a book l ike this . Such freedom has,I trust
,been ach ieved by the aid
O f my two friends,Dr . James Morison
,Librarian of the Indian
Institute, and my former pupi l , Dr . A . Berriedale Keith,Regius
Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Ph ilology in the Univers ityOf Edinburgh . In the course O f this Obl iging task Prof . Keith has
suppl ied me with a number of suggestions , the adoption Of wh ich
has undoubtedly improved the notes in many points of detai l .
BALLIOL COLLEGE , OXFORD .
October , 19 17.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTI ON x1—xxx1
VEDI O HYMNSAgni
Savitr
Marutas
Visnu
Dy'
avaprthivi
IndraRudra
Apam h ap’
at .
Mitra
Brhaspati
Usas
Agn i
Parjanya
Pfi san
Apas
Mitra-Varun'
a
Sfi rya.
Aévinfi.
Varuna
Mandfikas
Visve deva'
s
Soma
Funeral Hymn
Pitaras
CONTENTS
Gambler x. 34
Purusa x. 90
Ratri 127
Hymn of Creation x. 129
Yama x. 135
Vata x. 168
VO OABU LARY 221 56
GENERA L INDEX 257 63
INTRODUCTION
1 . AGE OF THE RIGVEDA .
T HE Rigveda is undoubtedly the Oldest l iterary monument O f the
IndO -European languages . But the exact period when the hymns
were composed is a matter of conjecture. Al l that we can say with
any approach to certainty is that the oldest of them cannot date from
later than the thirteenth century B . C . This assertion is based on
the fol lowing grounds . Buddhism, which began to spread in India
about 500 B . O .
, presupposes the existence not on ly O f the Vedas,but
al so of the intervening l iterature O f the Brahmanas and Upan ishads .
The development of language and rel igious thought apparent in the
extensive l iterature Of the successive phases of these two Vedic
periods renders it necessary to postulate the lapse Of seven or eight
centuries to account for the gradual changes , l inguistic, rel igious ,
social, and pol itical , that th is l iterature di splays . On astronomical
grounds , one Sanskrit scholar has (cf . p . 146) concluded that the
Oldest Vedic hymns date from 3000 B. O .,whi le another puts them as
far back as 6000 B. 0 . These calculations are based on the assumption
that the early Indians possessed an exact astronomical knowledge O f
the sun’
s course such as there is no evidence, or even probab il ity,
that they actual ly possessed . On the other hand , the possibi lity of
such extreme antiquity seems to be disproved by the relationship
O f the hymns of the Rigveda to the oldest part of the Avesta,
which can hardly date earl ier than from about 800 R C . That
relationship i s so close that the language Of the Avesta, if it were
known at a stage some five centuries earl ier,could scarcely have
differed at al l from that Of the Rigveda . Hence the Indians could
not have separated from the Iranians much sooner than 1300 B . C .
But, according to Prof . Jacobi
,the separation took place before
4500 B . C . In that case we must assume that the Iranian and the
xii AGE OF THE RIGVEDA
Indian languages remained practical ly unchanged for the truly
immense period O f over 3000 years . We must thus rest content
With the moderate estimate Of the thirteenth century B . O . as the
approximate date for the beginning O f the Rigvedic period . Th is
estimate has not been invalidated by the discovery in 1907 O f the
names Of the Indian deities Mitra, Varuna , Indra, Nasatya , in an
inscription O f about 1400 B . 0 . found in Asia Minor . For the phonetic
form in which these names there appear may quite Well belong tothe Indo-Iranian period when the Indians and the Persians were
stil l one people. The date Of the inscription leaves two centuries for
the separation Of the Indians , their migration to India, and the
commencement of the Vedic hymn l iterature In the north -west of
Hindustan .
2 . ORIGIN AND GROWTH OF THE COLLECTION.
When the Indo-Aryans entered India,they brought with them
a religion in which the gods were ch iefly personified powers O f
Nature,a few Of them
,such as Dyaus , going back to the Indo
European,others
,such as Mitra
,Varuna
,Indra
,to the Indo-Iranian
period. They also brought with them the cult Of fi re and Of Soma ,
besides a knowledge Of the art Of composing rel igious poems in
several metres, as a comparison O f the Rigveda and theAvesta shows .
The purpose Of these ancient hymns was to propitiate the gods by‘
praises accompanying the Offering O f melted butter poured on the
fire and Of the juice Of the Soma plant placed on the sacrificial grass .
The hymns which have survived in the Rigveda from the early period
Of the Indo-Aryan invas ion were almost exclusively. composed by
a hereditary priesthood. They were handed down in different famil ies
by memory, not by writing , which could hardly have been intro
duced into India before about 700 B . c. These family groups O f hymns
were gradual ly brought together til l , with successive additions,they
assumed the earl iest col lected form of the Rigveda . Then fol lowed
the constitution Of the Samh ita text,which appears to have taken
place about 600 B . O ., at the end O f the period Of the Brahmanas
,
but before the Upan ishads , wh ich form appendages to those works ,
came into existence. The creators O f the Samhita d id not in any
INTRODUCTION xi ii
way alter the diction of the hymns here col lected together , but only
applied to the text certain rules of Sandhi which prevailed in their
time,and by which ,
in particular, vowels are either contracted or
changed into sem i -vowels,and a is often dropped after 9 and o
,
in such a way as constantly to Obscure the metre. Soon after this
work was concluded,extraordinary precautions were taken to preserve
from loss or corruption the sacred text thus fixed . The earl iest
expedient,
of this kind was the formation of the Pada or‘word
text,in which all the words of the Samhita text are separated and
given in their original form as unaffected by the rul es of Sandhi ,
and in which most compounds and some derivatives and inflected
forms are analysed . This text,wh ich is virtual ly the earl iest com
mentary on the Rigveda, was fol lowed by other and more compl icated
methods Of reciting the text, and by various works cal led Anukram
anIs or‘Indexes ’
, wh ich enumerate from the beginn ing to the
end of the Rigveda the number of stanzas contained in’
each hymn,
the deities,and the metres of al l the stanzas of the Rigveda. Thanks
to these various precautions the text of the Rigveda has been handed
down for years with a fidel ity that finds no paral lel in any
other l iterature .
3. EXTENT AND DIVISIONS O F THE RIGVEDA .
The Rigveda cons ists of or, counting eleven others of the
eighth Book which are recogni zed as later additions,
hymns .
These contain a total of about stanzas, wh ich give an average
of ten stanzas to each hymn . The shortest hymn has only one
nza, wh i le the longest has fifty
-eight. I f printed continuous ly l ike
characters,the Samhita text would fi l l an octavo
about 600 pages of thi rty-three l ines each . I t has been
calculated that in bulk the RV. is equivalent to the extant poems
of Homer .
There is a twofold division of the RV. into parts . One,which is
purely mechanical,is into Astakas or eighths of about equal length,
each of which is subdivided into eight Adhyayas or{lessons while
each of the latter consists of Vargas or‘
groups of five or s ix s tanzas .
The other division is into ten Mandalas or‘books
’
(l it.‘cycles
Xiv EXTENT AND DIVISIONS OF THE RIGVEDA
and Suktas or‘hymns
’
. The latter method is an h istorical one,
indicating the manner in which the col lection came into being .
This sys tem is now invar iably followed by Western Scholars in
referring to or quoting from the Rigveda.
4 . ARRANGEMENT OF THE RIGVEDA .
Six of the ten books , i i to V l l,are homogeneous in character . The
hymns contained in each of them were, according to native
Indian tradition , composed or‘seen
’
by poets O f the same family,
which handed them down as its own col lection . The tradition i s
borne out by the internal evidence of the seers’
names mentioned in
the hymns , and by that O f the refrains occurring in each of these
books . The method of arrangement fol lowed in the ‘fam ily books
is uni form,for each of them is simi larly divided into groups addressed
to different gods . On the other hand , Books i , vi i i , and x were not
composed each by a distinct family of seers,wh i le the groups of
which they consist are cons tituted by being the hymns composed
by different individual seers . Book ix is distinguished from the
rest by al l i ts hymns being addressed to one and the same deity,
Soma,and by its groups being based not on identity O f authorship ,
but of metre .
F amily books— In these the first group of hymns is invariably
addressed to Agni , the second to Indra, and those that fol low to gods
of less importance. The hymns within these deity groups are
arranged according to the dim in ishing number of stanzas contained
in them . Thus in the second Book the Agni group of ten hymns
begins with one of sixteen stanzas and ends with one of only Six.
The first hymn of the next group in the same book has twenty-one
,
the last only four stanzas . The entire group of the fami ly books is ,
moreover,arranged according to the increasing number of the hymns
in each of those books,i f al lowance i s made for later additions . Thus
the second Book has forty-three
,the th ird s ixty-two
,the s ixth seventy
five, and the seventh one hundred and four'
hymns .
‘ The homo
geneity of the fam ily books renders it h ighly probable that they
formed the nucleus of the RV.,which gradual ly assumed its final
shape by success ive additions to these books .
INTRODUCTION xv
The earl iest of these addi tions appears to be the second half of
Book i , which , cons isting of n ine groups , each by a di fferent author ,
was prefixed to the fam ily books , the internal arrangement of which
it fol lows . The eighth is l ike the fami ly books as being in the main
composed by members Of one family, the Kanvas but it di ffers from
them in not beginn ing with hymns to Agni and in the prevalence of
the strophic metre called Pragatha . The fact of its containing fewer
hymns than the seventh book shows that it did not form a unit
of the fam ily books ; but its partial resemblance to them caused it
to be the first addition at the end Of that col lection . The first part
of Book i (1—50) is in several respects l ike Book vi ii : Kanvas seem to
have been the authors of the majori ty of these hymns their favourite
strophic metre is again found here ; and both col lections contain
many sim ilar or identical passages . There must have been some
difference between the two groups, but the reason why they should
have been separated by being added at the beginning and the end of
an ol der-
col lection has not yet been shown .
The ninth book was added as a consequence of the first eight beingformed into a unit. It cons ists entirely of hymns addressed to Soma
while the juice was clarifying (p avamana ) on the other hand,the
family books contain not a Single Soma hymn,and Books i and viii
together only three hymns invok ing Soma in his general character .
Now the hymns of Book ix were composed by authors of the same
famil ies as those of Books 11 to vi i,as is shown
,for instance
,by the
of refrains pecul iar to those fam il ies . Hence it is to
al l the hymns to Soma Pavamana were removed
to vi ii , in order to form a single col lection belonging to
the Udgatr or chanting pr iest, and added after /Books
were the sphere of the Hotr or reciting priest. The
econdite allus ions in the hymns O f this book suggest
that they are later than those of the preceding books ; but some of
them may be early, as accompanying the Soma ritual wh ich goes
back to the Indo-Iranian period . The hymns of the first part O f thisbook (1—60) are arranged according to the decreas ing number of their
stanzas , beginning with ten and ending with four. In the second
part (61 which contains some very long hymns (one of forty-eight
and another of fifty-eight stanzas) , this arrangement is not fol lowed .
xvi ARRANGEMENT O F THE RIGVEDA
The two parts also di ffer in'
metre : the hymns of the first are,excepting
four stanzas,composed in GayatrI , while the second consists mainly
of groups in other metres ; thus 68—84 form a Jagati and 87—97
a Tristubh group .
The tenth took was the final addition . I ts language and subjectmatter show that it is later in origin than the other books ; its
authors were,moreover
,clearly fami li ar with them . Both its
position at the end of the RV. and the fact that the number of
its hymns (191) is made up to that of the first book indicate i ts
supplementary character . I ts hymns were composed by a large
number of seers of different fam i l ies , some of which appear in other
books ; but the traditional attribution of authorship is of l ittle or
no value in the case of a greatmany hymns . In spite of its general ly
more modern character,it contains s ome hymns quite as old and
poetic as the average of those in other books . These perhaps found
a place here because for some reason they had been overlooked while
the other col lections were being formed . As regards language, we
find in the tenth book earlier grammatical forms and words growingObsolete
,wh i le new words and m eanings
‘
begin to emerge. AS to
matter , a tendency to abstract ideas and ph ilosophical speculation ,
as wel l as the introduction of magical conceptions , such as belong to
the sphere O f the Atharvaveda , is here found to preva il .
5 . LANGUAGE .
The hymns of the RV. are composed in the earl iest stage of that
l iterary language O f wh ich the latest, or Class ica l Sanskrit, was
stereotyped by the grammar of Panini at the end of the fourth
century B. O . It differs from the latter about as much as Homeric
from Attic Greek . It exh ibits a much greater variety of forms than
Sanskrit does . Its case-forms both in nominal and pronominal in
flexion are more numerous . It has more participles and gerunds .
I t is , however , in verbal forms that its comparative richness is most
apparent. Thus the RV. very frequently uses the subjunctive, which
as such has entirely d ied out in Sanskrit it has twelve forms of the
infin itive , wh ile only a s ingle one of these has survived in Sanskr it.
The language of theRV. also differs from Sanskrit in its accent, wh ich ,
INTRODUCTION xvi i
l ike that of ancient Greek , is O f a musical nature,depending on the
pitch of the voice, and is marked throughout the hymns . This
accent has in Sanskr it been changed not only to a stress accent,but
has shifted its pos ition as depending on quantity, and is no longer
marked . The Vedic accent occupies a very important position in
Comparative Phi lology ,while the Sanskrit accent
,being secondary,
has no value of this kind .
The Sandhi of the RV. represents an earl ier and a less conventional
stage than that of Sanskrit. Thus the insertion of a s ibilant between
final n and a hard palatal or dental is in the RV. restricted to cases
where it is historical ly justified in Sanskrit it has become universal ,
being extended to cases where it has no justification . After 9 and o
in the RV. a is nearly always pronounced, while in Sanskrit it is
invariably dropped . It may thus be affirmed with certainty that no
student can understand Sanskrit historically without knowing the
language O f the RV.
6 . METRE .
The hymns of the RV. are without exception metrical . They
contain on the average ten stanzas, general ly of four verses or l ines ,
but also of three and sometimes five . The line,wh ich is cal led Pada
and forms the metrical un it,usual ly consists of eight,
eleven,or twelve syl lables . A stanza is
,as a rule
,made up of l ines
of the same type ; but some of the rarer k inds of stanza are formed
by combining l ines of d ifferent length . There are about fifteen
metres,but only about seven Of these are at al l common . By far the
most common are the Tristubh (4 x 11 syllables), the GayatrI (3 xand the Jagati (4 x l 2), which together furn ish two-thirds of the
total number O f stanzas in the RV. The Vedic metres, which are
the foundation of the Clas sical Sanskrit metres except two,have a
quantitative rhythm in which short and long syl lables alternate and
which is of a general ly iambic type . It is only the rhythm of the last
four or five syl lables (cal led the cadence) of the l ine that is rigidly
determ ined, and the l ines of eleven and twelve syl lables have a
caesura as wel l . In theirstructur e th e Vedic metres thus come hal f
way between the metres of the Indo-Iran ian period, in which , as the
Avesta shows,the principle is the number of syl lables only, and
1902 b
xvi i i METRE
those of Class ical Sanskrit, in which (except the Sloka) the quantity
of every single syl lable in the line is fixed . Usua lly a hymn of the
Rigveda consists of stanzas in the same metre throughout a typical
divergence from th is rule is to mark the concl us ion of a hymn with
a stanza in a di fferent metre . Some hymns a‘
re stroph ic in their
construction . The strophes in them consist e ither of three s tanzas
(cal led trca) in the same s imple metre, generally Gayatri , or of two
stanzas in different mixed.
metres . The latter type of strophe is
cal led Pragatha and is found chiefly in the eighth book .
7. RELIGION OF THE RIGVEDA .
This is concerned with the worship of gods that are largely
personifications of the powers of nature. The hymns are mainly
invocations of these gods , and are meant to accompany the oblation
of Soma juice and the fire sacrifice of mel ted butter . It i s thus
essential ly a polytheistic rel igion ,which assumes a pantheistic
colouring only in a few of its latest hymns . The gods are usual ly
stated in the RV. to be thirty-three in number
,being divided into
three groups of eleven distributed in earth , air, and heaven ,the three
divis ions of the Un iverse . Troops of deities, such as the Maruts
,are
of course not included in this number . The q s were bel ieved to
have had a beginning. But they were not thought to have al l come
into being at the same time for the RV. occasionally refers to earl ier
gods , and certain deities are described as the offspring of Others .
That they were considered to have been original ly mortal is impl ied
in the statement that they acquired immortal ity by drinking Soma
or by receiving it as a gift from Agni and Savitr .
The gods were conceived as human in appearance. Their bodily
parts , which are frequently mentioned , are in many instances s imply
figurative i l lustrations of the phenomena of nature represented by
them . Thus the arms of the Sun are nothing more than h is rays ;
and the tongue and l imbs of Agni merely denote his flames . Some
of the gods appear equipped as warriors , especial ly Indra, others are
descr ibed as pr iests , especial ly Agni and Brhaspati . A l l of them
drive through the air in cars,drawn ch iefly by steeds , but sometimes
by other an imals . The favourite food of men is a lso that of the gods ,
xx CLASSIFICATION OF THE GODS
heaven,air
,and earth
,according to the threefold division suggested
by the RV. itsel f. The celestial gods are Dyaus, Varuna , Mitra ,Sti rya , Savitr , Pusan, the Asvins , and the goddesses Usas , Dawn ,
and Ratri , Night. The atmospheric gods are Indra, Apam napat,
Rudra,the Maruts
, Vayu, Parjanya, and Apas , the Waters . The
terrestrial deities are PrthivI , Agni , and Soma . This Reader con
tains hymns addressed to al l these gods , wi th detai led introductions
describing their characters in the words,as far as is possible, of the
RV. itself. A few quite subord inate deities are not included, partly
because no entire hymn is addressed to them . Two such belong to
the celestial sphere . Trita,a somewhat obscure god, who is mentioned
only in detached stanzas of the RV.,comes down from the Indo
Iranian period. He seems to represent the‘third
’
or l ightning
form of fire. Similar in origin to Indra , he was ousted by the latter
at an early period. Matari svan is a divine being also referred to only
in scattered stanzas of the RV. He is described as having brought
down the hidden fi re from heaven to men on earth , l ike thePrometheus
of Greek mythology. Among the terrestrial deities are certain rivers
that are p ersonified and invoked in the RV. Thus the Sindhu (Indus )is celebrated as a goddess in one hymn (x . 75
,2 . 4 . and the Vipas
(Bi as) and the SutudrI (Sutlej ), s ister streams of the Panjab , in another
(iii . The most important and Oftenest lauded is,however, the
Sarasvatl‘
(vi . 61 ; VI I . Though the personification goes much
further here than in the case of other streams , the connexion of the
goddess with the river is never lost Sight of in the RV.
Abstract deities — One result of the advance of thought during the
period of the RV . from the concrete towards the abstract was
the rise of abstract deities . The earl ier and more numerous class of
these seems to have started from epi thets wh ich were appl icable to
one or more Older deities,but which came to acquire an independent
value as the want of a god exercising the particular activity in
question began to be fel t. We find here names denoting either an
agent (formed with the suffix tr or tar ), such as Dhatr ‘Creator ’
,or
an attribute,such as Prajapati ,
‘Lord of Creatures ’
. Thus Bhatr,
otherwise an epithet of Indra,appears also as an independent deity
who creates heaven and earth , sun and moon . More rarely occur
Vi dhatr,the
‘Disposer’
,Dhartr
,the ‘Supporter
’
,Tratr , the
INTRODUCTION xxi
‘Protector and Netr , the Leader The only agent god mentioned
at al l frequently in the RV. is Tvastr,the ‘Artificer
’
,though no
entire hymn is addressed to him . He i s the most sk ilful of workmen,
having among other things fashioned the bolt of Indra and a new
drinking-cup for the gods . He is a guardian of Soma
,which i s
cal led the‘food of Tvastr
’
,and which Indra drinks in Tvastr
’
s
house. He is the father of Saranyu, wife of Vivasvant and mother
of the primaeval twins Yama and YamI . The name of the solar
deity Savitr , the‘Stimulator
’
,belongs to this class of agent gods
(of. p.
There are a few other abstract deities whose names were original ly
epithets of older gods, but now become epithets of the supreme god
who was being evolved at the end of the Rigvedic period . These
appellations , compound in form , are of rare and late occurrence.
The most important is Prajapati ,‘Lord of Creatures ’
. O riginal ly
an epithet of such gods as Savitr and Soma , this name is employed
in a late verse of the tenth book to designate a distinct deity in
the character of a Creator. Simi larly, the epithet ViSvakarman ,
‘al l -creating appears as the name of an independent deity to whom
two hymns (X. 8 1 . 82) are addressed . Hiranyagarbha, the‘Golden
Germ once occurs as the name of the supreme god described as the‘oné lord of al l that exists ’
. In one curious instance it is possible
to watch the rise of an abstract deity of this type. The refrain of a
late hymn of the RV. (x . 121) is kasma i d ev’
aya h avi sa vi dhema
‘to what god should we pay worship with oblation ? This led to
the word ka, who being used in the later Vedic literature as an
independent name,Ka , of the supreme god. The only abstract
deity of th is type occurring in the oldest as wel l as the latest parts
of the RV. is Brhaspati (p.
The second and smal ler class of‘
abstract deities comprises per
sonifications of abstract nouns . There are seven or eight of these
occurring in the tenth'
book . Two hymns (83 . 84) are addressed to
Manyu,‘Wrath
’
,and one (x . 151) to Sraddha,
‘Faith’
. Anumati ,3‘
Favour (of the Aramati ,‘Devotion , Sfinrta,
‘Bounty’
,
AsunIti ,‘Spirit
-l ife’
, and Nirrti,
‘Decease’
,occur only in a few
isolated passages .
A purely abstract deity, Often incidental ly celebrated throughout
Xx ii ABSTRACT DE[TIES
the RV . is A-diti,
‘Liberation
‘Freedom (l it. un whose
main characteristic i s the power of del ivering from the bonds of
physical suffering and moral gui lt. She,however
,occupies a unique
position among the abstract deities,owing to the pecul iar way in
which the personification seems to have arisen . She is the mother
of the smal l group of deities cal led Adityas , often styled‘sons of
Aditi This expression at first most probably meant nothing more
than ‘Sons of l iberation according to an idiom common in the RV.
and elsewhere. The word was then person ified, with the curious
result'
that the mother is mythological ly younger than some at least
of her sons, who (for instance Mitra) date from the Indo-Iranian
period. The goddess Diti , named only three times in the RV. ,
probably came into being as an antithesis to Aditi, with whom she
is twice mentioned.
Goddesses play an insignificant part in the RV. The only one of
importance is Usas (p . Next come Sarasvati,celebrated in two
whole hymns (vi . 6 1 vi i . 95) as Wel l as parts of others , and Vac,‘Speech
’
(x. 71 . With one hymn each are addressed PrthiVI,
Earth (v. Ratri,
‘Night’
(x. 127, p . and Aranyani ,
Goddess of the Forest’
(X. O thers are only sporadi cal ly
mentioned . The wives of the great gods are stil l more ins ignificant,being mere names formed from those of their consorts
,and altogether
lacking in individuality : such are AgnayI, Indrani , VarunanI,spouses of Agn i , Indra, and Varuna respectively.
Dual Dinintttes .
— A pecul iar feature of the religion of the RV. i s
the invocation of pairs of deities whose names are combined as com
pounds , each member of which is in the dual . About a dozen such
pairs are celebrated in entire hymns,and about a dozen more in
detached stanzas . By far the largest number of hymns is addressed
to the couple Mitra-Varuna, though the names most frequently found
as dual compounds are those Of Dyava-
prthivI , Heaven and Earth
(p. The latter pair , having been associated as universal parents
from the Indo-European period onwards , in al l probabi l ity furnished
the analogy for this dual type.
Groups of Deities — There are also a fewmore or less definite groups
of deities, general l y as sociatedwith some particular god. The Maruts
(p. who attend on Indra, are the most numerous group. The
INTRODUCTION xxii i
smal ler group of the Adityas , of whom Varuna is the chief, is
constantly mentioned in company wi th their mother Aditi . Their
number is stated in the RV. to be seven or,with the addition of
Martanda,eight. One passage (i i . 27, 1) enumerates Six of them ,
Mitra,Aryaman
,Bhaga , Varuna , Daksa, AmSa : Sti rya was probably
regarded as the seventh . A much less important group, without
individual names or definite number, is that of the Vasus , whose
leader is general ly Indra . There are,final ly ,
the Visve devas (p.
who, invoked in many hymns , form a comprehensive group,
which in spite of its name is, strange to say, sometimes conceived as
a narrower group associated with others l i ke the Vasus andAdityas .
L esser Dinini ttes.—Besides the h igher gods, a number of lesser
divine powers are known to the RV. The most prominent of these
are the Rbhus , who are celebrated in eleven hymns . They are a
deft-handed trio, who by their marvel lous Sk il l acquired the rank of
deities . Among thei r five main feats of dexterity the greatest con
s isted in transforming the bowl of Tvastr into four shin ing cups .
The bowl and the cups have been variously interpreted as the moon
with its four phases or the year with its seasons . TheRbhus furtherexhibited their skil l in renewing the youth of their parents , by whom
Heaven and Earth seem to have been meant.
O ccasional mention i s made in the RV. of an Apsaras, a celestial
water -nymph , the spouse of a corresponding genius named Gandharva .
In a few passages more Apsarases than one are spoken of but the
only one mentioned by name is UrvaSI . Gandharva is in the RV .
a single being (like the Gandarewa of the Avesta), who dwells in the
aerial sphere, guards the celestial Soma,and is (as in the Avesta)
connected with the waters .
There are,lastly, a few divinities of the tutelary order
, guardians
watching over the welfare of house or field. Such is the rarely
mentioned Vastospati ,‘Lord of the Dwel l ing who is invoked to
grant a favourable entry, to remove disease , and to bestow protection
and prosperity. Ksetrasya pati , Lord of the Field is besought to
grant cattle and horses and to confer welfare. Si ta,the Furrow i s
once invoked to dispense crops and rich blessings .
In addition to the great phenomena of nature,various features of
the earth’
s surface as wel l as artificial objects are to be found deified
xxiv LESSER DIVINITIES
in the RV. Thus bes ides Rivers and Waters (p. al ready
mentioned as terrestrial goddesses , mountains are often addressed as
divin ities,but only along with other natural objects
,or in association
with gods . Plants are regarded as divine powers, one entire hymn
(x . 97) being devoted to their praise, chiefly with reference to their
heal ing properties .
‘
Sacr ificial implements,moreover , are deified.
The-
most important of these is the sacrificial post, which is praised
and invoked in a whole hymn (i i i . The sacrificial grass (b arh i s)and the Divine Doors (dvaro d evih), which lead to the place of
sacrifice,are addressed as goddesses . The pressing stones (gravanas)
are invoked as deities in three hymns (x . 76 . 94 . 175) spoken of as
immortal , unaging, mightier than heaven , they are besought to drive
away demons and destruction . The Mortar and Pestle used in
pounding the Soma plant are also invoked in the RV. (i . 28 , 5 .
Weapons , finally, are sometimes deified : armour , bow, quiver ,
arrows, and drum being addressed in one of the hymns (vi .
TheDemons often mentioned in the hymns are of two kinds . The
higher and more powerful class are the aerial foes of the gods . These
are seldom cal led asura in the RV.,where in the older parts that
word means a divine being , l ike ahura in the Avesta (of. p .
The term d asa or d asyu , properly the name of the dark aborigines ,
is frequently used in the sense of fiend to designate the aerial
demons . The confl ict i s regularly one between a Single god and
a Single demon,as exemp lified by Indra and Vrtra. The latter is
by far the most frequently mentioned . His mother being cal led
Danu,he is sometimes al luded to by the metronymic term Danava .
Another powerful demon is Vala,the person ified cave of the cows,
which he guards , and which are set free by Indra and his al l ies,
notably the Angirases . O ther demon adversaries of Indra areArbuda,
described as a wi ly beast, whose cows Indra drove out ; ViSvarI‘
Ipa,
son of Tvastr, a three~headed demon slain by both Trita and Indra,
who seize h is cows ; and Svarbhanu ,who ecl ipses the sun . There
are several other individual demons, general ly described as Dasas
and slain by Indra . A group of demons are the Panis niggards
primari ly foes of Indra, who , with the aid of the dog Sarama, tracks
and releases the cows hidden by them.
The second or lower class of demons are terrestrial gobl ins , enemies
INTRODUCTION XXV
of men . By far the most commori generic name for them is Raksas .
They are nearly always mentioned in connexion with some god who
destroys them . The much“
less common term Yatu or Yatudhana
(primari ly‘Sorcerer alternates with Raksas . and perhaps expresses
a species. A class of demons scarcely referred to in the RV. ,but
often mentioned in the l ater Vedas , are the Pisacas, eaters of raw
flesh or of corpses .
Not more than thirty hymns are concerned with subjects other
than the worship of gods or deified objects . About a dozen of these ,
almost entirely confined to the tenth book , deal withmagical practices ,
which properly belong to the sphere of the Atharvaveda . Their
contents are augury (ii . 42 . 43) or Spel ls directed against poisonous
vermin (i . 191) or disease (X. against a demon destructive of
children (x. or enemies (X. or rival wives (X . A few
are incantations to preserve l ife (X. 58 . or to induce sleep (v.
or to procure offspring (x . 183) while one is a panegyric of frogs as
magical bringers of rain (vi i . 103, p.
8 . SEOULAR MATTER IN THE RIGVEDA.
Secular hymns— Hardly a score of the hymns are secular poems
,
These are especial ly valuable as throwing direct l ight on the earl iest
thought and civil ization of India . One of the most noteworthy of
them is the long wedding hymn (X. There are also five funeral
hymns (x . 14 Four of these are addressed to deities concerned
with the future l ife ; the, last, however, is quite secular in tone , and
gives more information than any of the rest about the funeral customs
of early Vedic India (of. p.
Mythologica l dialogues — Besides several mythological dialogues in
which the speakers are divine beings (iv. 62 ; x . 51 . 52 . 86 .
there are two in which both agents are human . One i s,a somewhat
obscure col loquy (X . 95) between a mortal lover Purfi ravas and the
celestial nymph UrvaSI,who is on the point of forsaking him . It is
the earliest form of the story which much more than a thousand
years later formed the subject of Kal idasa’
s drama Vikramorvaéi .
The other (x . 10) is a dialogue between Yama and Yami , the twin
parents of the human race . This group of hymns has a special
l iterary interest as foreshadowing the dramatic works of a later age.
xxvi SECULAR HYMNS
Didactic hymns— Four hymns are of a didactic character . One of
these (x . 34) is a strik ing poem ,being a monologue in wh ich
a gambler laments the misery he has brought on himsel f and h is
home by his inabi lity to resist the attraction of the dice. The rest
which describe the various ways in which men fol low gain (ix. 112)or praise wise speech (X . or the value of good deeds (X . antici
pate the sententious poetry for wh ich post-Vedic l iterature i s noted.
Riddles — Two of the hymns consist of riddles . One of these
(viii . 29 , p. 147) describes various gods without mention ing their
names . More elaborate and Obscure is a long poem of fifty-two stanzas
(i . in which a number of enigmas , largely connected with the
sun, are propounded in mystical and symbolic language . Thus the
wheel of order with twelve spokes , revolving round the heavens,
and containing within it in couples 720 sons , means the year with
its twel ve months and 360 days and 360 nights .
Cosmogonic hymns— About half a dozen hymns consist Of specula
tions on the origin of the world through the agency of a Creator
(cal led by various names) as distinct from any of the ordinary gods .
One of them (X . 129, p . which describes the world as due to the
development of the existent (sat) from the non-existent (a - sat) , is
particularly interesting as the starting-
point of the evolutional phi lo
Sophy which in later times assumed shape in the Sankhya system .
A semi -historical character attaches to one complete hymn (i . 126)and to appendages of 3 to 5 stanzas attached to over thirtyj
others ,
which are cal led Danastutis,or
‘
praises O f gifts’
. These are pane
gyrics of l iberal patrons on behal f of whom the seers composed their
hymns . They y ield incidental genealogical information about the
poets and their employers , as wel l as about the names and the
habitat of the Vedic tribes . They are l ate in date‘
,appearing chiefly
in the first and tenth,as wel l as among the supplementary hymns of
the eighth book .
Geographical data— From the geographical data of the RV.
,
especially the numerous r ivers there mentioned, it is to be inferred
that the Indo-Aryan tribes when the hymns were composed occupied
the terri tory roughly corresponding to the north -West Frontier
Province,and the Panjab of to-day. The references to flora and fauna
bear out th is conclus ion .
xxvi ii OCCUPATIONS AND AMUSEMENTS
trades and crafts already existed,though doubtless in a rudimentary
s tage . The occupations of the wheelwright and the carpenter were
combined . The sm ith melted ore in a forge, and made kettles and
other vessel s of metal . The tanner prepared the skins of animals.
Women plaited mats of grass or reeds , sewed , and especial ly wove,but whether they ever did so professional ly is uncertain .
Amusements — Among these chariot-racing was the favourite .
The most popular social recreation was playing with dice (cp . p.
Dancing was al so practised , ch iefly by women . The people were
fond of mus ic,the instruments used being the drum (dundubh i ) , the
flute (Vana), and the lute (Vina) . Singing is also mentioned.
9 . LITERARY MERIT OF THE RIGVEDA .
The diction of the hymns is on the whole natural and simple, free
from the use of compounds of more than two members . Cons idering
their great antiquity, the hymns are composed with a remarkable
degree of metrical sk il l and command of language. But as they were
produced by a sacerdotal class and were general ly intended to ao
company a ritual no longer primitive, their poetry is often impaired
by constant sacrificial al lusions. This is especial ly noticeable in the
hymns addressed to the two ritual deities Agni and Soma,where
the thought becomes affected by conceits and obscured bymysticism .
Nevertheless the RV. contains much genuine poetry. As the gods
are mostly connected with natural phenomena, the praises addressed
to them give rise to much beautiful and even noble imagery. The
degree of l iterary merit in different hymns natural ly varies a good
deal,but the average is remarkably high . The most poetical hymns
are those addressed toDawn ,equal i f not superior in beauty to the
rel igious lyrics of any other l iterature. Some of the hymns to Indra
Show much graphic power in describing his conflict with the demon
Vrtra. The hymns to the Maruts,or Storm gods, often depict with
vigorous imagery the phenomena of thunder and l ightning, and the
mighty onset of the wind . One hymn to Parjanya (v. 83) paints
the devastating effects of the rain -storm with great vividness . The
hymns in praise of Varuna describe the various aSpects of his sway
as moral ruler of the world in an exalted s train of poetry. Some of
INTRODUCTION XXIX
the mythological dialogues set forth the Situation with much beauty
of language ; for example, the colloquy between Indra’
s messenger
Sarama and the demons who stole the cows (X. and that between
the primaeval twins Yama and YamI (X. The Gambler’
s lament
(X. 34) is a fine specimen of pathetic poetry . One of the funeral
hymns (X. 18 ) expresses ideas connected with death in language of
impressive and solemn beauty . One of the cosmogonic hymns
(X. 129) i l lustrates how philosophical speculation can be clothed in
poetry of no mean order .
10 . INTERPRETATION.
In dealing with the hymns of the RV. the important question
arises,to 'what extent are we able to understand their real sense
,
cons idering that they have come down to us as an isolated relic from
the remotest period of Indian l iterature The reply, stated general ly,
is that, as a result of the labours of Vedic scholars, the meaning of
a cons iderable proportion of the RV. is clear,but O f the rema inder
many hymns and a great many single stanzas or passages are still
Obscure or un intel l igible .
‘
This was already the case in the time of
Yaska , the author of the Nirukta,the oldest extant commentary
(0 . 500 B. c. ) on about 600 detached stanzas of the RV. for he quotes
one of his predecessors, Kautsa,as saying that the Vedic hymns were
obscure,unmean ing, and mutual ly contradictory.
In the earl ier period of Vedic studies,commencing about the
middle of the n ineteenth century, the traditional method, wh ich
follows the great commentary of Sayana (fourteenth century
and is represented by the translation of the RV.,begun by H. H.
Wi lson in 1850, was cons idered adequate . It has since been proved
that, though the native Indian commentators are invaluable guides
in explain ing the theological and ritual texts of the Brahmanas and
Sutras, with the atmosphere of which
__they were fami liar
,they did
not possess a continuous tradition from the time when the Vedic
hymns were composed . That the gap between the poets and the
interpreters even earl ier than Yaska must have been cons iderable,
is shown by the divergences of Opin ion among h is predecessors as
quoted by h im . Thus one of these,Aurnavabh a
,interprets nasatyau ,
XXX INTERPRETATION
an epithet of the Asvins , as‘true, not fal se
’
,another Agrayana , a s
‘leaders O f truth (satyasy a pranetarau ), whi le Yaska himsel f thinks
it may mean‘nose-born
’
(nas ik a-
p rab h avau ) ! Yaska,moreover
,
mentions several different schools of interpretation ,each of which
explained difficulties in accordance with its own particular theory.
Yaska’
s own interpretations , which in al l cases of doubt are based on
etymology, are evidently often merely conjectural,for he frequently
g ives several alternative explanations of a word. Thus he explains
the epithet jata-Ved as in as many as five different ways . Yet he
must have had more and better means of ascertain ing the sense of
var ious obscure words than Sayana who l ived nearly years
later . Sayana’
s interpretations , however , sometimes differ from
those of Yaska . Hence either Yaska is wrong or Sayana does not
fol low the tradition . Again ,Sayana Often gives several incons istent
explanations of a word in interpreting the same passage or in com
menting on the same word in _ different passages . Thus asura ,
‘divine being’
,is variously rendered by h im as
‘expel ler of foes
’
,
‘
giver of strength’
,
‘
giver of l ife’
,
‘hur ler away of what i s un
desired’
.
‘
giver of breath or water’
,
‘thrower of oblations
, pr iest’
,
‘taker away of breath
’
,
‘expel ler of water , Parjanya
’
,
‘impel ler
strong’
,
‘wise
’
,and ‘
rain -water’
or‘a water -discharging cloud
In short it is clear from a careful examination of their comments
that neither Yaska nor Sayana possessed any certa in knowledge
about a large number of words in the RV. Hence their interpreta
tions can be treated as decis ive only if they are borne out by
probabil ity, by the context,and by paral lel passages .
For the traditional method Roth , the founder of Vedic phi lology,
substituted the critica l method of interpreting the difficul t parts of
the RV. from interna l evidence by the m inute comparison of a l l
words parallel in form and matter,whi le taking into cons ideration
context, grammar
,and etymology, without ignoring either the help
supplied by the historical study of the Vedic language in i ts con
nexion wi th Sanskrit or the outside evidence derived from the Avesta
and from Comparative Ph i lology. In the appl ication of h is method
Roth attached too much weight to etymological cons iderations , wh ile
he underva lued the evidence of native tradition . On the other hand,
a reaction arose wh ich,in emphasiz ing the purely Indian character
INTRODUCTION
of the Vedic hymns,connects the interpretation of them too closely
with the l iterature of the post-Vedic period and the much more
advanced civil ization there described. It Is Important to note that
the critical scholar has at h is disposal not on ly al l the material that
was open to the traditional interpreters , and to which he is moreover
able to apply the comparative and historical methods of research,
but also possesses over and above many valuable aids that were
unknown to the traditional school—" the Avesta,Comparative Ph i lo
logy, Comparative Rel igion and Mythology, and Ethnology. The
student‘
wil l find in the notes of the Reader many exempl ifications
of the usefulness of these aids to interpretation . There is good reason
to hope from , the results al ready achieved that steady adherence
to the critical method,by adm itting al l available evi dence and by
avoiding onesidedness in its appl ication ,wi ll eventual ly clear up a
large proportion of the obscurities and diffi culties that stil l confront
the interpreter of the Rigveda .
ERRATA
P. 14 , l ine 27, for S Itipad o read SI tipadO.
P . 28 , l ine 1 , read Freiqffi l .
P. 31,l ine 29
,and p . 46
,l . 29 for yo read yo .
P . 48,head - l ine
,for i . 12 , 4 read i i . 12 , 4 .
P. 51,l ine 31
,for y é read y o .
P. 60, l ine 13, for n o read nO .
P . 69,l ine 2 , for tam read tam .
Pp. 68,70 , 71 , 75, head
- l ines,for APAM read APAM.
P . 1 18 , head - l ine,for APAS read APAS.
P . 125,l ine 12
,for V i s
’
Vacak s a s read v i évacak sas .
P . 128,l ine 3
,for n i
’
i read nu .
P. 139,l ine 14
,for v ibh fd ak o read v i bh fd ak O.
P . 142,last l ine , and p . 143
,l ine 11 , for any é read any o .
P . 144,head - l ine
,for MANDUKAS read MANDUKAS .
P. 179,l ine 26
,for t é read 138.
P. 184 , l ine 17, for t é read té .
P. 224,h ead- l ine and l ine 1 , f or ab b i ti read at ti .
As the person ification of the sacrificial fire, Agni is second in importance
to Indra (i i . . 12) only , being addressed in at least 200 hymns. The anthropo
morph ism of his physical appearance is on ly rudimentary, and is connected
chiefly with the sacrificial aspect of fire. Thus he is butter -backed , flame
ha ired, and has a tawny beard, sharp jaws , and golden teeth . Mention is
often made of hi s tongue, with which the gods eat the oblation . Witha burning head he faces in al l directions .
He - is compared with various an imals : he resembles a bul l that bel lows ,
and has horns which he sharpens ; when born he is often cal led a cal f ;
he is kindled l ike a horse that brings the gods , and is yoked to convey
the sacrifice to them . He is also a divine bird ; he is the eagle of the
sky ; as dwel l ing in the waters he is l ike a goose ; he is winged, and he
takes possession of the wood as a bird perches on a tree.
Wood or ghee is hi s food , melted butter h is beverage ; and he i s
nourished three times a day. He i s the mouth by which the gods eat the
sacrifice ; and h is flames are spoons with which he bespr inkles the gods ;
but he is al so asked to consume the Offerings himsel f . He is sometimes ,though then nearly always with other gods, invited to drink the Soma
q ce.
His brightness i s much dwelt upon be s hines l ike the sun ; his lustre
is l ike the rays of the dawn and the sun,and l ike the l ightnings of the
Ia in-cloud . He shines even at night, and dispel s the darkness with h is
beams . On the other hand , h is path is black when he invades the forests
and shaves the earth as a barber a beard . His flames are l ike roaringwaves
,and h is sound is l ike'the thunder of heaven . His red smoke rises
up to the firmament ; l ike the erector of a post he supports the sky with
Smoke- bannered’
(dhuma-k etu ) is his frequent and exclusive
a shining , golden , l ightn ing car , d rawn by two or‘
more ruddysteeds. He i s a charioteer of the sacrifice, and with his steeds
on his car.
He is the ch i ld of Heaven (Dyau s ), and i s Often cal led the son of
Earth (i . He is also the offspring of the waters. The
ed him as a l ight for the Aryan or for man,and placed him
among men . Indra is called Ag ni’
s twin brother , and i s more closelyassociated with h im than any other god .
B
2 AGNI
The mythology of Agni , apart from his sacrificial activity ,is mainly
concerned with h is various births , forms,and abodes . Mention i s often
made of his da i ly production from the two k indl ing sticks (a ran i s ) , whicha re his parents or his mothers . From the dry wood Agn i is born l iving ;
as soon as born the chi ld devours hi s parents. By the ten maidens that
produce h im are meant the ten fingers of the k indler . Owing to the
force required to kindle Agni he is Often call ed son of strength’
(Sah a s ahsnnnh) . Being produced every morn ing he i s young ; at the same time
no sacrificer is older than Agn i , for he conducted the first sacrifice. Again
Agni’
s orig in in the aerial waters is often referred to : he is an embryo of
the waters ; he is kindl ed in the waters ; he is a bul l that has grown in
the lap of the waters. As the‘son of Waters
’
(i i . 35) he has become a
separate deity . He is also sometimes conceived as latent in terrestrial
waters. This notion of Agni in the waters is a prominen t one in the RV.
Thirdly, a celestial Origin of Agn i i s often mentioned : he is born in the
h ighest heaven ,and was brought down from heaven by MatariSVan , the
Indian Prometheus and the acqui sition of fire by man is regarded as a gift
of the gods as wel l as a production of Mat The Sun (vi i . 63) isfurther regarded as a form of Agni . Thus Agni i s t he l ight of heaven in
the bright sky ; he was born on'
the other side of the air and sees a ll
things ; he i s born as the sun rising in the morning . Hence Agni comes to
have a triple character . His births are three or threefold ; the gods made
him threefold ; he is threefol d l ight ; he has three heads, three bodies , three
stations . This threefold nature of Agni is clearly recognized in the RV and
represents the earl iest Indian trinity .
The un iverse being al so regarded as divided into the two divisions of
heaven and earth ,Agni is sometimes sa id to have two origins , and indeed
exclusively bears the epithet dv i-janm an having two bi rths . As being kindled
in numerous dwel lings Agni i s also said to have many b i rths.
Agni is more closely associated with human l ife than any other deity.
He is the only god cal led grh a-
p ati lord of the house,and i s constantly
spoken of as a guest (ati th i ) in human dwel lings . He i s an immortal who
has taken up his abode among mortals . Thus he comes to be termed the
nearest k insman of men . He is Oftenest described as a father, sometimes'
also as a brother or even as a son of his worshippers . He both takes theofferings of men to the gods and brings the gods to the sacrifice. He isthus characteristical ly a messenger (data) appointed by gods and by men
to be an oblation -bearer
As the centre of the sacrifice he comes to be celebrated as the divine
counterpart of the earthly priesthood . Hence he is often cal led priest
(r tv ij, v ip ra ) , domestic priest (purOh i ta ) , and more often than by any
other name invoking priest (h é tr) , al so officiating priest (ad hva ry I’
I ) and
praying priest (b r ahman ) . His priesthood is the most sal ient featl re
4 AGNI i . 1, 1
On the marking of the accent in the RV. see p . 448,2 . The verb
i l e (1 . S. pr. A. of i d : 1 for d between vowels, p . 3
,f. n . 2) has no
Udatta because it is in a pr incipal sentence and does not begin
a sentence or Pada (p. 466,19 its first syl lable bears the
dependent Svarita wh ich fol lows the Udatta of the preceding
syl lable (p. 448, puro-h i tam has the accent of a Karmadharaya
when the las t member i s a pp . (p. 456,top) . yajfiasya is to be taken
with rtV Ijam (notwith puro’
h i tam according to Sayana) , both because
the gen itive normally precedes the noun that governs it (p. 285 e) ,and because it is in the same Pada ; cp . RV. vi ii . 38
,1 yajfiasya
h i stha rtvija ge two (Indra -Agni) are ministrants of the sacrifice.
The dependent Svari ta wh ich the first syl lable of rtvijam would
otherwise bear (l ike i le) , disappears because this syl lab le must be
marked wi th the Anudatta that precedes an Udatta . rtv- ijthoughetymological ly a compound (rtu + ij yaj) is not analysed in the
Pada text, because the second member does not occur as an i h
dependent word cp. X . 2,5 agni r d evri r
’
hl
rtuso y ajati mag Agnisacr ifice to the gods according to the seasons. ratna -d h a -tama (with
the ordinary Tp . accent : p . 456,
the Pada text never divides
a cd. into more than two members . The suffix tama , which the
Pada treats as equivalent to a final member of a cd.,is here regarded
as form ing a uni t with d h a ; cp . on the other hand Vi ra-Vat + tama
in 3 c and citra-Sravas -l—tama in 5 b . ratna never means jewel inthe RV.
aaffix: gafuaifi fij‘
g
{s it EEG—gs
e 26 dus attire u
2 Agn ih p f’
i rveb h ir rs ib h i r
ilio n iitana'lr uta,s é d evtiih é ha vak sati
I‘
sib h i s The declensional endings bhyam ,b h i e, b hyas , su are in
the Pada text treated l ike final members of compounds and separated ,
but not when the pure s tem,as in the a dec.
,is modified in the
preceding member hence pfirveb h i s (p. 77,note 9 ) is not ana lysed .
id yas to be read as ilias (p . 16,2 d) . n iitanai s : note that the two
affix: t idfii : asfii sfii :
fist: add : uas
e : 23 11 1 an I {s sa fe I
Agni to be magnified by past and
present seers, may he conduct thegods
here.
AGNI 5
forms of the inst. pl . of the a dec. in a i s and eb h i s cons tantly occur
in the same stanza. s é (49) being unmarked at the beg inn ing of
a Pada, has the Udatta ; the dependent Svarita of the fol lowing
syl lable disappears before the Anudatta required to indicate the
fol lowing Udatta of Vé rh (Sandhi , see This Anudatta and
the Svarita of Vak sati Show that al l t he inte rven ing unmarked
syl lables vain eha have the Udatta . All the unaccented syl lables
fol lowing a Svarita (til l the Anudatta preceding an Udatta) remain
unmarked ; hence the last two syl lables of Vak sati are unmarked ;
but in the Pada text every syl lable of a word which has no Udatta
is marked with the Anudatta thus v ak sati . The latter word is
the s ao. Sb . of vah carry for vah - s -a -ti (143, 2 ; 69 a). In it ih é.vak sati , the prp . because i t is in a principal sentence is uncom
pounded and accented (p. 468,
bes ides as very Often.
being
separated from the verb by another word . The verb vah is con
stantly connected with Agni, who conveys the sacrifice and brings
the gods. Syntactically the fi rst hem istich is equivalent to a rel .
clause, sé being the correlative (cp. p . 294 a) . The gerundive id yas
strictly speaking belongs in sense to nfitana i s , but i s loosely con
s trued with p iirvebh i s also, meaning‘is to be magn ified by present
seers and (was ) to ‘
be magnified by past seers’
. The pcl . uta and
(p. 222) is“always s ignificant in the RV.
s ifte d ”
( feasted wfimi Tfifl t l wa s ?“finia l as l fg
’
é sfi’
é u
audi t a t tai ned It
Through Agni may one obtain wealth
day by day (and) prosperity , glorious‘
vi ravattamam . (and) most abounding in heroes .
-a-t : Sb . pr. of am é atta in, 3 . s . ind . pr . aénOti (cp . p . 134)‘he
’
inherent in the 3 . s . of the vb. is here used in the
e s ense of‘one
’
,as so often in the 3 . s . op. in classical
ray im , posam : co- ordinate nouns are constantly used
without the conjunction ca . d ive-d ive this is one of the
itv. compounds found in the RV., which are always
6 AGNI (i . 1, 3
accented on the first member on ly, and are analysed in the Pada
text l ike other compounds (189 C a). y aéasam : th is is one of
the few adjectives ending in-as that occur in the RV. the corre
sponding n . substantives are accented on the first syl lable, as yas-a s
fame (83, 2 a 18 2, p. vi ra-vat-tamam : both the suffix vant
(p . 264,cp . 185 a ) and the superlative
“
suffix tama are treated in the
Pada text l ike final members of a cd . viravant being here regarded
as a unit,it is treated as the first member in the analys is (cp . note
on ratna -dh é tama in 1 c) . In these two adjectives we again have
co-ordination without the connecting pcl . ca . Their exact mean ing
is caus ing fame and ‘
produced by many heroic sons’
,fame and
brave fighters being constantly prayed for in the hymns .
8 wfi i i fl i ttwt
fw d: aftat fie’
r
a {gag“i f? u4 Agne , yam y ajfiam adhvaram
viévatah par ibh fir as i ,s é id d evesa gach ati .
wyajfiam ad hvaram : again co-ordination without ca ; the former
has a wider sense worship (prayer and offering) ; the latter
sacr ificial act. vi éva-tas : the prn’
. adj. vi éva usual ly shifts its
accent to the second syl lable before adv. suffixes and as first member
of a cd. (p. 454,
asi is accented as the vb . of a subordinate
clause (p. 467 , B). sé id : al l successively unmarked syl lables at
the beginn ing of a hemistich have the Udatta (p. 449 , On the
particle i d see p . 218 . devé su : the 10 0 . of the goal reached
(p. 325,1 b) ; the acc.
,which m ight be used , would rather express
the goal to wh ich the motion i s directed. gach ati : as . the vb .
of a principal sentence has no Udatta (19 A) ; nor has it any accent
mark in the Samh ita text because al l unaccented syl lables fol lowing
a dependent Svarita remain unmarked on the other hand al l the
syl lables of an unaccented word are marked with the Anudatta in
the Pada text (cp . note on 2 d). The first syllable of gach at i is long
by pos ition (p. 437 , a
wfi l am uw l wam l
fi a é z l nfitswmfitu‘
Hz l im i'
fig'l flafa n
0 Agni , the worship and sacrifice
that thou encompassest on every side,
that same goes to the gods.
i . 1,6] AGNI 7
WEI-{fiatmfaatg
Ha fwmtq'i m:
Agn ir hota k avik ratuh
satyas ci traé ravastamahy
d evo d evé bh i r agamat ”
Both k avi -k ratu s and citra-é ravas have the regular Bv. accent
(p . 455 c) the latter cd . is not analysed in the Pada text becauseit forms a unit as first member
,from which tama is separated as the
second cp . notes on tama in 1 c and 3 c. d evé b h i s the inst. often
expresses a sociative sense without a prp. (l ike sah a in see
199 A 1 . d evé d evé b h ih : the juxtaposi tion of forms of the same
word,to express a contras t, is common in the RV. gam-a -t : root
ao. sb .
’
of gam (p. on the accentuation of ii gamat see
p . 468 , 20 A
yad anga daéfi se tuam ,
Agne , b h ad ram k ari syas i ,
tavé t tat satyam ,Ang i rah,
afigd: on this pcl . see 180 (p . d aéfi se : dat. of daé -véms ,
one of the few pf. pt. s tems in the RV. formed without red . (140, 5157 b), of which only vi d -vams survives in Skt. tvam : here
,as
nearly everywhere in the RV. ,to be read as tuam on account of the
metre. Though the Padas forming a hemistich constitute a metrical
unit,that is
,are not divided from each other either in Sandh i or in the
marking of the accent,the second Pada is syntactical ly separated
from the first inasmuch as it is treated as a new sentence, a voc. or
a vb . at i ts beginning being always accented (p . 465,18 a ; 19 b) .
arfirz l shat a far/
stat
s at: faaz iazsaa :
2a : éfifii : annmm
May Agni the invoker , of wise
intelligence, the true, of most br illiant
f ame, the god come with the gods .
aa l ws imm mufi l ggmmfiwffi l
net {anam1mm artist : in
J ust what good than, 0 Agni , wilt
do f or theworshipper , that (purpose)of thee (comes) true, 0 Angiras.
8 AGNI ( i . 1, 6
Hence Agne is accented (the Udatta being, as a lways , 0 11 the first
syl lable , p. 465, whi le Ang i ras i s not (p. 466, 18 b) . k ar i syasi
(ft. of k r do) : that is , whatever good thou intendest.
to do to the
worshipper wi ll certainly be realized . tava i t tat : that intention
of thee.
s s d a fi fififé'
éj s ti lm l wfi l fg'
é sfgt’
é l
fi ataa fiim 3 am {W SHER 1ram 1awn
flat l fltfi lz l‘
ar lmfit u
7 up a tvagne d ive-d ive , To thee,0 Agni, day by day, 0
dosavastar , d h iyé vayam , i lluminer of gloom, we come with
namo b har anta ema g‘
thought bringinghomage
tva as the enc. form of tvam (109 a) and Agne as a voc. in the
middle of a Pada (p. 466 b) are unaccented . The acc . tva is most
natural ly to be taken as governed by the prepos ition l ip a (p .
though it m igh t otherwise be quite wel l dependent on the cd. vb .
l'
i pa a - imas i (a common comb ination of up a and a wi th verbs
meaning to go), as the first prp . i s often widely separated from the
verb (191 f ; p . 468,20 a) . dosafvastar : Sayana explains this cd.
(wh ich occurs here only) as by night and day, but vastar never occurs
as an adv. and the accent of d ose—i. is shifted (which is not otherwise
the case in such cds .,as sayam-
pratar evening and morning, from
sayam) the explanation as 0 i lluminer (from 1 . vas shine) of darkness
(with voc. accent on the first syl lab le) 1s much more probable , being
suppo1 ted by the descr iption of I 11d1 a (i i i . 49 , 4) as k sap am vasta
jan i tasuryasya il lummer of nights, generator of the Sun. d h iya inst.
of d h i thought (accent, p. 458 , used in the sense of menta l p rayers
namas , l it. bow, implies a gesture of adoration . bharantas : N. pl .
pr . pt. of b h p bear . {i - imas i : the ending masi is five times as
common as mas m the RV. (p. 125, f. n .
z: ( Ti ifi fl fié l'
flml' “
( Ti tfi fi l 31a
firm ing {Vi i-
fin 111mm an d a’
iféfamafimfi é fi u afi
'mm ué uz
’
fi n
AGNI 9
adhvaranam , (to thee) ruling over sacr ifices, the
rtasya d id ivim , shining guard ian of order, growing in
m su é dame . thine own house.
this and the other accusatlves in this stanza are in
agreement with tva in the preceding one. adhvarftnam governed
by the preced ing word,because verbs of ruling take the gen .
(202 A a) ; the final syl lable,am must be pronounced with a s lur
equivalent to two syl lables (l ike a vowel sung in music) . go-
p iimone of the many m . stems in final radical a (p . which in Skt. i s
always shortened to a (as go-p a). rta means the regular order of
nature,such as the unvarying course of the sun and moon
,and of
the seasons ; then , on one hand,the regular course of sacrifice (1 ite) ;
on the other, moral order (right) , a sense replaced m Skt. by dh arma .
Agni 1s special ly the guardian of rta in the ritual sense,because the
sacrificial fi re i s regularly k indled every day ; Varuna,
(v11. 86) isSpecial ly the guardian of rta in the moral sense. vard h amanam
growing in thine own house,because the sacrificial fi re after being
kindled flames up in its receptacle on the altar . své : to be read as
sué this prn. meaning own refers to al l three persons and numbers
in the RV.,my own, thy mwn, his own ,
&c. (cp . p . 112 c). dame
thisword Lat. domu-s) is common in the RV.,but has disappeared
in Skt.
s dzfilfié lfi é a t l an ffiamta l lf f'
é u
( itW eta at?! 1 13mm“: 1 are
ads-summ it » ada l a z l a fifi
‘
z’
n
s é nah p i té va sumave, HQ}; 4
”A,
So,0 Agni , be easy of access to us,
Agne , supayan é b h ava ; as a father to his son abidewith us
via. nah suastaye . for our well-being.
set is here used in its frequent anaphoric sense of as such,thus
294 b) . nas enc. dat. (109 a) paral lel to sunaVe . p ita iva : the
enc. pol . iva is regularly treated by the Pada text as the second
,
member of a cd . ; in the RV. p i tri
is usual ly o
coupled with sunu,
“mat? with putra. sunavé : this word as written in the Samhita
text appears with two Udattas , because the Udatta of the el ided a
10 AGNI [1 1,9
is thrown back on the preced ing syl lable (p . 465 but this amust
be restored,as the metre shows
,and sunave A gne read . Though
a is el ided in about 75 per cent. of its occurrences in the written
Samhita text, it remains in the rest ; it must be pronounced in
about 99 per cent. (cp. p . 23,f. n . 4 and The vowel Sandhi
wh ich is invariably appl ied between the final and initial sounds
of the two Padas of a hem istich , must always be resolved to restore
the metre. This i s another‘
indication (see note on Agne in 6 b)that the second and the first Pada were original ly as independent of
each other as the second and the third . O n the accentuation of
supayana as a Bv. see p . 455,c a . sacasva : this verb (which
is exclusively Vedic) is construed with the ace. (here nas) or the
inst. the vowel of sva , the ending of the 2 . s . ipv. A.
,is here (l ike
many other final vowels) lengthened in the Samhita, but is regularlyshort in the Pada text. svastaye must be read as su-astaye ; it
has the sense of a final dat. (200 B 2) . I t is not analysed in the
Pada text because a sti does not occur as an independent nom inal
stem .
SAVITR
This god is celebrated in eleven entire hymns and in many detached
stanzas as well . He i s pre-eminently a golden deity : the epithets golden
eyed , gol den-handed , and gol den
-tongued are pecul iar to h im. His car and
its pole are golden . It is drawn by two or more brown ,white-footed
horses . He has mighty golden splendour which he diffuses, i l luminatingheaven , earth ,
and a i r . He raises aloft h is strong golden arms, with wh ich
he arouses and blesses al l beings , and which extend to the ends of the
earth . He moves in his golden car , seeing al l creatures , on a downward
and an upward path . Shining with the rays of the sun, yel low
-haired ,
Savitr raises up his light continual ly from the east. His ancient paths in
the air are dustless and easy to traverse, and on them he protects his
worshippers ; for he conveys the departed spirit to where the righteous
dwel l . He removes evi l dreams,and makes men sinless ; he drives away
demons and sorcerers . He observes fixed laws ; the waters and the wind
are subject to him . The other gods fol low hi s lead ; and no being can
resist his wi ll . In one stanza (i i i . 62 , 10) he i s besought to stimulate the
thoughts of worshippers who desire to think of the glory of god Savitr .
This is the celebrated sav i tri stanza which has been a morning prayer
in India for more than three thousand years . Savitr is often d istinguished
from Surya (vi i . as when he is said to sh ine with the rays of the sun.
12 SAVITR [ i . 35, 1
hvayam i Ratr im jagato n ivé s world to rest ; I ca ll on god Surtir
an im ; for help .
hvayam i d evam Savi taram ti ta
y e .
hvayam i : pr . ind . from hva ca ll ; note the anaphoric repetition
of this word at the beginning of each verse. p rath amam is in
appos ition to Agu im . su -astaye : this, é vase , and utaye are final
datives (p. 314 , B the last two words are derived from the same
root, av help . svasti (cp . note on i . 1, 9 c) evidently means well
being ; by Sayana , fol lowing Yaska (Nirukta , iii . it is explained
negatively as a -vinasa non-destruction. M i tra -varuna : one of the
numerous Dvandvas both members of wh ich are dual and accented
(p . note that Dv. cds . are not analysed in the Pada text.
ih avase for ma avase : on the accent see p. 464,17, 1 . jagatas
the objective gen . (p. 320, B 1 b), dependent on n ivé é an im that
causes the world to ‘turn in (cp. x . 127, 4 . 5) the es . n ivesayan is
appl ied to Savitr in the next stanza .
aana i m( aim attain“? an l wait I ( aim asura : n
ffi'
fiaé qga:we: a 1 fi rfi mimn ew nata l a n
Fstw'
é a Gfifi fl“( firs t Fernanda s tem ( via l
é éfi with admin na h u an 1as : mfa Hahn’s trash u
2 it k rsné na rajasa vartamano, Rolling hither through the dark
n iveéayann amrtam marti am space, laying to rest the immorta l
ea , and the mortal, on his golden car
h iranyayena Savi tarath ena , god Savitr comes seeing (al l) crea
ad ec yati b huvanan l p asyan . tures.
ii. var tamanas : the prp. may be separated from a pt. as from
a fin ite vb ., p. 462
,13 a ; when it immediately precedes , as in ui
veéayan , i t is usua l ly compounded , ibid. k rsn é na rajasa through
the darkness ; loc. sense of the inst , 119 A 4. amf tam martiam ca
8 . m . used col lectively z : gods and men. rath ené must of course be
read rath enaIz‘
i ; see note on Agne , i . 1 , 9 b . {i d evo yati : cp. note
4] SAVITR 13
on a ma vak sati , i : 1 , 2 c. In th1s and the two following stanzas
Savitr is connected with evening.
mfit23 : nearmag ? " mfi h§azl g saatunfitIwa sh
zufil gaunt s fimm mfit summi twa s : 1sfitmml
“
at §Ei1 a irs ufifi uth an"
? 3511 123 : Rufin ufi an“mart:m first gfimmama : u 3 111 first gzsi ar autism: n
yat i d evalji p ravata, yati ud The god goes by a downward , he
vata goes by an upward path ; adorable
ati éubh rab hyam yajato har i he goes with his two bright steeds .
b hyam . God Sav itr comes f rom thedistance,
ad evo yati Savi tz‘
i p aravato , driving away all hardship s .
r r J. J.
ap a V l sva dur1ta b ad h amanah .
In this stanza a J agat i verse is combined with a Tr istubh in each
hemistich . This is quite exceptional in the RV. see p . 445, ,8 1 and
f. n . 7. p ra-vat-a and ud -vat -a : local sense of the inst. (199 A 4) ; notethat the suffix vat (p. 263) is in the Pada text treated l ike the second
member of a ed. The downward and upward path refer to the sun’
s
course in the sky . The second y é ti is accented as beginn ing a new
sentence . har ibhyam inst. in sociative sense ; cp. d evé bh i s in
i . 1,5. On the different treatment of subh ré b hyem and har ibhyam
the Pada text see note on p iirvebh i s in i . 1,28 . p aravaté 5
see note on Agne in i . 9 . p aravatas : ab ] . with verb of
tion (201 A ap a bad h amanas : cp . note on it in 2 c. vi éva
this form of the 11 . pl . 1s commoner l n the RV. than that in
78,f. n . 14 .
and?
ufi ai fi auta
wfi ng’
am amt: fi s st tza l
fetwmm l wa s : i flgfi il‘l l
“
an W il l“( aim Hf
'
q'
fl'
l l fi fi
soda: I
am lw ith afaififiru guts
14 SAVITR (i . 35, 4
4 ab h ivrtam k réan ai r , visvaru His car adorned with p earls
p ang, omniform, with golden p ins, lof ty,h i ranyaéamyam , yajato b rhan the adorable Savi tr br ightly
tam , lustrous, putting on the dark spaces
asthad rath am Savita ci tra and his might, has mounted.
b h anuh,
k rsné rajams i , tavi s im dad ha
nah .
The final vowel of abh i is lengthened in the Samhita text,as
often when a long vowel is favoured by the metre. The prp. is
also accented,this being usual when a prp . is compounded with
a pp. (p. 462,13 b). k f éanai s : stars are probably meant
,as is
indicated by x . 68 ,‘the Fathers adorned the sky with stars
,l ike
a dark horse with pear ls vi éva-rupam : on the accent cp . note on
i . 1,4 b .
-é amyam : inflected l ike rath i, p . 87 ; the sami is
pl obably a long pin fixed at each end of the yoke to prevent its
sl ipping off the horse’
s neck . a asth at : root ao. of sth a . k rsnar ajamsi —
.darkness d ad hanas (pr. pt. the pf. would be d a
d hanas) governs both rajamsi and tavi s i’
m clothing himself in
darkness (cp. 2 a) and might, that is , bringing on evening by h is
might.
14fat afl i'm rai z fitfi mrfi fa
“
anti man: fufirmrg'r l
216 m ‘ WEF‘LI
“
( vi fstwus vi arse—rfz ( vim few-10 mm s in : 1
mafi a: fi nish} nata l fan': 1 fi g: l i sts: n
as first {Flam-1mg: n smi th first I eja'mfi f t as}; n
5 vi janan chyavah si tip ad o His dusky steeds, white-f ooted,
ak hyan ,drawing his car with golden p ole,
rath am h iranyap raugam vah have surveyed the p eop les . F or
antah . ever the settlers and a ll creatures
sasvad visanSavi tur d a l vi asya have rested in the lap of divine
upasth e vi éva b huvanan i ta Savitr .
s thuh .
i . 35, 6] SAVITR 15
vi : separated from vb. see note on a vak sati , i . 1 , 2 c . janan
chyavéh : for janan éyavéih (40 , si ti -p é d as : on the accentua
tion of this Bv. on the final member,see p . 455 , c a . Note that the
initial a of ak hyan remains after 0 (cp . note on i . 1,9 b) . ak hyan
a ao. of k h ya see (p. 168,a cp . 7 a and 8 a
,and pasyan in 2 d ;
the ao. expresses a s ingle action that has just taken place (p. 345 O)the pf . tasthur expresses an action that has constantly (éaévat)taken place in the past down to the present (113 A a) . In {p r a ii gam
(analysed by the Pada text of x . 130,3 as p ra -uga), doubtless
p ra -
ya gam (as explained in a Pratisakhya), there is a remarkable
h iatus caused by the dropping of y . visva b huvanan i : here the
old and the new form of the n . pl . are used s ide by s ide,as very
often . On the Sandhi of d a1vyasy 0 pasth e cp. note on Agne ,i . l
,9 b . daivya divine is a variation of the usual d eva accompanying
the name of Savitr . upasth e z
'
the idea that al l beings are con
tained in various deities,or that the latter are the soul (atma) of the
animate and inanimate world, is often expressed in the RV.
first? and: Hfi lfiét was " the n a nd: 31’
q i t [I 3“i 1
wt aw net? fi fty-us 1 rat I mush Hath fi tt ing 1
anfl i a t atnqmfii neg a irma n7 : I ( 9 1'
s I angst a fi-J'
{s shag a s afs'
ataa n mg:
{g tafl g l a z ls i fih amfi atflan
sr c’
) d yavah ; Savi tur dvaupa (There are) three heavens : two
stham , (are) the lap s of Savitr , one over
Yamasy a bhuvane vi rasat . coming men, (is) in the abode of
rathyam amftadh i Yama . A ll immorta l things rest
tasthur‘
(on h im) as on the axle-end
a b ravi tu ya 11 tac cik etat . of a car let him who may under
stand this tell i t here.
The interpretation of this stanza is somewhat difiicult ; for it is
as the last Pada indicates , as an enigma (l ike several others
The first Pada 1s evidently intended to explain the
16 SAVITR [i. 35, 6
l as t two of the preceding stanza of the three worlds Savitr occupies
two (air and earth) .‘
The second Pada adds : the th ird world (thehighest heaven) is the abode of Yama
,in which dwel l men after
death (that is , the P itrs). The third Pada means : on Savitr , in
these two (lower) worlds,the gods rest. d yavas : N . pl . of d yé ,
here f. (which is rare) probably an el l iptical pl . (193 , 3 a) heaven ,
a ir,and earth . d va : for dvau before 11 after ti sr é dyavah
the f . form dve should strictly be used (l ike ek a in b) , but it isattracted in gender by the fol lowing upasth a (cp. 194
,upa
sthafi’
i z the dual ending a (wh ich in the RV. is more than seven
times as common as an ) , appears before consonants,in pausa at the
end of a Pada , and in the middle of a Pada before vowels,with which
it coalesces . Here it is nasal ized (as often elsewhere) before the
initial vowel of the fol lowing Pada to avoid the hiatus ; th is is
another indication (cp. note on Agne , i . 1 , 9 b) that there was in the
original text of the RV. no vowel Sandh i between the Padas of
a hem istich . vira-
sat N . s . of vi ra- sah (8 1 b) , in which there is cerebral ization of s by assimilation to the final cerebral t (for in the
first member the quantity of the vowels (for vi ra ) is interchanged for
metrical convenience the Pada text does not analyse the cd. because
the form vira does not occur as an independentword (cp. note on rtvu,
i . 1 , 1 b). amrta n . pl . the gods . an im net : on him,as the car
rests on the two ends of the axle which pass through the nave of the
wheels . ad h i tasthur : the pf. of stha here takes the ace. by being
compounded with adh i ; in 5 d the simple verb takes the loc. The
th ird Pada i s on ly a modification in sense of 5 0 d . b ravi tu : 3 . s .
ipv . of b ru speak (p . 143 , 3 c) . The pcl . 11 1s always written in the
Pada text as a long vowel and nasal ized : ufh i ti . c ik etat : pf. sb .
of ci t observe.
e, far3331511“wa ft
-
sw a g
nfi f émwrit ! I
3153151?Ti:mfiéfiia
aw na t t fmxmr Fir-11a
far 1gnu: wa ftmfm w ri t
mfit s’
é t u: Wit : I l
a’
n gmn’
iu l gfiz l mz l fi fiml
EEHHTFU emu ( it s : l we: W I
aura u
i . 35,8] savrrR 17
vi suparnc’
) antar i k san i ak h yad ,
gab h i ravepa asurah sun i thah.
r 1 r
kued amm sur i ah ? k as el k eta 9
.L f rk atamam dyam rasm l r asya
tatana
7—9 deal with Savitr as guiding the sun .
.vi . :akhyat cp. 5 a and 8 a . sup arnas : Savitr is here cal led
a bird,as the sun-
god Surya (vi i . 63) often 1s . On the accent of th is
Bv.~ and of su-ni thas see p. 455
, c a . antar i k sani : equivalent to
k rsn'
a’
. rajams i (4 d) , the aerial spaces when the sun is absent.
asuras : this word,which is appl ied to various gods in the RV.
,but
especial ly to Varuna , and in the Avesta , as ahura,is the name of the
highest god , means a divine being possessed of occult power ;
towards the end of the Rigvedic period it gradual ly lost this sense
and came to mean a h igher hostile power , celestial demon . su
n i thas : guiding well here means that the sun il lumines the paths
with his l ight. kvé d ftnim : when an independent Svarita is in the
Samhitaq
text immediately fol lowed by an Udatta, the Svarita vowel ,if long, has added to it the figure 3 , which is marked with both
Svarita and Anudatta (p . 450 b) . i dan im : now at night. cik eta :
pf . of ci t observe (139 , d yam : ace. of d ye (p . 94,
here again
(cp. 6 a) f. asya : asya a. tatana : pf. of tan stretch (cp .
2 b) . The question here asked, where the sun goes to at night,
l lel to that asked about the stars in 1 . 24,10 :
‘those stars
are seen at night placed on high , where have they gone
first : arm s
as W311 !
dfam éjq'smug
The bird has surveyed the atmo
spheric regions, the divine sp irit, of ,
deep insp i ration,of good guidance.
Where is now the sun ? Who hasunderstood (it) ? To what heaven
has his ray extended ?
wfi l fi lm l ffl uz l gfigmz l
ah ua‘nfi s
’
mrmn nfi rqfi l
tw i gs : ufifi u §az“
an
3mm1
axia l ( at {mi l 1 snitin u
18 SAVITB. [ i . 35, 8
8 astan vi ak h yat k akubh ahp rth i He has surveyed the eight peaks
vyas , of the earth, the three waste lands,tr1 d hanva, yojana, sap ta s in the leagues, the seven r ivers.
dhun . Golden-eyed god Savitr has come,
h ir anyak sah Savi ta d evaagad , bestowing desirable gif ts on the
dad h ad ratna daéuse var ian i . worshipper.
The general meaning of this stanza is that Savitr surveys al l
space : the mountains,the plains, the rivers, and the reg i ons between
heaven and earth . astau : 106 b. p r th ivy é s : on the accentuation
see p . 458,2 . tri : n . pl . (105 , 3) to be read disyl labical ly. d hanva
acc. pl . of dhanvan n .,90
,3 (p. 70 ; cp. p . 67
,bottom) . The long
syl lable after the caesura in b and d u for u v is rare in the
RV. (p . 440,4 B) . yojana probably the th irty leagues that Dawn
traverses in the sky (i . 123, the number of each of the other
features being expressly stated. h i ranyak sas : the accent of this
ed. as a Bv. is quite exceptidnal : p . 455 c. é -agat : root ao. of
ga go. dad hat : 0 11 the accent cp . 127, 2 ; on the formation of the
stem,156 .
Q fstwmf‘
m: afar-cu firs’
fifisg fattestufm: s tem l fi sé fifm:
If " 31131315 137"
fl a i l“? l 3 3? {fit I matgfwfii rfit l am :
“
afii s li m( starmagma n“
ad autumnand? l'
érfa‘gum
a fii l afi d l tfim lmmwmfitn9 h i ranyap an ih Savi tavi carsanir Golden-handed Savitr , the active,
ub b e d yavap rthivi antar i yate . goes between both heaven and earth.
apamivam badh ate ; veti s fir i am ; He drives away disease he guides
ab h i k rsn é na rajasa d y itm ruoti . the sun through the dark space he
penetrates to heaven.
Dy i'
tva-
p rth ivi with the usual double accent of Devata-dvandvas
(p . 457,eB) and not analysed in the Pada text (cp . . note on 1 b).
I ts final 1, as wel l as the e o f ub h é , being Pragrhya (25 a,26 a) , is
fol lowed by i ti in the Pada text (p. 25,f. 11 . 2 . antar (46)
o SAVITR ( i . 35, 10
a connecting ca : cp. note on ray im ,in i . 1
, 3 a ; note that the
Sandhi of an before vowels (39) does not apply at the end of an
internal Pada . I f Savitr in this stanza is connected with morning
rather than evening, asthat would here be equivalent to ud asthat ;
cp . RV. vi . 71,4 l id 11 $57 31 d evah Savitadama na h i ranyap anih
p rati d osam asthat that god Savitr , the domestic f r iend, the golden
handed, has arisen towards eventide it may, however , be equivalent
to d. asib at , that is , he has mounted his car,cp. 4 c. grnanas
pr. pt. A . , with ps . sense, of 1 . gr sang, greet.
as $1 a and: s tem: 33 113 1 a a l an d” nfi aftfi i l gi rd:
fi l ls : st at W itt—ir l “
aims: I 3633 1: wa rts
fifitfii warafi tfii : g’
inh fifii : a : i“
as: ufmfv'r: gs
’
i lfii :
t ama-w a ge s” ( fi l a l a zmfid us l gfig
’
l éfl
11 y é tepanthah, Savitah, purV1a so , Thine ancient p aths, 0 Savitr ,
arenavah suk rta antar ik se , the dustless,the well made, in the
té bh i r no adya p ath ibh ih sug é air, (going) by thosep aths easy to
b h i traversep rotect us tod ay, and speak
rak sa ca no, ad h i ca b rub i , for us, 0 god.
d eva .
te : the dat . and gen . of tvam , is always unaccented ; while té ,
N . pl . 111 . and N . A. du. f. 11 . of ta, is always t é . panthas N . pl . of
pantha, m . p ath, which is the on ly stem (not panth an ) in the RV.
(99 , 1 a) . Savi tah : when final Visarjaniya in the Samh ita text
represents original r, this is always indicated by the word being
written with r fol lowed by i ti in the Pada text '; here Savi tar i ti .’r enava s the initial a must be restored (see note on Agne , i . 1 , 9 b
but a is not el ided after 0 in c and d) ; 0 11 the accent of a Bv.
formed with pr ivative a, see p. 455
,c a . su-k rtas : Karmadharayas ,
in which the fi rst memb er is an adv. and the last a pp. ,accent the
former ; p . 456,1 a . t é bh i s : inst. of ta, p . 106 p . 457, 11 b. In e
no adya should be pronounced because e and 0 are shortened before
a (p. 437,a this rule does not apply when 6 and 0 are separated
from a by the caesura ; hence in d 6 , adh i should be pronounced .
sug é b h i : see 47. The final a of rak sa is l engthened because the
i . MARUTS 2 1
second syl lable of the Pada favours a long vowel . ad h i b ruh i
be our advocate the meaning of this expression is i llustrated by
other passages : in i . 123 , 3 Savitr is besought to report to Surya
that his worshippers are sinless ; in vii . 60 , 2 Surya is implored to
make a simi lar report to the Adityas .
MARUTAS
This group of dei ties is prominent in the RV., thirty
-three hymns being
addressed to them alone, seven to them wi th Indra , and one each to them
with Agni and Pusan (vi . They form a troop (gana, sardh as ) , beingmentioned in the plural only. Their number is thrice sixty or thrice
seven . They are the sons of Rudra (11 . 33) and of Prsni , who is a cow
(probably representing the mottled storm-cloud ) . They are further said to
have been generated by Vayu, the god of Wind, in the wombs of heaven,
and they are called the sons of heaven ; but they are also spoken of as
sel f-born . They are brothers equal in age and of one mind , havingthe same birthplace and the same abode . They have grown on earth ,
in
air, and in heaven , or dwel l in the three heavens. The goddess Rodasi is
always mentioned in connexion with them she stands beside them on their
car , and thus seems to have been regarded as thei r bride.
The bril l iance of the Maruts is constantly referred to : they are golden ,
ruddy, shine l ike fires, and are self-luminous. They are very often asso
ciated with l ightni13g : al l the five compounds of vi dyut in the RV. are
almost exclusively descriptive of them. Their lances represent l ightning ,
as their epithet r sti -v i dyut l ightning-sp ew ed shows. They al so have
golden axes . They are sometimes armed with bows and arrows,but this
trait is probably borrowed from their father Rudra . They wear garlands,
golden mantles, gol den ornaments, and golden helmets . Armlets and
anklets (kh ad i ) are peculiar to them. The cars on which they ride gleam
are drawn by steeds (general ly feminine) that are
otted, swift as thought. They are great and mighty ;young and unaging
~dustless,fierce, terrible like l ions, but also playful l ike
children or calves .
The noise made by them , and often ment1oned , is thunder and the
roaring of the winds. They cause the mountains to quake and the two
worlds to tremble ; they rend trees, and, l ike wild elephants, devour the
forests. One of their main activities is to shed rain : they cover the eye
of the sun with rain ; they create darkness with the cloud when they shed
rain and they cause the heavenly pail and the streams of the mountains to
pour. The waters they shed a re often clearly connected with the~
thunder
22 MARUTS (i . 85, 1
storm. Their rain is often figuratively cal led mi lk, ghee, or honey. They
avert hea t, but also d ispel darkness, produce l ight, and prepare a path for
the sun .
They are several times cal led singers : they are the singers of heaven ;they sing a song for Indra when he slew the dragon ,
they sang a song and
pressed Soma . Though primarily representing the sound of the winds,
their song i s also conceived as a hymn of praise. Thus they come to becompared with priests , and are addressed as priests when in the company of
Indra .
Owing to their connexion with the thunderstorm ,the Maruts are con
stantly associated with Indra (i i . 12) as his friends and al l ies, increasing hi s
strength and prowess with their prayers , hymns , and songs , and general lyassisting him in the fight with Vrtra . Indra indeed accompl ishes al l h is
celestial exploits in their company . Sometimes,however , the Maruts
accompl i sh these exploits alone . Thus they rent Vrtra joint from joint,and disclosed the cows .
When'
not associated with Indra , the Maruts occasional ly exhibit the
maleficent traits of their father Rudra. Hence they are implored to ward
off the l ightning from their worsh ippers and not to let their il l-wi l l reach
them,and are besought to avert their arrow and the stone which they hurl ,
thei r l ightning , and their cow and man- slaying bolt. But l ike their father
Rudra,they are also suppl icated to bring heal ing remedies. These remedies
appear to be the waters, for the Maruts bestow medicine by raining .
The evidence of the RV. indicates that the Maruts are Storm-
gods. The
name is probably derived from the root mar,to shine
, thus mean ing‘the
shining ones’
.
i . 85 . Metre : J agati ; 5 and 12‘
Tr 1stubh .
q n’
u flatfit avtsfi a uazfi u t i l fidfi l adm l a l uam l
wh izz-
{s i {f r-
qt
: agai n: mai l"
33 21 gai t: gian
ts :
1
61a re ar tis ts? 331 see {fit I fs 1“it: Eff-
m"? l ,
ni t-7 1 an fai r-figga in: 11 33
nq'fifl d i t i : film 1grain: u
1 p ra y é sumbh ante , janayo net, The wondrous sons of Rudra,
saptayo the racers, who on their course
yaman ,Rud rasya sunavah su adorn themselves like women, the
damsasah, Maruts have indeed made the two
MARUTS 23
rod as i h i Marutas cak r ir é vr worlds to increase. The imp etuous
d h é . heroes rejoice in r ites of worship .
mad anti vi ra vi dath esu gh rsva
y ah .
janayas : 99, 1 a . yéman : loc . ,90
,2. sudamsasas : accent,
p . 455,10 c a . cak r iré : 3. pl . A . pf. of k r ; with dat. inf . , p. 334 , b .
mad anti 1 with loc.,204
,1 a . vidath esu the etymology and
precise meaning of this word have been much discussed. It. is most
probably derived from vid h worship (cp. p. 41, f. n . and means
divin eworship .
3 s'f
'
stmé i nfsmw'wma 3 1 affirms: 1 fi reman 1 amt-1 1
fi fi ggfi fi d a fi’
t ufin Qt“
? l ggru: 1 fi rst 1 fi fifit 1 ad 1
“i t
'
dv“rh w
’
a‘t w as? $ 2131 351
-35 1: 1 3 13m 31min : 1 {ri-
{umwfixfimfi affix? gfstmat z11 a fix
'1 fi rst: 1gfia
’
t 1gfi smat : 11
tauk sitaso mah imanam asata They having waxed strong have
d iviRud rasoad h i cak r i re sadah . atta ined greatness : in heaven the
arcanto arkam , janayanta ind r i Rudras have made their abode.
yam , Singing their song and generating
adh i sriyo d ad h i re Prénima the might of Indra , they whose
tarah . mother is Prsni haveput on glory.
té : N . pl . m. of ta that,110. uk si tasas : pp. of 2 . uk s vak s)
grow. asata : 3. pl . A. root ao. of ams atta in. Rud rasas : the
Maruts are often cal led ‘Rudras’
as equivalent to‘sons of Rudra
’
.
ad h i : prp. with the loo. d ivi ; 176, 2. janayanta ind r iyam : that
is,by their song. ad h i d adh i re : 3 . pl . A. pf. of ad h i dh a , which
is especial ly often used of putting on ornaments . sr iyas : A . pl . of
sri glory 1 eferring to the characteristic brilliance of the Maruts .
firs t“? 11W a ft-min i ns is t : 1fl d l3mm 1a fa tfit: 1
“
mflm i fifi fifl afitaz t mlw u gfq'
i l fi t fi w l
am‘
fi W W I: arcifi 1fastrlwfmmfifimaith
53131511151“an? gm 11 aaufi 111151111 1 3 1d1fig? 133 11 11
24 MARUTS ( i . 85, 3
gomata ro yae chubhayanté arij i
bh i s ,
tan fisu sub h ra d adh ir e v iruk
matah .
b adh an te visvam abh imatinam
ap a .
vartman i es'
am anu r i yate
ghrtam .
gomataras : as the sons of the cow Prs’
ni . yac chub hayan te
Sandhi,53. d adh ire pf. with pr. sense, they haveput on theywear .
ap a : prp . .after the vb. and separated from it by other words
191 f ; p . anu r i yate : 3 . pl . A. pr. of r i f low. gh rtam
ghee fertil izing rain . The meaning of d is : the course of the
Maruts is followed by showers of rain. esam : unemphatic G.
pl . m . of ayam , p . 452,8 B c.
8 f‘
q’ 31 1313131wi t-Tm a
'
z'fiefii :
316 113316 1swimmasts“vi i fl att rfi
assume : 351mm 11
vi y é bhr iijante sumak hasa rst1
b h in,
-
p racyavay anto acyuta cid éjasa,manojuvo
’
yan , Maruto, r é
th esu é.
vi savratasah p i sati r ayugm
d huam ;
sumak h asa s : a Karmadharaya cd . according to its accent (cp.
p. 455,l O e a ), but the exact meaning of mak ha is stil l somewhat
uncertain . p ra-cyavayantas : pr . pt. of es . of cyu move ; though
this est,which occurs frequently in the RV.
,always has a long
When they whose mother is a cowdeck themselves with ornaments,
shining they put on their bodies
bri lliant weapons. They drive of‘
every adversary. Fatness flows
a long their tracks.
is 1 it 1meta 1at rium: 1 safe
sfit: 1
N a tash a a sg'rcu 1fi lft l
‘f fi lm 1
Hawaii : l ad l fl i fl : 1 6 2113 1 3 11 1
i ntes tate : 1361m: 1 31331 3311 1Who as great warriors shine
forth with their spears, overthrow
ing even what has never been over
thrown with their might : when ye,
0 Md ra ts, thatareswif t as thought,
with your strong hosts, have yoked
the spotted mares to your ears ,
i . 35, 6] MARUTS 25
radical vowel in the Samhita text, it invariably has a short vowel in
the Padapatha . Marutas : change from the 3 . to the 2 . prs .
,in the
same sentence,a not infrequent transition m the RV. manojuva s
N. pl . radical stem mano-jil , 100, II a (p. rath esu it : 176 , 2 .
p fsati s : the spotted mares that draw the cars of the Maruts .
ayugdhvam : 2. pl . A . root ao. of yujyoke.
11 1 31m 1311511: 1 3 13113311 161131
“
e rg"
war-uteal-7 1: 1 3 1231 1 3 16531 1“( at 1133131: 1“6mm Fa 3111 13 1 3 3 1“as 1 fa 1mi c—d 1 $111 1: 1
s itters 1 semi : 1 far 1 swi ft—q 1
{at 111
p ra yad rath esu p fsati r ayug when ye have yoked the spotted
d hvam , mares before your ears, speeding, 0
vaje ad r im ,Maruto , ramha Maruts, the stone in the conflict
,
yantah, they discharge the streams of the
utarusasya vi s iauti d haraé ruddy (s teed) andmoisten the earth
carmevodabh i r vi und anti b'
h fi like a skin with waters .
ma .
ayugd hvam : with loc .,cp. 204, 1 b . ad r im : the Maruts hold
l ightning in their hands and cast a stone. uta : here comes before
the first instead of the second of two clauses , as ea sometimes does
(p. 228, arusasya : the ruddy steed of heaven ; cp . v . 83,6
where the Maruts are invoked to pour forth the streams of the
stall ion ; and in v . 56, 7 their ruddy steed (vaji arusah) is spoken of .
sy anti : 3 . pl . pr. of set bind ; Sandhi , 67 a ; . change back from
to 3 . prs . ; cp . 4 c d . und anti : 3 . pl . pr . of ud wet. b h fima
of bhfiman n . earth (but bhuman m . abundance) .
311 3 3a {131311“
311 1 a : 1 age—g 1 saw: 1
“( gm
-
qt: 1
Ema 3113 61: 1 gamma : 1 11 1 fi rms 13 131
1151”
611311 i ti-gs a : £113 16 u
’
iq'a 1 3 11 1aft: 1 3 11 1 a : 1nq
': 1
suiteswas? $1311“
fl ats : 11 316 11 1
11132136111 1 111111: 1 treat: 1was : 11
syad o ,
raghupatvanah p ra 31gata bahu
b h ih
sid ata b arh ir : uru vah sad as
k rtam
madayad hvam ,Maruto
,mad h
voand h asah .
raghu-syad as : Sandhi, 67 b. raghupatvanas as belongi ng to
this Pada to be taken with p ra jigata (gaoutstretched a1ms as they drive . sid ata a : 2 . pl . ipv. pr . of sad. sit
wi th prp . fol lowing (p. 468, sad as : Sandhi , 43, 2 a . k rtam
as finite vb . 208 . madayad hvam : cs . of mad rejoice, with gen . ,
202 A b. mad hvas : gen. 11 . of madhu , p . 8 1,f . n . 12 ; the sweet
juice is Soma .
S’
fisafia 6 1661111} affi rm
matam“sitar? 113:
fi s fi'
fiw“F551“:31s =1 fl gafii aféfi i fi m
7 to’vard h anta svatava so mah i
tvana
é. nak am tasthur ; ur1'
1 cak r ire
sad ah.
V 1 snur yad d h z‘
ivad vrsanam
mad acyutam ,
vayo n é. s i d anu ad h i b arb igi
p r i y é .
te ’vard h anta : Sandhi accent, p. 465 , 17 , 3 . mah itvané : inst.
of mah i tvana, p . 77,f. n . 3 . atasthur : vb. of a principal sentence
L et your swif t-gliding racers
bring you hither. Swif t-f lying come
forward with your arms. Sit down
on the sacrificia l grass : a wide
seat is made for you . Rejoice, 0Maruts
,in thesweetjuice.
$1 1wash 1c uriae : 1Hfssam l
W 1mu l aq z l amafafi’
tméfind: 1 111 1
'
s 1W 1 315mmass
-
a imaziz m l é
’
tzm wffi w féfi
Self -strong they grew by their
greatness : they havemounted to the
firmament; theyhavemadefor them
selves a wide seat. When Visnu
helped the bull reeling with intoxi
cation, they sat down upon their
beloved sacrificial grass like birds.
28 MARUTS [1 85,9
W fi ni te nsé sgfim 1 313 1111: 1 a ddam
séfif i fi tmmv—flu
‘
iaa 11 a $1 1ref : 1 aft 1“
w ife 1 3151-31 1
i i i ! 33 11 1 fin 1 3 1mm fl a i l
wfiaR 11
9 Tvasta yad vaJram suk r tam When the skilful Tvastr had
h i r anyayam turned the well-made, golden,
sahasrab h rstim suapa avarta thousand-edged bolt, Indra took i t
yat , to perform manly deeds : he slew
ab atta Ind ro namapamsi k ar Vr tra, and drove out the flood of
tave waters.
ah an Vrtram ,ni r ap am aubjad
arnavam .
The association of ideas connecting Indra with the Maruts is
continued from 7 c d. That Tvastr fashioned Indra’
s bolt for him
i s mentioned, in a simi lar context,in i . 32
,1 c and 2 b : ah ann
ah im , anv apas tatard a ; Tvasta asmai vajr am svaryam tatak sa
he s lew the serp ent, he released the waters ; Tvastr fashioned for him the
whizz ing bolt. d h atté : 3 . s . pr . A. used in the past sense (212 Ak ar tave dat. inf. of purpose , in order top erform (k r ), 211 . narya
pamsi is here and in vi ii . 96, 19 analysed by the Pada text as nar i
apams i . The only possible sense of thesewords would be deeds against
the hero (Vrtra) . On the other hand naryani appears once (vi i . 21, 4)and narya twice (iv. 19
,10 vi i i . 96
,21) as an attribute of apamsi ;
the epithet naryap asam , analysed by the Padapatha (vii i . 93, 1 ) asnarya-ap asam doing manly deeds is applied to Indra . I t thus seems
preferab le to make the s light emendation naryapamsi (to be read
nar iapamsi ) in the Samhita text,and narya|apams i in the Pada
text. m r aubjat : 3 . s . ipf. of ubjf orce (cp. 23 c)
qom3 31331 1 6111 a 3113'
s " mau l 333 1 3 1311111 13 1 37131111 1
QTQEIEEfi fii fi gfii fi at“ 315311111 1 fi rs 1 raging: 1 r-
q
mic—ch 61111 13nd: ggld
ifi 1133 11 1
1. MARUTS 29
11? 6 111151”
(Mira afifi‘
t 11 vii-7 1: 1 3111131 1“at: 1gsq1=iaz 1
a? 1finia l“
(wtfif 1 fl fm’t 11
O'
fi rd hvam nunud re avatam ta They have pushed up the well
9 with might ; they have sp lit even
d ad rhanam ci d b ibh idur vi par the firm mountain. Blowing their
vatam . p ipes the bountiful Maruts have
d hamanto vanamMarutah suda p erformed glorious“
deeds in the
navo intoxication of Soma .
mad e somasya ranian i cak r 1re .
- 1‘
1rd hvam : have pressed (the bottom) upward, that is , overturned,poured out ; avatam the cloud ; they have shed rain. d ad rhanam
pf. pt. A. of d rh‘
mak e firm,with long red. vowel (139 , shortened
in the Pada text. b ibh idur vi : p . 468,20. parvatam : cloud
m ountain ; another way of saying the same thing. d hamantaswith reference to the sound made by the Maruts ; cp . arcantas , 2 c.
mad e somasya : Indra i s constantly said to perform h is mightydeeds in the intoxication of Soma
, so h is associates the Maruts are
here simi larly described.
5 161stair s-
fit ant igm fi lm !mi 11 3amant 1155111 1
fi'
fi afi 11171111121 gun
'
s? 1 wfi iam vfir'mm 1gari sh
m viawfina’
m faautaa W1 1 flat-1 1 1 in 1 3 16m ) firs
31111 fi ling afizm miner: 1
main 1 fafm 1 3 13115 1 1waists : 11
31hmam nunud re avatam taya They have pushed athwart the
d isa well in that direction they poured
i ficann utsam Gotamaya trs out the Spr ing for the thirsty
naje . Gotama . Of bri lliant sp lendour
gach antim avasa ci trab hana they app roach him with help ; may
vah they satisfy the d esire of the sage
vip rasya tarp ay an ta by their powers .
30 MARUTS (i . 85, 11
ji hmam : so as to be ho1 izontal and pom out the watei,much the
"
same as urd hvam in l 0 a. taya d i sa: this exp1 ess ion is obscur ;e
i t may mean,in the quarter in which Gotama was cp. l 99 A 4 .
im : him,Gotama
, p. 220. vip rasya : of Gotama. tarp ayanta
cs . of trp be p leased ; the inj. is more natural here,coming after a
pr.,than an unaugmented ipf . would be .
qs 2111 a : 111?uamam s fa
'm 1a : 1mil 1 summit 1 s tat 1
famifi i uamfii 1 fa imqfi i 1gm? 1was 1 and 1
W mfii“( fi l fi l fi'
fi l WWR Imfi i l ni a : 1 fi l l'
fl ffl l
( fit W 31111: 1561111 11 ( fi lma : 1a? 1gnu: 131
611401 11
12 yavah sarma éaéamanaya Santi , The shelters which you have for
tr i d hatfi ni d aéuse y ach atad h i . the z ealousman, extend them three
asmabhyam tan i , Maruto,vi fold to the worshipp er . Extend
yanta . them to us , 0 Maruts . Bestow on
ray im no d h atta , vrsanah, su4 us wealth together with excellent
heroes, mighty ones.
sarma : N. pl . 11. (90, 2) sasamanaya : pf. pt. A. of sam labour.
tr i d hatfi n i : used appositionally daéuse : dat. of daévdms,
157 b. y achata adh i : prp . afte1 vb . , p . 468 , 20 ,ipv. pr . of yam
stretch. asmab hyam : p. 104 . vi yanta : 2 . pl . ipv. root ao. of
yam stretch (cp. p . 172,
d h atta : 2 . pl . ipv. of dha, put
(p . 144 B b). su -viram : that is,accompanied by warrior sons ; cp .
vi ravattamam , i . 1, 3 c.
VISNU
This deity occupies a subord inate position in the RV. , being celebrated
in only five or six hymns. The only anthropomorphic traits mentioned
about him a re the strides he takes, and the description of him as a youth
vast in body who is no longer a child . The central feature of his nature
consists in his three steps , connected with which are h is exclusive epithets‘wide-
going’
(urn -
gaya) and‘wide- striding
’
(uru -k rama) . With these
steps Ho traverses the earth or the terrestrial spaces . Two of h is steps are
visibl e to men , but the thi rd or highest is beyond the fl ight of b i rds or
xi . 154,1] 31
‘
mortal ken . His highest step i s l ike? an eye fixed in heaven ; it shines
brightly down. It is his dear abode, where pious men and the gods rejoice.
There“
can be no doubt that these three steps refer to the course of the sun,
and in al l probabi l ity to its passage through the th ree divisions of the
world ; earth , ai r, and heaven. Vi snu sets in motion l ike a revolving wheel‘
his ninety steeds days) with their four names seasons) , an al lusion to
the three hundred and sixty days of the solar yea r. Thus Visnu seems to
have been orig inal ly a personification of the activity of the sun,the swiftly
moving luminary that with vast strides passes through the whole universe .
Visnu takes his steps for man’
s existence, to bestow the earth on h im as a
dwel ling . The most prominent secondary characteristic of Visnu is hi s
friendship for Indra , with whom he i s often a l l ied in the fight with Vrtra .
In hymns addressed to Visnu alone, Indra is the only other deity mei
dentally associated with him. One hymn (vi . 69) i s ded icated to the two
gods conjointly. Through the Vrtra myth the Maruts, Indra’
s companions ,
are drawn into al l iance with Visnu ,who throughout one hymn (v. 87) is
praised in combination with them .
The name is most probably derived from v is be active, thus meaning‘the
active one
i. 154 . Metre : Tr istubh .
q fi flfifi fi‘
é’ffiifi l fl ffifi
as ii‘afi fi wfi t atfm
snor nu k am vi r iani p ra vo
cam,
arth ivan i y imamé rajams i ;
ask ab hayad uttaram sad ha
sth am ,
cak ramanas tredhorugayah .
k am th is pcl . as an encl . always fol lows nu,$ 11 or h i (p. 225
,
vi rydn i : the syl lable preceding the so-cal ledkindependent Svarita
femur: 1 fi 1 a1r1 1 afi ifm 1 n 1
33mm21: 1 tnfiir
'mfi i 1fimfi 1
‘
( Eli'tfl 1
a : 1a s tmamsasatamm e'
mf
‘
q'
saaimm: 131m 1“171111: 11
I wi ll now p rocla im the heroic
p owers of Visnu, who has measured
out the terrestria l reg ions who
establ ished the upp er gathering
p lace, having, wide-
p aced , strode
out tr ip ly.
32 VISNU [i. 154, 1
(p . 448 ) is marked with the Anudatta in the same way as that
preceding the Udatta ; here we have , as usual,in real ity the depen
dent Svarita,the word h aving to be pronounced vi r iani . p ra
vocam : inj. ao. of vac , 147 , 3 . par th ivan i rajamsi : the earth
and the contiguous a ir . vi -mame th is refers to the sun traversingthe universe ; cp. wha t is said of Varuna in v . 85
,5 : maneneva
tas th ivaf'
fi antar ik se vi yo mame prth ivim sfiryena who standingin the air has measured out the earth with the sun
,as with a measure.
ask ab h ayat : ipf. of sk ab h p rop ; the cosmic action of supportingthe sky is also attributed to Savitr
,Agni , and other deities . uttaram
sadhasth am : that is,heaven
,
‘
as opposed to the terrestrial Spaces
in b,according to the twofold division of the world . vicak ram
anas : pf. pt. A. of k r am . tre-dha: with his three s teps ; the
first syl lable must be pronounced with a s lur equivalent to two
short syl lables (u u ) ; the resolution tred h é'
. urugayah would“
produce both an abnormal break and an abnormal cadence (p. 441,
top) .
Q $1 fining}: 6 1313 3
313511
13111 a 3111 1: fi ift sn 1
mamé fag fl aming
wfiq fnafa 3351m first 11
2 p ra tad V i snuh stavate vi r iena,Q Q V O
mrgc’
) na bh iman kucaro g ir i
sth é h.
yasyorusu tr i su vi k ramanesu
ad h ik s i yanti b huvanan i vi éva.
p ra stavate : A. of*
stu in the ps . sense, as is often the case when
the pr. stem is formed according to the first (and not the second)class . tad : the cognate acc. (p. 300, 4) referring to the heroic
powers of Visnu attributed to h im in the preceding stanza . vi ryena
cp . note 0 11 vi ryan i in 1 a . m rgas : Sayana here interprets th is4
u l na 1fi sgiz 1mafi 1 éfi ’q 1
15111: 171 13s t : 1fi tment 1
21st 1anti 1 fag 1 farm-t ing 1
wfusf‘
nafirt 1 361W 1fi rst 11
By reason of his heroic p ower,
like a dread beast that wanders at
wi ll, that haunts the mountains,
Visnu i s p ra ised a loud for that :
he inwhose three wide str ides all
beings dwell.
i . 1 54, 3] VISNU 33
word to mean a beast of prey such as a l ion ; but though bh ima
occurs as an attribute both of simha lion and of vrsabha bull in the
RV. , gir isth éi. is found three or four times appl ied to the latter and
never to the former, and in the next stanza Visnu is cal led a
mountain- dwell ing bul l’
; hence the simile appears to al lude to
a bul l rather than a l ion . ku -cara : Yaska,fol lowed by Sayana,
has two explanations of this word, doing i ll (ku k uts i tam k arma
blameworthy deed) or going anywhere (kva ayam na gachati where does
he not go Note that the word is not analysed in the Pada text
because ku does not occur as an independent word . Sayana has
two explanations of g ir isthas : dwelling in a lof ty world or a lways
abiding in speech (gi r i as loc. of g ir ) consisting of Mantras,&c. (I) ;
on the inflexion see 97 , 2 note that in the analysis of the Pada textthe change caused by internal Sandhi i n the second member is
,
as always , removed . vi k ramanesu : note that the final vowel of
the Pada must be restored at the junction with the next Pada .
ad h i -k siyanti : the root 1 . k s i fol lows the ad class (k s é ti ) when itmeans dwell
,but the bhfi class (k sayati ) when it means rule over.
With c and d cp . what is said of Savitr in i s 35,5 .
n fatd‘
é gn'
figwai ‘
u 1 féim'3 1 ’gflu l ua l m
'1 1
firft fwiW q fi l'
firfi sfn’
d l vfi smamq fi 11
a fi fifi fi fim n au g m éfi rt l nfi m mu
fi fmfi fi fiifimafii : 11 «aimHaz l fi mfi l fi sfinmmfi fiiz11
praV isnave éfisam etu manma , L etmy inspir ing hymn go forth
gi r ik sita urugayaya vfsne, for Vi snu, the mowntain-dwelling
ya i dam d i rgham p rayatam sa wide-p acing bull, who alone with’
d hasth am“
but three steps has measured out
é k o vimamé tribh ir i t pade this,
long f ar-extended gathering
b h ih ; p lace ;
- éfi sam the 11 must be slurred disyl labical ly u u ). idam
sad hasth am of course the earth as opposed touttaram sadhasth am
in 1 c . ek as and tr ibh i s are antithetical . i d emphasizes the latter
D
84 VISNU [ i . 154, 3
word : with only three. The second Pada of this stanza is paral lel to
the third of the preceding, the epithets in the former being appl ied
direct to Visnu, in the latter to the wi ld beast to which Visnu is
compared : gi rik sit gi r i stha; urugay é . kucara ; vfsan
mrgé b h imah . This correspondence of k ucara (besides V.
’
s a lterna
tive exclusive epithet uruk rama in 5 0 and elsewhere) confirms the
explanation of urugaya as wide-pacing from ga go (Yaska , mahagati
having a wide gait), and not widely sung- from ga sing (Sayana) .
sm ifi gmnm ga q ag i l ah gnin mjan gajfit l3116 121111111 s um“Q
'fi
'
fi l wfi amm 1 smut 1warm
a é famjgfi ré’rga am a z 1wxfi 1 fi sw§ 1 gfqflu 1
trait 11mg aa’
wfi i first 11‘
s a 1 31111 1
natu erent'l ua
'mfin fa’at 11
4 yasy a tri purna madhuna p a Whose three steps fil led with
dani mead,unf ai ling, rejoice in bliss ;
ak siyamana s vad hayamad anti ; and who in threefold wise alone
ya 11 tr idh atu prth iv'
im uta has supported earth and heaven,
d yam and a ll beings .
ek o dad hara bhfivanan i vi éva.
tr'
i : n . pl . of tr i (105, p ad any : the final vowel of the Pada
must be restored ; cp . 2 c. pfi rnd : cp . p. 308 d . ak s i yamana
never fail ing in mead ; the privative pcl . a is almost invariably
accented in Karmadharayas, p. 456 a (top) such negative cds . are
not analysed in the Pada text. s'
vadhaya : inst. with verbs of
rejoicing (p. 308 c) . mad anti : his footsteps rejoice,that is , those
dwel ling in them do so. 11 also (p . 221,
tr i -dh'
atu : this 11.
form is best taken adverbial ly in 1 d, in a threefold way,by taking his three steps . It might, however, mean the threefold
world,l oosely explained by the fol lowing earth and heaven. é k as :
alone in antithesis to visva, cp . 3 d . d ad h'
ara : pf. of d h r , wi th
long red . vowel (139 , which‘
is here not shortened in the
Pada text.
36 VISNU [ i . 154, 6
vam of you two, that is, of Indra and V1snu. The former,being
the only other god with whom Visnu is intimately associated,would
easily be thought of incidentally in a hymn addressed to Vi snu
alone th is dual also anticipates the joint praise of these two gods
as a dual divinity (i nd ra-V i snfi ) in the first two stanzas of the next
hymn (i . a smasi z 1. pl . pr. of vas desire (134, 2 a ) . gam
ad hyai : dat. inf. , p . 193,7. gavas : N . pl . of go cow (102,
it is somewhat doubtful what is meant by the cows ; they are
explained by Yaska and Sayana as rays this is a probable sense, as
the rays of dawn are compared with cattle,and something connected
with sunl ight is apprOpriate to the third step of Visnu,the realm
of l ight. Roth explains gdvas as stars,but there is l ittle to support
this interpretation . bhfir i -srfigas : many-horned would al lude to
the diffusion of the sunbeams in many directions . aya s as : this
form is understood as a N. pl . of aya (from i go) by Yaska, whoexplains it as ayanas moving, and by Sayana as gan taras goers
ativi strtas very widely dijfuscd ; but the occurrence of the A . s .
aydsam , the G. pl . ayasam , as wel l as the A . pl . ayasas , indicates
that the stem i s ay é s ; wh ile its use as an attribute of s imha lion,
asva horse, and often of the Maruts, shows that the meanmg must
be active, swif t, nimble. ah a : on the use of this pcl . see p. 216.
vi‘snas cp . 3 b .
DYAVA-PRTHIVl
Heaven and Earth are the most frequently named pair of deities in the
RV. They are so closely associated that , wh ile they are invoked as a pai r
in six hymn s,Dyaus is never addressed alone in any hymn
, and Prthiv in
only one of three stanzas . The dual compound Dyava-Prthivi , moreover ,
occurs much oftener than the name of Dyaus alone. Heaven and Earth
are al so mentioned as r é d a s i the two worlds more than 100 times. They
are parents, being often cal led p i tara, matara, jan i tr i , besides beingseparately addressed as
‘father’
and ‘mother’
. They have made and
sustain al l creatures ; they are al so the parents of the gods . At the same
time they are in different passages spoken of as themselves created byindividual gods . One of them i s a prol ific bul l , the other a variegated
cow,being both rich in seed. They never grow old . They are great and
wide- extended ; they are broad and vast abodes . They grant food and
weal th , or bestow great fame and dominion. Sometimes moral qualities
i . 160,1] DYAVA-PRTHIVT 37
are attributed to them . They are Wi se and promote righteousness . As
father and mother they guard beings, and protect from disgrace and mis
fortune. They are sufficiently personified to be cal led leaders of the sacrifice
and to be conceived as seating themselves around the offering ; but they
never attained to a l iving personification or importance in worship. These
two deities are quite co-ordinate, while in most of the other pairs one of the
two greatly predominates.
i . 160.
-Metre : J agati'
.
a remaigfgfi famine {fit 1 te 1 anaigfiaafinewfinsairmai l ( visit unnatafi 1 S‘fiHHT 1
35131711 fi mh
‘m fi a’
n a wait] {31311 511
61 1 ( sin: 1mt
§a°rWinn115:
safe
": 11 r en
tal? {ir-1ma nta
—Eh 1{fi at-fl {fit353 31713 1fimi
‘
r {fi'1
aia z 1 i n? 1
i az l é é l rfiimflm l gn: I’Hfi lt ll
t é h i Dyava-Prth ivi Vi évasam These two, indeed, Heaven and
bhuva, Earth, arebeneficial toall, observing
rtavar i , rajaso dharayatk avi order, supporting thesageof the air
q anmam d h i sane antar i yate between the two divine bowls that
d evé d evi d harmana Sfir iah produce fair creations the divine
sli cih. bright Surya moves according to
fixed law.
The first two Padas form an independent sentence ; otherwise h i
(p. 252)would accent iyate in c. Dyava-P rth ivi : on the accent,
and treatment in the Pada text, see note on i . 35
,1 b. viéva-sam
b huva : dec., p . 89 ; accent
,note on i . 1 , 4 b ; final a and 5. are
never contracted with r (19 a and note rté -var i : note that,
when the final vowel of a cd. is P ragrhya, th is is in the Pada text
first indicated by i t i , and the cd . is then repeated and analysed ; in
the present case the suffix var i (f. of van , pp. 67 , and 69, f. n . 2)is treated l ike the final member of a cd.
,and the final vowel of rta
is treated as metrical ly lengthened. dharayat-k avi : a governing
38 DYAVA-PRTHIVI (i . 160, 1
cd . (189 A 2 a) the gen . rajasas is dependent on-k avi , probably
Agni , who (in x. 2,7) is said to have been begotten by Dyava-
pr'thiVI .
d h i sane : the exact meaning of this word, here a designation of
d yava-p r th ivi , i s uncertain . antar i yate goes between with ace.
the same thing is said of Savitr in i . 35,9 b. d harman n . ordinance
(dh arman m . ordainer) is the only stem in the RV. (dharma is
a later one) .
s“swi
m aren’
tmeant “mam 1Risa? {fit 1wen t 1
filmmm a
'
uémfir ( an: 1 ram 1 111711 1 s! 1sandm a n: 1
113951 Eight i f f resh sat? {fit 1 3361'
s f f?“fircn ufi nfii { fireman11 a 1flash {fit 1
tum 1Wt IEfiR Ia fin e’
fi: 12131
3 2151 11
2 uruvyacasamah in i asaé cata, As F ather and Mother , f ar-ex
p i tamata ca,b h i ivan
‘
an i rak s tending, great, inexhaustible, the
atah . two protect (a ll) beings. L ike two
sudhr‘
stame vapus ie na rod as i'
, mostp roud fair women are the two
p i tti yat sim abh i rfi pa1r é vasa worlds, since the Father clothed
yat . them with beauty .
uru -vyacasa : on the accent of this Bv. having wide extension, see
p . 455 c a . The du . a -sascat-a i s a Bv. (as the accent shows ,
p. 455 c 01) having no second, while a-sascant (also an epithet of
Dyava-
prthiVT) is a Karmadharaya (p. 455, f. n . not a second
un equa lled. su -d h fstame on the Pada analys is cp. note on i . 1, 1 c.
vapusy é cp . note on vi ryan i , i . 154 , 1 a. p i th: the god heremeant .
as the father of Dyava-
prthiVI may be Visvakarman,who in RV.
x. 8 1,1 . 2 is cal led
‘our father
’
and is described as creating the
earth and heaven . s im : see p. 249 . abh i avasayat : ipf. es . of
2 . vas wear.
3HHf}? 33 : fi sh: nfi é am 11: 1 61114: 1113 : 1fi1€1z 1n fi
ftsa1=11
W q‘ififi ném fi nm i l amfil l sfitz l afimfin maah
i . 160,4] DYAVA-PRTHIVI 39
afifi fi afifi fli dfi fifi l a 1gfi 1’
n 1gw l gst dm 1
famsi ga uz’
d almgain 11 fameh gaml tm: 1m 1§rn1a 11
s é vahn ih putrah p itaroh p avi That son of the two p arents, the
travan driver, the purifier, wisely purifies
punati d h ir o b h dvanani ma beings by his mysterious power .
yaya. He has always mi lked f rom the
d h en lim ca prén im vrsabham sp eckled cow and f rom the bull
sur é tasam abounding in seed his shining
viévéha sa k ram payd asya duk moisture.
sata .
putras : by the son of the parents (Heaven and Earth) Agul 1smeant ; for he is expressly said to have been begotten by Heaven
and Earth (RV. , x . 2 , cp. note on 1 b ; he i s especially cal led
vahni as the one who conveys (vah ati ) the gods to the sacrifice he
is very_ frequently cal led pavaka purifier (a term seldom appl ied to
any other deity) ; he purifies beings in h is character of priest.
Sayana thinks the Sun i s meant,and explains purifies by i llwmines.
d h en lim : the term cow i s often used in the RV. in the sense of
earth . ca is here used with the first acc. instead of the second
(cp. p. 228,
vrsabham : Dyaus is cal led a bull in other passages
also, and is said to have been made by Agni to rear for man
(i . su-r é tasam : alludes to the shedding of’
rain. visvah a isa cd. adv. resulting from the juxtaposition of vi éva and as an ace.
of time (cp . p . 300, 5) for a ll days equivalent to and vi éva which
also occurs . duk sata : unaugmented sa ao. (141 a) without initial
aspiration (wh ich is,however , restored in the Pada text), from
duh mi lk (with two acc.,198
,The general meaning of c d is
that Agni as the priest of sacrifice causes heaven to fertilize the
earth , and the latter to be productive.
3111Qan tauetme'
nfi 31am m enu“
sw am
61 31311? fie sta-
4 1 1 a: 1 313ml 1 t'
tafs’
jsrfa’
1 F415
fit“61 Hi?
“
( Gish flW'
flI NW 1
40 DYAVA-PRTHIVI (i . 160, 4
311131 : 1111111111131 : entire 11 fa 121: 11151 11 31111 111119 3111211 1“
51311131: 1 1511113131: 1 1111 1 errg'
e 11
4 ayam d evénam apasam apas He'
of the active gods is the
tamo most activewho has created the two
yo jajana r é d asi visvasam worlds that are beneficial to all.
b huva. Hewhowith insight has measured
vi yomam é . rajas i suk ratfi yaya out the two spaces (and upheld
ajarebh ih skambh anebh ih, sam them) with unaging supports, has
anrce. been universally pra ised.
In this stanza (cp . 2) the father of Heaven and Ear th is celebrated.
apasam partitive gen . (p. 321 , b a ) . v1 mame this expression
is also used of Visnu (see i . 154, 1. 3) and other gods. rajas i : the
heaven ly and the terrestrial spaces. The initial vowel of d must be
restored . sam anrce : red . of arc sing (139 , the A . being
used in the ps . sense ; Sayana explains it in an act. sense as pfijitavan has honoured, which he further interprets to mean stb d
p itavan has established !
uh fit gmfi fifsfl nfewfi: fi i fil l'
fl‘1 gmfi i fi'1 1 17f67ll
11a atmgfwah mash 1 {id 1 1113 1 8 1d: 1
11mmfi fi fi fi fl ifl feast 11 1 111 1 311311w {fi'1mew: 1
w a shed 3 131 nfita au 11 get-
1 1
fid lwfmw u anfi tm fm t l
UflTfi l‘l l 311311 1W ifi l l m l
{HER ll
5 té no grnan é , mah ini , mah i era. 8 0 being lauded, 0 great tries,vah , bestowon us, 0 Heaven and Earth
,
k satram ,Dyava-P rth ivi , dha great fame and amp le dominion.
sath o b rhat . Bring for us praiseworthy strength
i . 160,5] DYAVA—PRTHIVI 41
y énabh i k rstis tatanani a vis by which we may always extend
vaha over thepeop les .
pan t'
iy iam éjo asme sam inva
tam .
té : N . du. f. , used anaphorically (p. 294, grudne : pr. pt. of
1. gr sing, A. used in ps . sense. mah ini'
: there are six adjectives
meaning great, formed from the root mah be great : by far the
commonest is mah (8 1) mahant (85 a) is also common ; maha and
mah in are not common ,but are inflected in several cases mah i
and mahas (83, 2 a a ) are used in the N . A . sing. on ly ,the former
very often,the latter rarely . k satram : without ca . d h asath as
2. du. Sb . 3 ao. (p . 162,2) of d ha bestow,
to be construed with the
dat. nas . ab h i tatanama : pf. sb . of tan . stretch (140, 1 ,
p. vi éva-h a is an adv. formed with the suffix ha dha
(p. 212 3) meaning l iterally in every manner always (cp. vi évdhain 3 d) ; on the accent cp . note on vi évatas in i . 1 , 4 b . p andyya :
see 162,2 . 6j6 : final 0 is pronounced short before a (p. 437, a 4),
but the rhythm of the break here u is abnormal (p. 440, f. n .
asmé : properly 10 6 . of vayam (p. but also used as a dat. , is
Pragrhya it is dat. here (200 A invatam : 2. du. ipv. of inv,
a secondary root produced by a transfer from the fifth class (i -nu ) tothe first
,inv-a (133, 3 b) .
INDRA
Indra is invoked alone in about one- fourth of the hymns of the RV.,far
ore than are addressed to any other deity ; for he is the favourite national
he Vedic people . He is more anthropomorphic on the physical side,nvested with mythological imagery , than any other member of the
He is primari ly a god of the thunderstorm who vanquishes the
drought or darkness, and sets free the waters or wins the l ight.
god of battle who aids the victorious Aryan in over
foes.
es,such as body and head
, are often referred to
he agitates h is jaws and his beard and his bel ly
in connexion with his great powers of drinkinge i s also tawny
-haired and tawnyreferred to because they wield the
42 INDRA [ ii . 12
thunderbolt (vajra ) . which , mythological ly representing the l ightningstroke, i s his exclusive weapon . This bolt was fash ioned for h im by Tvastr ,being made of iron (aya sa) , golden , tawny, sharp , many-
pointed , sometimes
spoken of as a stone or rock . Several epithets, compounds or derivatives
of vajra , such as vajra -b ahu bear ing the bolt in his a rm and vajr in wielderof the bolt are almost without exception appl ied to him. Sometimes he is
described as armed with how and arrows he al so carries a hook (ank uéa) .Having a golden car , drawn by two tawny steeds (har i ) , he is a car
fighter (ra th esthd) . Both h is car and his steeds were fashioned by the
Rbhus , the divine artificers .
As Ind ra is more addicted to Soma than any of the other gods, the
commdh epithet‘Soma-drinker
’
(Somapd) is characteristic of him . This
beverage stimulates h im to carry out his warl ike deeds ; thus for the
slaughter of Vrtra he i s said to have drunk three lakes of Soma . One wholehymn (x. 119) is a monologue in which Indra , intoxicated with Soma , boastsof his greatness and his might .
Indra i s often spoken of as having been born,and two whole hymns
deal with the subject of his birth . His father , the same as Agni’
s, appears
to be Dyaus ; but the inference from other passages is that he is Tvastr, the
artificer among the gods. Agni is cal led Indra ’
s twin brother, and Pfisan
(vi . 54) is also his brother . His wife, who is often mentioned , is Indran'
i'
.
Indra is associated with various other deities. The Maruts (i . 85) are hischief al lies, who constantly help him in his conflicts . Hence the epithet
M arfi tvant accomp anied by the Maruts i s characteristic of h im . Agni i s
the god most often conjoined with him as a dual divinity. Indra i s also
often coupled with Varuna (vii . 86) and Vayu, god ofWind , less often with
Soma (vii i . Brhaspati (iv. Phean , and Visnu.
Indra is of vast size ; thus it is said that he would be equal to the earth
even if it were ten times as large as it is. His greatness and power a re
constantly dwelt on : neither gods nor men have attained to the l imit of
h is might ; and no one l ike him is known among the gods . Thus various
epithets such as sak ra and sacivant mighty, é e’
tcipati lord of might, sata
k ratu having a hundred p owers , are characteristic of him .
The essential myth forming the basis of h is nature is described with
extreme frequency and much variation . Exh ilarated by Soma and general lyescorted by the Maruts, he attacks the chief demon of drought, usual ly
called Vrtra , but often also the serpent (ah i ) . Heaven and Earth tremble
when the mighty combat takes place. With h is bol t he shatters Vrtra
who encompasses the waters, hence receiving the exclusive epithet ap su-ji t
conquering in the waters . The resul t of the conflict, which i s regarded as
being constantly renewed , i s that he pierces the mountain and sets free
the waters pent up l ike imprisoned cows. The physical elements in the
conflict are nearly always the bolt, the mountain , waters or rivers, whi le
44 INDRA [11. 12
the axle ; he made the non-existent into the existent in a moment. Some
times the separation and support of heaven and earth are described as
a result of Indra ’
s victory over a demon who hel d them together .
As the destroyer of demons in combat,Indra is constantly invoked by
warriors . As the great god of battle he is more frequently cal led upon than
any other deity to help the Aryans in thei r conflicts with earthly enemies .
He protects the Aryan colour and subjects the black skin . He dispersed
of the black race . He subjected the Dasyus to the Aryan ,and gave
land to the Aryan .
More general ly Indra is praised as the protector, helper , and friend of his
worshippers . He is described as bestowing on them weal th , which is con
sidered the result of victories. His l iberal ity i s so characteristic that the
frequent attribute maghavan bountiful is almost exclusively his .
Besides the central myth of the Vr tra-fight , several minor stories are
connected with Indra . In various passages he i s described as shattering the
car of Usas, goddess of Dawn (iv. this trait is probably based on the
notion of Indra ’
s bringing the sun when kept back by the delaying dawn .
He is al so said to have stepped the steeds of the Sun,apparently by
causing the latter to lose a wheel of hi s car . Indra i s further associated
with the myth of the winning of Soma ; for it is to him that the eagle brings
the draught of immortality from the highest heaven . Another myth i s
the capture by Indra , with the help of Saram'
a,of the cows confined in
a cave by demons cal led Panis .
Various stories which , though mixed with mythologica l elements , pro
bably have an hi storical basis, are told of Indra’
s having fought in ai d of
individual protégé s , such as k ing Sudas, against terrestrial foes .
The attributes of Indra are chiefly those of physical superiority and rule
over the physical world . He is energetic and violent in action , an
i rresistible fighter , an inexhaustible lavisher of the h ighest goods on man
kind,but at the same time sensual and immoral in var ious ways , such as
excess in eating and drink ing , and cruelty in killing h is own father Tvastr.
He forms a marked contrast to Varuna , the other great universal monarch of
the RV. ,who wields passive and peaceful sway, who uni formly appl ies the
laws of nature, who upholds moral order , and whose character displays lofty
ethical features .
The name of Indra is pro-Indian ; for it occurs in the Avesta as that of
a demon ; the term verethraghna ( = V r trah an ) is a lso found there as the
designation of the God of Victory , though unconnected with Indra . Thus
it seems l ikely that there was al ready in the Indo-Iran ian period a god
resembl ing the Vrtra-sl aying Indra of the RV. The etymology of the word
i s doubtful , but its radical portion ind may be connected with that in
ind -u drop .
i i . 12,2] INDRA 45
11. 12 . Metre : Tr istubh .
111 51111 as 1121111when 11: 1 31111: 1 1131 1mm: 1 11=lei 1=1 1
fish i anagjm gziiiflm 211: 1211111 1 ag’
m 1 fifi fi flifld l13m in3111111111 net 1 13131111 1 {fit 1 31112111
qme'
l 115 1 n 3111111 11 11111 1
Elms 1 11151 1 11: 1 3111111: 1 ( at: 11
yo jataevap rath amé manasvan The chief wise god who as soon
d evé d evz‘
in k ratuna p aryabh fi as born surpassed the gods in
sat power ; beforewhose vehemence the
yasya susmad rod asi ab hyase two worlds trembled by reason oftam the greatness of his valour : he,
nrmnasya mah na sa, janasa , 0 men, is Indra .
Ind rah .
eva : see p. 224,2. manas -van : note that the suffix van is not
separated in the Pada text,as it i s in p avi tra -van (i . 160, had
the Sandhi of the word,however , been mano-van it would have
been analysed as mah ansvan . d evé d evdn : 4 cp . i . 1 , 5 c. p arya
b h f lsat : the exact meaning of the vb . par i b hfi s is somewhat
uncertain here,but as the greatness of Indra i s especially emphasized
in th is hymn,surp ass seems the most probable. Sayana explains it
here as encompassed with p rotection ; in theAV. as ruled over in the
TS. as surp assed. r é d as i : the P ragrhya i of duals is not shortened
in pronunciation before vowels (p . 437 f. n . ab hyasetam : ipf.
of bhy as bh i be af raid of , with abl . (p . 316,b) . mahnfi inst. of
mahan greatness (cp . p. 458,
The refrain sé , janasa ,_
I'
nd rah
ends every stanza (except the last) of th is hymn ; s imilarly vi évas
mad Ind ra l i ttarah ends al l the twenty-three stanzas of x . 86 .
s 11: g'fi lafi
'
swimmflssg 21: 1gfi’fi m 5 1211115 111 1 3 113311 1
21: uém aafi ai 31111 11151 1 21: 1 11311111 1uséfi ém1Wm 1
fi fi ftfi fi flfi afim au wfi fi'
w l fi mfi l afi au
46 INDRA [11. 12,
211 3111111115111; 371111 at : 11 11: 1 111111 1walnut 1 11: 1 315 111: 1
2 yah p rth ivim vyath amanam Who made firm the quaking
ad rmh ad , earth,who set at rest the agitated
yah parvatan p rak up i tarh aram mountains who measures out the
h at , a ir more widely, who supported
yd antar ik sam vimamé var iyo , heaven : he, 0 men, is Indra.
yo d ye—1m astab h nat : sa, janasa ,Ind r ah .
yas : note that every Pada of this stanza,as wel l as of nearly
every other stanza of this hymn,begins with a form of the
relative prn . corresponding to the 8 15. of the refrain . The cosmic
deeds of Indra in al l the three divis ions of the universe,earth
,air
,
and heaven, are here described. aramnat : ipf. of ram set at rest.
vimam é var iyas (cpv. of ur li, 103 , 2 a) : here the opv. is used
predicatively , extended so as to be wider ; cp. vi . 69,5, where it is
said of Indra and Visnu : ye made the air wider and stretched‘
out
the spaces for us to live .
’
d yam ace. of d ye sky. astabhnat : ipf .
of stab b prop in this and the preceding stanza the ipf . of narration
is used throughout excepting vimam é (a form of constant occurrence,
cp . 154, 1 . 3 ; 160, cp . 213 d (p .
s111 35 11
1
51111
111t finest 11: 1sen 1 3 11311 1 s fi'ma 1 1111 1
111 111 3 1 13313511 and 1 1111311111wt dfi t a t fii 3 31111 21: 1111z1t-1a13 113
'1a1a111m1 laae11
1136115111151, 11 3111111 ( i : 11 11: 13 1mm: 1 =11a : 131111111512111111
1111131 1quai ljmuaam: 113 : 11
3 y é h atvah im arinat sapta s in Who having slain the serpent
d hfi n ,released the seven streams
,who
yo gaudajad ap ad haV alasya , drove out the cows by the unclosing
y é aémanor antar agnimjajdna , of Va la, who between two rocks
samvfk samatsu : s é , janasa , has p roducedfire, victor in battles
Ind rah. he,0 men, is Indra .
i i . 12, 4] INDRA 47
The first hemistich refers to the two wel l -known myths, the
release of the waters by the conquest of Vrtra , and the capture of
the cows imprisoned by Vala ; cp. i i . 14,2 : yo apo vavrvémsam
V rtram jagh éna who slew Vr tra who had enclosed the waters, and
ibid. 3 yo gé udajad , ap a h i V alam val; who drove out the cows, for
he unclosed Va la. ar inat : ipf. of r i release. sap ta s indh f m : the
seven rivers of the Panj‘
ab . gas : A . pl ] of g é cow. u d - éjat : ipf.of ajdrive. There is some doubt as to the exact interpretation of
apad h é , a word that occurs here only. In form i t can only be an
I . s . of ap a-dh é (cp . 97 The paral lel use of ap a -V 1; in ii . 14 , 3
(quoted above) indicates that ap a - d ha, means the un closing by Indra
of the cave of Vala in which the cows are imprisoned ; cp. also
i . 11, 5 : tvam V alasy a g émafté ’
pavar b i l am thou hast unclosed the
aperture of Vala rich in cows. The form is explained by Durga, the
commentator on the Nirukta,by ap adh anena as meaning ud gha
tanena Va l asya by the unclosing of Va la . Sayana interprets it as an
irregularity for the abl . f rom the enclosure of Va la . V a lasya : the
objective gen . (p. 320,B 1 b) by opening (the cave of ) Vala .
aémanor antar : between two clouds , according to Sayana between
heaven and earth according to Durga the al lusion is to the l ightn ingform of Agni Who in several passages is said to be ‘in the rock
to be ‘
produced from the rock’and is cal led ‘
son of the rock
(ad reh sfi nuh).
fi m fim wfimw fi 111i 1 § 111 1fi =at 1 € 1é 111 1 aa1fit1
fi a fi afinfitm z l 11: 1g11t11 1'
q'
i t11 1 1 11311 11 1 311t 1
W a fi fitvfia‘
i’
m ég mam é ”
z 11iz 132 15 11 311111 {i t 11 151311111 1 11: 1 f111i1111=1 1 1 11 11 1
3 11i ?“ardu gmfit l az l sfinnu fi z n
é nemé vi éva cyavan'
a k rtén i , By whom a ll things here have
varnam adh aram gu been made unstable, who has made
h ék ah ; subject the Dasa colour and has
48 INDRA [ i . 12, 4
évaghn'
iva yo jig ivafn l ak sam made it disappear ; who,like a
Eid ad winning gambler the stake, has
aryah pu stan i sé , jan i sa , taken thep ossessions of thefoe he,
Ind rah. 0 men, is I ndra .
ima. vi éva : a ll these things, that is , a ll things on earth. cyavana
is used predicatively after k rtén i , just as adharam is in b after
ak ar ; cp . iv. 30,22 : yds ta vi évan i cicyusé who hast shaken the
whole world. dasam varnam : the non-Aryan colour k rsnam
varnam), the aborigines ; note the difference of accent in the
substantive d as é . and the adj. dasa . ak ar root ao. of k r (148 , 1 b) ,to be ~
construed wi th both ad h aram (make inf erior subject) and
guha (put in hiding cause to disappear, drive awag). When a final
Visarjaniya in the Samhita text represents an etymological r , this is
indicated in the Pada text by putting i ti after the word and
repeating the latter in its pause form : ak ar i ty ak ah . J l g i vam
pf. pt. ofji win (139 , 4) on the Sandhi see 40, 3 . Since the normal
metre requires u u after the caesura (p . 441,top) , this word was
here perhaps metrical ly pronounced jigivé fn as i t came to be
regularly written in B. ad at : irr . a ao. (147 a 1 ) from 1151 give ;
though not analysed in the Pada text,it must owing to the sense
be“
al -ad at has taken . aryas gen of ar i (99 , 3) this word appears
to be etymologically a Bv. having no wea lth (r i ra i ), either
for oneself (whence the sense needy, supp l iant) or to bestow on
others (whence the sense niggard, foe). [If a s ingle meaning has to
be given , devout is misleading, and supp liant should be substituted
for it in the Vedic Grammar , p . 8 1,f. n . 1 ; 99 , 3 ; and in the
Index, p . 473 ]
quwgfi ajyg’
flfii ak u 1111 1 1 1 1 316 fi 1 1 §1€1 11: 1 1fit
fl utg fifi’ri fififitflu 1
fl wé z gxfifi ifi im fitm fi 3 11 1 111 1 1 113 : 1 11 1 1111: 1 111fi11 1
wa nn a 311111 1341: 11
11: 1 3 111: 1 13x31: 1 fastzsrq 1 1511 1
fi1=11fi1 1
1 11 1 1131 13 1 1 111z 1a =1111z 11d z11
i i . 12,6] INDRA 49
5yam sma p rchanti kuh a seti
gh oram ,
utém ahur na1s6 astiti enam
$ 6 ’ryal;1 pa stir V l Ja iva mmati .
érad asmai d hatta : s é , janasa ,i nd rah .
sma (p . 250) is metrically lengthened, the second syl lable of the
Pada favouring a long vowel (p. 441, top). p rchanti pr . of p rach .
seti for $ 15. i ti : the irr. contraction of set with a fol lowing vowel is
common (48 a) . im anticipates enam : see p . 220.
.
ahur : pf. of
ah sag, 139 , 4 ; th is vb. not being accented,b has the form of
a principal clause, though the almost invariable use of r elative
clauses in this hymn would lead one to expect that the of the
first clause would accentuate the second also. 8 6 aryas : the initial
a , though written , should be dropped ; otherwise the 1rr . contraction
vijeva is just possible, but u for u u fol lowing a caesura after theI
fifth syl lable i s rare . 5 c is paral lel to 4 c : a minati to ad at ;
aryah pustin to aryab pustan i ; vijah to l ak sam . Usas (iv. 51)is in i . 92
,10 described as wearing away the life of mortal s,
svaghniva k rtmi r v1ja. aminana diminishing it as a skilful gambler
the stakes . minati : pr . of mi damage. érad d h atta (2 . pl . ipv. of
d ha) believe, with dat. (200 A. 1 e) . The Padas a b mention doubts
as to the existence of Indra ; 0 impl ies that he does exist ; and d
cal ls for belief in him .
fl w mm a z am 11: 1 1 111111 1’
1fg111 1 11z 1 11‘1d 1
111 1111111 fi t : 1 11: 1 113111: 1 111111111 1111 1 11111 : 1
111 11 13111 111 sf11111 g'fign: 133 1111
6 11: 1 11: 1 11111 1111 131W : 1
111111111111 11 fi t: 11 111 1 1111 6 1 1 11: 1 1 111111: 1ref: 11
6 yd radh rasya cod i té , yah k rea Who is furtherer of the rich, of
sya , thepoor, of the supp liant Brahmin
yo b rahmano nddh amanasya singer ; who, f a ir-Zipped, is the
k ir é h ; helper of him thathas p ressed Soma1 902
T he terrible one of whom they
ask ‘where is he of whom they a lso
say‘he is not
’
; he diminishes the
possessions of the niggard like
the (player’
s) stake. Believe in him
he, O
‘
men ,is Indra.
50 INDRA [ it 1-
2,6
yuk tagravno yo avita sué iprah and has set towork the stones : he,sutasomasya : sé , janasa , I
'
n 0 men, is Indra.
d rah.
cod itagoverns the three genitives (the rich, the poor, the priestly
poet) of a b,as the three relatives show ; while avi tagoverns that
of c. su -é ip ras : Bv. cd. , p . 455, c a . The exact meaning of é ip ra
is somewhat doubtful , but as it i s regularly dual, has the attributive
tawny, har i-sip ra being paral lel to har i - émaéaru tawny-bearded
,and
is associated with Indra’
s drinking of Soma,i t can hardly mean
anything but l ips or moustaches it could not wel l meanjaws whichare hanfi . yuk ta
-
gravnas : of h im who has set in motion the
stones with which the Soma shoots are pounded.
13 1111111111111: 111311
1 1 111 11111 1 13111 11111rz1n1q a1111 111111'1: 1
11111 111111 111 1 fi=1§ 1 11111: 1 1161 1 111111: 1 111111 1111l1 1 1 1111: 1
11: 1 111111 1 11z 1 3 111111 1 1 1111111
111 1 111111111 11 111 111 {a}: 11 11: 11 111111 131111 111z l a=1111z 11 115 11
7 yasyaévasah p rad i é i , yasya In whosecontrol are horses, kine,
gavo, clans,al l chariots ; who creates the
yasya grama, yasya visve r é sun, the dawn ; who is the guide
thasah ; of the waters : he, 0 men, is
yah sfir iam , ya u sasam jajana ; Indra .
1 . r o
yo ap am neta : sa , Janasa , I n
d rah.
ngasam : often also usasam ; du . N . A . usasa and usasa ; N . pl ..L
usasas and usasas ; see 83, 2 a , f. n . 1 .
W 11 111
111 1 1113 11111 11111111: 1
1111 1W111 {fit l Ff“) {fitmi1 1 111 1 11 31111 {Fri fi sfi fi 1
111 1 1 111? 1 11 11111: 1 1111511 1: 1
1 11111 133111f11111: 111111111: 19 13 "
52 INDRA [i i . 12, 9
na rte : must be pronounced narte (19 a). vi -Jayante : pr . of jiconquer . havante : cp. vihvayete in 8 a . é vase z final dat.
(p. 314 , B p ratimanam : cp . iv. 18,4 : nah i nu asya p rat i
manam asti antar jaté su uta y é jan i tvah f or there is nomatch forhim among those who have been born nor those who wil l be born.
acyuta-cyut : cp . 4 a ; also i ii . 30, 4 : tvam cyavayann acyutani
caras i thou continuest shaking unshaken things .
ao 11: 1
1 11131 1131111 1 11111111 1 1 1 : 1 1 1 11: 1 1 a i
antammw ét 111 11111 1 1111 1111 11 1 11111 1 3 1 11111
11: 1112111 11113 31111 131211
111 afi fiém 11 111 11 W: 11 11
10 yah éaévato mah i é no dad hanan Who slays with his arrow the
amanyamanafi charu'
ajagh ana ; unexp ecting many that commit
yah sard h ate nénudadati srah great sin ; who f orgives not the
yarn,arrogant man his arrogance, who
yo dasyor h anta : s é , janaso, slays the Dasyu : he,0 men , is
fnd rah. I ndra .
dadhanan : pr. pt. A. of d h a. The Sandhi of an (39) is not
appl ied between Padas (cp. i . 35,10 c). amanyamanan : not
thinking soil . that he would slay them ; on the Sandhi of n 51, see
40,1 . sarva : with his arrow (inst , p. with h is characteristic
weapon ,the vajra , he slays h is foes in battle. jaghana : has slain
(and sti ll s lays) may be translated by the present (213 A a ). anu
dad ati 3 . s . pr . of anu + d a forgive, wi th dat. (cp . 200 Af dasyos
the demon, a term appl ied to various individual demons,such as
mbara (11 a).
1 1: watt 1196135
1 11 11130 111“113 111111 11 1
11 3 1111111 111“
a ft 11111111
{1111
1 111111 11 1111111 ( a
t : 11
11: 1 11111 11 1 11111113 1 fav e-111 1
1 11 11111 1111 1 11t 1 1 111 1 151x11 1
1113 1111 11 11 1 11: 1wfém 111 1111 1
1 11111 13 1111111 111: 13111111: 11
i i,12,12] INDRA 58
51 1111 é amb aram parvatesu k s i Who in the fortieth autumn
yantam f ound out Sambara dwelling in
catvar iméy ém sarad i anva the mountains ; who has slain the
vind at ; serp ent as he showed his strength ,
ojayamanam yo ah im jaghana , the son of Danu, as he lay he,
Danum sayanam : s é , janasa , 0 men, is Indra .
P
I nd r‘
ah.
gambara , next to Vrtra, Vala, and Sush a, is the most frequently
mentioned demon foe of Indra, who strikes h im down from h is
mountain.
“He‘
is often spoken of as possessing many forts . k si
yantam : see note on i . 154,2 d. catvariméy ém : that is
,Indra
found h im after a Very long search, as he was hiding himsel f .
anvavind at : ipf . of 2 . vi d find . The second hemistich refers to
Indra’
s slaughter of Vrtra . ojayamanam : cp. ii i . 32,11 : ah ann
ah im p ar i éayanam arna ojayamanam thou slewest theserpentshowing
his strength as he lay around the flood . Dénum : this is strictly the
name of Vrtra’
s mother,here used as a metronym ic Danava ; cp.
i . 32,9 Danuh saye sahavatsa na d henuhDanu lay like a cowwith
her calf (i . e. Vrtra). éayanam : pr . pt. A. of £11 lie (134 , 1 c) .
1 11:W fi'
fléqmfi iw a 1 1: 1 11111113111: 131111 : 1gf‘q'mm
w ém h’
é 1111 1°1 1 i 1 13 1 1 161 111 1 11113 1 1111 1finia l
11: 1fi fem m‘
sjm l aé finfi u
11111111351 111 111 11 ( i : 11 111111111111111111 111: 11111111z1
yah sap taraémir vrsab has tuvi \T hemighty seven-reined bullwho
sman let loose the seven streams toflow ;avasrjat sartave sap ta s ind hfi n ; who armed with the bolt spurned
yo Rauh inam asphurad vajra Rauhina as he scaled heaven : he,
bahur
dy iim arch antam : s é , janasa ,i nd rah .
The term vrsab ha is yery often appl ied to gods , but especial ly to
Indra, as expressing mighty strength and fertil ity. sap ta-raémi s
54 INDRA [11. 12, 12
having seven reins probably means hard to restrain irresistible’
;Sayana interprets the cd. to mean
‘having seven kinds of clouds
(parjanyas) that shed rain on the earth tuvis-man : the suffixmant is separated in the Pada text only after vowels
,as gosman
on the Sandhi see 10 a . ava-asrjat : ipf. of srjemit. sar tave dat. inf.
of sr flow (p. 192 , sap ta s indhfi n : cp. 3 a and i . 35,8 b. Rau
h inam : a demon mentioned m only one other passage of the RV
d yam a -roh antam : ascending to heaven i n order to attack Ind1a.
asm t ffl a gfigfi fi fi 1111 1 1 fi 11 1 wa l gfi11fi 1fi1 1
wattage 1111111 1111511 1 111111 {fit 1
11: 11111111 11111 11 11111113 1”F ifi ! F1 11 I ‘W 11111111 : 11111111
111 11113111: 11 1111111 fi t: 11 11: 1 111111 111: 1f‘3'
11fi a: laé safiazl
11: 1 3 11131 1: 1 11: 1 1 111111: 1 {i t 11
13 Dyava cid asmaiPrth ivi namete ; Even Heaven and Earth bow
éfi smac cid asya parvata b ha down before him before his ve
yante ; kemence even the mountains are
yah somap é ni ci to vaJrab ahur , afraid. Who is known as theSoma
y é vajrah astah : s é , janasa , drinker, hold ing thebolt in his arm,i nd rah. who holds the bolt in his hand he
,
0 men, is I ndra.
Dyava Prth iw : the two members of Devata-dvandvas are
here,as often ,
separated by other words (186 A asmai : dat.
with nam bow (cp. 200 A 1 k, p. bhayante : see note on
i . 85, 8 c. susmad : cp. 1 c. soma-p'
as (97, predicative nom.,
(196 b). ui -ci tas on the accent see p. 462, f. n . 4 .
11: gm 11: ni t
11: £1 5 1 11: 13 11131 111
11111 1111 1131 1 1m 111111
11111? ( 13 : 11 d t i :
1 1 1 1 1 511 3 111 11 1 11111 1 11111 1
11
i i . 12, 15] INDRA 55
yah sunvantam avati , yah pacant am ,
yah éamsantam , yah sasama
11am
ya'
sya b rahma vardh anam,
yasya somo,
yasyedam radh an: sé , janasa ,i nd rah.
sunvantam : all the participles in a and b refer to some act of
worship : pressing Soma bak ing sacrificial cakes , &c. praising the
gods ; having prepared the sacrifice. éaéamanam : explained bySayana as stotram kurvanam ofiering a Stotra by the Naighantuka,ii i . 14
,as arcantam singing ; by the Nirukta, vi . 8 , as é amsamanam
p ra i sing. nti : contracted inst . of nti (p. 80) to be construed with
avati ; cp. i . 185,4 : avasa avanti help ing with aid. vard hanam :
to be taken predicatively with each of the three subjects b rahma ,
s émas , rad h as , of whom prayer, &c. is the strengthening, that is,
Whom prayer, &c. strengthens ; yasya being an objective gen.
(p. 320,B 1 b). idam radh as this gif t this sacrificial ofiering.
az éqfi udfi gum fijg 11: 1 132 1'
11 1 111111 1gs1z 1 1 11 1 f1 111 1
W d fit ffl ifi aa u 11111q 1z€f§ 11n1fi 1d 1 1 1f11111111z1
afi dw fw t fimd 111111 13 1 111 1fi1ag'1fi 1111h 1
111111 1111 1331111111211 11 31 1111111: 16111111 1 1 11 1fi g 11
15 sunvat é pacate dudh ra a As hewho, most fierce, enforces
c1d booty f or him thatp resses and him
véjam dard ar s i , sé k i lasi sat that bakes,thou indeed art true.
571111 . We ever dear to thee, 0 Indra,
vayam ta , Ind ra , vi évah a p r i with strong sons, would utter divine
yasah, worship .
.L .L
sun raso V i dath am a vad ema .
This concluding stanza is the only one that does not end with the
refrain sé , janasa , Ind rah. Instead, the poet, changmg from the 3 .
Whowith his aid helps him that
p resses Soma, him that bakes, him
that offers p raise, him that has p re
pared the sacrifice whom p rayer,
whom Soma, whom this gif t
strengthens : he, 0 men ,is Indra .
56 INDRA 15
to the 2 . prs .,substitutes at the end of b the words sa
’
. k i l auas i
satyah as such thou art indeed true to be depended on (cp. note on
satyam in i . 1,6 c) ; while c and d are a prayer ending with an
adaptation of the favourite refrain of the Gautamas,the poets of the
second Mandala : b rh ad vad ema vi d ath e suvirah wewould, aecom
panied by strong sons , speak a loud at divine worship . 6. cid
perhaps better taken as emphasiz ing dudh ras (cp. p . 216) than withdard arsi (int. of te : gen . with p riy iisas (p. 322
,C) . vi da
th am : the etymology and precise sense of this word have been
much discussed . There can now be hardly any doubt that it is
derived from the root vidh worship ,and that it means divineworship,
scarcely distinguishable from yaji'
ia, of which it is given as a
synonym in Naighantuka, i ii . 17 cp. note on i . 85,1 .
RUDRA
This god occupies a subordinate“
position in the RV bemg celebrated
in only three entire hymns, in part of another , and in one conjointly withSoma . Hi s hand , his arms, and his l imbs are mentioned . He has beautifull ips and wears braided hair. His colour i s brown ; his form is dazzling ,for he shines l ike the radiant sun ,
l ike gold . He is arrayed with golden
ornaments, and wears a glorious necklace (n i ska). He drives in a car. Hisweapons are often referred to : he holds the thunderbolt in his arm, and
discharges his l ightning shaft from the sky ; but he is usual ly said to be
armed with a bow and arrows, wh ich are strong and swi ft .
Rudra is very often associated with theMaruts (i . He is thei r father,and is said to have generated them from the sh ining udder of the cowPrs
’
ni .
He is fierce and destructive l ike a terrible beast, and is'
cal led a bul l,as
wel l as the ruddy (arusa) boa1 of heaven . He i s exalted , strongest of the
strong, swift, unassailable, unsurpassed m might. He 18 young and unaging ,
a lord (isana ) and father of the world . By his rule and univei al dominion
he i s aware of the doings of men and gods. He is bounti ful (m i d hvams ) ,easily invoked and auspicious (siva) . But he i s usual ly regarded as malevo
lent ; for the hymns addressed to him chiefly express fear of his terrible
shafts and deprecation of his wrath . He is implored not to slay or injure,in his anger , his worshippers and their belongings , but to avert h is great
mal ignity and his cow- slaying , man-slaying bolt from them,
and to lay
others low. He is, however , not purely maleficent l ike a demon . He not
only preserves from calamity , but bestows blessings. His heal ing powers
are especially often mentioned ; he has a thousand remedies,and is the
ii . RUDRA 57
greatest physician of physicians . In‘
this connexion he has two exclusive
epithets,jalasa , cooling, andjal asa -b h esaja , possessing cooling remedies .
The physical basi s represented by Rudra. i s not _
clearly apparent. But it
seems probable that the phenomenon underlying h is nature was the stonn ,
not pure and simple, but in its baleful aspect seen in the destructive
agency of l ightning . His heal ing and beneficent powers would then have
been founded partly on the fertil izing and purify ing action of the thunder
storm, and partly on the negative action of sparing those whom he might
slay. Thus the deprecations of his wrath led to the appl ication of the
euphemistic epithet siva, which became the regular name of Rudra’
s
historical successor in post-Vedic mythology.
The etymological sense of the name is somewhat uncertain, but would be‘Howler according to the usual derivation from rud cry.
11. 33. Metre : Tr l stubh .
wfi fi afiWgfi g1111 111 1 fnaz111
'
1 11111 1g11111 1 1zq 1
m i s i denfifi gafimu 111 111zui€11 1 111111wz 1W111z 1
W fi a’
ifi fi fi ufia a fi l a z l éfit lmfin ufim
n fi finfi fig nmfitz u a mg msmfitz n
1 a te, pitar Marutam , sumnam L et thy good will, 0 Father of
etu theMaruts,come (to us) : sever us
m6, nah sfiryasya samdr‘
éo yuyo notf rom the sightof the sun . May
th an. the hero bemerciful to us in regard
abh i no viroarvati k sameta to our steeds ; may we be p rolific
p ra jayemahi , End ara , p r ajé with ofispring.
bh in.
p itar Marutam : the whole of a compound voc. expression loses
its accent unless i t begins a sentence of Pada ; in the latter case
only the first syl lable would be accented (p. 465,18 a). yuyothas
2. s . inj. A. of 2 . yu separate, with irregular strong radical vowel
(p. 144,a ) . samd f'éas : abl . 201 A 1 . viras Rudra, with change
from 2 . to 3. prs .,as is often the case (cp. i . 85, 5 c) . arvati abh i
k sameta may he not injure us in our steeds, may he spare them .
Rud ra must be read as a trisyl lable (15, 1 d).
58 RUDRA [11. 33, 3
1 w ins? 1 15161 1 111311151 : 1 ( g 1unfi tfifu: 1
“W anfiu fifi fitu 111111 1 fe111u w’
111 1'
1‘
11111fitz 1
1 1411 13111 fi at far11 11 111 1311: 1
1 1113 111 16 1 6 1 1111111 : 11 fa 1 1 1111111: 1 1 111111161 1w t 11
2 tvad attebh i , Rudara , samtame By the most salutary medicines
bh in given by thee, O Rudra, I would
satam h ima asiya b hesajé bh ih. attain a hundred winters. Drive
vi asmad dvé so vi taram , vi far away from us hatred, away
13t , distress, away diseases in all di
vi amivas catayasva visfi cih . rections.
tvfi-d atteb h i : the first member of th is cd. retains the inst. case
form (p. Sandhi,47. satam : on the concord see p. 291 , b ;
l ife extending to a hundred winters or autumns (saradas) is often
prayed for. asiya : root ao. op. A. of ams (p. 171, vi : the prp .
of a cd . vb . is often repeated with each object , the vb . itself being
used on ly once. vitaram : adv. of the opv. of vi farther (cp. fi t-tara)employed only with verbs compounded with vi . catay asva : ipv.
A. cs . of cat , with metrical lengthening of the final vowel . visfi ci s
A . pl . f. of vi svafi c turned in various directions, is used predicatively
l ike an adv.
s ad t g figmfit §Era -1 111111111 1 131 1 11 1111 1 1 1111 1
111 1 1111 11111? 11111 131 1“113 267131: 1 111111111 1 11111 11? {fit
ufii'
11: 1111 11311: 113 111111 1
13 1 11 1 1111? 1 11111Wf11 11 11f11 1 =1z 1 1111 11 1 1 11t11z 1 1 1fi§1 1
fl at: 1 151511133: 11 1111: 1311111 1 11
3 é r é stho jatasya , End ara , sr i Thou art the bestof what is born,
yas i , 0 Rudra,in glory, themightiest of
tavastamas tavasam , vajrab aho. the mighty, O wielder of the bolt.
parsi nah param amh asah su Transport us to the farther shore
asti ; of distress in safety. Ward
vi éva ab b iti rap aso yuyodh i . a ll attacks of mischief .
60 RUDRA [ ii . 33, 4
the internal Sandhi of this word see 43, 3 a . sahfi ti : contracted
inst. invocation with other deities whom Rudra might consider
inferior . l id. arpaya : es . of 11d r (p. 197,irr . 1) raise up ,
strengthen. b h isajam : partitive gen. (see 202B 2 b, p. 321) cp .
3 b. érnomi : pr . of é ru hear ; with double acc.,198
,1 .
11 same-1111 111was 3611111131: 1are 1 a : 1ere-
1111111: 1
3 161 5 11 1111? gar fi sh 1 and 1 151131151: 1 fgéjv 1
egg-t: gear? 111 $ 1 Eli? fi g“: 1 1311531: 1 111 1 11: 1 3 1? 1
apa: grunt {11 113 11113 11 mg: 1gsfud: 13133 1111 1 11
111? 11
5 havimabh ir havate y é havi r Rudra who is called on with
b h ir , invocations and with oblations,I
ava stémebh i Rud a ram d isiya would appeasewith songs of p raise
rd fi darah suhavo mano asyai may he, the comp assionate, easy
b ab h ruh sué ip ro r i radh an ma to invoke, ruddy brown, fa ir
nayai . Zipped, not subject us to that
jea lousy of his.
haviman : from h fi ca ll, but h avi s from hu sacrifice. ava d isiya
s ao. op. A. of (15. give (144, rd fi daras is not analysed in the
Pada text, perhaps owing to a doubt whether it is rdu
-udara or
rdu-dara (the former is the view of Yaska who explains it as
mpdu -ud ara) ; for rdu-p é and rdu-vfdh are separated and d ara is
separated in puram-d ara. Both this word (according to the former
analysis) and su-hava are Bv. (p. 455, c a ) . b abh rus : this colour
is attributed to Rudra in vi ii . 9 , 15 also ; otherwise it is appl ied
more often to Soma (viii . 48) as wel l as once to Agni . su-é ip ras
see note on 11 . 12, 6 c. r i radh at : inj. red . ao. of rand h . asyai
manaya i : that is,Rudra
’
s wel l-known wrath is deprecated ; cp .
4 a b . There is some doubt as to the exact interpretation of th is
stanza. The ch ief objection to the above explanation is the necessityto take havate in a ps . sense hfi yate according to Sayana). The
fol lowing sense has also been suggested :‘he who invokes Rudra
(thinks),“I would buy off Rudra with songs of praise let not
Rudra subject us to that suspicion (on his
i i . 33, 7] RUDRA 61
i W 311173: 33111 13111311 3 11 1 111 1 191-“
gt 131131: 1 13Wm itt-1111 adm 111311111111 1 6 13111111 1 3 11111 1 1 11111111111 1
W3 5 1111111 111 31111111 q'rsi a 16 121111 1
“311 111: 12 1
11321 1
133112111gm1311111 11=411 1fi aT
’
uvm g el 1311111 11
6 tin ma mamanda vrsabh é Ma The bull accomp anied by the
rutvan Maruts has gladdened me, the sup
tvak siyasa vayasa nadh ama p liant, with hismostvigorous force.
nam . I would unscathed attain shade in
gh fniva ch ayam arap a asi ya hea t as it were : I would desire tol
a vivaseyam Rud arasya sum win the good wi ll of Rudra .
11d mamand a : pf. of mand (nasalized form of mad ) gladden ;intransitive, be glad, in A. only. rsabhas : Rudra . Marutvan
though this epithet is characteristic of Indra,it is also twice appl ied
to Rudra (as father of the Maruts, see 1 a) as wel l as very rarely to
a few other gods who are associated with Indra on the Sandhi see
40,2 . gh lfniva has been much discussed. The only natural
explanation (following the‘
Pada text) is ghrm iva , taking gh fn i
as a contracted inst. f. (p. 80) expressing either cause by reason ofheat (199 A 3) or time in heat (199 A 5) Sayana
’
s explanation
is gh fn i'
iva like one heated by the rays of the sun but a word gh rn in
N . gh rni does not occur,and the accent is wrong. For the simi le
cp. vi . 16, 38 : up a chayam iva ghr‘
ner aganma sarma te vayam
we have entered thy shelter like shade (protecting) f rom heat (p. 317,
aé iya : see 2 b on the Sandhi of the final vowel of the Padacp. i . 160
,4 c. a vivaseyam : op. ds . of van win.
s 2131 s a 1 11 sw at
K IT111 artd 5111311 313 111: 1
31111131 3316 11311 a 111
'
31111 smitten: 11
én s mfi l gp gsimgtu
geizm z rwf'
sh fi wn aatvn
ammfin rduu i fim l
wfm amn gmn avtfimz u
62 RUDRA [11. 33, 7
7 k l ia sya te , Rudara , mrlayak ur
has to yé 3331 b h esajé jalasahapab h arté rapaso daivi asya
abh i mi 1115 , vrsabh a, cak sam
i thah.
k val'
sya : see p. 450,b. bhesajas is an adj. here and in one
other passage ; otherwise it is a n . noun meaning medicine. apa
13113 333 : on the accent see p. 453,9 d. daivy asya : derived from the
gods , that i s, such as is inflicted by Rudra himself ; on the Sandhi
of the final vowel,cp. 6 c. abh i final vowel metrical ly lengthened
in the second syllable of the Pada , but not in l o. cak sami thas
2. s . pf. op. of k sam (p. 156,
c n aa‘d gw w n l aafi
'l q I fiJfifi l
113? 11111 gigfi wfi'
t af n we: 1 1113131 13 1113115111 111 211151
W TW ad 11111611 W16 1 1 3 33313 313131 1 1111x131 : 1
gm'
lwfi i 811131m 1 1111 11 unfinfit133111 1 ggd 1ant 11
8 p ra b abh rave vrsab haya évi ti cé For theruddy-brown andwhitish
mah d mah im sustutim‘
irayami . bull I utter forth a mighty eulogy
namasya k almal i k inam namo of the mighty one. I will adore
bh i r . the radiant one with obeisances.
grmmas i 3173 33113 Rud rasya We invoke the terrible name ofnama . Rudra.
p ra i rayami : an example of the prp. at the beginning, and
the vb . to wh ich it belongs at the end of a hemistich . évi ti’
cé '
D. s . of évi tya‘
r‘
ic (cp. mahas : gen . s . m . of math,beside the acc.
s . f. of the same adj(Sayana : mah ato mah atim), of the great one
(Rudra) ; cp. i . 1 , 5 c. namasy é : according to the Pada this form
has i ts final syl lable metrical ly lengthened for namasya, which is
the 2. s . ipv otherwise it is the 1 . s . sb . (p . which is the
more l ikely because the third syl lable does not favour metrical
lengthening , and because the 1 . prs. is used both in the preceding
Where, 0 Rudra , is thatmercifulhand of thinewhich is healing and
cooling ? As remover of injurycoming f rom the gods, do thou, 0
Bull,nowbecompassionate towards
me.
i i .(
33,10] RUDRA 63
and the fol lowing Pada. The metre of c is abnormal because the
caesura fol lows the third syl lable, and there is a secondary caesura
after the eighth . grnimas i : 1 . pl . pr . of gr s ing (p.
fisfi fii : 1 1ava st 1 an: 1
gagW : filfilfi'
ffi ifiz 1 13151: 1fi
'
fiifiiz 1fizfi lfi 1Fetfi : 1
{1113 13131 515 1q mflml wm l afi tm ufi z l
a m s‘w wgfimu a l fi l fi tfit l fi
‘ma l g m1
313 1111 11
sth ir é bh i r angal h pururup a With his firm limbs, having
ugro manyforms, themighty one, ruddyb abh ruh éuk r é bh ih p ip i ée h i ra brown
, has adorned himself with
nyaih. bright gold ornaments. From the
1sanad asya bhuvanasya b hfirer ruler of this great world, f rom
netv3, 11 yosad Rud arad asuryam . Rudra, let not his divine dominion
depart.
sthi r é bh i r angaih : probably to be construedwith p ip i ée, by mean s
of his firm limbs he has adorned himself with golden ornaments,that is
,
h is l imbs are adorned'
with golden ornaments ; Sayana supplies
yuk tas furnished with firm limbs. p ip i ée pf . A. of p is. iéanad
pr . pt. (agreeing with Ba d rad ) of 13 rule over with gen . (202 A a)the pf. pt. is 1333 3. bh f
'
i res : agreeing with bhuvanasya ; cp.
vi i . 95, 2 : cé tanti b huvanasya bhfireb taking note of the wide
world (where bhfires could not agree with any other word) Sayana
takes it with 1311 113311 . yosat : s ao. of yu separate (p. 162, 2 ;
201 A asuryam : an examination of the occurrences of this
word indicates that as an adj. it should be pronounced asur i a , but
as a substantive asurya.
N ew va r w‘
é’
m f‘
aufii l mvm fi 1aah
1111
311 1W maau fi ms fs nm
a m fi fi é’
t fig a‘
é fa u a 1§ 1 § 1fi vz 1§ g 1a a l wfi n
64 RUDRA ( i i . 33, 10
10 arh an b ibh arsi sayak ani dhanva
arh an n i skam yajatam vi évarfi
p am ;
arh ann i dam d ayase vi évam abh
vam.3 fina va éji yo, ud ara , tvad asti .
b ibhar s i : 2 . s . pr. of bhp bear ; this pr . stem is much less
common than that according to the first class,b hara . arh ann : 52 .
i dam : this,viz . that thou possessest. d ayase : 2. s . A. pr. of 2. da
divide. Sayah a interprets idam d ayase abhvam as thou p rotectest
this very extensive (abhvam ) world . tvad : abl . after cpv. (p . 317,
33 1313 3 13wfi wfiug’
gafi 33 1333 13 1333 133 13 3 1
"
a findufi gum 131111 1 11 1 111 1111 1“seam33111 1
qw afi'fi tg a aifi
’r fi l fi fi l i g l fi afi t l
tar am“? 611131$1111: 11 3 1am1a 13 1mm311fifi fiifidz 11
11 stuh i érutam gartasad am yuva Praise him,thef amous, that sits
nam , on the car—seat, the young, the
mrgam nabh imam upah atmim , mighty, that slays like a dread
ugram . beast. 0 Rudra , being p raised be
mrla jar itr é End ara stavano gracious to the singer : let thy
anyam té asman u i vap antu missi les lay low another than us.
senah.
yuvanam : other gods also,such as Agni , Indra, the Maruts, are
Spoken of as young. mrgam na b h imam : cp . note on i . 154, 2 b
either a bull (vrsab h é na bh imah vi . 22, 1) or a lion (s imh é 11 a
b h i’
mah, iv. 16, 14) may be meant . mrla : ipv. of mrd ; with dat.,
p . 311 , f . stavanas : here, as nearly always , in a ps . sense. asmad
abl . with anya , p . 317,3 . s é nas : that this word here means
missi les IS rendered probable by the paral lel passage VS. y as
te sah asram b atayo’
nyam asman ui vap antu tah may those
thousand missi les of thine lay low another than us.
Worthy thou bearest arrows and
bow worthy thy adorable all
coloured necklace ; worthy thou
wieldest a ll this force : there is
nothing mightier than thou,0
Rudra .
ii . 33, 13] RUDRA 65
W tfiéfifi t sfimfi 55t 1131161 1fimtu 13 71311111111 1
11rd 711m ( 131111131111 ufit 1 1111111 1 ( g 1 3 111 16 1111 1
glam? 3151311 ( 13 113 11 1311: 1 (
711-113111511 1nfi 1 1w@ {fit11
k umaras c it p itaram vé ncfama A son bows towards his f ather
n am who app roving app roaches him, 0
p rati nanama Rud aropayantam . Rudra . I sing to the true lord,
bhfi rer 311 satp at im grni se the giver of much p raised thou
stu tas tuam 1311 3 3313 ras i asme. givest remedies to us.
The interpretation of a b is doubtful . I t seems to mean Rudra ,
as a father , approaches with approval the singer , as a son ; Rudra ,
being addressed in the voc.,i s told this in an indirect manner .
I cannot fol low Sayana (p ratinato’smi I have bowed down to) and
several translators in treating nanama as 1. s . pf. , which in the RV.
could only be nanama (p. 149,n . nanama = pr . ; the lengthening
of the first syllable is not metrical,see 139 , 9 . The meaning of c (1
appears to correspond to that of a b : Rudra, being praised , shows
his favour by bestowing h is remedies ; the s inger therefore extol s
him as the giver of riches . grh i se : an i rr . form of the 1 . s . A . of
gr sing. a sm é : dat., p. 104 ; 200 A 1 .
111 3 11311 dva: 1331171 211 1 a : 13111311 1 111 11: 1uni t? 1
211 1111111 315111? 1 11 than1 111 1 11 111 131111 13
1111: 1211 111a zsajl
111f=1“111 3'm fi1m 1 111 211131 1 1113: 1 111511111 111 1311 1a : 1
muv zfié fia‘
d 361111 11 an umm afin q lgge'n afi u u
3 yavo bh esaja , M arutah , 3113 1131, Your remedies, 0 Maruts
,that
316. éamtama, vrsah o , yamayo arepure, that gap most wholesome,
bhu, 0 mighty
/
ones, that are beneficent,
yani Manur 311311133 , p i tanas tha tManu,our f ather, chose these
136. s'
am ca y é é ca Rud arasya and the healing and blessing ofvaémi . Rudra I desire.
F
66 RUDRA ( i i. 33, 13‘
Marutas : the Maruts, as the sons of Rudra (cp. 1 a) are hereincidental ly invoked
, and their remedies associated with Rudra’
s .
mayobh li : the short form of the N. pl . 11. (p. 82,n . 7
,and p. 83
,d).
Manus : the ancestor of mank ind,often Spoken of as a father or
‘our father and the institutor of sacrifice. avrni ta : 3 . s . ipf . A. (withmetr ically lengthened final vowel ) of 2 . vr choose. 33m , yos these
words are frequently used in combination,either as adverbs or
substantives .
urt'l m 1
‘
sfi1z 1gad 1 gw1 z 1
utt'3111131gfifufis
‘r 11111 1 wt 1 11111131 13mm : 1 1161 1m 1
3161111111 1W WGW arei 1 fem 1 1111611 1 111: 1 113151 1
111 316 11 61111 am am 11 11133: 1 am 1 119111111 1a; 11
14 par i no h eti 1111 1183 33513 vrjyah, May the dart of Rudra p ass us
pari tvesasya d urmati r mah'
i by, may the great i ll wi ll of the
ear. terrible one go by us : slacken thy
ava s th iramaghavad bhyas ta firm (weapons) for (our) l ibera l
nusva ; patrons ; 0 bounteous one, bemerci
mid hvas , tok i‘
iya tanayayamrla . ful to our chi ldren and descendants.
vrjyas 3 . s . root ao. prc. (p. 172 a) of vrjtwist. gat root ao. inj.of ga go. maghavad bhyas : the I . D: Ab . pl . of maghavan are
formed from the supplementary stem maghavant (91 , 311—3tanusva sth i r z
‘
t : relax the taut, with reference to the how,the
special weapon of Rudra ; used with the dat. because equivalent to
mrla bemerciful to (p. 311 f ) . mid h vas :\
voc. of the old unredupl i
cated pf . pt. m i d hvéms, cp. p. 66 ; 157 b (p. mrla mrla ,
p . 437,a 9 .
11611 31111 %1fa11111r1
aui aq a éufi’
s a sfi 1 avi 1§q 1a 1 sfi fi 1v | €fit1
gaaqafi ( i s 311631 savsqm =1: 1gg 1 {a 1 31164 1
3133311 fgg’
é'
r36111: 11 asm33 11 111133111111 11111: 11
es APAM NAPAT [11.
waters,who l ives in then depths, who is surrounded by females , who is
often invoked with them, who drives with swi ft steeds,and is said to have
seized the brightness in the depth of the ocean.
11 . 35. Metre : Tr i stubh .
°1 31 313 13 magas s i 13111111 1s e ts 13 1mg : 1333 1111 1131111 36 111 711311 1311151 1 $ 1: 1grim1 1113 : 1 fut: 131 1
3 1111 3 11131351311131111111=1111111 11111111 13 1113111111swam
s’
fidswt fa 5 1161111211 11 gsfias : 1“3111 111 1 5116115111 1fig 11
1 upem asrk si vajayur vacasy am Desirous of gain I have sent
cano d ad h i ta nad i c'
) g i ro me f orth this eloquence (to him) may
Ap’
am napad asuh éma k uvi t set the son of streams gladly accep t
sup é sasas k arati ? jé si sad d h i . my songs. Wi ll he, the Son of
Waters,of swif t impulse, perchance
make (them) well-adorned ? F or
hewi ll enjoy (them) .
as rk si :‘
1 . spi k s iao. of srj, which wi th l ip a may take two acc. ,
so that nadyam ,.might be suppl ied. On im see 180 (p.
d ad h i ta 3 . s . pr . 1o1p .,A. of d h a, which with canas takes the ace. or
loc. nadya, wh ich occurs. only here, is evidently synonymous with
ap am nap at i n c. aéuh éma, though a Bv. ,is accented on the
second member : see p . 455 C a . k arati : 3 . s . sb . root ao. of k r
unaccented because k uvi t necessari ly accents the verb only i f it is
in the same Pada . sup é sasas well- adorned = well—rewarded ; cp .
i i . 34,6 : dh iyam vajap esasam a p rayer adorned with gain ;
on the accent see p . 455 C a ; on the Sandhi -s k see 43,2 a .
josi sat : 3. s . sb . is ao. of jus . h i explains why he is l ikely to
accept them it accentsjé si sat, which , however, as beginning a new
sentence (p. 466, 19 a), would be accented without i t.
a{Fl Fifi 32 WT15513
117151afi n grade; 31311 !
sari“
3 1111311118 1 132151
13 1311311511 113111 313 1? 11
11111 1 13 1 11§ 1§qz l 1s11 1§ s1ls 11 1
11111111 1 1111111 1 1 1311111 1 133 1 1
fi s tfa 1 1 111: 1 1311111 1 1 111111 11
ii . 35,3] APAM NAPAT 69
2 imam 3 11 asmai'
h rda 5. 3 1133 3
mantram vocema : kuvid asya
vé d at ?
Apam nap ad , asur i asya mahnéi,
visvan i a‘
ryo b huvanajajana .
h rda it : this expression occurs several times,e. g. i ii .
matir h rda a vacyamana a p rayer wel ling f rom the heart. 3 11
tastam well-f ashioned, l ike a car,to which the seers frequently
compare their hymns on the accent see p. 456, 1 a cp. p . 462,13 b.
asmai and asya : unaccented , p. 452,8 B 0 ; dat. of prs . wi th vac
cp . 200,1 c. vé d at : 3 . s . pr . sb. of vid know,
with gen .,cp.
202 A c. asuryasya : see p. 451,6 .
3 11111 11 d 1111 1 1 11a1z 1 11f1r'1 1 s tl 1 11fi 1 1
W 1111:Wfifl l 1111111: 1
FF; flfif 3111
111 11131 11111 111111111 1 131111 1 1111: 1gmfia111111 1 111 art neg
-
( 1d: 11 1111 1 131 1fi1 1 1311111 1 131111: 1 g'
1fg1 11111111 1
1 111111 1 111111111 1 t1f1'
1111jz 1111111n1
3 sam anya yanti , up a yanti Whi le someflow together, othersanyah flow to (the sea) : the streams fi ll
samanam fi rvam nad i ah pr the common recep tacle ; hi m; the
nanti . pure, the shining Son of Waters,
tam u sucim sucayo d i d ivam thep urewaters stand around.
sam
Ap am napatam par i tasthur
apah.
yanti : accented because of the antithesis expressed by anyahany iih, the first vb . then being treated as subordinate (see p. 468
fi rvam ocean. samanam : common, because al l streams flow
into it. nadyas : cp. asuryasya in 2 c. p r ll anti : from p? fi ll.
Wewould ver i ly utter f rom our
heart this well-fashioned hymn for
him. Perchance he will take note
of it. The Son of Waters, the lord,
by the greatness of divine dominion,
has created a ll beings.
70 APAM NAPAT [11. 35, 3
u : u is often lengthened in the second syl lable of a Pada beforea single consonant (see p. d i d ivémsam : pf. pt. of d i shine
wi th lengthened red. vowel (139 , 9) and shortened radical vowel ;the sense is illustrated by 4 d. par i tasthur they tend him.
9 1111111 1 131111111 231 111 1111 1 1 173211 1 : 13111111: 111111111 1
Wfi'111 11111: 1 11151 11 11 1: 1 aft 1 11f111 1
“11111: 1
HW 3 13731311 i agfil 11: 1‘Efi ifii t 1111311131: 11 11111 111131
1113 151W ugasfi fi q 11 11111311
4 tam asmera yuvatayo yuvanam Him, the youth, the young
marmrjyamanah par i yanti é maidens, the waters , not smiling,
Pal l ! making him bright surround : he
3 3: éuk r é bh ih é i k vab h i revad with clear f lames shines bounti
asme fully on us, without f uel in the
d i d éyan id hmogh rtani rnig ap s ti . waters,having a garment of ghee.
asmeras : it is somewhat uncertainwhat is the exact sense here
impl ied ; but judging by iv. 58,8, where the drops of ghee are
described as hastening‘to Agni l ike beauteous maidens
,smil ing,
to meeting-
places i t may mean that the waters attend seriously on
this form of Agni , not as lovers ..y l i vanam : a term appl ied to
Agni in several passages . marmrjyamanas : the vb. mrjis often
used of making Agni bright, with ghee, &c. Sl k vab h i s the precise
sense is somewhat doubtful , but it must mean‘flames
’
or the l ike.
Note that though in this word the ending bh i s is separated in the Pada
text, i t is not so in éuk r é b h i s because suk re is not a stem. asme
dat. Pragrhya , 26 c. d i daya : 3. s . pf. of d i shine, with long red. vowel
(139 , an - i d hmas : accent, p. 455 c a ; cp. x . 30 , 4 : yo an i dhm é
d i d ayad ap su an tar who shone without fuel in the waters. gh r ta
n i rn i k : an epithet otherwise appl ied only to Agn i and (once) to the
sacrifice (y ajfia) : note that the second member appears in the Pada
text as n irn ik , in accordance with the analys is nih-n ik when the
word occurs uncompounded.
72’
APAM NAPAT [11. 33, 3
Though every word ,is clear in this stanza the meaning of the
whole is somewhat uncertain . I t seems to be th is : Apam napat
i s produced from both the terrestrial and the heavenly waters . He
i s invoked to protect sacrificers from injury. He himself dwel ls
beyond the reach of foes . aévasya : Agni is often spoken of as
a steed . atra : here, i . e. in the waters of earth . svar : this i s the
only passage in the RV. in which the word is not to be read as
suar ; i t is here a loc. without the ending i (see 82 c) . pah i : the
change from the 3 . to the 2 . prs . in the same stanza is common in
the RV. with reference to deities . On this form depends the ab] .
inf. s ampr‘
cas as wel l as the two preceding ablatives lit. p rotect the
patrons f rom mal ice and f rom injury, f rom f alling in with them (cp.
p . 337 a) . 3 11133 11 : in the unbaked, i . e. natural (cloud) citadels.
pursu : loc. pl . of pur , 8 2. p aras : note the difference of accent
between this adv. and the N . s . adj. paras yonder, other. nasat °
inj. pr . of 3 . nas reach.
3 6 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 11 11
111 1 11 1 1 11g1°
111 1 1 11111§1321 111 11 1 1 11 11111 11
I
7 3 113, a dame sudugha yasya He, in whose own house is a cow
d h enuh, yielding good milk, nourishes his
svadh ém p ipaya , sub hu annam vita l force, he eats the excellent
atti ; food ; he, theSon of Waters, gather
se’
p ém napad urjayann ap su ing strength within the waters,
antar , shines forth for the granting of
vasud é yaya vid h até vi bhat i . wealth to the advantage of the
worshipp er.
sva é dame : that is, within the waters ; in i . 1 , 8 sve dame
refers to the sacrificial altar on wh ich Agni grows, that is , flames up.
The first three Padas merely varv the sense of 5. The food that he
{11 1 1 11 1 131 1 13151 1 11 1 111 1”
11 1 11 111111 11111111 1111 11 fi 11
11: 11 11 111 11 11 1'
1 11 1111 11 1111m1
‘
i i. 35,3] APAM NAPAT 7s
eats is the milk that he receives, and that strengthens h im . sva
d h ém : this word is not analysed in the Padapatha of the RV. and
AV. (as i f derived from a root svad h ), but it is separated in that
of the TS. as sva -d b d. p ipaya 3. s . pf. of p i swell, with lengthened
red. vowel (139 , so ap eim must be read as’
p§m s ince a
must here be metrical ly el ided (21 a ; p. 465, 17 , On ap sv
antar see p. 450,2 b [where ap sviantah shoul d be corrected to
ap svaintah] . vi d h até : dat. of advantage (p. 314 , B on the
- accent see p. 458,11 , 3 . vasud h é yay a : dat. of purpose, ibid.
,B 2 .
vi b hati : here Apam mapat is thought of as the terrestrial Agni
appearing on the sacrificial altar.
c zfi m gfdal’
sfd a
1 1 1111 1111 1111 1 f1111fi'1 1 1 2111 1 111 1111az1s f11 1 1f1 1 111f111
11 1 {gm 1111 11 1111 1 1 1 : 1 1111 1 1 111 1 1 13111161 11 11 1 1
1 1 111 3 111 1311 m fit: 11 11 1 1 111 161 1 111 11: 1 1 111 1 1161: 11
8 yd,
ap su3 3113 1113. daiviena Who in the waters,with bright
rtavéjasra urviy'fi vibh ati divinity, holy, eternal, widely shines
vay ii. i d any i'
i b huvanan i asya f orth : as offshoots of him other
p rajayante vi rudh aé ca praja beings and p lants propagate them
bh ih. selves withp rogeny.
sucina d a l vyena divine brightness. rtéva : note that in the
Padapatha the original short a is restored (cp. i . 160, vayé s
other beings are his offshoots because he produced them ; cp. 2 d
vi évani bhuvana jajana . p rajébh i s : cp. 11 . 33,1, p rajayemah i
prajtibh ih.
Q 1 1 1 11111 1 a s 11‘g1 11
’
1
W 1 f1111j1 1111 1: 111111 1113 1111111111 1 sa
'
1g fi l111111'111
'
11111: 117111111111 1
11151111 111 : trFt 1 61 1 1 51 : 11 11131 1 11811 1 1 11 1111 11 1 1 11W1
fetu s-m1 : 1 1 1 111 11 1 1 51 : 11
74 APAM NAPAT [11. 35, 3
9 Ap am napad a h i asth ad upa
sth am
jihménam , fi rdhvé vid y l i tam
vasanah.
tasya jy é sth am mahiménam
vahanti r ,
h iranyavarnah par i y anti yah
vih .
The l ightning Agni is again described in this stanza . t ménamfi rdhvah : these Words are in contrast ; cp. i . 95
,5 of Agni
vard h ate asu jihmdnam fi rd hvah upasth e he grows in
them, up right in the lap of thep rone. tasya mah imfmam his great
ness him the great one. h i ranyavarnas : because he is clothed in
l ightning. par i yanti : cp. 3 a and 4 b. yahvis : the meaning of
the word y ahva, though it occurs often , is somewhat uncertain
it may be great (Naighantuka, Sayana) , or swift (Roth), or young
(Geidner).
11 1 1111 151 : 1 11: 1 11111 11111 1
1 11 1 111 151115 (111111 11: 1 1 11 111 1 111 111 1 11: 1 11 1 11 {1111
11111 11 11: 1
11311 111 1 e‘
ga atua 11 fi rwm'
a 1art 1 11111: 1 11 1111111
igu ana : 1ggfg 1 1 11111 11 13 11
h i ranyarfi p ah , sé h iranyasam He is of golden f orm,of golden
d rg asp ect ; this Son of Waters is of
Ap ém nap at sed u h i ranyavar golden hue ; to him (coming) f rom
nah ; a golden womb, after he has sat
h i ranyayat par i yoner n i sadya, down, the givers of gold givefood.
h i ranyad ii d ad ati annam asmai .
In th is stanza the terrestrial Agn i is described . He is spoken of
as golden’
because of the colour of his flames . s é d : 48 a. par i
as a prp . here governs the abl . (176, 1 a). The golden source of Agni
The Son of Waters has occup ied
the lap of thep rone (waters) , (him
sel f) up right, clothing himself in
lightning. Bearing his highest
greatness, golden-hued
,the swif t
streams flow around (him) .
76 APAM NAPAT [11. 35, 11
The general meaning of the stanza is : Agni, who in the hidden
form of Apam Napat is nourished in the waters,is at the sacrifice
fed wi th ghee.
a€1 sa i nt-
41 1m £16
afifé'fin 71118 1
‘
sfi ffiz 1
Ifmgwi th?fgfiimfintaa’
lg
39 113213 : aft 3 ? azfin: 11
i rasma 1 b ahunam avamaya sa
k hye
yajfiai r vi d h ema namasa h avir
bh in
sam sa‘
inu marjm i ; d idh isami
b i lma i r ;
dadh am i annaih ; par i vand a
rgb h ih.
avaméya : l it. the lowest,that is
,the nearest ; b ahunam (accent,
p . 458 , 2 a ) : of many (gods). In iv. 1,5 Agni is invoked as avama
and n é d i stha nearest ; and in AB. i . 1 , 1 Agn i is called the lowest
(avama) of the gods (whi le Visnu is the highest p aramafi), becausehe is a lways with men as the terrestrial fire. Sam marjmi : cp.
marmrjyamanas in 4 b ; on the accent cp. i . 35, 9 c. The prp. Sam
may be suppl ied with the other two fol lowing verbs . d idh isami pr.
ds . of d hap a t accented as first word of a new sentence. b i lmai s
with shavings, to make the newly k indled fire flame up. annai s :
with oblations . dad hami : pr . o'
f dhaput.
a 3151131 a viiiu fwa
'siafijFiRafa
151 31311 aq qfifiwmaai fi
w i t-
813 32 11F43 1: 11
2 131 1Err 313 111211“1 111311
21431: 1 fain: 1 3 31111 1zfi zsfiiz 1
{111 1£112) 1mfvfhfqfiimfi t 1$ 131: 1
{wire 1 1aft'13? 1figmfnz 11
To him the nearest f riend of
many we of er worship with sacri
fices, homage, oblations I rub
br ight (his) back ; I support (him)
with shavings ; I supp ly (him)with f ood ; I extol (him) with
stanzas.
m im31511 lwa flvmmfimfima : 1imfinfin '
qafa 1amfi gfi n
a : 1wml auta 1wé fiwfi 1fi safizl
W SW IKEIHHT'I fi
'
fiH II
i i . 35,14] APAM NAPAT 77
ing vfsajanay at tasu gar
b h am ;
1m é i éur d h ayati ; tam r ih
anti ;
’
p am napad anabh imlata
varno
anyasyeveha tanua vivesa .
In a and b Apam napat reproduces himsel f in the waters ;
in c and d he appears as the sacrificial fire on earth . i’
m anticipates
garbh am him,that is
,a son. tasu : in the waters , as h is wives .
im in b them,the waters
, who here are both the wives and
mothers of Apam napat. d h ayati : cp . 5 d. r ih an ti : l it. lick,
as a cow the cal f. so ap am : here the a , though written must
be dropped after 0 , as in 7 c. anab h imlata-varnas : he is as
bright here as in the waters ; cp. h iranyavarnas in l 0 b ; on the
Sandhi,op . note on i . 1
,9 b . any é sya iva. of one who seems to be
another,but is essential ly the same. iha : on earth
,in the form
of the sacrificial Agni .
31W ? rife‘
é fmaidrt wfwu 112 l 116 1 1 é fimaidmm fitfé ’ssi fi fiaidm wa m fit: 1 tw at 1g
’
i fgsaidm3 1111? at] 371
-
6121ate—vii and: 1wit 1 a11:
—5111 1 as'fifi : 1
aw fii zufi'
{321177 1 af t: 11 aw l 3 1311:mfr'1f lfl f‘fl 1E13 ) : 1!
Lasmin p ade p arame’
tasth ivam Him stationed in this highest
sam , place, shin ing‘
f or ever with un
ad hvasmabh i r vi évah a d i d ivam dimmed (rays), theWaters, bringing
sam , ghee as food to (thei r) son, swif t,apo , nap tre ghrtam annam vah themselves fig around with their
antih robes.
i svayam atk aih par i d iyanti
yahvih.
p ad é p arame in the abode of the aerial waters . adhvasmabh i s
a substantive has to be suppl ied : flames or rays ; cp . 4 c, éuk r é bh ih
He, the bull, generated in them
that germ he, as a child, sucks
them ; they kiss him ; he, the Son
of Waters,
of unf aded colour,
works here with the body of
another.
7s APAM NAPAT [i i .
é ikvabh ir d i d aya . naptre : apam is omitted because apas immediately precedes . atk ai s : the meaning of this word is not quite
certain,but it most probably means garment ; the commentators
give several senses . The expression perhaps impl ies that the waterscover him up for protection or concealment. par i d iyanti (d i f ly) ;cp . par i yanti in 4 b and 9 d
, and par i tasthur in 3 d.
anmuta te: gfijffi am u watam 2 15: 1qsfi rfam am 1
fi agm t fli fim l w h a l vfi rfih m sm l g
m 1a§m fi fir 1 § sfi fi z 11
15 ayamsam ,Agne , suk si tim ja
iI have bestowed, 0 Agni, safe
nfiya ; dwelling on thepeop le ; I have a lso
ayamsam u maghavad bhyah su bestowed a song of p raise on the
vrk tim patrons : ausp icious is a ll that the
vi évam tad bh adram yad avanti gods favour. We would, with
d evah . strong sons, speak aloud at divine
b rhad vadema vi dath e suvirah. worship .
ayamsam : 1 . s . s ao. of yam . Agne the sacrificial Agni is here
addressed . janaya : on (our) peop le, by means of this hymn . suvrk
t im a hymn that wi l l produce the fulfilment of their wishes .
b h ad ram : if a hymn finds favour with the gods , it wil l produce
bless ings . vad ema : the poet desires this a lso as a reward for h is ,
hymn . The final hemistich also occurs at the end of 11 . 23 and the
last Pada is the refrain of twenty-three of the forty
-three hymns of
the second Mandala .
MITRA
The association of Mitra with Varuna i s so intimate that he is addressed
alone in one hymn only (ii i. Owing to the scantiness of the information
supplied in that hymn his separate character appears somewhat indefinite.
80 MITRA [ i ii 59, 1
al l may hear him’
(11 . 38 , Sayana interprets the wo’
rdv
as being
p raised or making a noise. Some scholars take the pt. with M i tras in
the sense of he who ca lls himself M i tra , but this in my opinion is
in itsel f h ighly improbable, wh ile th is construction cannot be shown
to exist in the RV. ,and even later seems only to occur when the
name immediately precedes , i e. M i tro b ruvanah. This Pada
occurs sl ightly mod ified in vu . 36, 2 as janam ca M i tre yatat i
b ruvanah. d ad hara: pf. pr. ; p . 342 a (cp. 139,
note that
the red . syl lable of th is pf. is never shor tened in the Pada text
(cp . i . 154,
d yam : ace. of d ye (102 , an imi sa : inst. of
a-n im is ; i t is characteristic of M itra and Varuna to regard men
with unwink ing eye. caste : 3. s . of oak s ; on the Sandhi see
66 B 2 a. juh ota : 2 . pl . 1pv. i rr. strong form occurring beside the
regular ja buta (p . 144,B 3 a ).
au e fi ia uq nziw a l uu fnm naz l ajg mda fi l
216 i 3 1TW tantra 3133 1 21: 13 1 3 11136 1 I f‘flfi
l
fii l f fi'
fifi l
a émfi a a'
iafi ehrfi
3rweh a shrafidd’f 71 g uru 71 1m 1 at: 1wahfa 1wfir
'm: 1
71 IW it ll
2 pra s é , M i tra , marté asta p ra L et that mortal ofiering obla
YaSVfin , tions , 0 M itra, be pre eminentwho
yas ta , Ad i ty a , sik sati vraté na . p ays obeisance to thee, 0 Ad itya,
na h anyate , naji yate tuoto according to (thy) ordinance. He
namam amh o ’snoty anti to na who is aided by thee is not sla in
d are—it . nor vanquished : trouble reaches
himneitherfromnear norfromf a i
tvotas : tva must often be read as tua ; tu é tas is therefore more
natural than the prosodical shortening (p. 437 a 4) of tva-dtas . The
fourth Pada has one syl lable too many as written in the Samh ita
text. By dropping the a after 0 the correct number of syl lables is
obtained, but the break quite irregular (p. 440, 4 B) .
ii i. 59,5] MITRA 8 1
W i nn tree—cit w ant: 1 {323111 1115 1
fini sh afitwn i drum: 1 fi mfi n: 1aftm 1 3 11 1gym: 1
“s111
‘
n quéufinfit aq wel 1m l an nual: 1
mi fin d aqrfi an 11 212111 1 fi nd 1gsmfi 1E1111 11
anamivasa i laya mad anto , F ree f rom disease, delighting in
mi tajfi avo var imann a prth i the sacred food, firm-kneed on the
w in, expanse of earth, abiding by the
Ad i tya’
sya vratam upak siyanto , ordinance of the Adi tya , may we
vayamMi trasy a samatau s iama . remain in the good wi ll of Mitra .
var iman : loc. (90, 2) with a ; note that var iman is n ., var iman ,
m . (p. 453,9 c) . Ad i tyasya : that is , of Mitra .
afi i finfi dint: gai t warn fi n: 1and : 1gsfié z 1
( 1311'
air-fralarm! 31m: 1 1ga f f : 1wa ffle 133 1: 1
ml ing'
qa’
i unw r net 1W Igmsfi 1“
a ffine 1
fitzji tfi'fi flfi extn n wfii l fi l fi mfi 1m fi n
ayam Mi tre namas iah sué évo , This Mitra , adorable, most p ro
raja suk satro ajan ista vedhah : p itious, a king wielding fair sway,
tasya vayam sumatau yajfi i has been born as a disposer : may
yasya , we remain in the goodwi l l of him
ap i bh ad re saumanas é s iama . the holy, in his ausp icious good
graces
ajani sta : 3 . s .A. is ao. ofjan . ved h as : that is,as a wise moral
ruler ; on the dec. see 83,2 a. ap i : to be taken as a verbal prp.
with as be.
we?“
s ifgai’radfiiuuéfi
W W W Wne w sm an
11311 1 enti re: 1 71191111 1w ant: 1
m artia n: 121111 1gri d: 1
flfii 1mmfi samu 1qs'x1 1
"
afi 1 fwarzt1 sfirz 1 3 11 1qé1q :
82 MITRA [ii i .”
59. 5
5 mahar’
i'rAd ityo namasop asad yo
yatayajjano g rnat é sué é vah
tasma etat panyatamayajustamagnau M i traya h avir ajuh ota .
mah é fi’
i : 39 . yatayajjanas : on the accent of governing eds . see
p . 455 b. gwate : dat. of pr. pt. of gr s ing ; accent, p . 458
,3 .
justam : a pp . ofjus enjoy, withsh ift of accent when used as an adj.meaning welcome (cp . p. juh ota : cp. note on 1 d.
é fi nei admi t-fi rsfi i a
'
ei fin n l watu ga'
ei mn rm
qfi nafiam q 11 gm 1nafiazsmn 11
6 Mi trasya carsanidhr‘
to, Of Mitra , the god who supports
avo d evasya sanas i , the folk, the f avour br ings gain,
dyumnam c itrasravastamam . (his) wealth br ings most brilliant
f ame.
carsan i dh r’
tas : the Pada text restores the metrical ly lengthened
short vowel of carsan i .-ab i
"
to ’v
‘
o z p. 465, 17, 3 ; cp. note on
1 . 1 , 9 b. c i trasravastamam : see note on i . 1,5 b .
s wfu ah dfiem fzd wfin as sm l fi é‘i l
fin”
? 3111611111211: 1 fi n: 1Egg-31 1HSIWT
’
i 1
3 1131 3 151131 : gfigafiq 11 wfii 1 zfi lzsfii : 1gfififirt 11
7 ab h i yom ah inad ivam Mitra the renowned, who is
M i tre b ab h iiva saprathah, super ior to heaven by his greatness,
abh i sravob h ih p rth ivim : superior to earth by his glories
ab h i bh fi surpass takes the ace. mah ina for mahimnfi : 90, 2 .
d ivam : ace. of dyu, cp.
i
d yo, 102, 3. b abhfiva : the pf.
The great 14ditya , to be ap
p reached with homage, stirring
men ,to the singer mostp rop itious
to him most highly to be p raised,
toM itra , of er in fire this accep t
able oblation.
84 BRHASPATI UV. 50,1
and ruddy. He is armed with bow and arrows, and wields a golden hatchet
or an iron axe. He has a car , drawn by ruddy steeds, which slays the
goblins, bursts open the cow-stal ls,and wins the l ight. Cal led the father
of the gods, he is also said to have blown forth thei r births l ike a black
smith. Like Agni , he i s both a domestic and a b rahman priest. He is the
generator of al l prayers , and without him sacrifice does not succeed. Hissong goes to heaven , and he is associated with singers. In several passages
he is i dentified with Agni , from whom,however , he is much oftener distin
guished. He is often invoked with Indra , some of whose epithets , such as
maghavan bountif ul and vajrin wielder of the bolt he shares . He has thusbeen drawn into the Indra myth of the release of the cows. Accompanied
by his sing ing host he rends Va la with a roar,and drives out the cows . In
so doing he dispels the darkness and finds the l ight. As regards his relation
to his worshippers , he is said to help and protect the pious man , to prolong
l ife, and to remove disease.
Brh a spati i s a purely Indian deity. The double accent and the paral lel
name Brahmana s pat i indicate that the first member i s the genitive of
a noun brh , f rom the same root as b rahman , and that the name thus
means‘Lord of prayer
’
.
He seems original ly to have represented an aspect of Agni , as a divine
priest, presiding over devotion ,an aspect wh ich had al ready attained an
independent character by the beginning of the Rigvedic period. As the
divine brahman priest he seems to have been the prototype of Brahma,the
chief of the later Hindu triad.
iv. 50. Indra is invoked with Brhaspati in 10 and 11.
Metre : Tr istubh ; 10 J agati .
qm m new fi1 a h 3 1am a z1m ai l eéfi 1 1fi1 1wz1wan 1
m fifi fi lm1 W ei: 1names : 1 “(3m1
11 1151111 1 1251161 {312113 1 3 11 1 1151111: 1win: 1611211711: 1
{it} find{flit 11715 313 11 11 gt : 1fin i : 1gfifi 1w sfi izq 11
jyas tastamb h a sahasa vi jmd Brhaspati who occupying three
antan seatswith roar hasp ropp ed asunder
t aspatis tr i sad h asthoravena , with might the ends of the earth,
tam p ratnasa fsayo d id h ianah him,the charm ing-tongued, the
pure vip ra d ad h i re mand raji ancient seers, the wise, pondering,
hvam . placed at their head.
iv. 50, 2] BRHASPATI 85
vi tastambh a the prp. here fol lows the vb. and is separated
from it by an intervening word : p. 468,20. jmas : gen. of jmfi.
(97 , Pronounce jmd antfin (p. 437 a Cosm ic actions l ike
that expressed in a are ascribed to var ious deities . t aspatis
note that this cd . is not analysed in the Pada text, while its doubletBrahmanas pati is treated as two separate words. tr i sadh asthas
refers to,
the three sacrificial fires and is a term predominantlyappl ied to Agni , cp. v. 1 1
,2 : puroh i tam Aguim naras tr isa
d h asth é Sam id h ire men have kindled Agni as their domesticp riest in
his trip le seat on the accent see p . 455 , 10 C a . ravena : referring to
the loud sound of the spell s uttered the word is especial ly used in
connexion with the release of the cows from Vala ; cp . 4 c and 5 b.
puro d adh i re : appointed their Purohita, a term frequently appl ied
to Agni, who is al so continual ly said“
to have been chosen priest
by men .
13113111 113131 am ine : 131 11311111 1wee—11: 1
W fl ffi'
fi flfi flfi l seafl m fii ffn au aafi l
d hun é tayah sup rak etam mad Who with resounding ga it, re
anto joicing, 0 Brhaspati , f or us have
Brh asp ate , abh i y é nas tatasr é attacked theconsp icuous,variegated,
prsantam srpram ad ab dh am extensive, uninjured herd OBrhas
fi rvam ; p ati, p rotect its dwelling.
Brh aspate , rak satad asya y é
nim .
This is a very obscure stanza,the al lus ions in which can only be
conjectured . The subject of a—c is not improbably the ancient
priests , mentioned in 1 0 , who with the aid of Brhaspati recaptured
the cows confined in the stronghol d of Vala. mad antas : beingexhilarated with Soma. tatasr é : 3. pl . pf. A. of tams shake. p fsantam : perhaps in al lusion to the dappled cows contained in it.
sup rak etam : easy to recognize, i . e. by their lowing, cp . i . 62,3,
se BRHASPATI [ iv. 50, 2
Brhaspati found the cows the heroes roared (vavasanta) with the ruddykine. The fourth Pada is a prayer to Brhaspati to protect the
recovered kine. Pada c is a Dvipada hemistich see p . 443 a . rak
satat 2 . s . ipv. of rak s : on the accent see p . 467 A c.
3 i ts“? 111 611 111 wh en géwfi 1 111 1 111 111 1 111 11 6111 1
w w dwqgu’rn
'
fign wdz lw1 1fi lwasgnz l fi 1 1fig 1
an?GIT? ”an? " urgi n g 6113 1: 1vamzmfitsgwmz1
met: an n fiifii fi ntatt 11 ma"
: 1shat 3 115171: 1fast fl m11
3 Bifh asp ate , yap arama p aravad , 0 Brhaspati, that which is the
site a ta r tasp rso u i sed uh . farthest distance, f rom thence (com
tut hyam k hataavata ad r idug ing) those that cher ish the r ite
d ha have seated themselves for thee.
mad hvah scotanti abh i to virap For thee sp r ings that have been
sam . dug, p ressed out with stones, dr ip
superabundance of mead on al l
s ides.
ata é u i sedur : cp. 11 . 35, 10 c. rtasp i‘
sas : perhaps the gods ;
or the ancient seers mentioned in 1 c and perhaps in 2 : they have
come from the farthest d istance and have seated themselves at the
Soma l ibation offered to thee. k h atas ad r i dugdhas two figures
al luding to the streams of Soma,which flows in channels and is
pounded wi th stones . mad hvas z'
on this form of the gen. see
p. 8 1 , f. n . 12 .
3agmfil: 111man'nfi fi
1161 afifi n: at?! i t“?nmd gnafi fi 631111
fi 1Hat'fi mw tnm
’
tfu 11
4 t aspatih p rath amam
mano
ggmfii: 1 111111111 1 3 11611113 : 1
fi g: 1 3 1’
1fi111: 1 at ?! 1fits-
5111111 1
ag e-
ates | §fa ss11az 1123111 1
fa 1eastfi m: 1 2 1111111 1w ife 11
Brhasp ati when first being born
f rom the great light in the highest
ss BRHASPATI [ iv. so, 5
5 11611 1”
a sli t n l fqfi wqmqan q fih
afifilfin 1111111 sfi1fi°
iz 1 113 : 1 fans 1 1111111 1 s nzsfii : 1
353111 15113 11 afin’
nfi state 15 1 113 11: 1 5111 1 616 1
afi wtn ua'zfi rcfiq n am l w mfnz l vfimfi t u
Geva’
l p itre vi évad evaya vfsne Then to the father that belongs
yajfiai r vidh ema , namasa, h avi r to all the gods, the bull, we would
b h ih . ofier worship with sacrifices, obci
t asp ate , sup rajavi ravanto sauce, and oblations. 0 Brhaspati ,
vayam siama patayo raym am . with good ofi sp r ing and heroes we
would be lords of wealth.
ev'
a: with final vowel metrical ly lengthened. The sense of the
pol . here is : such being the case (cp . p i tr é : Bi'haspati . The
term is appl ied to Agni , Indra , and other gods . vi ravan tas : that
i s, possessing warrior sons
,cp. i . 1, 3 c. vayam : this l ine occurs
several times as the final Pada of a hymn cp . vi i i . 48 , 13.
s 11 nfinanfi rnew 11: 11 1111 13 111nfiisw w fifiat l
3315111 awn fii a
'
fi i‘u 1 Win 1aefi 1 =s1fi1 1 éfi i
‘u 1
ggwfij11 : gig-
51 faafii 358111111 1 11: 1 fin fii 1
311611111? an? 15611115111 11 n ymfi i 1aw
'fi 1531
511 5515111 11
7 s é i d 1 515, p ratijanyan i vi éva That king with his impulse and
susmena tasthav ab h i vi r iena , his heroism overcomes a ll hostile
t aspatim yah sub h rtam b i forces, who keeps Brhasp ati well
b harti , nour ished, honours him,andpraises
va l g fi yati , vand ate p fi rvabh a him as receiving thefirst (portion
jam . of the offering) .
ab h i : the prp. , as often ,here follows the vb . subh rtam b ibhar ti
l it. cherishes him as well-cherished (predicative) . Al l three verbs
depend on yas , though the last two, as beginn ing a Pada and a
sentence, would even otherwise be accented. val gfi yati : note that
this denominative i s treated as a cd. in the Pada text (cp . 175 A
p fi rvabh éjam : predicative.
iv. 50,9] BRHASPATI 89
u rfi fi gfitq fi ttfi é 11: 1{a 1fifi1 1135fiiaz 11i‘
1d1fi 1 13 1
N T{3151fin fi finen'
im F1311{a t 1fi 1=a1fi 1fi re szfi firt l
afi nfiz a afimdfi afifl fa‘au nflmum aufin
vfidw mfijfi vfil n affilm am l rn'rrm gaz l nfi n
se’
. i t k seti sud h i ta ok asi sve, That king dwells well-established
tasma 115, p invate vi évadan'
im ; in his own abode, tohim the couse
tasmai visansvayam eva nam crated food a lways yields abun
ante , dance; tohim his subjects bowdown
yasmin b rahmz’
i r iig’
ani p firva eti . of their own accord, with whom the
p riest has p recedence.
k seti : from 1 . k s i possess or dwell . sfi -dh i ta : this form of the
pp. of d ha is stil l preserved as the last member of cds . (otherwiseh i ta) ; the word is explained as su -h i ta in the AB. ok as i sve
cp. sve dame in i . 1 , S c. 1111 : expla ined as food (annam) in AB.
vi ii . 26,7,and as earth (bh fim i ) by Sayana. yasmin rfijan i : the
10 0 . here in the p resence of whom,in whose case ; the antecedent i s
here put in the relative clause,while in 7 a it accompanies the corr .
(sé id rfija) . p firva eti : with reference to this l ine the AB.
vi ii . 26,9 remarks , puroh i tam evai tad ah a thus one calls him a
Purohita ; cp. also AB. viii . 1 , 5 : b rahma k h a lu vai k satrat
pfi rvam theBrahmana certain lyp recedes theKsatr iya.
wirififi w in 11W in 111111115111: 1 t nfid 1 1111 1 s nifi1 1
111“d 111 11512 11 1 1 1 111 1 115317111 1
w ere vfi afi'a : unfifi l want
-31 1 11: 1afi's : 1afiifi l I
313111 mnfa 23 1: 11 nerd 1 ( 1511 1 1111 1“
aqfi'
rj1gen: 11
ap ratitojayati Sam d hanan i Unresisted he wins wealth both
p ratijanyani uta yd sajanya. belonging to his adversaries and
avasyave yo var ivah k rn é ti to his own peop le. The king who
b rahmane r z'
ija, tam avanti d e for the p riest des i ring (his) helpvah. p rocures p rosperity, him the gods
90 BBHASPATI (iv. so,9
After the statement in 7 that the k ing who honours BrhaSpati
prospers , it is added in 8 and 9 that the k ing who honours the
Brahman,the counterpart among men of Brhaspati , also prospers .
jay ati Sam : prp. after the vb. (p. 285 f ) . d hanan i : he wins
weal th both abroad and at home . avasyave avan ti : both words
from the same root av : the gods help the king who helps the
Brahman.
{i n 11111fin d 311111
sfiuwfi dre—113111 3111 1111 1
1111 111‘11 1 11 1 1111 : 5 11131
11
1 131 1 171111111111 fi1 i lfi fl ii 11
Indraé ca somam p i b atam ,
Brhaspate ,
asm in yajfi é mand asanfi, vrsan
vasfi
a wi ne vi éantu ind avah sua
bh fivo ;
asmeray im sarvavi ram u i y ach
atam .
Ind ras ca : nom . for voc. (196 0 11 ; cp. ca , p. 228 , 1 and 1 a) .
p ib atam : 2. du. ipv. of pa dr ink. mand asana: ao. pt. of mand
mad . vr‘
san-vasfi : here vrsan mighty, great ; Sayana explains
the word as if i t were a governing cd . (IS9 A) , the normal form of
which would,however
,be var san -vasu (189 A 2 ; cp. p. 455 b) .
Note that in the Pada text the cd. is first marked as Pragr'hya with
i ti and then analysed ; also that in the analys is the first member
here appears not in i ts pause form vrsan (65) but in its Sandh i form
with n as not final . ray im sarvavi ram : that is, wealth wi th
offspring consisting of sons only : a frequent prayer (cp. i . 1 , 3 c) .
yach atam : 2 . ipv. pr. of yam. Here we have the intrus ion of
5 1mm113 1117151111 11 13131151 6 11
31 111 1111 1
3 11 111111111 111113 1 1313 11151
1n
1 111 1fi'1 1
'
1fi111 1 1131 1fi1 11 1fi 1 1
116 1111 11
0 I ndra and Brhaspati, drink
theSoma , rejoicing at this sacr ifice,0 ye of mighty wealth ; let the
invigorating drop s enter you two;
bestow on us r iches accompanied
altogether with sons .
92 BRHASPATI ( iv. 50, 11
agh ény aryd , vanusam aratayah evi l deeds of the foe, hostilities ofi ivals (vii . 83, ab h i tim aryo, vanusam savams i the onset of the
foe, the might of rivals (vn . 21,9 d). 11 a vii . 97, 9 d.
The goddess of Dawn is addressed in about twenty hymns. The pei soni
ficationo
is but sl ight , the physical phenomenon a lways being present to
the mind of the poet. Decked i n gay attire l ike a dancer,clothed i n l ight,
she appears in the east and unvei ls her charms . Rising resplendent as
from a bath she comes with l ight, driving away the darkness and removingthe black robe of night. She i s young , being born again and again, thoughancient. Shining with a uniform hue
,she wastes away the l ife of mortals .
She i llumines the ends of the sky when she awakes she Opens the gatesof heaven ; her radiant beams appear l ike herds of cattle. She drives
away evi l dreams, evi l spirits , and the hated darkness. She discloses the
treasures concealed by darkness, and distributes them bountiful ly. She
awakens every l iving being to motion . When Usas sh ines forth , the bi rds
fly up from their nests and men seek nourishment. Day by day appearingat the appointed place, she never infringes the ordinance of nature and of
the gods. She renders good service to the gods by awakening al l wor
sh ippers and causing the sacrificial fires to be kindled. She brings the
gods to drink the Soma draught. She is borne on a shin ing car, drawn by1 uddy steeds or kine, which probably represent the red rays of morning .
Usas i s closely associated with the Sun. She has Opened paths for Suryato travel ; she brings the eye of the gods , and leads on the beautiful white
horse. She shines with the l ight of the Sun , with the l ight of her lover.
Sfirya fol lows her as a young man a maiden ; she meets the god who
desires her . She thus comes to be spoken of as the wi fe of Sii rya . But as
preceding the Sun ,she i s occasionally regarded as h is mother ; thus she is
said to ari ivewith a bright chi ld. She is also cal led the sister, 0 1 the elde1
siste1,of Night (x. and their names are often conjoined as a dual
compound (usa sa-nak ta and nak tos a sa) . She is boxn in the sky, and i s
therefore constantly cal led the daughter of Heaven . As the sacrificial fire
i s k indled at dawn , Usas is often associated with Agni , who is sometimes
cal led her lover. Usas causes Agn i to be k ind led , and Agni goes to meet
the shining Dawn as she approaches. She is al so often connected with the
twin gods of early morning , the As’
vins (vi i . When the As'vins
'car is
yoked , the daughter of the sky is born . They are awakened by her,
accompany her, and are her friends.
iv. 51,1] USAS 93
Usas brings the Worshipper wealth and children , bestowing protection
and long l ife. She confers renown and glory on al l l iberal benefactors of
the poet. She is characteristically bounti ful (magh é n i ) .
The name of Usas is derived from the root va s , to shine, forms of
which are often used with reference to her in the hymns m which she i s
invoked.
iv. 51 . Metre Tr l stub h .
111 1 155 1 11 1 15 . M l fi fi fi lm ln sadrwgt
wfifqnfis‘r{smegma 1 11111 1
Tl é fgflfi finmfig afifiiz 1 111111: 1 11131111111 1 31mm1113amagflfi
’
t 1 111111 11 141111 1Q1 : 1gfimt: 1 11 11111111: 1
111311 1m am 111111: 1 1 11111 1 11
idam u tyat purutamam puras Thisf ami liar , mostfrequent light
tfij in the east, with clearness has stood
jyoti s tamaso vayunavad asthat . (forth) f rom the darkness. Now
unnam d ivo duh i taro vi bhatir may the Dawns, the daughters of
gati im k rnavann Usaso janaya . the sky, shining afar , make a p ath
f or man.
tydd : see p. 297, 5 . purutamam : because appearing every
morning ; hence Usasas the Dawns in d. tamasas : abl . dependent
on asth'
at 11d asth at . The word vay l’
m a , though very frequently
used, is still somewhat uncertain in meaning. The commentators
explain it variously as marga road, p rajiiana cognition, and k anti
beauty. P ischel favours the first of these. Sayana here expla ins
vayunavat as very beautiful or possessed of knowledge showingeverything It probably here means
‘making the way clear’
,cp .
gatlim in d. nfi nam : note that in the RV. th is word always
means now. d ivo duh i taras : from the point of view of the dai ly
recurrence of the phenomenon,Dawn is pl . throughout this hymn .
gatlim : cp. vi . 64, 1 :‘she makes al l fair paths easy to traverse
’
.
k rnavan : 3. pl . sb . ; explained by Sayan'
a as 3. pl . ipf . ind .
ak urvan .
94 (iv. 51, 2
1W1 nyu 131111: 131 1 1111“1 111: 1 11 {fit1 fin s 1 1
1 1111: 1 111
fii fiT i s 6 111111 1511 1I I
0
O x 1
151111 11 1 1 1 111 fi1'
c11 . 11 11 1 1111 1 . 1 13115113 1
awh'
t as gsnz 11111111: 11 n 1 11 {fit1113 1 1 1 1 1111: 1 1111 1
s a c-
111: 1 =111111 1 13111 1: 1 1111 1111: 11
2 asthur u ci traU gasanpurastan , The br illiantDawns have stood
m itd iva svarave ad hvar é su . in the east, l ike posts set up at
vi vrajasya tamaso du é ra sacrifices. Shining they have nu
uchanti r avrafi chucayah p a closed the two doors of the pen ofvakah. darkness, bright andpurifying.
Usasas that is,each of the preceding Dawns and the present one.
m ité s : pp . of m i fix. svaravas : that is,shining with ointment ;
cp. i . 92,5 : svarum 115 peso vidath esu afijafi , ci tram d ivo
d uh i td b han iim aéret the daughter of heaven has sp read her bri lliant
beam, like one who at divine worship anoints the post, the ornament
(of the sacrifice). Note that u in c is lengthened though fol lowed by
two consonants (p. 437 a vrajasya : a s imile with iva om itted
cp . 1 . 92,4 g évo 1151 vrajam vi U saavar tamah Dawn has unclosed
the darkness as the cows their stall.’
dvdra the two folds of the door ,
the dual of d v’
ar often being used - thus . vi : to be taken with
avran ,3 . pl . root ao. of vr cover. uchant
’
i s : pr. pt. of 1 . vas shine.
éucé yah pavak éh : these two adjectives very often appear in juxta
position . On the pronunciation of pavaka see p. 437 a.
asnak e 1111111111 1111 1111 155 1 111: 1 11111 1nana 1 11111111 1
1 11112111111 1“11111111: 1 “moi 1 3 1 111: 1 11111111: 1
1 111-1 1 1111: 111111: 111111 1 wfin 1wa fi fi l 1amt: 1 11111; 1
s’
wm nwfifi new11 1 111111111 11: 1 111111: 1 1111 11131 11
3 uchanti r adya ci tayanta b h ojén Shining tod aymay thebounteous
rad h od é yaya Usaso maghon ih. Dawns stimulate the l iberal to the
96 [iv. 51,5
5 yfi yam h i, d evi r , r tayugbh i r
aéva ih
p ar ip rayatha b hfivanan i sa
d y é'ba
prab od hayanti r , Usasah , sa san
tans ,
dvipé c catuspac carathaya ji
vam .
p ar ip rayatha : accented owing to h i ; on the accentuation of
verbal prepositions see p. 469 B a . p rab od hayanti s : cp. i . 92,9,
vi évam ji vam carase b od hayanti wakening every living soul to
move. catuspad : note that catur when accented as first member
of a cd. shifts its accent to the first syl lable. Th is word,dvipéd
andji vafim are al l neuter .
1; at fe a stmam 1&1t £11 fa in W Iaim-11 131 1111
fl at fi lmat faggi igmm ant1fi=1sz11=1t 1fi sgg : 11351111 1 1
agajagm s quatfi
'
d 331111 1 1111 1 1 and: 1WW 1
a fa £1121? uga’
tq whz 11 =1 1 fa 1"
am 1a sgsfi: 1313311 : 11
6 h i s. svi d asam k atama puram Where, p ray, and which ancient
yaya vi dh ana V i d ad hur rbh fi one of them (was i t) at which theynam (the gods) imposed the tasks of the
é fibh am yac chubh ré. U sasaé Rbhus ? When the beaming dawnscarant i , proceed on their shining course, they
met vi jfi ay an te sad fé i r ajuryah. arenot distinguished,a likenmaging.
asam : of the dawns . yaya : in a temporal sense at whose
time. vid ad hur : they, the gods, enjoined : this probably refers to
the most distinctive feat of the Bbhus , that of mak ing one bowl into
four ; cp . i . 161, 2 : ek am camasam caturah k rnotana , tad vo
d eva. ab ruvan ‘mahe the one bowl four’
, that the gods said to you ;
that was one of their vi dh fma tasks. sub h am cognate acc. na vi
jfi ayante : they are always the same ; cp. i . 92, 10 , punah-punar
jéyamana purani samanam varnam abh i éumbhamana being
For you, 0 goddesses , with your
steeds yoked in due time, proceed
around the worlds in one day,
awakening, 0 Dawns, him who
sleep s, the two-footed and the four
footed living world, tomotion.
iv. 51,8] USAS 97
born aga in and again , ancient of days, adorning herself with the same
colour,where dawn is
,as usual ly, spoken of as a s ingle goddess
reappearing day after day, whereas in th is hymn many individual
dawns that appear successively are referred to.
111 3 1 amand:w g‘
g art,1E1 1 FIT: 1 113
-
51: 1 and: 1$ 1 1
wfirfisajm azaataua u: 1 3 113 : 1
1116115113 : 11111113 3 53 wfi fizsgim : 1mi nimum : 1
(gamma Re: 3 1111 11 mfi 1 tam: 1 111111171: 1 3 3551: 1
E1311 ! u’
dmatrium£131: 133111111
ta gha ta bh ad ra U sasah pu Those indeed, thoseDawns have
rasur , formerly been ausp icious, sp lendid
ab h i stidyumna rtajatasatyah ; in help , punctually true ; at which
yasu ijanah é aéamanauk thaih the strenuous sacrif icer with reci
s tuvafi , chamsan , dire'
winam sa tations p raising, chanting, has at
dyaap a . once obta ined wea lth.
On purawith pf_
. see 213 A . ijanas : pf . pt. A. of yajsacrifice.
é aéamana pf. pt. A . of sam labour . stuvafi chamsan s tuvan +
samsan (40, The general meaning of the stanza is : former
dawns have brought blessings to the sacrificer ; may they do
so now.
ar=411 Ett fi
'
fl mmmm FIT: 1=311 1 at ria 1em u1gra tin
w art: 1mm ttmuvuz 1 unmet: 1 1111711 1 11m m: 1
3311121gait: ag'
é i guru a nd 12611: 1we : 1gum : 1
113 1 71witm 1“fir 11 1161111 1 =1 1E1111 : 1and: 1 11
ta5. ceranti samané purastat , They app roach equally in the
samanatah samana paprath a east, sp reading themselves equa lly
nah. f rom the same p lace. The god
rtasya d evih sad aso b udhana , desses waking f rom the seat of
gavam na Sarga, Usasojarante . order, l ike herds of kine let loose,
theDawns are active.
H
98 USAS [iv. 51 , 8
saman ii : always in the same way . samanatas cp. i . 124, 3
p rajanati iva , na d l so minati as onewho knows (the way) , she losesnot her direction. rtasya sad asah : abl . dependent 0 11 budh anah(cp . cp . i . 124
,3 rtasya pantham auv eti sadhu she follows
stra ight thep ath of order . bud hané s : ao. pt. awaking not
b od h ayantyas wakening (trans ) according to Sayana when A. and
without an object,b ud h is intr . ; cp . ab odh i has awoke
,said of
Usas (i . 92, 11 ; i i i . vii . so gavam na Sargah : cp.
iv. 52,5, p rati b h ad ra ad rk sata gavam sarga na rasmayah the
ausp icious rays (of dawn) have appeared like kine let loose. jaranteare awake are active are on the move (cp. a caranti in a and
9 a,b) , arepraised (stuyante) acco1 d1ng to Sayana.
Q 3 1 dam dmfitr $11 : 1 {11 1a 1 113 111mm 1111161: 1
3 11115161111 M aria 1 mai ntai n 1 3 15111: 1‘
fl t fia 1
géajvqwfdfi ( i f? flea}: 1“
s wim-3 11
5117111 1wi sts : 1
{Fifi “I?“ll 1‘
fi fiiz 1fi sh : 1W 1: 11
9 ta in mi eva samanasamanir , Those Dawns even now equa lly
ami tavarna Usasa é caranti . the same,
of unchanged colour ,
gfih anti r abhvam as itam ,ruéad move on ; concea ling the black
bh ih monster, br ight with gleaming
éuk r é s tan fibh ih, éfi cayo , ruc f orms , brilliant, beaming.
anah .
0 11 the accentuation of nv eva see p. 450, 2 b. abhvam : cp .
i . 92,5,b é dh ate k rsnam abhvam she dr ives away the black monster:
(of n ight) . ruéad bh i s : m . form irregularly agreeing wi th the f.
tanfibh i s . Note that the Pada text does not separate the endings
b hyam , b h i s , bh yas , su from f . s tems in long vowels , nor of m .
stems in a because the pure stem in these cases appears in an
altered form,e . g. p r iy é bh i s , but p i tf sbh i s .
0 {Ed fi sh gfsaf’
rfi ma’
t: ( firm (gel : 1gfigar : 1firwwfi : 11
1131161711 216 31191112311 : 1 mudm 1 215 7-1 1 3 16 1113127513 1
AGNI’
See Introduction to i . 1 on the nature of Agni .
v. 1 1. Metre : J agati .
<1 3 1a =i1a1 sta fag s ng'
fag $ 16 1 111111: 1warns 1WEI: 1a fim£1311: gfimq 1 =411131: 1 1315 11: 1gfiwm7131
’
s 1
3111111t gsm 115 3 131 1 3111 11111811: 1311111 1 fgfijsgfi 1
311113 111fi1 11111111: flfi t: 11 1511 1111 1fit 1 311111 11113 11: 1waist: 11
1 J anasya gop z’
i ajan i stajégrvi r Guardian of thepeop le, watchful,
Agn ih sudak sah suvi taya na most ski lful , Agn i has been born
vyas e. for renewed welf are. Butter-faced,
ghrtap rati k o b rh at'
si d ivi sp f'éa bright, he,
shines forth brilliantly
dyumad vi b hati b h araté bh iah f or theBharataswith lof ty, heaven
éucih. touching (flame).
gopas : 97,2 . ajan i sta : is ao. of jan generate. su -dak sas
a Bv. (p. suvi t iiya : final dat. (p. 314 , B navyase
dat. of cpv. of nava new. gh rta-p r at i k as : cp . yasy a p ratik am
ahutam gh rté na whose f ace is sp rinkled with butter (vi i . 8 , 1) as an
analyms of the cd. b rh até : supply téjasa. b h araté bhyas : for
the benefit of (p. 314 , 1) the Bharatas , the tribe to which the seer
belongs .
a fi et’
ifi i t“?Sfi fé flfi “6 1135331 1um 1g zsfs'av1 1
3 1111atfm ufi « fi rst 1 wfim 1at : 113 11111151 11111 1i f“? 1'
11111 21 : H aféfi: {am13351: 1 1111 911 1 1 711: 1aféfit1
fi l i fa"
6 711 113121111 11 111111 1fin 151111 1113 21121 1ma gi: 11
2 y ajfiasya k etum, p rath amam As banner of sacrifice, as first
pur é h i tam, domestic priest, men have kindled
Aguim naras , tr isad h asth é Sam i in the threefold abode. (Com
in on the same car with Indra
v. 11. 3] AGNI 101
fnd rena d eva 1n Sarath am set and the gods may that most wise
b arh i s i I nvoker'
sit down on the sacrificia l
sid an ui hota yajathaya su grass f or sacr ifice.
k ratuh.
k etum : in appos ition to Aguim ,in al lusion to the smoke of
sacrifice ; cp. vi ii . 44,10
,b otaram dhfimak etum yajfianam
k etum the I nvoker , the smoke-bannered banner of sacrifices ; cp . 3 d .
p rath amam : first-appointed in order of time. pur é h i tam see
i .‘
1,1 . naras : N. pl . of 1116 (p. tr i -sad h as th é : on the three
sacrificial altars ; Sandhi 67 b. Sam i dh i re pf. of i d h kindle ; have
kindled and sti l l kindle (cp . p. 342 a). sarath am : adv. governing
I’
nd rena and d eva l s (cp . p. 309,
sid an h i : the ipf. expresses
that he sat down in the past when he became Puroh ita ; the prp . as
often fol lows the verb (p. 468, y ajath aya : final dat.
(p. 314 , B
3 211113151 3111121m=i1zfifi
'
g 3 111111 132 : 13 12131 1 11151: 1sgfia
‘1
117g :M 151 fl as h : 1 na fi : 13m=urns : l faasta : 1
WW Ws H enh anm é umwmwssm
gfi %§1fl afzfil fi m: 11 an: 11111113: 1311161311@fi 1155m: 11
3 asammr stojayasematar é h éucir . Uncleansed thou art born bright
mandrah k avi r 1i a ati sth o V i f rom thy two parents. Thou didst
vasvatah. arise as the gladdeni/ng sage of
ghrté na tvavardh ayann , Agna Vivasvant. Wi th butter they
abu ta , strengthened thee, 0 Agni, in whomd hfimas te k etur abh avad d ivi the oficr ing is poured. Smoke be
ér i tah. came thy banner that reached to
asam-mr stas : pp. of mrjwipe, opposed to suei s , though nu
cleansed, yet bright. matr é s : ab l . du. z the two fire- sticks , from
which Agni is produced by friction . l id ati sth as : 3. s . ipf. of stha.
stand. Vivasvatas : gen. dependent on k avi s ; the sage (a common
designation of Agni) of VivaSvant, the first sacrificer. tva : the
102 AGNI [v.
caesura, which should fol low th is word (p. 442
,is here on ly
apparently neglected because the fol lowing augment may be treated
as dropped. avard h ayan : that i s,made the fire burn up with the
ghee poured into i t explained by a-huta . d humas , &c. : affords
an analys is of Agn i s epithet d humak etu (cp. note on 2 a) . d ivi
loc. of the goal (p. 325 b) . Note the use of the’
imperfects as referringto past events (p. 345
,B) .
8 3 151 1 13111311fig 11113111 wfi : 1a : 1213 11 13 11131111113 1111 1
fit af t fi=1 111 55 {fi fe 1 3 115111 1 711: 1fir 1 111 713 1111 1111 1
W 111 31313 3 3 131113} wfia: 1gaz 1 31116111 1 samanam1
1111 31 11-
111 émfi 61161311311 11 31115111 13mm : 1guf? 131161111111 11
4 Agh ir no yajiiam up a vetu L et Agni com‘
e straightway to
sad huya. our sacrifice. Men carry Agni
A gu im naro vi bharan te g rh é hither and thither in every house.
grh e . Agni became the messenger, the
Agh ir duto’
ab h avad d h avya carrier of oblations. I n choosing
vah ano . Agni they choose one who has ther .L r
Agmm vrnana vrnate k av1k ra wi sdom of a sec;
vetu : 3. s . ipv. of vi . bh aran te : see note on bh r , 11. 33, 10 a .
g rh é g rh e : 189 C a . d u tas : Agn i 1s cha1 acteristical ly a messengei
as an intermediary between heaven and earth . dh avyavah anas
Sandhi , 54. vrnanas : pr.
_pt. A . of 2 . vr, choosing Agni as thei r
priest. vrnate : 3 . pl . pr. A of 2 vr.
113131311551minus Emu gmwamfi lmfimmmaah
6 1111 1firt: 1 111311111 31 1waf t: 1
$1111: 1
m lm l uatm l aé dfifl l a u
04 AGNI [v.
Ang irasas : an ancient priestly fami ly (cp. x . 14,3 Agni being
regarded as their chief (cp. d and i . 1 , They are said to have
designed the first ordinances of sacrifice (x. 67, guha h i tam
p laced (pp . of d h a) in hiding, concea led,explained by é i é riyanam
vane ; having betaken himself (pf. pt. of sr i ) to, resting in,al l wood.
auv avind an they found him out as a means of sacrifice Sandhi , 40.
vane-vane : 189 C a . set : as such as found in wood (cp. p. 294 b) .math yamanas : pr . pt. ps . of math stir
,being produced by the
friction of the k indling sticks . sah o mahat : cognate acc.= with
mighty strength (cp . sab asa yo math ité jayate nr‘
bh ih he who when
rubbed by men with strength is born, vi . this being an
explanation of why he is cal led sah asas pu tram son of strength
this,or sah asah sfi nuh
, is a frequent epi thet of Agni ; Sandhi ,
43,2 a . Afig iras see note on a .
PARJANYA
This deity occupies quite a subordinate position , being celebrated in only
three hymns. His name often means rain -cloud in the l iteral sense ;
but in most passages it represents the personification , the cloud then
udder , a pai l , or a water- sk in . Parjanya is frequently
ul l that quickens the plants and the earth . The shedding
o , i s h is most prominent characteristi c. He fl ies around with a watery
car,and loosens the water-skin he sheds rain -water as our divine (as ura )
father . In th is activity he is associated with thunder and l ightning . Hei s in a Special degree the producer and nourisher of vegetation . He a lso
produces fertility in cows , mares,and women . He is several t imes referred
to as a father . By implication his wi fe is the Earth ,and he is once cal led
the son of Dyaus .
v. 83. Metre : 1 . 5—8 . 10. Tr 1stubh ; 2—4 . J agati ; 9 . Anustubh .
9 3 151 as 116111 1111511 1131 3156 1 fig 1 11611111 1111 1131: 13 11131: 1‘
sfi ué wi anm fi imm w l gfidm afim 1w 1r—q—am .
mfiin qsfi 31113 11 aifi'
mqm93 11: 111111 1 11151: 1
1 1711mam 111111 11 1 11: 1W 1“111111113 1 111
1111 11
PARJANYA 105
1 acha vad a tavasam g i rbh i r I nvoke themighty one with these
fibh ih ; songs ; p ra ise Parjanya seek to
stuh i P arjanyam ; namasé vi win himwith obeisance. Bellowing,
175 3 11 . the bull of quickening gif ts p laces
kanik rad ad vrsab h é ji radanfi seed in thep lants as a germ.
reto d ad hati 6sadh i su garbh am .
acha : with final vowel metr ical ly lengthened in the second
syl lable of the Pada . vad a : the poet addresses himsel f. vivasa
ds . of van win . k an ik rad at : see iv. 50, 5 d . vrsab has : Parjanya .
ji radanfi : Sandhi,47 ; his quickening gi ft 1s ram retas in d .
garbh am : as apposition to retas , Parjanya qu l ckens the growth
of plants with rain .
Q fi afi‘
fi é figfl éfifl t fi ifi fi lgmmfi fin smsfm wdn
first rams; 136111 111111111111 1 111111111 1tama 11511111111 1113113114 1111
s a1=1tv11 13111 38 11113 111 3 11 1 a11=11=11z 1 136 1111 6111: 1
113131711:m isfi t315-
817 1: 11 11111116111: 133 5 11 ll
2 vi vrk s im h anti uta h anti ra He shatters the trees and he
k saso smites the demons : thewholeworld
vi évam b i bh'
aya bhuvanam ma f ears him of the mighty weapon.
havad hat . Even the sinless man flees beforeu ténaga i sate vf sn iavato, the mighty one, when Parjanya
yat P arjanyah stanayan hanti thundering smi tes the evi l-doers.
dusk ftah.
b ibhaya : pf. of b h i’
pr. mah évadhat : a Bv. owingto its accent (p. 455 c). vfsnyavatas : Parjanya ; abl . with verbs
of fearing (p. 316 b) . anagas : with irr . accentuation of the priva
tive ah in a Bv. (p. 455 c a and f. n . Th is word is here contrasted
with d usk f tas ; hence the uta before it has the force of even. On
the internal Sandhi of d usk f t see 43, 2 a.
3 1 21111 am t“3 11511311111: 1 11111111 1W I 31131 1
W fi fsfi sfiié vé l fw u
106 PARJANYA [v. 83,3
{U fiusei Ema? s i lt ? anti : 1gafi uW l avi’fit l
“
as 1
amé fi zmfi awq W1: 11 zrml fi iseh m wtn smi tma irman: 1 1533 1afim mt: 11
3 rath i iva k aéayaévari’
i abh ik s i L ike a char ioteer lashing his
pann , horses with a whip hemakes mani
avir dutan k rnute var s iafi’
i ah a . fest his messengers of rain. From
d fi rat simhasya stanatha 1i d afar arise the thunders of the l ion,irate , when Parjanya makes ra iny the
37331: P arjanya ]; k rnuté vars i am shy.
nabh ah.
rath i : N . of rath in, much less common than rath i , N . rath is .
The contraction rath iva al so occurs in x . 5 1 , 6 rath ir iva is much
commoner and would have been “metrical ly better here. d fi tan :
the clouds . s imhasya. stanathah : condensed for‘the thunders of
Parjanya l ike the roars of a l ion . varsyam : pred icative acc . ;
on the accent of this form and of varsyan in b, see p. 450
,
k rnu té note that k r fol lows the fifth class in the RV. k rn é ti , &c.
k ar é ti does not appear ti ll the AV.,cp. p. 145, 4 .
aa 311m “
fi fe—d flfifl
'
fifl fi ga I1 1611711: 1arfi 11um’
1fi 1 1fi sgfi: 1
fi duhfsiéfi fimfi 5 1: 1 Ed ! fi ré'cfl: 1 fi té
’
fi 1 fim’
fi 1 6 131
m we 11313 131 311213 ft fi i 1
uafi fi é : gfi rafi i amé fa 11 1fi é fi 1 236171111 1m 1
fl fifi lfli: 1gfqa’
h IO
i TiHT 1 sulfa 11
4 p ra vi ta vanti ; p atayanti vi Thewinds blow forth, the l ight
d yuta ; nings fa ll ; the p lants shoot up ;
l i d 6 sad h i r 31h ate ; p invate suah . heaven overflows . Nurture is born
i ravi évasmai b huvanayajayate , for the whole world when Parjanya
yat P arjanyah prth ivim retasa quickens the earth with seed.
vati .
108 PARJANYA [v. 83, 6
p ra p invata vrsno aévasy a dha of your sta llion. Hither with this
rah . thunder come, pour ing down the
ar vanetena stanay itnuné h i , waters as the divine sp ir it our
7 0 0 ~ 7 r o .L
ap o n l sl ncann asurah p 1ta nah . father
d ivas : this might be abl ., from heaven, as it is taken to be by
Sayana ; but it is more probably gen. , being paral lel to aévasy a
d harah in b ; cp. ix. 57,1, p ra te d hara, d ivo na, .yanti vrstayah
thy streams go f orth like the ra ins of heaven. rar i d hvam : 2 . pl . pr .
ipv. of ra g ive (cp. p. 144,B 1 a). Marutas : the storm gods , as
associated wi th ra in,are in a b invoked to bestow rain , which is
described as water shed by their steed (as al so i n 1 . 64,6 and
i i. 34, vr
‘
sno aéva sya stal lion. In c d Parjanya i s again
addressed. s tanay itnun é h i : the accent alone (apart from the
Pada text) shows that th is is a contraction not of -n §. ih i (which
would be -neh i ), but of ona é h i , wh ich would normal ly be-naih i ;
-né h i is based on the artificial contraction -n€1. -na a) + i h i . The
same Sandhi occurs in i nd r é h i (i . 9 , 1) for i nd ra ii ih i . Withstanay i tnuna cp. s tanayan in 2 d and stanathas in 3 0 . apas
vrstim in a and d h é ras in b . asa rah p ité nah : as appositional
subject of the sentence, with the 2 . ipv. i h i ; cp. 8 21 in 5 d with the
voc. Parjanya and the 2 . ipv. yach a . The two epithets are appl ied
to other gods also,such as Dyaus , whom in his relation to Earth
Parjanya most resembles .
s wfir dara nuwfimm’
wfir 1ag 1mué 1wfifi 1m 1mz 1
aga r“aft i ts }( 21a 1 g gi saai 1 aft'
1 $121 1“
(Etta 1
gfi g até fi féa‘
ataf gfiim g l awfi fi asfi immtw
mu31711-75 711 finger: 11 am: 1new; 1 g ame: 1fi'
1wm: 11
7 ab h i k rand a ; s tanaya ; garbham Bellow towards us ; thunder ;
é d h a ; deposit the germ ; fly around with
ud anvata par i d i ya rath ena . thy water-bearing ear. Drawwell
d f tim su k arsa vi s i tam n i a thy water-shin unfastened down
ficam ward : let the heights and va lleys
samdb h avantu udvato n ipadah. be level.
v. 83,8] PARJANYA 109
stanaya : accented as forming a new sentence . garbh am : cp . 1 d,
reto d adhati 6sad h i su garb h am . d h as : 2 . 3 . root ao . sb . of
1 . d ha. d iya : with final vowel metrica l ly lengthened . d ftimthe rain-cloud
,here compared wi th a water-skin
,doubtless l ike the
leather bag made of a goat- skin sti ll used in India by water-carriers .
vi s i tam (from s i tie) : untied so as to let the water run out. nyafi
cam : predicative so that the untied orifice turns downward .
samas : that i s , m ay the high and the l ow ground be made level bythe surface of the water cover ing both .
c W fiW jfi fita fl are—da l a
‘r‘am sm wa n?”
REEL-i ti 3m firfi im: st a id
W matgfilafi ajfiu maim l gen: 1 fi sfé arz 1 gr
qmm‘
demand : 11 E11 !
afi wmtgfi ré’
r i fii l fi wfin
lit swam 3333 1 3 19 11231: 11
8 mah antam k é éam l id aca, ui Draw up the great bucket, p our
sifi ca ; i t down let the streams released
syand antam kul ya vi sitah pu flowf orward. Drench heaven and
rastat . earth with ghee let therebe a good
ghrté na d yavaprth ivi vi undh i ; dr inking p lacefor the cows .
supr ap anam b h avatu aghnid
b h yah .
The process of shedding ra in is here compared with the drawing
up of a pai l from a wel l and pouring out its contents . aca
metrical lengthen ing of the final a . n i sifi ca Sandh i , 67 c. puras
tat : according to Sayana eastward, because rivers general ly flow
eastwards’
; but though this is true of the Deccan, where he l ived ,
it is not so of the north -west of India ,'
where the RV. was composed .
ghrté na : figuratively of rain,because it produces fatness or abun
dance. dydvaprth ivi : Pragrhya, but not analysed in the Padatext (cp. i . 35 , 1 b). undh i : 2 . s . ipv . of na wet : und d h i . This
Pada is equivalent in sense to 7 d. suprapanam : note that. in the
110 PARJANYA [v.
Pada text this compound is written with a dental n,indicating that
this was regarded by the compilers of that text"
as the normal
internal Sandhi (see 65 b) .
Q afi a mfimGrazia asw e: 1
afi'
m‘
gfigamfii 11
9 yat , P arjanya , k anik rad at ,
stanayan hams i dusk ftalzl ,
p rati dam vi évam mod ate ,
yat k ing ca p rth ivyém ad h i .
yat P arjanya : cp. 2 d. hamsi : 2. s . pr . of h an yat
k im ca : indefinite prn . ,whatever (19 b), explains idam vi évam this
world if a verb were expressed i t would be bhavati .
wai f-
3115115 g ainful a é fi : 1
“artist 1 ea 1 tn
"1 11 1
mfimwfiiam s 1
3513 17
131? fi du’
ififdam a l l 3 1amHa ifa 1alt-
«ism? {H1
an nanfi sfaz’
l ua'
hm 11 351311313 : 1“
di dn'
t: 1 f rst-“1m 1
an 1M ama: 1 3 1513 : 1Ram 11
avars’
i r varsam : l i d 11 $11 gr Thou hastshed rain nowwholly
b hay a ; cease ; thou hast made the deserts
ak ar d hanvan i ati etavau . passable aga in. Thou hast made
ajijana 6sad h i’
r bh éjanaya k am ; the p lants to grow f or the sake of
uta p rajab h yo avid o man i s'
am . food and thou hastfound a hymn
of p ra isef rom (thy) creatures.
Th is concluding stanza , implying that Parjanya has shed abundant
rain, descr ibes its resul ts.
mmsbm afifitfl a
W m é fd l gzsmiz ln fiwgm fa‘a
‘m lfiqfi
aa l famm gfifi m l wfit n
When, 0 Parjanya ,
bellowing
a loud,thundering, thou smitest the
evi l-doers,this whole wor ld exults ,
whatever is up on the earth.
112 PUsAN (vi . 54, 1
1 sam , Pusan , vid li sa naya , Conjoin us, 0 Pusan, with one
yoafijasanuéas ati , that knows, who shall straightway
ya evé dam i ti bravat . instruct us, and who sha ll say (it
i s )‘
just here
vid li sa : inst. governed by the sense of association produced bythe combination of nay a (u i
’
lead) with sam : cp. p. 808,1 a . The
meaning is :‘
provide us with a guide’
. anu-é é sati (3 . s . pr . sb . )who shal l instruct us where to find what we have lost. i dam not
in frequently, as here,used adverbial ly when it does not refer to
a particular substantive. b ravat : 3 . s . pr. sb . of b r l’
i .
as ti gma ti sm em swfih gml nfiinry211 313
Wsimmers 1 21: 1gen“a fil smdfa 1
{H fi fd fi fi é au fi 1® 1 < fi11a 1 s ata n
2 sam u 13 li a gamemah i , We would also go with Pusan,
yo grh‘fn
‘
ifi ab h isiis ati , who sha ll guide us to the houses,
ima evé ti ca b ravat . and sha ll say (it is)‘
just these
u : see p . 221,2 ; on its treatment in the Pada text, p . 25, f. n . 2.
P fi snaz’
see note on vid l i sa, 1 a . gamemah i (a ao. op. of gam)wewould preferably go with Pusan as our guide. g rhan : that is , the
sheds in which our lost cattle are.
sgn a’
a ftwfi gmu am m l fitwfin
n afia‘
tsatwfi l m aira'u watmarm
afi aw alwfi ufi z u a'
l i fih wen m fi wfi z u
3 P l‘
l snaé cak ram na r i syat i , Pusan’
s wheel is not injured, the
na k é é é ava p ad yate ; well (of h is car)f a lls notdown nor
né asy a vyath ate p avih. does his f elly waver.
116 na 11, also not ; on the Sandhi op. 24. k é é é va z on the
Sandhi accent, see p . 465,
asya : unaccented, p. 452 , B e.
Sayana explains cak ram as Pusan’
s weapon , and p avi s as the edge
of that weapon. But this is in the highest degree improbable
vi.54,6] PUSAN
because the weapon of Pusan is a spear, an awl , or a goad ; whi le
his car is elsewhere mentioned,as wel l as the goats that draw it
,
and he is cal led a charioteer.
a? 313 111d a : 1 3 16 1 3151 111 1wfitum“W m . Wl flfl l gfl
'
t l'
fl fil l fiqfi l
1121111 fi rst}na'11 112131: 1 fi g ? 1mi 11
yd asmai h avisavidhan , Himwhohasworshipp ed himwith
net tam P l‘
i sdp i mrsyate oblation Pusan forgets not : he i s
p ra th am é vind ate vasu . thefirst that acquires wealth.
asmai : Pusan ; on the syntax, see 200, A I f ; on loss of accent
see p. 452 B c. 51111 : verbal prp . to be taken wi th mrs. prath amas
the man who worships Pusan.
gm3 151 s ahaa : 11J.
Pusa ga anu etu nah ;L r
Pusa rak satu arvatah ;.L .L .
Pu sa vaaam sanotu nah.
anu etu to be with them
to prevent their being los t.
m a n ta asm alfim l mu r fiw
s i tarc1m13mm m m 1 14.
—clan
w ag-
3711571 11
P fisann ,anu pra
’
. ga ih i
yajamanasya sunvatah ,
J . 1 rasmak am stuvatam uta .
anu p ra ih i : cp. p. 468,
of the sacrifice. stuvatam :
1302
w lmzmfiq qmu
gan t ngmfifl u
gmmm’mmfigmz n
Let Pusan go af ter our cows ;
let Pusan p rotect our steeds ; let
Pusan gain booty for us.
and prevent 1n3ury or loss . rak satu.
0 Pusan, goforth af ter the cows
of the sacrifleer who p resses Soma ,
and of us whopraise thee.
20 a . yaJamanasya : of the institutor
of the priests as a body.
1
s 111513 131? Fun 111t 13 1161 1mafim 1115171 1
mah u al'fi fi et
'
i i mafia lml l ad t l'
aé i 1
w ft'erfim ufia'u mh wftmfim mm fi u
7 mak ir nesan ; mdk im r isan ; L et not any one be lost ; let i t
mak im sam sari k é vate not be injured ; let i t not saf er
athar l stab h ir a gah i . f racture in a p it : so come back
with them u ninjured.
neé at : inj. ao. of naé be lost (see 149 a 2). r i sat : a ao. inj. of
r i s . sar i : ps . ao. inj. of sr crush. ar i stabh i s : supply g é b h i s .
{ita 1wv'ras
'
fi1m 1
i ‘m‘fi £11? 11 {ain‘t 1 ( 121: 1 i n? 11
8 srnvantam Pusanam vayam , Pusan, who hears, the watchful,
i ryam anastaved asam , whose p rop erty is never lost, who
i éanam raya imah e . d isposes of riches , we approach.
auasta -ved asam : who always recovers property that has been
lost ; he is a l so cal led anasta-p aéu : whose cattle are never lost ; cp.
1,2,5,6, 7 . rayas : gen . dependent on isanam (see 202 A a) .
imah e : 1 . pl . pr. A. of i go govern l ng the ace. Pusanam
cp . 197 A 1 .
q alga-
1 as 8111 1111 1“
as"
1“
5111 1 31 111 1
a fi'fimait h m fi fim ngh am
11113 116 1 {3 Elfi l 11 EHHTJC 1a 1 {s 1 £1151 11
9 Pusan , tava vrat é vayam 0 Pusan,in thy service may we
na r i syema kad a cana never suficr injury : we are thy
stotaras ta i ha smas i . p ra isers here.
Pusan tava note the Sandhi (40, vraté : that is , while
abiding in thy ordinance. smasi 1 . pl . of as be ; e gives the reason
for the hope expressed in a b .
1 16 APAS [vii 49, 1
accordant with the priests that bring Well-
pressed Soma for Indra . Soma
(viii . 48) del ights in them l ike a young man in lovely maidens ; he ap
proaches them as a lover ; they are ma idens who bow down before the
youth .
The deification of theWaters is pre-Vedic, for they are invoked as upo in
the Avesta also.
vn . 49 . Metre : Tr i s tub h .
313 5118 1 : « fan's 11121111 W sfimz 1mad 1 118 1111 1
3mmw fitfi amm: 1 gur u: 1 111111 1wfi sfirm mz 1
{7151 111 8131 13115111 ( W W: 1 111: 13
1111: l fl d l
711 3 11111 sea s 111113 751, 11 mz1=smr1z 1§a1 z 1vs 111111 1aa7r1 11
1 samudragyesthah sal i lasya ma Having theocean as their chief ,
d hyat f rom the midst of the sea, p ur ify
punanayanti an ivi éamanah ing, they flowunres
'
ting let those
i nd ro yavajr i vrsab h é rarad a , Wa ters,the goddesses , for whom
taap o d evir ihamam avantu . I ndra, thebearer of thebolt, themighty
one, opened a path, help me here.
s amud ra-jy esthas that is , of which the ocean is the largest.
sal i lasya the aerial waters , referred to as d ivy i'
i s in 2 a , are meant.
punands : cp . pavak é s in c. an ivisamanas : cp. i . 32 , 10, where
the waters are al luded to as ati sth anti s and an iveé anas standing not
sti ll and resting not. r ar ad a : of Indra , it is said elsewhere (i i . 115,
vajrena k hany atrnan nad inam with his bolt hep ierced channels for
the r ivers . ta ei p o , &c. is the refrain of al l the four stanzas of this
hymn .
a 111 3 11111 figa uanHTe é fa
s fi fitm an n e w: 1
1153 1131 211 : $ 121: 11161611111
m 3 11111 2611133 111116131, 11
1f§5211z
1311 1111111: 13 71 1 1111 : 16 1111151121
nas tam: 1 £11 : 1 13am: nut 1
111 : 13 11dz1§é1z l i s 111111 1wafg11
vii. 49, 4] APAS 117
2 yd i p o d ivyauta. va sravanti
k han i tr ima uta va y'
all svayam
55h ;samud ré r tha yah sli cayah p a
vak ds
taAp o d evi r . ihamam avantu .
d ivyas : that fal l from the sky as rain : cp. sa l i lasya madh yat
in 1 a . k h an i tr imas : that flow in artificial channels : cp . Ind r o
ya rarei d a in 1 c . svayamjii s : that come from Springs . samud
rarthas : that flow to the sea ; cp. samud rajyesthah punana
yanti in 1 a, b. p avakas : thi s word here and elsewhere in the
RV. must be pronounced p avaka (p . 437 a
s 3 13 1 333 1 3 1f3 11121 3 13 13 1 ( 1311 1 333 : 1111111111a 1
1131133 333 3 1313 13 13 1 3 31133 {fit 1 3 13m1113 1 313 13 111 1
113153 :133131 3 1: 1113 3 13 ngsgri: 1
333111: 1 111 : 1 1113 3 1: 1
31 3 11111 33113 3 3 11133111 3 1 :
3 yasam raids. Varuno yati ma I n
.
the mi dst of whom King
d hye , Varuna goes looking down upon
satyanrt é avapasyafi Jananam , the truth and untruth of men, who
madhuécutah sucayo yah p a disti l sweetness, clear and purify
vakas ing let those Waters,the god
ta Ap o d evi r ihamam avantu . desses, help me here.
Varunas : this god (vii . 86) is closely connected wi th the waters,
for the most part those of heaven . avapasyan : this shows that
the celestial waters are here meant ; on the Sandhi see 40,1 .
satyanrté : Pragrhya (26 ; cp . p . 437, note accent : p . 457,10 e.
Note that Dvandvas are . not analysedjn the Pada text. mad hu
é cutas that is,i nherently sweet.
3 13 1 1 13 1 1 33111 1 3113 1 9131 !
The Waters that come f rom
heaven or that flow in channels or
that ar ise sp ontaneously, that clear
and pur ifying have the ocean as
their goa l let those Waters , the
goddesses, help me here.
1 18 APAS (vii . 49, 4
31313 11 ma fia: nfiisu 33 13 1 : 1 3 1511 1nsfits : 1
3 1 3 111113311113 3 1113 33 11 3 1: 131111: 1331 1{3 13 13 13 133111
4 yasu raja Varuno, yasu Somo, I n whomKing Varuna , inwhom
V isve d evil ydsu firjam mad Soma,in whom the A ll -gods drink
ant i ; exhi larating strength, into whom
vai évanar é yasu Aguib p ra Agni Va is’
vanara has entered : let
vi s tas those Waters,the goddesses , help
1. J L J .
ta Ap o d evi r 1h a mam avantu . me here.
li rjam : cognate ace. with mad anti (cp . 197 A 4) obtain v igour
in exh ilaration,that is
,by drinking Soma wh ich is assoc iated wi th
the Waters . va isvanaras : belonging to al l men, a frequent epithet
of Agni . pravi stas : Agn i’
s abode in the Waters i s very often
reten ed to ; cp. a lso his aspect as Apdm naput‘Son of Waters
’
(11.
MITRA-VARUNA
This is the pa ir most frequently mentioned next to Heaven and Earth .
The hymn s i n which they a re conjointly invoked a re much more numerous
than those in wh ich they are separately addressed. As Mitra ( ii i . 59) i sd istinguished by hardly any individual tra its , the two together have prac
tical ly the same attributes and functions as Varuna alone. They are con
ceived as young . Thei r eye i s the sun . Rea ching out they drive wi th the
rays of the sun as with a rms. They wear gl isten ing garments . Theymount their car in the highest heaven . Their abode i s gol den and is
located in heaven ; it is g reat, very lofty, firm ,with a thousand columns
and a thousand doms . They have spies that are wise and cannot be
deceived. They a re kings and. universal monarchs. They are al so cal led
Asuras , who wiel d dominion by means of may z'
i. occultpower, a term mainly
connected with them . By that power they send the dawns; make the sun
traverse the sky, and obscure it with cloud and rain. They a re rulers and
guardians of the whole world . They support heaven ,and earth , and a ir.
They are lords of rivers , and they are the gods most frequently thought
of and prayed to as bestowers of rain. They have kine yielding refresh
ment, and streams flowing with honey. They control the rainy sk ies and
the streaming waters . They bedew the pastures with ghee rain) and the
120 MITRA-VARUNA [vi i 61, 2
3 3 1 3311131 3311 3 313 3 31 1 331131 1 3311 3fi1 1513 3 1
3 1 333 3 11 3 11131: 33131 11 3 313 : 1
3 1 1 3 3 1 3 3 1 1 3 1 at é z 1g'
313
313 11
2 pra vain s é , M i tra-Varunav , Forth f or you two, 0 Mitra
rt i'
iva Varuna, this p ious p riest, heard
vip ro manman i d i rgh aér li d afar, sends his hymns, that yemayiyar ti f avour his p rayers, ye wise ones
,
S’ é SYa b rahmani, suk ratli , s, that yemay fi ll his autumns as it
Vfith a , were with wisdom.
a yat k ratva na sarad ah pr
nai th e .
iyarti : 3 . s . pr. of 1; go.
“
yasya avath as yat tasya
avath as : on the sb . with relatives see p. 356,2. suk ratl
'
i : see
note on rtdvar i , i . 160 , 1 b. The repeated unaccented word in the
Pada text here is not marked with Anudattas because al l unaccented
syl lables fol lowing a Svarita are unmarked .
“ap rnaith e 2 . du. sb .
pr. of prn fi ll . The meaning of d is not quite certain , but is
probably‘that ye who are wise may make h im ful l of wisdom
al l his l i fe’
. sarad as : autumns, not var sén i rains (which only
occurs in the regularly used’
in the RV. to express years of
l ife,because that was the distinctive season where the RV. was
composed.
a313113 3 133 3 1 3133 1 11 1 3 31 : 1 1313 133 3 1 12133 1: 1
11 3 3 1g33 : 3313 1 11 13 3 13 3 113 1333 1 13311 {fit
3131 33 13 3111313 f33 L $ 313 1
3 111331 3 fi1fi-13 333 13 1 11 3111: 1gaps 313 13 1113 15 1 133 1
3 1313 13 3 : 13 fi11fi133 1( 33 13 1 11
3 pra ur é r,Mi tra-
“
Varuna, prth i F rom the wide earth, 0 Mitra
vy zi h, Varuna, f rom the high lof ty sky,
vii . 61,4} MITRA-VARUNA 121
p ra d iva rsvéd b rhatah, su 0 bounteous ones, ye have p laced
d anfi, your Sp ies that go separately, in
spaso d adhath e 6sad h i su vi k su p lants and abodes, ye that p rotect
fdhag y até ,’n im i sang rak sa with unwinking eye.
mana.
ur é s : here used as f. (as adjectives in u may be : 98) though thef. of this particular adj. is otherwise formed with i urv-i . sud é nfi
see note on suk ratfi in 2 c. spaéas : the spies of Varuna (and
Mitra) are mentioned in several passages . d ad hath e : Pragrhya
(26 b). 6sad h isu : the use of this word seems to have no special
force here beyond expressing that the Spies lurk not only in the
houses of men, but also outs ide. yatas : pr . pt. A . pl . of i go.
an im isam : ace. of é -n imis f . non-winking, used adverbial ly, to be
distinguished from the adj. a -nim i sé. al so used adverbial ly in the
ace. The initial 8. must be elided for the sake of the metre.
{fat fir maims am 31d 1 feast1 aim 1ant 1
W fi éfilm wfi'fi n fluizl fi é éjrrfanqgfi mfi mn
W 1 3 1213 3 111211“ a dm 111111: 1Wa mmfl irt: 1
n uafimr gwfi fi t fi u m afi sfimn saa'
m fat fi u
5:1,i M i trasya Varunasya dh é I will p raise the ordinance ofma : M itra and Varuna : their f orce
susmo r é d as i b ad b ad h emah itva . p resses apart the two worlds with
aWan mass. ayajvanam avirah ; might. May the months of non
p ray adfiamanmavrjanam ti rate . sacr ifieers p ass without sons ; may
he whose heart is set on sacrifice
extend h is circle.
samsa : this form may be the 2 . s . P. ipv. with metrical ly
lengthened final vowel , as the Pada text interprets it ; or the 1 . s .
sb . P . (p. The latter seems more l ikely because the poet
Speaks of h imsel f in the 1 . prs . (twice) in 6 a, b also. b ad b ad h e
int. of b ad h (174 a) cp . vn . 23,3,vi b ad h ista sya. r é d as i mah i tva
he ha s p ressed asunder the two worlds with his might. mah itva : ins t.
MITRA-VARUNA [vn . 61, 4
(p. ayan : 3. pl . p 1 . sb . of i go (p . avir é s : predicative
as sonless ; on the accent see p . 455, 10 0 01. yajfiamanma : con
tras ted with ayajvanam (accent p . 455,f. n . p ré . tirate : 3 . s .
sb. pr . of t? cross ; th is cd . vb . is often used in the sense of pro
long ing l ife (A. one’
s own , P . that of others) , here of increasingthe number of one
’
s sons (as opposed to aviras in c) ; cp. p ra y é
band hum t irante , gavya prfi canto aévya magh én i whofurther theirkin
, giving abundantly gif ts of cows and horses (vii . 67,
11win firstaamf‘
am at anjv 1 fas t 1aand 1am: 1awn
71 11113Tara qg’
i a aaa l a 1 and 1 faaa 12a? 1 a 1aa=1 1
gs: na'
-11 agaraaiat get: 1 aafi 1 a im 1 ate-
1171111 1
a at fauna fa'
fi“
a gau 11 a 1 am 1 faw fi'
r 1a fa'
i'nm a 1
5 amfi ra, vi éva, vrsanav, ima 0 wise mighty ones,a ll these
(praises ) are f or you two, in which
na ydsu c itram dad r é e , na y a no marvel i s seen nor mystery.
k sam . Avengers f ollow the f a lsehoods ofarub ansacan te anrtajané nam men : there have been no secrets
na vam n iny én i ac ite abh fi van . for you not to know.
The interpretation of th is stanza is uncer tain . Fol lowing the
Padapatha I take amfi ra to be a du2 m . agreeing with vrsanau , but
vi éva for vi évas (contrary to the Pada) f. pl . N . agreeing with imé s
these (sc. stutayas ) . n é. c itram : that is,no deceit or falsehood .
dad r ée : 3 . s . pf. A. wi th ps . sense as often (cp. p. 342 a) . d ruh as
the spies of Varuna (cp . 3 c). na n iny én i : explains c : there is
noth ing hidden from you . a -ci te dat. inf. (cp . 167, 1 a).
5ad at a i’
113111 afi‘tfirg
starat fi1a1aam1 Harri : 1
a ai amtaga'
r] aaita
aimfa erstafi afimfit 11
m 1 aaara 1 a1u 1aau 1asamafizsfim l
sa l mm faafi ammsawun 1 am 1 a=utfi 1 1 =aafi 1aatfa 1
arcnfit 1aat 1aammamfit 11
124 MITRA-VARUNA [vii. 61 , 7
only within a Pada before vowel s,in the Sandhi form of i v .
ak ar i : ps . ao. of k r do. p iprtam : 2 . du. ipv. pr . of pr put across.
yfi yam : pl . , s oil . d evas , because the l ine is a general refrain
addressed to the gods, not to Mi tra -Varuna .
sm a
Some ten hymns are addressed to Surya . Since the name designates theorb of the sun as wel l as the god , Surya is the most concrete of the solar
deities,h is connexion with the l uminary always being present to the mind
of the seers . The eye of Surya is several times mentioned ; but Sfi rya
h imsel f is also often called the eye of Mitra and Varuna , as wel l as of
Agni and of the gods . He is fa r-seeing , al l -seeing , the Spy of the whole
world ; he beholds al l beings , and the good and bad deeds ofo
mortals . Hearouses men to perform their activities . He is the soul or guardian of al l
that moves or is stationary. His car is drawn by one steed cal led eta éa,or by seven swi ft mares cal led har i t bags .
The Dawn or Dawns reveal or produce Surya ; he shines from the lap of
the Dawns ; but Dawn is al so sometimes Sfi rya’
s wi fe. He also bears the
metronymic Aditya or Aditeya , son of the goddess Aditi . His father isDyaus or Heaven . The gods raised him who had been hidden in the ocean ,
and they placed him in the sky ; various individual gods, too, are sa id to
have produced Surya or ra ised him to heaven .
Surya i s in various passages conceived as a bird traversing space ; he is
a ruddy bi rd that fl ies or he is a flying eagle. He is also cal led a mottled
bul l, or a wh ite and bri l l iant steed brdught by Dawn . Occasional ly he i s
described as an inan imate object : he i s a gem of the sky, or a variegated
stone set in the midst of heaven . He i s a brill iant weapon (dyud h a ) whichMitra Varuna conceal with cloud and rain , or their fel ly (p av i ) , or a bri l
l iant car placed by them in heaven . Surya is also sometimes spoken of as
a wheel (cak ra) , though otherwi se the wheel of Surya is mentioned . Surya z
shines for al l the world,for men and gods . He dispels the darkness ,
which he rol ls Up l ike a skin, or which his rays throw off l ike a skin into
the waters . He measures the days and prolongs l ife. He drives awaysickness , disease, and evi l dreams. All creatures depend on him
, and the
epithet‘a l l - creating
’
(v i éva-k arman ) is once appl ied to him. By h is
greatness he is the divine priest (a surya p ur é h i ta ) of the gods. At his
rising he i s besought to declare men sinless to Mitra -Varuna and to other
gods .
The name Sfirya i s a derivative of svar l ight , and cognatewith theAvestic
hvare sun,which has swi ft horses and is the eye of Ahura Mazda .
vi i . 63,2] SURYA 125
v n. 63. Metre : Tr 1stub h .
a1 amat
afii l nfit l gsufiu fam
swim : i f}? aim: 1
ma ins: 1 1121: 1mamma l
ass a : aafiw‘
tfia 11 azi z 1raast 1am 12a : 1
aa'ssa 1a : masarra'am1w ith 11
dd 11 eti subhago vi év'
acak sah Up r ises the genial al l-seeing
sad haranah Sdr i o manusanam , Sun,common to all men, the eye
caksur M itrasya Varunasya of M itra and Varuna , thegod who
d evas, rolled up the darkness like a
carmeva yah samavivyak ta skin.
mamsi .
vi évacak sas cp . urucak sas in 4 a on the accentuation of these
two words cp. p . and p. 455,10 0 61. cak sus : cp. vn . 61, 1 .
sam-avivy ak : 3 . s . ipf . of vyao extend. carm'
a i va : cp . iv. 13,4,
rasmayah Sur iasya carmevavad hus tamo ap sd antah the rays
of the sun have deposited the darkness l ike a skin within the waters.
was ma’
im aaiat ama‘
i {fit1111‘s 1 a sura? " 1a art
am 1
11311 13151: 1 amia: 1
11211111 aéra gfiga z 11 mm 1aam1 afi sarfaa'rsm
umumu aéfin g sg l ga : 11
dd 11 eti p rasavi ta jananam Up r ises the rouser of thepeop le,mahan k etur arnavah Sdr i asya , thegreatwaving banner of theSun,
samanam cak ram p ar iavivrtsan , desir ing to revolvehither the uni
yad Etaé é vah ati d h fi rsd yuk tah. form wheel, which Eid sa , yoked to
thepole, draws .
126 SURYA (vii . 63, 2
p rasavi ta with metrical ly lengthened i (cp. p . 440 , 4 ) for
p rasavité as restored by the Padapatha cp . 4 c,janah Sfiryena
p rasfi tah. samanam : uniform, with reference to the regularityof the sun
’
s course . cak ram : a s ingle wheel of the sun,doubtless
with reference to the shape of the luminary, is regularly spoken of.
p aryavivrtsan : ds . of vrt turn ; cp. p . 462 , 13 a . Etasas : as the
name of the sun’
s steed,is several times mentioned but Surya is also
often said to be drawnby seven s teeds; cp . i . 164,2,sapta yufijanti
rath am é k acak ram , ek e aévo vah ati sap tanama seven yoke the
one-wheeled car,one steed with seven names draws it. d h fi rsd the 10 0 .
pl . as wel l as the s . of this word is used in this way.
3 fi matmfl W atfiflwig fasmaima : 1 aaata 1 aaswta l
W w w ta : 1 1 11: 1amq 1 ammaaia :
na'
fi fia : diamam 1111: 1gaz 1afam 1ai ry
a : 1111171a firm vamt 11 a : 1ama11 1 a 1nsfa aufit1amt 11
3 vib h rdjamana usasam upasthad Shining forth he rises from the
rehb a1r 11d eti anumadyamanah . lap of the dawns , greeted with
esame d evah Savi tacach and a , gladness by s ingers. He has seemed
yah samanam nap ram inati d ha to me god Savi tr who inf ringes not
the uniform law.
cach and a : here the more concrete god Surya i s approximated to
Savitr (i. who i s in seve i al passages spoken of as observing
fixed laws . In th is hymn Surya is also referred to with terms
(p rasavi ta , p rasutas) special ly appl icable to Savitr . nap ram inati
cp. what 1s said of Dawn i n i . 123,9,rtasya na minati dh ama she
inf ringes not the lawof Order.
8 taa‘t ( as aaaausi t
-
61
asaaaufa amaaai'fa 11
fga : 1aaaz l aa1aa iz 1aa 1nfi1 1
{Ts 1 at filt: 1manual : 1
11am a ai z 1gas 1a id-
611 : 1
W I aatfa 1“
cantata 1watts 11
128 Sl'
JRYA [vii. 63, 6
fim a’
i fa‘m’
awai ts w, sun 1 a : 1 fas t 1gsnwtfi1 1s § 1
1 d uta s tints : set a : 11 a21mma 1a fis sfii : 1 set 1 a : 11
6 h it M i tr é VarunoAryamanas Now may l lI itra , Varuna, and
tmane tok éya var ivo d ad h antu : Aryaman gran t wide space to us
sugano vi éva supathani santu . ourselves and to our ofisp r ing.
yfi yam pata suastibh ih Sad a L et all our paths be f a ir and easy
nah . to traverse. Do yep rotect us ever
morewith blessings.
n f'
i z to be pronounced with a slur as equivalent to two syllables
(u cp. p. 437 a 8 ) only nfi occurs a s the first word .of a sentence ,
never mi (p. the Pada text always has mi . tmane : th is
word (cp . 90,2, p. 69) is often used in the sense of self , while atman
is only just beginn ing to be thus used in the RV. (115 b a ) and latersupplan ts tand body d ad h antu : 3 . pl . pr . according to
the a conj . (p. 144 , B 3 {3} instead of d ad h a tu . sugé : l it. may a ll
(paths) be easy to travel and easy to traverse. This final stanza is
a repetition of the final stanza of the preceding hymn (vii .On d see note on vn . 61 , 6.
ASVI’
NA
These two deities are the most prominent gods after Indra , Agni , andSoma
,being invoked in more than fi fty entire hymn s and in parts of severa l
others . Though their name (a év - in horseman) is purely Indian, and
though they undoubtedly belong to the group of the dei ties of l ight, the
phenomenon wh ich they represent i s uncerta in,because in al l probabil ity
their orig in is to be sought in a very early pre-Vedic age.
They a re twins and inseparable, though two or three passages suggest
that they may at one time have been regarded as distinct. They are
young and yet ancient . They are bright, lords of lustre, of golden bri l
l iancy, beauti ful , and adorned with lotus~
garlands . They are the only gods
cal led golden-
pathed (h i ranya -vartan i ) . They are strong and ag ile, fleetas thought or as an eagle. They possess profound wisdom and occult
power . Their two most distinctive and frequent epithets a re d a sra won
drows and ndsa tya true.
They are more closely associated with honey (madhu ) than any of the
other gods. They desire honey and are drinkers of it. They have a skin
vi i.71] AsvINS 129
fil led with honey ; they poured out a hundred jars of honey. They have
a honey-
goad ; and their car i s honey-hued and honey
-bearing . They give
honey to the bee and are compared with bees .
‘
They are, however , also
fond of Soma,being i nvited to drink it with Usas and Surya . Thei r car is
sunl ike and , together with al l its parts , golden . It i s threefold and has
three wheels . It is swifter than thought, than the twinkl ing of an eye. It
was fashioned by the three divine artificers,the Bbhus. It is drawn by
horses , more commonly by birds or winged steeds ; sometimes by one or
more buffaloes , or by a single ass (ras ab h a ) . It passes over the five
countries ; it moves a round the sky ; it traverses heaven and earth in one
day it goes round the sun in the distance. Their revolving course (varti s ) ,a term almost exclusively appl icable to them,
i s often mentioned . They
come from heaven,air
, and earth , or from the ocean ; they abide in the
sea of heaven , but sometimes their local ity is referred to as unknown .
The time of thei r appearance is between dawn and sunrise : when darkness
stands among the ruddy cows ; Usas awakens them ; they follow after her
in their car ; at its yoking Usas is born . They yoke their car to descend tom
earth and receive the offerings of worshippers. They come not only in the
morning , but also at noon and sunset. They dispel darkness and chase
away evil spirits .
The Asvin s are children of Heaven ; but they are also once said to be
the twin sons of Vivasvant and Tvastr’
s daughter Saranyii (probably the
, rising Sun and Dawn) . Pusan is once said to be their son ; and Dawn seems
to he meant by their sister . They are often associated with the Sun con
ceived as a female cal led either Surya or more commonly the daughter of
Surya . They are Surya’
s two husbands whom she chose and whose car she
mounts. Surya’
s companionship on their car is indeed cha racteristic .
Hence in the wedding hymn (x. 85) the Asvins are invoked to conduct the
bride home on their car,and they (with other gods) a re besought to bestow
fertility on her.
The As’
vins are typical ly succouring divinities . They are the speediest
del iverers from distress in general . The various rescues they effect are of
a peaceful k ind , not del iverance from the dangers of battle . They are
characteristical ly divine physicians , heal ing diseases with their remedies,
restoring sight, curing the sick and the maimed . Severa l legends are
mentioned about those whom they restored to youth , cured of various
physical defects , or befr iended in other ways . The name Oftenest mentioned
is that of Bhujyu, whom they saved from the ocean in a ship.
The physical bas is of the Asvins has been a puzzle from the time of the
earl iest interpreters before Yaska , who offered various explanations, whi lemodern scholars also have suggested several theories . The two most
probable are that the Asvins represented either the morning twil ight, as
1 902 K
130 Asvms [vii . 71, 1
hal f l ight and half dark, or the morning and the even ing star. It is
probable that the As’
vins date from the l ndo-European period . The two
horsemen, sons of Dyaus, who drive across the heaven with their steeds,and who have a sister , are para l lel to the two famous horsemen of Greek
mythology, sons of Z eus,brothers of Helena ; and to the two Lettic God
’
s
sons who come riding on their steeds to woo the daughter of the Sun. In
the Lettic myth the morning star comes to look at the daughter of the Sun.
As the two As’
vins wed the one Surya , so the two Lettic God's sons wed the
one daughter of the Sun ; the latter also (l ike the Dioskouroi and theAsvins) a re rescuers from the ocean , del ivering the daughter of the Sun or
the Sun h imsel f.
vii . 71 . Metre : Tr l stubh .
wh e fiu s fi u mp ffi l
fi nfi i amfitsm vmtm fi nfit lm hn m d mmimW 1 first! " at fi n 3 1mm 1mam 1arm 3 311 1
Q azas’
fi atw ajvhau u feat l artmntmm l gfi mn
1 ap a svasur Usaso Nag ji h i te Night departs f rom her s ister
r inak ti k rsnir arusaya pantham . Dawn. The black one yields a
asvamagh a, g é magha, vam hu p ath to the ruddy (sun). 0 ye that
vema are r ich in horses, r ich in cows,
d iva nak tam sarum asmad yu on you two wewould call : by day
yotam . and night ward of the arrow
f rom us.
Nak (N. of nets) this word occurs here on ly. ap a t i te 3 . s . A .
from 2 . ha. Usasas : abl .,with which svasur agrees . Night and
Dawn are often cal led s isters,e. g. svasa svasre jyayasya i y é n im
araik the (one) sister has yielded her p lace toher greater sister (i . 124 , 8 )and their names are often joined as a dual divinity, nak tosasa.
The hymn Opens thus because the Asvins are deities of the early
dawn. k rsnis (dec.
, p . n ight cp. i . 113,2,svetyaagad araig
u k rsna sad anan i asyah the bright one has come ; the black one has
yielded her abodes to her. r inak ti : 3 . s . pr . of r ic leave. arusaya
to the sun ; cp. i . 113 , 16, araik panth am yiitave sfiryaya she has
132 Asvms [vi i . 71 , 3
sy fimagab h astim rtayugb h i r as that is drawnwith thongswith your
vai r , horses yoked in due time hither,
a,Asvina,vasumantamvah etham . laden with wealth.
avamasyam : prn . adj. (120 c l ). sumnayavas : the vowel is
metrical ly lengthened in the second syl lable , but, when this word
occupies another posi tion in the Pada , the short vowel remains .
8 i t at“a gar-ii 2 1rd 6113 1 a : 1 3111 1“it 1gurh {fit3311371 1fitmfl 3113
's ? p lantar 1 wfid 1M T1
3 "“31W atnwfidman fa cing} : 1aljsm lm a xim 1
2 1131 as?W ai t famifa 11 m l az lnm lm m wd lmflm31151 1 E151 1m 1 tas s e l: 1 fa
ntfa 11
4 y é vam ratho, nrpati , as ti The car, 0 lords of men, that is
voina, your vehicle, three-seated
,fi lled with
trivandhuré vasumar‘
i’
i u sra r iches, faring at daybreak, with that
y ama, come hi ther to,a s, Nasatyas, in
ana ena , Nasatya, up a yatam , order that, laden with all food, for
abh i yad vam visvap sn iojigati . you it may app roach us.
“
tr ivand huras : accent, p. 455 C a . vasuman : Sandhi , 39 . a
up a yatam : p . 468,20 a ; cp. note on upayatam in 2 a. ena°
p. 108 . yad : p . 357. vam : ethical”
dat. vi évap snyas : the
meaning of this word being doubtful , the sense of the whole Pada
remains uncertain . jigati 3 . s . sb . of ga go, indistinguishable from
the ind.
11351watts s tai rwayfa firstmeg 1
fl i t-lawns : mfifl fi
is 3113 11 fidfift“tam :
gamwatflm s t s: 1 315531511 1
fit 1§fi 1w§gz 1w 1wfimfi zwiss z l azts zmfimwfimfi l am mfirfi
‘t l t ttam fi
ft fitn
vi i. 71, e] Asvms 133
yuvam Cyavanam jaraso ’mu
muk tam ,
ni Fedava fi h athur asum sé
vam ;
n ir amh asas tamasah sp artam
Atr im
ui J abusam sith i r é d hatam
antah.
yuvam : note that this 1s the nom ., yuvam be ing the ace. : .p 105 .
Cyavana is several times mentioned as having
b
been rejuvenatedby the Asvins . jarasas : abl . (p. 316 b). amumuk tam : ppf. of
muc (140, 6, p. ui ii h athur : 2 . du. pf. of vah . P edave
Pedu is several times mentioned as having received a swift, white ,
serpent-kil l ing steed from the Asvins . n ih sp artam : 2 . du. root
ao. of spr (cp. 148,1 a) . The ao. in c and d i s irregularly used in
a narrative sense. u i d hatam : 2 . du. root ao. of d ha. In 1. 116 , 20
it is said of the Asvins : ye carried away at night J ahusa who was
encompassed on al l sides
fi fifimrwfifism vfiz {aa ma'
im lm l afismnfiu
m i sfi éw s'
iw u W 'sszfim lnw ssm l
{111 33111511 {1q {m msfiftn gzjsgfit lm l
1a nh a fwfi m a n W 1m 1m sfitz 1wt 1 azn
iyam man isa, iyam , Asvina, g l r . This is my thought, this, 0
im’
am suvrk tim ,vrsana, juse Asvins, my song. Accept gladly
tham . this song of p raise, ye mighty ones.
.L J .
1ma b rahmamyuvayum agman . Theseprayers have gone addressed
yfi yam pata suastibh ih Sada to you. Do yep rotect us evermore
nah. with blessings.
mani sa: this is one of the four passages in which the nom . of the
der. a dec. does not contract with a fol lowing vowel in the Samhita
text, here owing to its preceding the caesura (cp. note on v. 11 , 5 b).
Ye two released Cyavdna f rom
old age, ye brought a swif t horse
to Pedu ; ye rescued Atri f rom
distress and darkness ; ye p laced
J ahusa in f reedom.
134 Asvrns [vii . 71, a
gir : 82 . agman : 3. pl . root ao. of gam This stanzai s a l epetition of the last stanza of the preceding hymn (vn .
which also 1s add i essed to the Asvins . On (1 see note on vn . 61,6.
VARUNA
Beside Indra (i i . 12) Varuna is the greatest of the gods of the RV. ,
though the number of the hymns in which he is celebrated alone (apartf 1om Mitra) 13 smal l , numbering hardly a dozen .
His face, eye, arms,hands , and feet are mentioned . He moves his arms ,
walks,drives, sits , eats, and drinks . His eye with wh ich he observes
mank ind is the sun . He is far- sighted and thousand - eyed. He treads
down wi les with shin ing feet. He sits on the strewn grass at the sacrifice.
He wears a golden mantle and puts on a sh in ing robe. His car,which i s
often mentioned , sh ines l i ke the sun,and is drawn by well
-
yoked steeds .
Va runa sits in h is mansions looking on al l deeds . The Fathers behold
him in the highest heaven. The Spies of Varuna are sometimes referred
to they sit down a l ound h im ; they obsei ve the two w0 1 lds ; they stimulate
pi ayei By the golden winged messenger of Varuna the sun i s meant.
Varuna i s often cal led a k ing , but especial ly a un iversal monarch (samraj ) .The atti ibute of sove1 eignty (k s atra ) and the tei m a sur a are p i edomi
nantly appl icable to him. His d ivine domin ion is often al luded to by the
word maya occult power ; the epithet mayin craf ty is accordingly used
chiefly of him .
Varuna i s mainly lauded as upholder of physical and moral order . Hei s a great lord of the laws of nature.
‘He establ ished heaven and earth ,
and by his law heaven and earth are held apart. He made the golden
swing (the sun) to sh ine in heaven ; he has made a wide path for the sun
he placed fire in the waters , the sun in the sky , Soma on the rock . The
wind which resounds through the a ir is Varuna’
s breath. By his ordinances
themoon sh ining brightlymoves at night, and the stars placed Up on high are
seen at night, but disappear by day. Thus Varuna is lord of l ight both byday and by night. He is also a regulator of the waters . He . eaused the
rivers to flow by his occult power they pour swiftly into the ocean without
fi l ling it. It is , however , with the aerial waters that he is usual ly connected .
Thus he makes the inverted cask (the cloud) to pour its waters onheaven ,
earth,and ai r
, and to moisten the ground .
Varuna’
s ordinances being constantly said to be fixed , he is pre-eminently
cal led dh rtavra ta whose laws a re establ ished . The gods themselves fol low
h is ordinances. His power is so great that neither the birds as they fly nor
the rivers as they flow can reach the l imits of his dominion . He embraces
136 VARUNA [vii . 86, 1
p ra ne’
ikam revém nunud e b rh worlds. He has pushed away the
antam, high, lof tyfirmament and the day
dvi tanak satram ; p ap rath ac ca star as wel l ; and he sp read out
b h fima . the earth.
d h ira : cp. 7 c , acetayad aci tah ; and vn . 60 , 6, acetasam cic
c itayant i dak saih they with their skill make even the unthinking think.
asya Varunasya . mah ina mah imna(see 90, 2, p. Varuna
(as well as other gods) is several times said to hold apart heaven and
earth (e. g . vi . 70,
which were supposed to have original ly been
un ited. p ra nunud e : pushed away from the earth ; cp. vi i. 99 , 2
of Visnu 11d a stabhna nak am rsvam b rhantam thou didstp rop up
the high lofty firmament. nak am : means the vault of heaven ; thereis nothing te show that i t ever has the sens e of sun which Sayana
gives i there . Sayana also makes the verb nunud e , though unaccented,
depend on the relative in b ; c is , however , equivalent to a relative
clause (cp. i i . 12,5 b . 8 d) . na
'
k satram : in the sing. this word
regularly refers to the sun,in the pl . to the stars . Varuna and other
gods are often said to have raised the sun to,or to have placed it
in,heaven. amt : doubly to be taken with nunud e ; that is , he
raised up from the earth both the vault of heaven and the sun .
p ap rath at : ppf. of p rath (140, accented because it begins a
new sentence. bh fima : note the difference between b h i'
iman n .
earth and b h iiman m . multitude (p.
sw e at s-
6 1133 812 3161 s a rs mh aat l um fg l aa l
arer a émétnw fm sa lmwwu at’
nq arfi l
ra i l samémfi 33a fina l ?! 1 33111 1 3 131213 : 1 i s?“m afi ags at swish " an 1W 1 grant: 1wfin
2 uta svaya tanua sam vad e tat
11 31115. 1111 antar Varuna bhu
vant ?
k im me h avyam ah rnanojuseta ?
k ada mr lik am sumana abh i
k hyam
And I converse thus withmyself :"when, p ray, shall I be in com
munionwith Varuna ? l/Vhat obla
tion of mine would he, f ree f rom
wrath, enjoy ? When sha ll I , of
good cheer, perceive his mercy ?’
vn ., 86, 4] VARUNA 137
svaya tanva : with my own body with myself (cp. p. 450, 2 b) .nv antar ; loc. cit. Note that when a final original r appears in the
Samhita text,it is represented byVisarjanIya only in the Pada text
on the other hand , antah in vii . 71, 5 appears as antar i ti ; within
Varuna united with Varuna. b huvan i : 1 . s . sb . root ao . of bhfi be.
k hyam : 1 . s . inj. a ao. of k hya.
i fi fifi m rfi
m afia M ama mm 1m1’
n1afiaé z1fsa 1ws z1
w s gwa'
fil fi ufifi u w a 1 s 1 §wa l ai§nz 1slfifi n
prch é tad é no,Varuna d i
d fksu ;upo emi cik ituso vip f cham
samanam in me k avayaé ci d
ahur
ayam ha tubhyam Varuno h r
n i te .
prch é : 1 . s . pr . ind. A . of p rach ask. d i d ifk su is a difficulty :
it has been explained as L . pl . of a supposed word d id f é , a very
improbable formation among those who see ; also as N . s . of a ds .
adj. d i d fk su , with wrong accent (p . 461 f ) and wrong Sandhi , ford i d lfk sur (upo) desirous of seeing (i . e. finding out). I t is probably
best,following the Padapatha, to take the word as n . of the de. adj.
used adverbial ly (with adv. sh ift of accent) with a desire to see, i . e.
find out. upo upa u cik itusas : A . pl . of the pf.’
pt. of cit
perceive. vi -p f ch am ace. inf. (167, 2 a). b rui te z 3. s . pr. A. of hr
be angry ; w. dat. (200 l).
fm ws am ws‘
m 1wwlz 1ws 1 ann l firsmW'
s-
hart tw is ts « s tain am sfimtmfm tafin ss tam
I ask about that s in, 0 Varuna ,
with a desire to find out ; I ap
p roach the wise in order to ask
the sages say one and the same
thing tome‘this Varuna is wroth
with thee.
’
138 VARUNA
11 fi t i ts? { 3511 await
sata fim mis t gt {ma 11
4 k im aga asa , Varuna , jy é sth am
yat stotaramji ghamsas i Sak ha
y am
p ra tan me voco,d i i labha sva
d hay o
ava tvanena namasa turauiy
‘
am .
jy é sth am jyaisth am , to be pronounced as a trisyl lable (15, 1 f ).yat : tha t as a cj. (p. jighamsas i : ds . of h an slay. p ra voca s
1nj. ao. of vac say. d ii labha : 49 c. turauiyam turah iyam (op.
of i go), to be pronounced , with irr . secondary contraction (cp. 22 a ;48
‘
a), as tur é yam . ava to be taken with iyam (cp. 5 a—c) .
uwé gwmfi t fimt smvfi wh ymfifl fizwh s a mu
«a m as s-
im a m” fi 1m 1 am 1w q qfitz 1
s tat ( Tamar-pi 71 apj“i l
'
él -1 ( Ta i l was-
gi t“a l fl igl l l
£ 511 sat =1 gush s ides 11 E31 1 s tea l a 1“
emi: 1affisa 11
5 1117 31 d rugdh éni p i tria srja no,
Set a s f ree from the misdeeds
ava y a vayam cak rmd tanfi of our fathers, from those that we
b h ih. have committed by ourselves. I l e
ava , rajan , paéutfp am na ta lease Vaszstha,0 K ing, l ike a
yum , cattle- steal ing thief; like a ca lf from
srja , vatsam na damano, Vas i a rope.
eth am .
ava srja (metrical ly lengthened final,also in d) : note the different
construction in a : ace. of object and dat. of prs . ; and in c d;ace. of
prs . and abl . of that from which V . is set free. d rugdhan i : pp.
[vn . 86, 4
u laa lfi l é’rs z lgzsgq l amsan
wh a r l wfimu afim q ru
W E ll
What has been that chief s in,
0 Varuna , that thou desirest to
slay thy praiser , a f riend ? Pro
claim that tome, thou that art hard
to deceive, self -dep endent one thee
would I, f ree from sin, eagerly
app ease with adoration.
140 VARUNA (vi i . 86, 6
done anything, have of ended in our conduct. The sense of the noun
would therefore be ofience, the whole Pada meaning : the elder is (involved) in the is the cause of the) ofience of the younger , that is, anelder has led me, the younger , astray. The use of the loo. here is
i llustrated by vi . yah p rasavé as i bh fimanah who
(Savitr) art in the stimulation of the world, i . 9 . art the cause of the
stimulation of theworld. p rayota: this word might be derived from
p ra + yu join or p ra + yu sep arate ; the latter occurs in the RV. in
the sense of dr ive away , while the former does not occur in the RV.,
and later means stir,mingle. The probability is therefore in favour
of the sense warder off. cana then would have the original sense of
not even (pp . 229 svapnas : i . s . by producing evi l dreams .
Qa f zgsfi a fi
’rzgs
afiw a tawmu m tfiz a lw fm
s im arn‘
ifi satmz l m 1§am1§hm w mz l
a'
fi'aagf
‘
afit 2311 su n 3 13311111 1 s it-
fi t: 1ea: 1 an: 1
W1 13”
: afifi lfl srum11 W i vfi l afasdt z l sfi fi n
7 aram dase na, m i lhfi se k arani I will,like a slave, do service
aham d evaya b h firnaye snag sinless to the bounteous angry god.
acetayad aci to d evd arye ; The noble god made the thoughtless
gftsam ray é k avitarojunat i . think he,the wiser, sp eeds the
caperienced man to wealth.
mi lhuse : dat. s. of midhvams . k arani : 1. s . sb . root ao. of k p
do ; to be taken with the adv. aram (p. 313, acetayat : see ci t .
gftsam : even the thoughtful man Varuna with h is greater wisdom
urges on. ray é : final dat. (of ra l ) , p. 314,2. junati : 3. s . pr. of
ju sp eed.
c augwsw em é ’r
gfz sfiu sfifimfism l
s a ss -15 313 3 3 13
331°
uia a fiirfii : set a : 11
steward: 1s dsfaaz l fsa 1q§ 1
m l a z 1fi 1m 1wrfi 1fifitl
gfla l m l a fi nfitz lml a zu
vii . 103, 1] MAnnuKAs 14 1
8 ayam s 1'
1 tub hyam , Varuha sva
d havo,
h rd i stema fip aér i ta é ci d astu .
sam nah k séme, em 11 y é ge ne
asta .
yuyam pata suastibhihSadanah.
tubhyam : dat. of advantage (p 314,B astu nah : p. 320 f.
On /d see note on vii . 61, 6.
MANDUKAS
The following hymn ,intended as a spel l to produce rain ,
is a panegyrl c
of frogs, who are compared during the drought to heated kettles , and are
described as raising their voices together at the commencement of the rains
l ike Brahmin pupi ls repeating the lessons of their teacher .
vn . 103. Metre : Tr 1stubh ; 1 . Anustubh .
1 samvatsaram saéayané
b rahmanavratacar ihah,yacam Parjanyajmvi tam
p ra’
. mand fik a avad isuh.
samvatsaram : ace. of duration of time (197 , sasayantis : pf .
pt. A. of 31 lie (p. 155,f. n . b rahmahds : i . e. l ike Brahmins .
vratacar i h as : i . e. practising a vowof s ilence. P arjanya-jinvi tambecause the frogs begin to croak at the commencement of the rainy
season ; on the accent see p. 456,2 a . avad isur : is ao. of vad
(145
L et this p raise bewell imp ressed
on thy heart, 0 self -dependent
Varuna . Let us have p rosperity
in possess ion, p rosp er ity a lso in
acquisition. Do yep rotect a s ever
morewith blessings.
tiara m m: 1
m : 1aasa tfm't: 1
swim usié sfafa ai 1
a 1gl i nt: 1warfig: 11
Thefrogs having lain for a year
l ike Brahmans practising a vow,
have uttered forth their voice roused
by Parjanya .
144 MANDl—IKAS [vi i. 103, 5
sarvam tad esam samfdheva that of his teacher , all that of them
parva is in unison l ike a lesson that
yat suvaco vad ath ani'
tdh i ap sri . eloquent ye rep eat upon thewaters.
esam : cp. enos in 4 a . sam f d h a : the interpretation of c is
uncertain because of the doubt as to the form and mean ing of this
word,and because of the many senses of parva . I t has accordingly
been very variously explained. The above rendering is perhaps the
most probable. samfd ha inst. of s ampah ,l it. growing together, then
unison,harmony . parvan , joint, then a section in Vedic recitation .
Thus c would be an explanation of b , the voices of the frogs sounding
together l ike those of pupils reciting a lesson after their teacher.
vad ath ana : see p. 125,f. n . 3 ; change , as often ,
from 3 . prs . to 2 .
ad h i : 176,2 a (p.
if 311113315111
grafts} sfi'a as 1mm
s emi a mfam'rfi fatstu
agar are”
firfirflé-
ia z 11
6 gé mayur ek o , ajamayur é k ah ;
p f éni r ek o ; har ita ek a esam .
samanam nama b ibh rato vi
rfi pah
purutra vacam p ip isur vad
antah .
g é mayus : cp . 2 c. p f éni s , har i tas : cp. 4 d. samanam : they
are al l cal led frog‘
s,though they have d ifferent voices and colours .
b ibh rata s : N . pl . pr . pt. of bh r (p . puru trd : note that the
suffix in words in wh ich the vowel is always long in the Samhita text
(as in d evatrd, asmatré , &c. ) is long in the Pada text also while in
others l ike atra , in wh ich it is only occasional ly lengthenedmetrical ly,
the vowel is always short in that text. p ip iéur theymodulate the
sound of their voices (cp . a) .
J fisatgz I wt: wa sntg: l ca:
gal: at : I Efta: I li st: l 1mm«mau l ant fad 193513111: 1
Hi t s " enam fwfqv
g: ate-
fl : n
One lows like a cow,one bleats
l ike a goat ; one is speckled, one of
them is yellow. Bear-ing a common
name, they have difi erent colours .
In many ways they adorn their
voice in speaking.
vii. 103, s] MANDTJKAS 145
Q am t "“
a fat ia a a‘
fir mamé : 311mm? a nEfffi
afi a gfiwfifi t Eri c—fl : at : a I gl in twfii at: I aim:
th rew flag: art a (Ward l mu wafitfit aft Ienc l l l 1
adamant: mam 3313 H mm1113
6151: agfimm 5913 u
7 b rahmanaso atiratr é na some, L ikeBrahmins at the over-night
saro na purnam abh ito, vad Soma sacrifice sp eaking around as
antah i twere a full lake, ye celebrate that
samvatsarasya tad ah ah par i day of the year which, 0 Frogs, has
sth a , begun the rains .
yan ,mandukah, p ravrsmam b a
b hfiva .
atiratr é : this is the name of a part of the Soma sacrifice in the
ritual of the Yajurveda . I ts performance lasted a day and the fol
lowing n ight. I ts mention in the RV. shows that i t is ancient.
saro na as it were a lake,a hyperbolic express ion for a large vessel
filled with Soma . abh itas : 177,1 . par i stha. : l it. be around, then
celebrate ; cp . par i car go round, then attend upon, honour ; on the
Sandhi , cp. 67 c. p ravrsinam b ab hfiva : has become one that belongs
to the rainy season.
r: m ind: a’rfinfi 315131553 m m : l é‘rfiwt: afi tR l ari a
firstm at:“W 1“
916i“
awai t: aft ermfim'
mWfi éfi afii‘d: fafw m maria: mfitmt: fare-
“
131m:
wrfafiafi yan a’
é i fé a n W z lmfi l ya tt l fl lai l fi i ll
8 b rahman'
asah somino vacam Soma-
pressing Brahmins,they
ak rata , have ra ised their voice, ofi ering
b rahma k rnvantah p ar ivatsa their yearly p rayer. Adhvaryu
rinam . p riests , heated, sweating, they
adhvaryavo gh arminah s isvi d appear ; none of them are hidden.
ana,
avi r bh avanti ; g li h ia na k é ci t .
1902 L
146 MANDUKAS [vii. 103, s
b rahman z’
isas : na need not be suppl ied (as in 1 b) , the frogs beingidentified with pr iests . sominas : celebrating a Soma sacrifice,/wh ichexpresses much the same as saro na purnam abh i tah in 7 b.
vacam ak rata : cp. vad antas in 7 b . ak rata : 3. pl . A. root ao. of
k r (148 , l b). b rahma : with b cp . 7 c,d . gh arminas is meant to
be amb iguous : oppressed with the heat of the sun (frogs), busiedwith hot mi lk (pr iests) . Here we already have a reference to the
Pravargya ceremony in which milk was heated in a pot, and which
was fam il iar in the r itual of the Brahmanas. s isvidané s pf. pt. A.
of svid ; note that the cerebral ized initl al of the root is restored in
the Pada text ; cp. kan i sk an in 4 c. avi s see p . 266, b.
Q §3 féfii fitfifigw §3 8f€ffl¥t I 3113: Imagi
agfiafja n fdfl -‘
r
’
afi l aggtt l fl‘
tz nm a l fnfl fa l ufi l
Hm ngwwtarai «w t 1 11731?“
arsvtmmmHHTsuit d i
gi t? renninn am: with: m ? fi sufia u
9 devah i timjugupur dvad asa sya They have guarded the divine
r tum naro nap raminanti ete. order of the twelvemonth : these
samvatsar é , p ravfsi agatay‘
am , men inf r ingenot the season. I n a
taptz'
i gh arma aénuvate vi sar year, the rain timehaving come, the
gam . heatedmi lk-ofier ings obtain release.
d evah i tim : on the accent see p .2156
,2 a. jugupur : pf. of gup
p rotect. d vad aéasya : note the difference of accent and inflexion
between dvad aéa twelve (104) and dvad aéa cons isting of twelve, twelf thsupply samvatsarasya from c. In the Aitareya Brahmana
the year, samvatsara , is cal led dvad aéa consisting of twelve months
and caturv1méa cons isting of twenty-four half-months . The gen .
natural ly depends on d evah i tim ,as being in the same Pada. Prof.
Jacobi understands dvad aéasya as the ordinal twelf th supplyingmasasya month, and making i t depend on rtl im in the next Pada.
This interpretation is then used as evidence to show that the
beginning of the year was held in the period of the RV. to com :
mence wi th the rainy season at the time of the summer solstice,and
taken in conjunction with another reference in the RV. to the
rainy season at the period to furnish an argument for the very early
date of the RV. But there is no trace here of any reference to the
148 Vi svE DEvAH [vi i i . 29, 1
that none should be left out in laudations meant for the whole pantheon.
The following hymn though traditional ly regarded as meant for the Vis’
ve
devah i s a col lection of riddles, in which each stanza describes a deity byhis characteristic marks
,leaving his name to be guessed . The dei ties meant
in the successive stanzas are : 1 . Soma , 2. Agni , 3. Tvastr, 4 . Indra,5. Rudra ,
6. Pusan, 7. Visnu, 8 . As
’
vins,9 . Mitra -Varuna , 10. Angirases .
vii i . 29 . Metre : Distichs of a J agat i + Gayatri (p . 445,
9 agai n? rm: (gif tgan aya: I net: fi fimt IW l 133 1
1!
m tg fstmttt n ma I 353: 1W W ll
1 b abh rur ek o vi sunah sfi naro One is brown ,varied in form,
YIiV é bountiful, young. He adorns him
anj i ank te hi ranyayam . self with golden ornament.
b abhr i i s this epithet is distinctive of Soma, to whom it is appl ied
eight times, while i t otherwise refers to Agni only once, and to
Rudra in one hymn only (i i . It al ludes to the colour of the
juice, otherwise described as aruna’
. ruddy, but most often as hari
tawny. visunas : probab ly referring to the di fference between the
plant and the juice,and the m ixtures of the latter with milk and
honey. y li va : here and in a few other passages Soma,l ike Agni ,
is cal led a youth , as produced anew every day. afiji : cognate acc.
(p. 300, ank te : 3. s . A. of afijanoint, wi th middle sense anoints
himself . h i ranyayam : cp. ix. 86,43
,madhuna abh i afijate
h iranyapava asu grbhnate they anoint him (Soma) with mead ; puri
fying with gold, they seiz e him in them (the waters) , in al lus ion to
fingers with golden rings .
azfififfiafi anew ; erms? u‘tfim vat: annam; afirtaz l
sag-
33 fifitt : n we: fi t fifltt t l
2 y é nim ek a é, sasada d y é tano, One has, shining, occup ied his
antar d evé su m é d h irah. recep tacle, thewise among the gods.
y é nim : the sacrificial fireplace ; cp. ii i . 29 , 10,l
aya'
ng te y é n i r
r tviyo, yato jatc'
) arocath ah : tam jandun , Agna , a s i d a this is thy
regular recep tacle, born f rom which thou didst shine : knowing it, Agni,
vi ii . 29,5] Vi svE DEVAH 149
‘
occupy it. dyotanas the brightness of Agni is constantly dwelt on.
mé d hi ras : the wisdom of Agni is very frequently mentioned ; in
i . 142, 1 1 he is cal led d evo
’
d evé su mé dh i rah the wise god amongthegods.
aam’
ifiafii fawn?3stairman aT‘lfi'
R lW fi ’ml www '
W fi fiffiifi t n was: i i fifi fi séfir:
3vaé im ek o b i bharti hasta aya One bears in his hand an iron
Sim , axe, strenuous among the gods.
antar d evé su nid h ruvih.
vité im : this weapon is connected elsewhere only with Agni , the
Rbhus,and the Maruts . But Agni cannot be meant because he has
already been described in 2 whi le the Rbhus and the Maruts would
only be referred to in the plural (cp . But x . indicates
sufficiently what god is heremeant : Tvasta apasam apastamalgi
é i é i te nunam para éum suayasam Tvastr , most active of workers, now
sharpens his are made of good iron . nidh ruvi s : strenuous as the
artificer of the gods , a sense supported by apastamas in the above
quotation .
8 aah-
«fit finifi‘
i si twires fl aunt: fauffi i sfihansféamafi gaf u
'fi iafi n fid ugmti t l faa
‘an
4 vajram ek o b ibharti hasta éh i One bears a bolt p laced in his
tam hand : with it he slays his foes.
tena vrtrani J i ghnate .
é -hi tam : pp. of dha p lace ; accent, p . 462, 13 b. ji ghnate : 3 . 8 .
pr . A . of h an slay, see p. 432. vajram : this,as h is distinctive
weapon, shows that Indra is meant.
ti famfi ffl fienrf‘
éi‘
s’ifl 3 "n
fifé p fi II
5 tigmam ek o b ib h arti hasta
dh am ,
éucir ugro Jal asabhesajah.
tan trum" : l fanfr‘
i l sfitl i ngua l
flfi l: an: nm ahna : n
One, bright, fierce, with cooling
remedies, bears in his hand a sharp .
weapon.
150 VisvE DEVAH [vi ii. 29, 5
ityudh am : bow and arrows are usual ly the weapons of Rudra ; in
vn . 46,1 he is described by the epithets sth i radh anvan having a
strong bow, k sip r é su swif t—arrowed, tigm éyud h a having a sharp weapon,and in vn . 46
,3 his lightning shaf t, d id y l i t , is mentioned. ugras
th is epithet is several times appl ied to Rudra (cp . i i . jalasab h esajas this epithet is appl ied toRudra in i . 43, 4 Rudra is also
cal ledjalasa , and his hand is described asjalasa (as wel l as b h esaja)in i i . 33
,7 ; these terms are appl ied to no other deity. b has the
i rregularity of two redundant syl lables (p . 438,2 a ) .
gas: net: farm: a‘
sti ?mu tia z 1net: tiium l Refit : 1mm
m: 32 wi th in 11 I N: 13g 1fi N‘Efl
'
v’
ITR u
6 patha ek an p i paya ; task aro°
Onemakes thepaths p rosp erous
yath a'
. like a thief he knows of treasures.
esaved a n idh i’
nam .
p athas : i t is characteristic of Pusan (vi . 54) to be a knower and
guardian of paths . p i paya : pf. , with lengthened red. vowel,from
p i pya) make ful l or abundant , cp. vi . vi’
p atho véjasatay e cinuh i clear thep aths for the ga in of wea lth (addressed to Pusan)and x . 59 , 7 : d adatu punah Pusa p ath i am ya suastih let Pusan
give us back thep ath tha t is p rop itious. task aras : to be taken with b,
l ike a th ief he knows whe1 e h idden treasure is to be found cp.
vi . 48,15 (addressed to Pusan) avi r gu l h a va su k arat
, suvé d a no
vasu k arat may he make hidden wea lth manif est, may he makewea lth
easy for us to find ; he al s o finds los t cattle ; cp . vi . 54,5 10. ya
th aii’
i : unaccented (p. 453,8 B d) , nasal ized to avoid hiatus (p. 23
,
f . n . ved a : with gen . (202 A c). n i d h i nam : accent (p. 458,
2 a) the final syl lable to be pronounced dissyl labically.
s area“mah fa dais-ina
'
2am“
; ug’
fa u
7‘tr i ni ek a urugayc
’
) vi cak rame ,i I o
yatra d evaso mad antl .
ahfd l fi t l s fi smaz l fin aafi i
fl at1gain: 1 trifle n
One, wide-p acing , makes three
strides to where the gods are ex
hilarated.
152 V1evn BEVAR [viii 9
samr z’
ija, as N . du. , i s appl ied to Mitra-Varuna exclus ively.
cak rate : 3 . da . pf. A . of k r with middle sense , make f or oneself .
up ama : N. du. in apposition to dva, further explained by samr itja.
ao 3135 1 1131 are antm e
371 tfi'fl t
‘
im 11
10 arcanta ek e mah i sama man
vata
tena sfi ryam arocayan .
arcantas singing is characteristic of the Ahgirases e. g. i . 62 , 2,
sama y é na arcanta Ang iraso ga avind an the chant by which the
Angirases, s inging, found the cows ; the Maruts are described in x. 78 , 5.
as vi évarupa Ang iraso na s itmab h ih manifold with chants like the
Angirases. The Angirases again are those ya p tena sfiryam firoh
ayan d ivi who by their r ite caused the sun tomount to heaven (x . 62,
Sayana and some other interpreters think that the Atris are meant.
But nothing is ever said of the s inging or the chants of the Atris.
Again , though in one hymn (v. 40) it is said in the last stanza that
the Atris found the sun : yam vai suryam Svarb hanu s tamasa
évi dhy ad ,Atray as tam anv avind an the Atr is f ound the sun which
Svarbhanu had assai led with darkness this is on ly a repetition of
what IS attributed to Atri in the s ing . gul ham suryam tamasa .
b rahmana avind ad Atr ihAtr i byp rayer found the sun hidden by darkness (6) andAtr ih sfi ryasya d ivi cak sur ad hat Atris p laced the eye ofthe sun in heaven (8) and in the AV. and the SB. it is Ati i (not the
Atris) who performed a simi lar act. Thus even this deed is not
characteristic of the Ati is (plui al), but at most of Atri (singular).
The Angirases must therefore undoubtedly be meant here. é k e : the
pl . is here used to express an indefinite group beside ek as and d va in
the rest of the hymn manvata : 3 . p1. ipf. A. (without
augment) of man think. arocayan ipf. es . of rue shine.
SOMA
As the Soma sacrifice formed the centre of the ritual of the RV., the
god Soma is one of the most prominent deities . With rather more than
120 hymns (all those in Mandala ix, and about hal f a dozen in others)
afifi n m mfii mrd mam
ha l tfita l wfl am n
Singing, some thought of a great
chant : by i t they caused the sun to
shine.
vi ii . 18] SOMA 153
addressed tohim,he comes next toAgni (i . 1) in importance. The anthropo
morphism of his character i s less developed than that of Indra or Varuna
because the plant and its juice are constantly present to the mind of the
poet Soma has terrible and sharp weapons , which he grasps in his hand
he wields a bow and a thousand-
pointed shaft. He has a car which i s
heaven ly ,drawn by a team l ike Vayu
’
s . He is al so said to ride on the same
car as Indra . He is the best of charioteers. In about hal f a dozen hymns
he is associated with Indra , Ag11i,'
Pusan ,and Rudra respectively as a dual
divinity . He i s sometimes attended by the Maruts, the close al lies of
Indra . He comes to the sacrifice and receives offerings on the sacred
grass.
The Soma juice, wh ich is intoxicating , i s frequently termed madhu or
sweet draught, but Oftenest cal led indu the br ight drop . The colour of Soma
i s brown (b ab h ru) , ruddy (aruna) , or more usual ly tawny (har i ) . The
whole of the ninth book consists of incantations chanted over the tangible
Soma , whi le the stalks are being pounded by stones, the juice passes
through a wool len strainer , and flows into wooden vats , in wh ich it i s
offered to the gods on the l itter of sacred grass (b arb i s ) . These processes
are overlaid with con fused and mystical imagery in endless variation . The
pressing stones with which the shoot (amen ) is crushed are cal led adr i or
grévan . The pressed juice as it passes through the fi lter of sheep’
s wool is
usual ly cal led pavamana or punana flowing clear . This purified (unmixed) Soma is sometimes cal led sa d dhap ure, but much oftener suk ra or
éuci bright ; it is offered almost exclusively to V'
ayu or Indra . The fi ltered
Soma flows into jars (k al asa ) or vats (d r é n a ) , where it is mixed with waterand also with mi lk
, by which it is sweetened . The verb mrjcleanse i s
used with reference to this addition of water and milk . Soma is spoken
of as having three k inds of admixture (aé i r ) : milk (go) , sour milk (dadh i ) ,and barley (yava ) . The admixture being al luded to as a garment or bright
robe, Soma is described as‘decked wi th beauty
’
. Soma is pressed three
times a day : the Rbhus a re invited to the evening pressing , Indra to themidday one, which is his exclusively, whi le the morningl ibation is h is firstdrink. The three abodes (s adh as th a ) of Soma wh ich are mentioned pro
bably refer to three tubs used in the ri tual .
Soma’s connexion with the waters, resulting from the admixture, is ex
pressed in the most various ways . He is the drop that grows in the waters ;he is the embryo of the waters or their child ; they are his mothers or hi s
sisters ; he i s lord and king of streams ; he produces waters and causes
heaven and earth to rain . The sound made by the trickling Soma is often
al luded to, general ly in hyperbol ical language,with verbs meaning to roar or
bel low, or even thunder. He is thus commonly cal led a bul l among the
waters, which figure as cows. Soma ismoreover swift, being often compared
with a steed , sometimes with a bird flying to the wood. Owing to his
154 SOMA [viii . 48
yel low colour Soma’
s brill iance is the physical aspect most dwelt upon bythe poets . He i s then often l ikened to or associated with the sun.
The exhilarating power of Soma l ed to its being regarded as a divine
drink bestowing immortal l ife. Hence it is cal led am i ta draught of immarta lity. Al l the gods drink Soma ; they drank it to gam immortal ity ; itconfers immor t al ity not only on gods , but on men . It has , moreover ,
med icinal powers : Soma heals whatever is sick, making the bl ind to see
and the lame to walk . Soma al so stimulates the voice, and is cal led‘lord
of speech’
. He awakens eager thought : he is a generator of hymns , a
leader of poets , a seer among priests. Hence h i s wi sdom is much dwel tupon ; thus he is a wise seer , and he knows the races of the gods .
The intoxicating effect of Soma most emphasized by the poets is the
s timulus i t imparts to Indra in his conflict with hosti le powers. That
Soma invigorates Indra for the fight wi th Vrtra is mentioned in innumerable passages. Through this association Indra
’
s warl ike exploits and cosmic
actions come to be attributed to Soma independently. He is a victor uni
conquered in fight, born for battle. As a warrior he wins al l k inds of
wealth for his worshippers .
Though Soma is several times regarded as dwel ling or growing on the
mounta ins ( like Haoma in the Avesta ) , h is true origin and abode are
regarded as in heaven . Soma i s the child of heaven ,is the mil k of heaven ,
and is purified in heaven . He is the lord of heaven ; he occupies heaven,
and his place is the highest heaven . Thence hewas brought to earth . The
myth embodying this bel ief is that of the eagle that brings Soma to Indra ,and is most ful ly dealt with in .the two hymns iv. 26 and 27 . Being the
most important of herbs, Soma is sa id to have been bom as the lord (pati )of plants, wh ich al so have him as their king ; he i s a lord of the wood
(van aspat i ) , and has generated al l plants. But quite apart from h is con
nexion with herbs, Soma is , l ike other leading gods , cal led a k ing : he i s
a k ing of rivers ; a king of the whole earth ; a king or father of the gods ;
a k ing of gods and mortals . In a few of the latest hymns of the RV. Soma
begins to be mystical ly identified with the moon in the AV. Soma several
times means themoon and in the Brahmanas this identification has al readybecome a commonplace.
We know that the preparation and the offering of Soma (the AvestanHaoma) was already an important feature of Indo-Iranian worship . In both
the RV. and the Avesta it is stated that the stalks were pressed, that the
juice was yel low, and was mixed with milk in both it grows on mounta ins,
and its mythical home is in heaven ,whence it comes down to earth in both
the Soma d‘
raught has become a mighty god and is cal led a k ing ; in both
there a re many other identical mythological traits relating to Soma.
It is possible that the bel ief in an intoxicating divine beverage, the
home of which was in heaven , goes back to the Indo-Eumpean period. It
156 SOMA [viii 48, 2“
antas cp. note on vn . 86,2 b . Soma is here addressed. p rhgas
the Padapatha analysis of th is as p ra agah is evidently wrong,
because in a principal sentence it must be p ra agah (p. 468,20) or in
a subordinate one p ra-agah (p. 469
,20 B) ; here it is the latter ,
because of ca if (p. 229,
Ad i ti s : because Aditi releases from
s 1n (e. g. anagastvam noAd itih k rnotu mayAditi produce s inlessness
f or us,i . 162
, that is,may Soma puri fy us within . Ind av
vocatives in 0 are always gl ven as Pragrhya in the Pada text (0 i ti )even though their Sandhi before vowels may be av or a in the
Samhita text cp. note on 11 . 33 , 3 b . éraust'
i this word occurs onlyhere
,and i ts meaning is uncertain ; the most probable sense is
obedient mare. ray é this analysis of the Padapatha makes the con
struction doubtful because an acc. is wanted as paral lel to d huram ;
nas may be suppl ied then the sense would be ‘as a wi l l ing mare
advances the yoke (of a car), so mayst thou advance (us or the yoke
of the sacrifice) for the atta inment of wealth .
’
rdhyas : root ao. op . of
rd h thr ive.
3 3111111 31 11115711Wign 1;
1131 afifijt fi iqm 2mm0
W13 1 1afifit: 1alfatqm 12mmfi lm 7
5 11 13 1mm3111161611swift
anagram fi a 1wtfitl gfiiz 1w mfiiwu
3 apama somam ; am i'ta abh fima ; We have drunk Soma we have
aganma jy é tir ; avid ama d evan . become immortal we have gone to
k im nunam asmén k rnavad a the light ; we havef ound the gods.
ratih ? What can hosti lity now do to us,
k im u d hurtir,amr ta , marti and what themaliceof mortal man,
a sya O immortal one?
This stanza describes the mental exaltation produced by drinkingSoma. Note the use of the aorist four times and its characteristic
sense (p. 345,
apama : root ao. of pa drink.
Q
ab h fima : root ao. of
bhu become. aganma : root ao. of gain go. jyoti s : ace. of the goal
(197 A avid ama : a ao. of 2 . vi d find. k rnavat : 3 . s . pr . sb . of
k r do (p. amrta : Soma.
vii i. 4s, 5]‘
SOMA 157
8 1131 113 3 3111 t ? 1111 1 nz 1 na 1 e2 1 3 11 1 11'
11-1z i
{fijfi fd l
afterHat sumsi ft fim st'an 11131 1 1551
31 1giua'u
11 n misfi ts? 11311 F116 : 11 Re ina 1afi l s‘
s ina 1 2111”
4 sam no bh ava hrda’
. a p i ta, Dogood toour heartwhen drunk,
Indo ; O Indu ; kindly l ike a f ather, O
p ité va , Soma , sunava sué é vah, Soma, to his son ,thoughtf ul like a
sakh eva sak hya , urusamsa , dh i f r iend to his f riend , 0 f ar-famed
rah,‘
one, prolong our years thatwemay
r .L r
p ra na ayur J i vase , Soma , tar in. live, 0 Soma .
sam hrd é ref reshing to the heart occurs several times ; the empha
s iz ing pcl . d is here added to the dat. p ra s ari : Sandhi , 65 c.
jivase : dat. inf. ofjiv live. tar i s : is ao. inj. from t? cross.
11 i s 111 616 1 and“as?
11 1a 11171 : usin g11513 1
anmW WW : 11
1 r
5 1mema p 1ta yasasa urusyavo,f -L f
ratham na gavah, sam anab a
parvasu ;
té ma rak santu vi srasaé car i
trad ,
uta’
. ma sramad yavayantu in
d avah .
ime : supply ind avas from d. yaéasas ; p. 59 . urusyavas : cp.
var ivovi ttarasya in 1 b. anah a : this seems to be an i rregular pf.
{fi 1m 1u'
1a1z l audz i suwé u“
( 2111 1 fl 1 111atz 1 aa 1 3 1fl 1s 1
113113 1
fi 1n1 1m 1fi i adz 1 s ffi tu1
s a 1m 1m ta inafi 1fi a :
These glorious, f reedom-
giving
(drops) , ye have knit me together
in myjoints like straps a car let
those drop s protectme f rom break
ing a leg and save me f rom
disease.
i 5s SOMA (vi ii . 4s, 5
form from nah bind for nanah a ; cp. g é bh ih samnad dh o as i thou
art bound together with straps (said of a car) ; another irregularity isthe 2 . pl . strong radical vowel (cp. 137
, vi srasas : abl . inf. (ofvi - srams ) with attracted object in the abl . car i trad : p. 337
,3 a .
Note that Pada c is a Tristubh . yavayantu : cs . ipv. of yu separate.
Change in c and d , as often , from 2 . to 3 . prs .
i a fii a at a faaa fa'rfia a faa 1 a 1 a1 1 a
’
faaa 1 av1 1
11aaa 3 151’
s aatafi a : 1 fgfia: 1
w fi fi agw fi a afi a l aaa l auyfi watau au
raf'
ta n an gfs a é u ah fi fi m’
i’
wm ahmm’
ih“( mari a 1 11 1 at 1 gram 3 133 11
6 agnim na 1115. math i tam sam L ike fire kindled by f r iction
d id i pah ; inf lame me ; i llumine us ; make
p ra cak saya ; k ynuh i vasyaso us wea lthier . For then, in thy
nah intoxication , O Soma , I regard
ath a h i te mad a 5, Soma , myself as rich. Enter (into us )manye for p rosp er ity.
revam iva . p ra cara pustim
ach a .
d i d i pas : red. ao. inj. of d i p shine. p ra cak saya : es . of oaks see
(cp. 3 b) . k ynuh i : op . p . 134 ; accented as beginning a sentence.
vasyasas : A . pl . of vasyams (opv. of vasu , 103, 2 a). atha (metri
cal ly lengthened) : then, when inflamed by Soma. revs—in : pred ica
tively wi th manye (196 a ), iva being sometimes added. p ra cara
(metrical ly lengthened) : cp . 2 a, antas ca p rdgah. pustim acha
give us actual prosperity also.
s afa’
i d fi aaaujast flfi d l a l aam q aah
“aunt‘s fi a tfi a va : 1 aa’
1afit l s am e : 1“ma : 1
160 SOMA (vi ii. 48, 8
know about, 202 A c. vid d h i : 2. s . ipv. of vid know. alarti : 3 . s .
pr . int. of y go (174 a). aryas : gen . of ar i foe (cp. p. 8 1,f . n . 1 ;
99,
dependent on anukamam cp. arati s in 3 0 . dub : 2 . s . root
ao. inj. of (15 give.
Q a‘faaaaz afia a
‘
im
1111111111 fi W Efi gaat: 1 11111111111 1 1111 111111 1gsaai : 1
1111aa 11fi111111amfa 1111 1a 1aa11 1 111111111111 aa1f1t1
a a1 qmgaa 1'
é a aai: 11 11: 1 a z 1 1gaa 1gsata1 1§a 1aatzn
9 tuam h i nas tami as , Soma , goph, Since thou art the p rotector of
g é tre-gatre n isasatthanrcak sah. our body, 0 Soma, thou as sur
yat te vayam pram in'
itma vra veyor of men hast settled in
152111, every limb. If we i nf r inge thine
set no mrla susak h a , deva , va ordinances , then be gracious to us
as our good f riend, 0 god, f or
tanuas : gen. of tanfi body. gop e‘
is : 97 A 2 (p. gatre-gatre
189 C . n i -sasattha : 2 . s . pf. of sad ; cerebral ization of s (67 a) ;metrical lengthening of final a (p. a) . yad : p . 242, 3. p ra
min i‘
ima : sb. pr. of p ra-m i . 8 21 : p. 294, b. su - sak h ii ; on the
cerebral ization of 8 see 67 b the accent is that of a Bv. (p. 455, c a ) ;that of a Karmadharaya (p. 455
,d 1) is su-
sak h a ; the former is
irregular ly used in the latter sense. vasyas : the opv. adj. is hereused as an ace. adverb (p. 301 , b).
aggfi q amt aaa
111 111 a ass-11a 1
11a a : a‘
nu11111112161
Han aw"
Iii 11
azgfi n 1aa 1'1 1 a
'
aa 1
a z 1 a1 1 a 1 fcfia 1 1fi fi r’9 1
111m l
aia11 1 1 fi1 1 a a tfa 1
wa i f?“fi lm l fl sfi t’i l flfi lfl ll
viii . 45,11] 161
rdud arena sak h ia saceya , I would associatewith thewhole
y é ma na r i syed , dhar iasva , somef riend who having been drunk
Pi té h would not injureme, 0 lord of the
ayam ya s é mo niadhayi asme, bays. For (the enjoyment of) that
tasma fnd ram p rati ram emi Soma which has been dep osited in
éyuh. us, I app roach Indra to p rolong
our years .
rd fi darena : not analysed in the Padapatha (cp. note on 1 1. 33,5 c) ;
cp . tvam nas tanvb gop'
dh in 9 a . sak hya : 99,2. y é na r isyet
cp. 4 a . h aryaéva : a characteristic epithet of Indra, who as the
great Soma drinker is here addressed. nyadhay i : 3 . s . ao. ps . of
d ha put ; . this (l ike prdgas in 2 a) is i rregularly analysed in the
Padapatha as ui a'
d hay i instead of u i -ad hay i (p. 469 , B) . asme
10 0 . (p . P ragrhya (26 c). emi : 1 . 8 . pr . of i go to. with acc.
(197, A I ) . p rati ram : acc. inf. of cross (p. 336, 2 d ) governingthe ace. éyus (cp . 11 d) . tasma i : for the sake of that to obtain or
enjoy that, final dat. (p . 314, B
1 111 1111 atag f‘
a'
q a11h'a1 anti 1a n: 1 are] : 1a11111 1: 1a 1h
'a1z 1
fataaa fitataj'
g’
iig: 1 fa : 1 111111171 1 5 11111111: 1 1 13'
s”
ara‘
ifi‘
tw f ataafastm an 1 11111: 1 11161111 1“111 311 1 fa
11111111 1111aid 1 1113: 11 1 111111 : 1
11111111 1 1 1a 1m int -1 1 1 111111: 11
ap a ty it asthur anira, amiva Those ai lments have started of ,
n i r atrasan ,tamisi ci r ab h ai suh. diseases have sped away, thep owers
it some asm i'
iii’
i aruh ad vihaya : of darkness have been aflr ighted.
aganma yatra p ratiranta hya h ./Soma has mounted in us with
might : we have gone to wheremen
prolong their years .
asthur : 3. pl . root ao. of s tha. atrasan : the ipf. is here
irregularly used bes ide the two aorists ; cp. the un iform use of the
ao. in 3 . tamisi ci s : this word,as occurring here only, is somewhat
doubtful in sense but it is probably a f . adj. formed from a stem in
4 902 M
N
162 SOMA (vi ii . 4s, 11
afi c added to tami s (inta'
m i s -ra darkness) : cp . 93 a and 95. The
mean ing i s that a draught of Soma
"
drives away disease and the
powers of darkness (cp. 3 b). abh ai sur : s ao. of b h i f ear . it aru
h a t : a ao. of ruh : cp. theEngl ish phrase, go to the head ,aganma
yatra‘we have arr1ved at the point when d is identical with
i . 113,16 d it refers to the renewal of l ife at dawn .
1 1 111 111 138 11 1116 3 5 11111? a z 1a z1a§ u faa1 z1§ai § 1ahaz1
aaaizmeitm a mta’
avh
afi fl fi a afi at fa’an afi 1 11‘
1111a 1afa111 1 fa’
a11 1
asa'
fai awaqa‘li arta n asifi n m uisaah l aua n
12 ye na induh, p i taro , h rtsup i te, The‘
drop drunk in our hearts ,
amarti o martiarh avivé sa , O F athers, that immortal has
tasma i Somaya h avisa vid h entered us mortals, to that Soma
ema we would p ay worship with obla
mrh k é asya sumatau s iama . tion we would abide in his mercy
and good graces.
p itaras : the Fathers, often spoken of as Soma-loving (somya)are cal led to wi tness (op. 13 a) . h rtsu p i tah : cp. 2 a antas ca p ragahand 10 c 37 111} s é mo niad hay i asme.
C13 11 1 11111 fagfit: afaaf fi 11 111 1 11111 1fi gsfit: 1 11111133111: 1
111matgfaa’i an 11am 1 3 11i 1matgraafi 1 1511 air 1 1111111 1 ,
1131a 1 1151 af ast fa‘
aa 1161 1 {fit1staat 1fa‘aa 1
aa 6 1111 1111111 aa11 1 111111 1 11:-ta : 1 1 111 1 111 11
13 tuam , Soma, p it if bh ih s amvi d Thou
,O Soma
,uniting with the
and , Fathers , hast extended thyself over
anu d y iwap ig th iw it tatanth a . Heaven and Earth. To thee as
tasmai ta , I nd o ,
I
h avi sa vid h such, 0 I ndu
,we would p ay
ema worship with ablation : we wouldr r .L
vayam s1ama p atayo r ay inam . be lords of ri ches.
164 SOMA [vi ii . 48, 15
tuam na , I nd a , fi t ibh ih s ajosah surveyor of men,enter us. Do
pah i p ascatad uta va purastat . thou, 0 Indu, protect us behind
and before with thine aids ac
cordant.
a visa : final vowel metrical ly lengthened . Ind a : for I nd av
(21 b) on the Padapatha , cp. note on 2 c. fi tibh i s to be taken with
sajosas . uta va : or and.
FUNERAL HYMN
The RV. contains a group of five hymns (x. 14—18) concerned with deathand the future l i fe. From them we learn that, though burial was al so
practi sed , cremation was the usua l method of disposing of the dead , and was
the ma in source of the mythology relating to the future l ife. Agni conveys
the’
corpse to the other world, the Fathers , and the gods . He is besoughtto preserve the body intact and to burn the goat which is sacrificed as h is
portion . During the process of cremation Agni and Soma are besought to
heal any injury that bird , beast, ant, or serpent may have inflicted on the
body. The way to the heavenly world is a distant path on which Savitr
(i . 35) conducts and Pusan (vi . 54) protects the dead . Before the pyre is
l ighted , the wi fe of the dead man h having lain beside him , arises , and his
bow i s taken from his hand . Th is indicates that in earl ier times his widow
and his weapons were burnt with the body of the husband . Passing al
by the path trodden by the Fathers, the spi rit of the dead man goes to
realm of l ight, and meets with the Fathers who revel wi th Yama in
highest heaven. Here, uniting with a glorious body, he enters upon a
of bl iss which i s free from imperfections and bodily frai lties, in wh ich
desires are fulfi lled, and which is passed among the gods , especially in th
presence of the two kings Yama and Varuna .
x . 14. Metre : Tmstubh ; 13. 14 . 16. Anustubh ; 15 . Erb ati .
a ti‘
tfixaifi 11am fl i rtsfi ner: nwinamum 1
3m timid amiai
mi “( NHstand gas 11
fi fmaidmmad: 1 as}: 1
asm ai: 1W'
TFU“
fi gswmflm336mm a ttend
-via l swarm
awn"
( Ti limi l sfim‘133st 11
x. 14,2] FUNERAL HYMN 165
pareyivamsam pravato mah’
ir
anu ,
bahfi bhyah pantham anupaspas
anam ,
Vaivasvatam samgamanam Ja
nanam ,
Yamam rajanam h avisa d a
vasya .
a is a J agatI (see'
p. 445, f. n. p arey ivamsam : pf. pt. act.
i y ivamsam (89 a) of i go, with para away. p ravatas : the steep
paths leading to the h ighest heaven where Yama dwel ls cp. ix. 113,
8, yatra raja Va ivasvaté , yatravar é d h anam d ivah tatra mam
am f tam k rd h i where the king, the son of Vivasvant, and where the
secret place of heaven is, there do thou (Soma) make me immorta l.mah is : A . pl . f. of math great. pantham : 97
,2 a . V aivasvatam
Yama
fi
is in several pas sages cal led by this patronymic ; cf. al so 5 c,
and x. 17, 1 : Y amasya mata, p aryuh yamana maho jaya V ivasvatah the mother of Yama being married as the wife of the great
Vivasvant. b ah li bhyas : for the many that die and go to the other
world. anu-p asp aéanam : pf. pt. A. of spas see. samgamanam
as gathering the dead together in his abode. rajanam Yama is several
times cal led a king , but never express ly a god . duva sya : addressed
to the sacrificer.
afi fit q fiflwfi’
rfi-fi g auzmz lw l wm l fi fig l
fimmjfi t tiafian s l a 1m 1n§fin 1wdmfi§ 1sfi fi 1“fi t a : fi ts
-
etzum aa 1 az'
1gfi'1fi1at : 1m tg
-
g: 1
m m zm éwg a n n nan-
vim zmwi zmfi lm z n
2 Y amo no gati im p ratham é vi Yama hasfirstfound out thewayved a for us : this pasture is not to be
nai sagavy ii ti r ap abh ar tavé 11 . taken away. Whither our former
yatra nah pury e p i tarah pa fa thers have p assed away, thither
rey i i r , those tha thave been born since (pass
and.jajfi anah p ath ia anu svab. away) along their severalpaths.
Him who has passed away along
themighty Steeps and has sp ied out
the path for many, him the son of
Vivasvant, the assembler of peop le,
Yama the king, do than p resent
with ablation.
166 FUNERAL HYMN [x. 14, 2
Yamas a explains what is said of Yama in the preceding stanza.
vived a : pf. of 2 . vid find. gavyfi t i s used figuratively to express the
abode which Yama has found for those who die . ap a-bh artavai
dat. inf. with double accent (p . 452,
here it has a passive force
(p. 335,a ) . b is most natural ly to be taken as forming a hemistich
wi th a,not as beginn i ng a new sentence antecedent to yatra . The
exact sense of cd is uncertain owmg to the doubtful interpretation of
ena andjajfi anas . The former word is probably corr. to yatr a , and
the latter the frequent pf. pt. A. of jan generate. I t might be from
jha know (from wh ich, however, this pt. does not seem to occur
elsewhere) : the meaning would then be,‘knowing the way thereby
because Yama found it for them . svas : by their own p aths,
each by h is own,each going by himself.
1?“F ifi i fsfi fifg nuts? 1fi : 1 2m: 1wfé t zsfit: 1
fi wfafi aifii é rama : 1 su rfs: 1 assi sts : 133W : 1
ma i ai atggfi é gam flTi l fl l affl t lm t l a l fl l
( 6113156 6 12121173 xterm 11 germ.
W 1fi 1w t 1wfi l q§ fwu
3 Matal i Kavya1r , ,Yam6 Afi g i ro Matali having grown strong with
b h i r , the Kavyas, Yama with the Angi
t aspatir Rk vabh ir vavrdha rases, Brhaspati with the Bhvans,nah, whom the gods have made strong
yams ca d eva vavrdhur , y é ca and who (have made strong)
d evan , the gods, some rejoice in the call
svaha any é , svad hayany é m ad Svaha, others in the ofierzng to the
anti . dead.
Mdtal i : mentioned on ly here one of seven m. stems in i (100, 1 b).
Sayana thinks th is means Indra because that god’
s charioteer (in
later times) is matal i and therefore mfital i (N. of m'
ata l in) is he
who is accompanied by mata l i’
but the accent of words in in is
invariably on that syllable (p. 454 B a) . Kavyai s : name of a group
of ancestors the inst. used in the sociative sense (199 A A'
ii g i a
168 FUNERAL HYMN [x. 14,
fasten s-81 21: fim
’
a faate fi a 1 s § 1a z 1 ffim 1fi 1
«tama atém fans-i 11“
s tem vi 1af€fi 13 11 1famat11
5 A'
fig irobh ir a gah i yajfi iyebh ir ;Yama , V airfi pai r iha mad a
y asva .
V ivasvantam huve, yah p i tate,asmin yajfi é b arh isi an isadya .
Angi rob h i s : sociative inst. (199 A a gah i : root ao. ipv. of
gam (148 , V ai rfi p a l s : sociative inst. ; this patronym ic form
occurs only h ere ; Vi rfi p a occurs once in the s ing. as the name of
one who praised Agn i (vi ii . 64 , and three times in the pl . as
of seers closely connected with the Angirases , as sons of heaven
or of Angiras . huve : l . s . pr. A. of h ii call. yas : supply asti .
c is defective by one syl lable (p. 441, 4 B a). b arh i si 5 : to be taken
together (cp. 176, l , n i sad ya : gd . of sad. si t ; agreeing with
V ivasvantam . (cp. it is not the priest who sits down
on the strew,but the god ; d occurs in 111. 35
,6 as appl ied to
Indra .
e, fi rst-
( tit =1: ffiafi adi eu
whim? avianGhana: 1
firstas {huh s tamin a
wfit if? man'
s win 11
6 Ahgi raso, nah p i taro , Navagva, T he Angirases, our f athers, the
Ath arvano, Bh fgavah , somia Navagvas, the Atharvans, the
sah Bhrgus, theSoma-loving wewould
t é sam vayam sumatau yajfi i abide in thefavour, the goodgraces
of them the adorable ones.
ap i bha'
dre saumanas é s iama .
Come hither with the adorable
Angirases ; 0 Yama, with the sons
of Virupa do than here rejoice. I
call Vivasvant who is thy father,
(let him rejoice), having sat himselfdown on the strew at this sacrifice.
i fs-
( q : 1 =1: 1mt: 1misfi t : 1“film: 1 ar ia : 1 sha rd: 1
twin IHam gi n-
«fl 1affi ahm1,
wfit’
a l tfim fi lwm n
x . 14, s] FUNERAL HYMN 169
nah p itarah : in apposition to the names cp. 4 b. Navagvas &c.,
names of ancient priestly famil ies . ap i syama to be taken together ;ap i as to takep art in.
m fi fivfixfitzfi fig u lr fimmfi l vfwsfii z lgfifiiufl at a t i s?first: Fi g: 1 as 1 a : 1 i s
"
1fl at: 1ntzsgg u
s en ( Tatar Is uz usa'm m u1
”
( Tatar 1e as t 1 am 1
anWTfi l -a‘
i‘
ni v fisa 11 21mmwants 1W 1a 123 a 11
7 p r é h i , p ré h i path i bh ih pfi rvi é Go f orth, go forth by those
bh i r , ancientpaths on which our fathers
yatra nah pfirve p itarah p a of old have p assed away. Thou
reyuh. shalt see both kings rejoicing in theub h é _ rajana svad haya mad ofier ing to the dead
,Yama and
anti», Varuna the god.
Yamam p asyasi Varunam ca
d evam .
p r é h i pr é h i : addressed to the dead man ; note that this repeated
cd. vb . is not treated as an Amred-ita in fact only one repeated
verbal form is so treated in the RV. , viz . p i b a-p ib a (p. 282
, g) . Notethe remarkable al l iteration in a b ; cp. the repetition of -a in c and
of -am in d ; of a in 9 c d,and of -au in 10—12 . pfirve : prn . adj.
(p. rajana : note that both Yama and Varuna are cal led kings ,
but Varuna alone a god (cp . note on 1 d) . svad haya : cp. 3 d.
pasyas i : 2 . s . pr. sb . of p as see (cp. p.
c é m fm ze afifi umm l fqgsfitzmmwfid l
W flfi i fifl i l
fsawtaai HW Q fiend 1’
wasra 1gvtz l wsta 1W 1
i i {Q 1
wa l aa i l gsasit: 11
170 FUNERAL HYMN (x . 14, s
8 sam gach asva p itf bh ih, sam Un ite with the F athers,unite
Yam é na , with Yama, with the reward of thyi stap fi rté na p arame vioman . sacr ifices a nd good works in the
h i tvéyavad yam p fi n ar as tam highest heaven. L eaving blemish
é h i behind go back to thy home ; unite
sam g ach asua tauli a suvarcah . with thy body, ful l of vigour.
i sta-pfi rté na : note that this old Dvandva cd. (see vocab . ) is not
analysed in,
the Pada text.’
p aramé : the abode of Yama and the
Fathers is in the h ighest heaven ; mad hye d iva}; in x . 15, 14 .
vi oman : loc. without i (p. h i tvaya : gd. ,163
,3. astam : the
home of the Fathers ; cp. 9 b—d. tanva suvareah : being free from
disease and fra ilties,the dead man un ites with a body wh ich is com
plete and without imperfections. The AV. often speaks of such beingthe state of th ings in the next l i fe. In 11 the
'
rare resolution of v
in - sva is required.
‘
wd l ra l fin ra l fm a l s fim
$5 11 1171fimfi madam 3 1a: 1
aw1ma 1fimtz 1m a 1=ma l
mfi émwamfiwfii 11 wé zsfii : 1 Eli sfil z 1wasfiiz 1 far
si s a l
2m: 1{fi rst 1wasafi a l fi 11
9 apeta, vi ta , vi ca sarp atato «Begone, disperse, slink of f rom
asmé. etam p i taro lok am ak ran . here for him the F athers have
ah obh ir ad bh i r ak tub h ir vi p repared this place. Yama gives
ak tam him a resting-
p lace distinguished
Y amo d ad ati avasanam a sma i . by days and wa ters and nights.
Th is stanza is addressed to the demons to leave the dead man
alone. vi ta : for vi i ta (see p. 464,17
,l a). asmai : accented
because emphatic at the beginning o f a Pada, but unaccented at the
end of d (cp . p. 452,A c). ak ran : 3 . pl . act. root ao. of k r make.
ah obh ir ad bh ih : cp. ix. . 113 , where the joys of the next world a re
172 FUNERAL HYMN [x. 14,11
anatfia'
ufit i fs aufia 1m 1vft 1§®1n amm aim wflfi é d fifs n a ffi 1 a 1 31€1 1 =smfiam a 1
fi fe 11
win te suanan,Y ama
, rak si ta
rau ,
caturak sau path i rak si nrcak sa
sau ,
tab h iam enam par i d eh i , rajan :
svasti casma anamivam ca
dh eh i .
yau : an in this and the fol lowing duals for a, as in 10. npea
k sasau : as Yama’
s messengers (cp. 12 b) . b is a J agati (cp. 10 b) .
enam : the dead man . d eh i ipv. of (15. give) : that they may
guide him to Yama’
s abode . d h eh i : 2 . s . ipv. of dhaput.
as sw mdggsi await “fi rst 1 aga i n1 3 313161?
w d ngfi l amu aa’rmvfih
mas t“?as? Fit 1“manta 1 7511311 (p
i
ta 1
Win-
1111511213m 11 371:1alarmswimwar1{s 1m n
12 urfi nasav, asutr‘
pa, udumb a lau , Broad-nosed, life-stea ling, the
Yamasya d fi tau carato jah an’
a two as messengers of Yama wander
anu ; among men ; may these two give us
tév asmab hyam d rsaye sfir iaya back here to day ausp icious life that
p l inar d atam asum ad y é habh ad wemay see the sun.
ram .
urfi -nasau : the second syl lable is metrical ly lengthened ; on the
cerebral ization of the dental 11 see 65 b here we have the normal use
of an as av before a vowel within a Pada ; broad-nosed,that is , keen
scented . asutfpa u on the Sandh i see 22 ; the l iteral meaning
delighting in lives impl ies del ighting in tak ing them, while they
Give him over to those two, 0
King, that are thy dogs, 0 Yama ,
the guardians, four-eyed, watchers
of the p ath, observers of men
bestow on him welfare and health.
x. 14, 14] FUNERAL HYMN 173
wander among men as Yama’
s messengers . udumb alau : th is word
occurs here only, and there is no means of throwing any l ight on i ts
sense ; the au,of th is dual
,as of d fi tau , for a, shows the same
irregularity as in the preceding stanzas . caratas : in order to seek
out the l ives of those about to go to the abode of Yama . asma
bhyam : dat . pl . of aham . d réaye : dat. inf. , with attracted ace
(200 B datam : 3 . du. ipv. root ao. of d a give ; as having already
marked us for their victims,let them give back our l ife to-day.
3W filfi'
flfifl W 1€1fia tgqa 1
muttsis-nu
“
sr 1 mud 1wa s 1 star: 1
mm1s 1W : 1 1
wffigfid’t 31m : 11 sunsets : 1 s tatus : 11
13 Yamaya s é mam sunu ta , F or Yama p ress the Soma ,to
Yamaya'
juhuta h avih Yama ofier the oblation -to Yuma
Y amam h a yajfi é gach ati , goes the sacrificewell p rep ared, with
A gni d fi to aramk rtah . Agni as its messenger.
juhuta : with metrical ly lengthened final vowel ; 2 . pl . ipv. of
hu sacrifice addressed to those officiating at the sacrifice. Y amam
ace. of the goal (197, 1 ; of. 204, 1 b). Agn id fi ta s : the idea u nder
lying this figurative expression is that the smoke of the sacrificial fire
goes up to heaven Where Yama dwel ls .
34613 v i f fus s 1
fi é mg: a f rai l 11
14 Yamaya gh rtavad d havi r To Yama ofier the abla tion
juhota , p ra ca t isth ata ; abounding in ghee, and step forth ;set no d evé su ayamaa may he guide us to the gods that
d i rgham ayub p rajivase . wemay live a long lif e.
W id l gasé d l s fi t l
i i ih m m fusa l
un an gag'l
'
an auul
afi m fl u m a’
ia’
i’
r 11
174‘
FUNERAL HYMN (x. 14,14
juh é ta : the irr. strong form (p. 144,B. 3 a ) with a long vowel in
the second syl lable is here uti lized for metrical purposes , as the
regular form Jub a ta has its final vowel lengthened in 13 b . p ra
t i sth ata : step forward, in order to offer the oblation ; cp. the use of
p ra b h p br ing forward an oblation . ii. yamat inj. of root ao. of yam
extend ; this form constitutes a play on the name of Yama. nas
ace, governed by a y amad ; cp . ix. 44
,5,s é nah Somo d evé su a
y amat may he, Soma, guide“
us to the gods ; on the loc.,cp . 204 B 1 b.
éyus : cognate A p rajivase : cp . p. 463,f. n . 8 . The
mean ing of cd i s may he keep us (the survivors) to the worship of
the gods (and not lead us to the Fathers), so that we may enjoy longl i fe on earth (cp . 12 c
,d).
c111Erma minus want1mini mum“( fi gs saha?
‘
( fi h samlW ?
i s an 331751321: affirm {g a l 1a ffirm: 1g i ant: 1
{£6t awash 11 lin 1uterin eat: 11
15 Yamaya madhumattamam To Yama the king ofier the most
rajfi e h avyam juhotana . honied oblation. This obeisance is
i dam nama f 8 1b h yah pfi rvajé f or the seers born of old, the ancient
b h i ah, makers of the path.
p firvebhyah p ath ik fd bh i ah .
juhotana : aga in the strong form to suit the metre (cp. 14 b) .
p ath ik i‘
d bh yas : because they were the first, after Yama had shown
the way, to tread the path leading to Yama’
s abode (the p itryah a the
road of the F athers) . This stan’
za is a Brhat‘
i‘
in the middle of
Anustubhs , differing from them only by the addition of four syl lables
in the th ird Pada (see p. 444, 9 b) .
s agas : Rafa fa satghfu: 1Rafa 1
fi ffi’
i’
f fifi sd a; 1 3 31 : 1 truism {61 1gen 1
fi gm’rq ahwa its fa sqwwas? 1wa tts 1
W at w wfs‘ai ué i mn ufi lmsfém 11
176 PITARAS [x. 15,1
PITARAS
Two hymns (x. 15 and 54) are addressed to the Pitaras or Fathers, the
blessed dead who dwel l in the th ird heaven , the th ird or highest step of
Visnu. The term as a rule appl ies to the early or fi rst ancestors , who fol
lowed the ancient paths, seers who made the paths by wh ich the recent
dead go to join them. Various groups of ancestors are mentioned, such a s
the Angirases and Atharvans, the ,Bhrgus and Vasisthas , who are identica l
in name with the priestly famil ies associated by trad ition with the composi
tion of the Atharvaveda and of the second and seventh Mandalas of the
Rigveda . The Pitaras are classed as higher , lower , and middle, as earl ier
and later , who though not always known to their descendants, are known to
Agni . They revel with Yama and feast with the gods . They are fond of
Soma, and thirst for the l ibations prepared for them on ea rth , and eat the
offerings along with h im . They come on the same car as Indra and the
gods. Arriving in thei r thousands they range themselves on the sacrificia l
grass to the south , and drink the pressed draught. They receive oblations
as their food . They are entreated to hear, intercede for , and protect their
worshippers , and besought not to injure their descendants for any sin
humanly committed aga inst them . They are invoked to g ive riches ,
ch i ldren , and long l i fe to their sons , who desire to be in their good graces.
The Vasisthas are once col lectively implored to help their descendants.
Cosmica l actions , l ike those of the gods, are sometimes attributed to the
Fathers. Thus they are said to have adorned the sky with stars, to have
placed darkness in the night and l ight in the day ; they found the l ight
and generated the dawn . The path trodden by the Fathers (p i tryana) isdifferent from that trodden by the gods (d evayana ) .
x . 15 . Metre : Tr is tub h ; 11 J agati’
.
va l traw l 3 161?c “is ”auti sm: first: Fi end: 1 a ?“mum: 1fi at : 1fi end: 1
fl amm aifi fl fi adm fi fi gn a gmnm s—mm
Ra ma E1a z lm 1fwtz 1 s’
é g u
1 l i d i ratam avara ,l i t parasa , L et the lower , let the higher, let
i in mad hyamah p itarah somi themiddlemostSoma-lovingFathers
asah ar ise let those F a thers who,
asum ya iy ii r avrk é p tajfié s , f riendly, knowing right, have gone
té no avan tu p itaro havesu . to life eternal, favour us in our
invocations.
x. 15, 2] PITARAS
l i d i ratam note that ed. verbs are often repeated bymeans of the
prp. (here l i d twice) alone . avare (on the dec.,see 120 c 1) &c . :
these three words refer to the P i trs dwell ing in the three divisions of
the world , earth, air , heaven (cp . y é p é rth ive rajasi in 2 c ; and thedivis ion of heaven into three
,the lowest, the middlemost
,and the
th ird'
in wh ich the Fathers s it : AV. xvi ii . 2, Sayana thinks
that here the degrees of their hol iness is meant,but in this same
stanza,when it appears in the AV. (xviii . 1, he thinks that
degrees of merit or of age are intended ; but degrees of age are
express ly mentioned in 2 b by purvasas and l iparasas . asum : l ife
in th e heavenly world, immortal l ife (the Pitaras are cal led immortal
i l l AV. vi . 41,3) as Opposed to terrestrial l ife. iyur : 3. pl . pf. act.
of i go.
a gate”
! a s wim fig: 131 111d (
“Sign fadvu
ii atTi signal'
s fig 11
2 i dam p i tfb h yo n ame astu adya,
y é pfirvaso , ya li p arasa i y lih ;
y é p arth ive rajas i é. n isatta,
y é va n l'
l nam suvrjanasu vi k sli .
pfirvasas : in x. 14, 2. 7 the prn. form p l’
irve is used (see 120,i y l
'
l r : in x. 14, 2 . 7 the more distinctive cd . p ar ey l'
l r appears. a
n i sattas (pp . of sad sit, cp. 67 a, b ; cp. a nisadya in x . 14,
pdrth ive rajas i : in the atmospheric’
region above the earth ; here
the P i taras in the air intermediate between heaven and earth are
meant,whi le in b and 11 those in heaven and on earth respectively
are intended . suvrjanasu vik s li : cp. the frequent mimus i su vi k sli
human settlements, with reference to the Fathers present at the
funeral offerings on earth .
{mmjgmtu wtu w M fi n
3 1g§tm 1fi l s tttmz 1 §gz 1
51 1 al fit‘21 1 fi'rfu 1W 1fi l sdmz 1
31 1 3 1 1 gmmgsgaatq u11
L et this obeisance bemade to day
to the Fathers who have dep arted
earlier and later, who have seated
themselves in the terrestria l a ir
or who are nowin settlements with
fa ir abodes .
i 7s PITARAS [x. 15,3
3W filfi fi fi l“
areas
ants a faults a filw’
i : 1
s féflfjii s mut gas :
Wi t-“
d fuel s mdfim : 11
3 éham p itin suvidatrali l avi ts i ,
napatam ca vik ramanam ca
V i se ob
barh i sad o y é svad haya sutasya
b hajanta p i tvas , ta ihagam i
ethan
d-avits i (1. s . A . s ao. of 2. vid find) I have induced to come to
this offering. napatam : i t is somewhat uncer tain who is meant by
th is according to Prof. Geldner’
s ingenious explanation Yama (withwhom the Pitaras are associated) is intended, because i l l the VS.
(xxix . 60) Visnu (here coupled with napatam ) is called the husband
of Aditi,whose son (TS. vi . 5
,6,2) was Vivasvant, the father of Yama
(see note on x . 14, 1) but it is doubtful whether th is later statement
was part of the mythological be l ief of the RV.,where Yama is the
grandson of Tvastr (x . 17,
On the other hand,the word may be
used el l iptical ly to des ignate Agn i sah aso napatam (Agni is cal led
naptre sah asvate in vi i i . 102,7) sahasah s i
'
l n lim son of strength, a
frequent epithet of Agn i , for which once (vi . 4 , 4) sfi no son alone is
used in an Agn i hymn ; and below (9 c) Agni is invoked to come
with the Fathers : agne yah i suvi datreb h ih p itfb h ih. There is
here also a good example of the fanc iful interpretations of Sayana
V i shor yajfi asy a ) napatam vinasabhavam) the non-destruction
of the sacr ifice. vik ramanam : Visnu’
s third step the h ighes t
heaven), where the Fathers dwel l (cp. i . 154,
b h ajanta : 3 . pl .
inj. A. of bh aj share, with partitive gen . (202 A e). p i tvas : gen . of
p it i l (p. d-gaml s thas : accent, p . 453, 9 A b.
W I m 1 fi1§=l 1 gsfq§ah 1
wfafim
711115111 1 a 1 famfim 1 a 1 far
fi lm
até sut: 131 1m ai 1gaet 1
us'rf-a 1 furs : 1h 1 {smuwtfi lsl z 11
I have won hither tlwbaimtifulF athers and the grandson and the
wide stride of Visnu they (who, s it
ting on the strew,sha ll p artake of
the p ressed dr ink with the ofi ering
to the dead, comemost gladly here.
180 PITARAS [x. 15,6
3 113 11 andaffirm? faua“
a wa i t 1 anti 1grams : 1f=1mat1
fi an fi l vjmfiq fil§1 1 {m 1 aaa 1wfu 1gm'
lu 1 ffi 1
m fs'fil s first : 3151 fl a
il m 1 i
°sm 1filat : 13591 =1z1
as amt: nasal aria 11 2171 1 a : 1 331111: 1as tral 1EUR 11
6 acya Janu ,d ak s inaté ni sadya , Bending the knee, sitting down
imam yajfiam abh i grui ta visve ; to the south do ye a ltgreet favour
ma h ims i sta , p itarah , k é na cin ably this sacr ifice ; injure us not,
11 0, 0 Fathers
,by reason of any sin
yad va agah purusata karama . thatwemay have committed against
you through human frailty.
d-acya (gd. of ac bend) : note that the suffix -ya is much oftener
long than short but i n the Pada text it 1s always short. janu
probably the left knee ; cp. the SB. i i . 4,2,2 , where the gods bend
the l ight knee, the Fathers the left knee. In r ites connected with the
dead,the auspicious direction is reversed, left being substituted for
righ t. d ak s inatas : to the r ight (of the vé d i a ltar), that is , to the
south, because the south is the region of Yama and the Pitaras .
grh i ta : 2 . pl . ipv. of 1 . gr sing. h imsi sta : 2 . pl . inj. i s ao. of
h ims injure. k ena c i d yad égah for k é na ci d figasa yad ,the sub
stantive being put into the rel . instead of the principal clause. vas
dat. of disadva ntage (p. 314 B purusata : inst. s . identical in
form with the stem (97, 1 , p . k arama : 1 . pl . root ao. sb .
(p. 171) in the sense of an indefinite past.
9 w h i chm hfi avfit‘
( fii an mi] watts 1
gas : fl aw s: as
11W a {sl it su m11
7 fis inaso aruninam upasth e Sitting in the lap of the ruddy
ray im dh atta d asl'
l se mar tiaya . (dawns) bbstowwealth on thewor
snaf fl e : 1“11117 1111 1 s usé t 1
t faa ma m’
fi'
meitm
331111: 1first : 1 ad 1 set: 1
m wm fi w‘
s m fi'
m g‘ma
9] PITARAS 18 1
putr é bh iah, p i taras , tasya vas shipp ing mortal. T0 your sons, 0
vah F athers, p resent a share of those
pra yach ats ; ta’
. ih é rjam d a r iches ; so do ye here bestow
d hata . strength.
é sinasas : i rr. pr . pt. A. of as sit : 158 a . aruninam : aruna
ruddy is ,the colour of dawn ,
and the f . of this adj. sometimes
appears as an epi thet of the dawns that these are heremeant is al so
indicated by vi i . 9 1 ; 63, 3 , where Agni and Sarya are said to
awake or arise usasam upasthat from the lap of the dawns. dh atta
and d ad h ata here both the regular and the irr . ipv. of dh a are used
(cp . note on 4 d). tasya vasvah : referring to ray im in b ; on the
form of the gen . see p. 8 1 . té : anaphoric use (cp. p. 294 b).
c a a : litt'
filat: s’
lm é i 331 1a : 1 if 1fl at : 1 f raud: 1
«i ts? {1111171121afits l : 1 ai m-
rs? 1mustfi‘am afi
'ls l : 1
afiiziu: ams saha fifil’
: 1 an: 1m um s : 1sa’
ffit1
sugars:malaria. 11“sums ausfit: 1afasafimm“
as; 11
8 yé nah p i'
i rve p i tarah somiaso , Those f oref athers of ours, the
anl'
l h ir é somap i tham Vas isthah, Soma-loving, the Vasisthas, who
t é bh ir Y amah samraran é h av f are af ter him to the Soma
imsi , draught, with them let - Yama,
usann usad bh ih, p rati kamam sharing their gifts , eat the obla
attu . tions atp leasure, he the eager with
them the eager.
anu - l'
l h i r é : the derivation and meaning are somewhat doubtful ;
most probably pf. of vah drive,in th is case meaning who have driven
af ter Yama to the Soma -draught ; it may possibly come from l'
i h con
sider, then mean ing who have been considered worthy of the Somadraught. Vas isthas : as one of the groups of ancient seers . sam
raranas (pf. pt. A . of re. give) : sharing with them their gifts to their
descendants (cp. 7 b c).
Q 51 atgfié’
qa l 313m 331 1 figs: 1§asal 1 serum: 1
s’
lfl fag: Ffivtasm‘
l £ 51: 1 shalsfazf: 1 shamans 1311541: 1
182 PITARAS (x . 15,9
3 1151was gfgg’
afil t é l sz‘SIT 1 3 1731 1 tufts 1 gsfgfi fil z 1
s ift: 6551: filgfité fmfw': 11 3 151331
a id: 131151: 1fg‘
gtfiiz 1afieusfai : 11
9 y é tatrsl i r d evatrajé h amanah otravi d ah stomatastas é ark a lh
é gne yah i suvi datrebh ir arva l'
i
satyaih k avyaih p i tf bh ir gh ar
masad bh ih .
tatrsl i r : pf. of trs , with long red . vowel ( 139 , such vowels
regularly appear in their short form in the Pada text (cp. note on
i i i . 59,1 b) . d evatr
'
e‘
l : in heaven ; tra is one of the suffixes wh ich
in the Pada text is separated ,being treated as the second member of
a cd . stoma-tastasas : this Tp.,f ashioned withp raise, otherwise used
with mati hymn, is here appl ied to persons and thus comes to have
the sense of a Karmadharaya Bv. (189 , 1) ta sta-stomasas ; the
latter kind of cd .,with a pp . as first member , does not exist in
the RV. arkai s : to be taken with the preceding word by means
of songs. arvéh : 93 b. k avya l s :‘
th is word occurs in on ly two
other passages , the original meaning apparently being k avi wise
(cp . k avya-tawisdom) here i t may be intended to denote a particular
group of Fathers (cp. x . 14, gh armasad b h i s probab ly in heaven ;
cp . x . 16,10
,s é gh armam invat p arame sadhasth e may he (Agn i)
further the gharma in the highest abode ; th is word as wel l as jeh a
manas may be inte‘
hded to contrast with tatrsl i r ; cp . vn . 103,9 .
31 am id Erat i l {film
{its 133 : {mi Tatar: 1
3 11731 al ts use?2613?f ig:
723: figfddfifl fé : 11
W'
ho, gasp ing, have thirsted
among the gods, knowing oblatio ns ,
having p raise f ashioned for them
with songs with them thebountiful
F athers,the true, the wise that s it
at the hea ting vessel, come hither ,
0 Agni .
31 1Ha rd: 1 sfirzswi : 1sfazsm: 1
{%W1§§ z 1m am 39 1711: 1
=411 1 afi 1mf3 1am 1aasa€n
at : 1£31: 1 fqgsfii : 1Epil lfi fit: 11
PITARAS [x. 15,l l
Agn i -svattas : with the voc. accent on the first syl lable ; the
ordinary accent would be Agn i -svatté s l ike other Tps . formed wi th
Agn i , but such eds . with a pp. as second member usual ly accent the
first (cp. p. 456,2 a ) . svatté s pp. of svad sweeten (op. 67 b). sad ah
s ad ah : itv . cd . (p . 282 a ; p . 454,10 a), governed by sad ats .
sad ata : 2 . pl . ipv. a ao. of sad sit (147, sup rani tayas : having
good guidance, well led, coming in good order ; the Pada text does not
recogn ize the cerebralization of the n (65 a , b) . atta, atha : final a
metr ical ly lengthened . p ra-
yatani : pp. of yam . d adhatana : i rr .
strong form (cp. note on 7 d) and suffix tana (p.
as slawi faaa’
l atria}? an 1“
a? 1ma: 1mafi a: 1
wisemfitfigu'
l li'rafih s laiy ssnfih gljfifilh aam
mat: fig-
get: 15mm ?“
dual 11 1 1 31: 16130 21: 1w t 1 11 1“sits. ati s natal sa
'
l’
fii 11
arts 1 am 261 1 I NElHT 1 sah’
fist11
12 tuam , Agna , i l ité , jataved o, Thou, 0 Agni , having been im
avad d h avyén i surabh in i k rtw . p lored, 0 J atavedas, hast conveyed
p radah p itltbhyah ; svad haya té the oblations, having made them
ak sann ; fragrant. Thou hast p resented
ad dh i tvam , d eva , p rayata h av them to the F athers ; wi th the
1mm f unera l ofier ing they have eaten
them ; do thou, 0 god, eat the
oblations p roficred.
i l itas : by us . jata-ved as : a very frequent and exclusive epi thet
of Agn i it is a Bv. as its accent shows , meaning having knowledge ofcrea ted things as explained by the RV. itself : visva ved a janima
jatavedah J atavedas knows al l creations (vi . 15, 13) this is a lso the
explanation of Sayana here : jatam , sarvam jagad , vetti , i ti jataved ah. avat : 2. s . s ao. of vah carry (144, d h avyan i : for
h avyén i k rtvi ; gd. of k r (163 , adas : 2 . s. root ao. of d a
(148 , 1 a). ak san : 3. pl . root ao. of gh as eat (p. 170, e) . ad d h i : 2 .
s . ipv. of ad eat.
x. 15, 14]'
PITARAS 185
fi hs fi lafi'
fi a’
az fi 1a 1rs l fuatz la 1a 1=1 1ss 1
wis fazl ai’
s a a ltfi lm aml a l fasn zlfiusl rtawsl lmEi
'
a'mfl fa Rvita
-
Q'
s : Refit?! 1
amffiéu’
ga'ri qua 11 a ll 1Em 1afit 13 1mac
'
s-
g: 1
amfit: 1W K ! gestalt l aw 11
y é‘
ca i ha p itaro y é ea né ha, Both the Fathers who are here
yflms ca vi dma yar‘
h 11 ca net and who are not here, both those
p ravidma, whom we know and whomwe know
tuam vetth a yati t é , jataved ah ; not,thou knowest how many they
svadh ébh i r yajfiam sfik rtam are, 0 J atavedas enjoy the sacri
jusasva . fice well p repared with funeral
y é ca : supply Santi . vidma 1 . pl . pf. of vi d know (p. 154,3) the
1 . pl . pr . is vidmas . yémé ca : Sandhi,40 a . yamu : 39
, and p . 25,
f. n . 2 . p ra-vidma : know exactly. vettha : 2 . s . pf. of vid know
(p. 154, yati : cp. 1 18 a . té : supply Santi .
f
a s ifi gral 3 3 17113 319 1 31 1wfiqsgm : 1311 1
wi ll fga: (swatmass 1 m'
i'
l 1 fgaz 1emwt 1m dfi 1
as : s nmg'filfifijal an: 1wa s wg
’
fi hfi lmmumdm
’
aé tW 6 ! 11 ma rsha l Hau'1w as 11
yé Agni d agd h é. y é anagni Those who, burnt with fire and
d agd h a not burnt withfire, are exhilarated
madhye d ivah svad haya mada by thefuneral Offering in themidst
yante , of heaven, as sovereign ruler do
té b h ih sn are asun i tim etam thou with themfit his body accord
yathavaéam tan l i am k a lpa ing to thy power f or this sp irit
yasva . guidance.
y é anagn id agdhah : that i s,buried. mad hye d ivah : note that
the Fathers enjoy in heaven the funeral offering conveyed to them by
186 PITARAS (x .
Agni , as wel l as eating the oblations offered them on the sacrificia l
grass t é bh i s : in association with them (199 ,A as they
know the path of the dead . svar ét : as sovereign lord who acts
according to h is wi l l (yathavaéam) ; the subject is Agni who is
addressed in 9 c and 10 0 (Agne) , and in 12 a and 13 c (jataved as )or mentioned in 11 a (Agn i svattas ), and in th is s tanza itsel f
(Agnid agd has ). tanvam k alp ayasva : the body of the deceased ;
the words svayam tanvam k alp ayasva (VS. xxi i i. 15) are ex
plained in SB. X111. 2,7,11 : svayam rfi parp k urusva yad f s
'l am
i chas i assume thyself the form that thou desirest ; cp. also i ii . 48,4 b
and vi i . 101 , 3 b yathavasam tanvam cak ra ( z cak re) esah he hastaken a body accordingto his will the corresponding Pada in the AV.
(xvi ii . 3, 59 ) reads’
yathavasam tanvah k a l payati may he fashion
our bodies according to his wil l ; cp . al so in the following funeral hymn
(x. 16,4 ) the hemistich : yas te sivé s tanvo, jataved as , téb h i r
vah a inam suk lf'tam u lokam with thosewhich are thy ausp icious bodies,
0 J atavedas , conduct him to the wor ld of the righteous. asun i tim etamdependent, like tanvam , on k a l p aya sva : p repare his body and this
sp irit-leading p repare it for this spirit- leading ; Agn i conducts the
sp iri t (asu ) of the dead man,who is cremated
,to the nextworld (op
16,4,just quoted) where i t unites with a new body (tanfl ) cp. x. 14
,
8 ed astam eh i ; sam gach asva tanvago home ; unite with thy (new)body ; and x . 16, 5 sam gach atém tanva, jataved ah let him (the
deceased) unitewith a (new) body, O‘
J d tavedas .
HYMN OF THE GAMBLER
This is one, among the secular hymns , of a group of four which have,
a didactic character . It i s the lament of a gambler who, unable to resist
the fascination of the d ice, deplores the ruin he has b rought on himsel f
and his fami ly. The dice (ak sas ) consisted of the nuts of a large tree
cal led v ib hid ak a (Termina lia bel ler ica ) , which i s sti ll util ized for this
purpose in India .
x . 34 . Metre : Tr l stubh ; 7. J aga ti .
amaul at 7
g'
t what-l l m’
éml : 1m 133a: 1m afia 1
Far’
avu ( Fifi; aé'mm: 1 w h im: 1{Fifi 1 agalm: 1
188 THE GAMBLER [x. a, 3
fi fé ’
qat tta lm imfa sfs'w a u wdm mn mrfifl
a 71c fiafi fi artm a 1al fwaz 1 fa§ fi 1ufémm 1
s laté‘
la was : wh en 1 al ts : 1 film'
s 1
ms fiffl fi! tam ail z'ltl u =1 13 13mfw fmfifiaaet1fi l ia l
3 dvesti svaér l‘
ir ; ap a jay é ru My mother-in- law hates me; my
nad d h i ; wife drives me away : theman in
net nath i to vind ate mard ité distress finds none to p ity him
ram ‘I find no more use in a gambleri
asvasyeva jarato vasn iasya than in an aged horse that is f or
n il ham vind ami k i tavasya bhd sale.
’
gam .
ap a runad d h i (3. s . pr . of rudh ) : turns him away when he asks
for money to gamble wi th . nath i tas the gambler speaks of h imsel f
in the 3 . prs . asvasyau iva : agreeing with k itavasya . jaratas
pr. pt. of j? waste away. k itavasya b h é gam : objective gen .
(p . 320, B b).
swi mwuft g‘afl w wi l 1almu 1uft 1 §afa 1W 1
n'sfsz
'fi fi na l i st: 1
"wt1 3 1q 1he? 1mail 1 s li t: 1
fi lmmmmitt 11711113 1 film 1mm 1HTFl'
C 1 11am =3111'
s : 1
a aifi fil azial agar =1 1m=ilm 1mtm as a 1m u
4 any é jayam par i mrsanti asya , Others embrace. the wife of him
yasyag lgd h ad vé d ane vaji ak sah. for whosepossessions the victorious
p itamati). bh r é tara enam ahur diehas been eager . Father, mother,
na jan imo, nayata b ad d ham brothers say of him,
‘we know him
etam not, lead him away boun d
agrd h at : a ao. of grab be greedy, governing vé d ane, 10 6 . of t
object (p. 325, 1 c) . vaji : to be read with a short final (p . 437,a
cp . p. 441 , 4 a) ; accent, p. 450, b. ah ll r : pf. of ah say. ja
1 . pl . pr . of j‘
r‘
ia know. nayata accented as beginning
x . 34,6] THE GAMBLER 189
sentence (p. 466 19 a) final vowel metrically lengthened (cp. p . 441 ,
l ine b add h am as a debtor .
W a fiw wfil m 1wsfi fit1a 1§fqfllm1nfii t l
« l ashed the? arena: 1 “laurel: 1wi t1 “5131 1Gretna: 1stars snail alumni fa teful : 1a 151ml: 1alarms a
'm
111112511W W illis 11 vfit 1 ( Ft ! 1ma - 1 fi zsaam sn
rw’
ifl a 11
yea ad idhye‘na d avisani When 1 think tomyself ;
‘I wi ll
eb h ih ; not go with them ; I shall be lef t
p arayad bh'
yo ava h iye sak h i behind bymy f r iends as theydep art
bhyah’
, (to and the brown ones,
n iuptas ca b abh ravo vil cam thrown down, have ra ised their
ak rata l‘
i l, voices
,I go straight, like a courtesan,
ém l d esam n isk rtamjar i h iva . to their p lace of assignation .
a-d id hye : 1. s . pr . A. of d h i think. d avisani : is ao. sb . of d a
go (of which other forms occur in the AA. and the YV.) some
scholars think the sense of play to \
be so necessary that th is must be
an irr . form (is ao. sb . ) from d iv p lay (l ike a-
sth avisam , in a Sl’
l tra,
from sth iv sp it) . ebh i s : with the friends . ava h i y e : ps. of 1 . ha
leave ; I am lef t behind with abl . (cp. 201 A up tas : pp. of vap
strew. ak rata : 3. pl . A. root ao. of k r , accented because still
dependent on yad . Here we have a J agatl Pada interposed in a
Tristubh stanza (cp. p . 445,f. n . the same expres s ion ,
vécam
ak rata , by ending a Pada in vi i. 103, 8 produces a Jagati Pada in a
Tristubh stanza . The final vowel of the vb . is here nasal ized to
avoid the hiatus at the end of the Pada (cp. i . 35, 6 a) ; vi ii . 29, 6 a
see p. 23,f. n . emi i d : I go at once (p. esam : of the dice.
m m : gafl tfi m mfil l f‘fi au ganta
W 1? aa l éflm'al a : 1 amfit 1 {a 1 715 11 05933 171
w fitw fi fdfi fl mtt W dz 1W 1fi 1 farfi'
fl 1auflmaq
’
la’
fi {as all EjflTfit 11 uq z’
la’
fl 1 {sim1“an1aarfit 11
190 THE GAMBLER [x.
6 sabh am eti k i tavah p rcha
mane ,
jesyam l ti, tan l
'
l a sfisujanah.
ak saso a sya vi tiran ti k amam ,
p rati d ivne dad h ata ak rtfl ni .
tanva : accent, p. 450 , 2 b.
l
sfiéujanas : as this pt. is the onlyform of the vb . occurring, and is itsel f only foufl d in one other
passage (also with tanva), its exact meaning is doubtful but i t must
express either fear or confidence.
‘
t i ranti : 3 . pl .‘
pr . of t? cross .
I"
90,3 ; dat. with verbs of giving (200 A a
d ad h atas : N. pl . pr . pt. of d ha, (156 , p. 18 1,top) agreeing wi th
ak sfisas ; wi th prp . fol lowing (p. 462, 13 a a ) . k rtfln i : probably inthe specific sense of the highest throws, pl . of n . k rtam.
s 3lm « s was
fana tas ldamlvfimat: 1
sw i m we sass?!W Tfi lia l : fan
-set361111 11
7 ak sil sa i d ank usino n itodino,n i k l
‘
tvanas tap anas tap ay l sna
vah ;
k umarad esna , jayatah punar
hano ,
mad hva samprk tah k itavasya
b arhana.
tap ay i sh avas : caus ing the gambler to pain others by his losses .
k umara-d esh as : giving gifts and then taking them back like chil dren .
punarhanas : winning back from the winner, equivalent in sense
to the preceding word ; Sandhi , 65 b. sam-
prk tas : pp. of pro mix.
b arhana : inst. s . (p. with objective gen. (p.
i
The gambler goes to the assembly
hall, asking himself , shall I eon
guer’
, trembling with his body.
The dice run counter to his desire,
bestowing on his adversary atp lay
the lucky throws.
“
aunt: 1m1Wad: 1firsa’
1fqdz1
fi sa a’m: 1 tidal : 1umfi ma
'r: 1
gmt s’
ém : 1min: 1 971163411 1
mat 1HESflHiT: 1rel—asst1stint 11
T he dice are hooked, p iercing,
deceitful, burning and cans
burn ; p resenting gif ts like
striking back the victors , sweete
with honey by magic power over th
gambler.
THE GAMBLER (x. 34,9
Every Pada in this stanza contains an antithes is : n i ca Up ar i ;
ah astasah hastavantam ; d ivyah— fr ine ; s i tah — n i r d ah anti .
d ivy as : a l luding to their magic power over the gambler ; cp
b arhah a in 7 d. aagaras : the d ice a l e compared wi th bits of
charcoal lying in a hol low ; ee .p SB. v. ad h i d é vanam v5.
agni s , tasya eté ’r°
lgara yad ak sah the gaming board is fire, the diceare its coa ls .
qo sum 71121? raaasts’
l fl l s e l l 1 711213 1 famed 1film 1
uml gaq ataz-
ghfam man gash atau sn fiama ural rams-arm s semen 1 fantau vira l ( anti : 1
slas h 1a i lm ent 1Hil
l?“11171 11
10 jaya tapyate k itavasya h ina , Forsaken thewif e of the gambler
mat i—l putrasya caratah k l i a sv
‘
i t . is grieved, the mother (too) of the
rh avd b ibhyad dhanam i cha son thatwanders who knows where.
mane , I ndebted, f earing, desiring moneyany é sam astam l ip a nak tam eti . he app roaches at night the house of
others.
h ina : pp . of ha leave. putrasy a : the gambler. tapyate must be
suppl ied with math. rna-vfl : lengthening of final a before v
( 15 , 1 c). b ibhyat : pr . pt. of b h i‘
fear. l i p a et i : probably for the
purpose of steal ing , to explain c. nak tam : see 178,2 ; 195 A 5 a .
flare?gen tfi rstdalm
fi fli‘511111astuF1 fi fi’hn
U1W at315151: thug 11
l striy am d rstvfiya k itavam
tap a ,
any é sam jayém ,sdk rtam
y é n im .
3 13 191111 1311mmgestalt 1a 1zit
film
gi f‘
a lw’al'
m ggamu wf l lRu wfiu fi q guuw u
I t pains the gambler when he
sees a woman, the wif e of others,
ca and their well-ordered home. Since
he yokes the brown horses in the
x. 64,12] THE GAMBLER 193
p l‘
l rvahne asvan yuyujé h i b a morning, he fa lls down (in the
b h run, evening) near thefire, a beggar
sé agn é r ante vrsalah p apad a .
tatapa : used impersonal ly with the ace. this and the fol lowing
two perfects may be trans lated as presents , because they express
habitual actions continued into and included in the pr . (213 A a ) .d rstvfiya : gd. of d ré see
,agreeing with k i tavam as the virtual
subject str iy am (p. 88 , ,8 ) jayam as appos ition ,a woman who
is the wife of others ; that i s , when he sees the wives of others and
their com fortable homes,he is reminded of the unhappiness of his
own wife and the bareness of his own home. aévan : the brown
dice are here figuratively called horses , wh ich he yokes ; that is , he
begins a lbng spell of gambl ing with them . p apad a : he conse
quently fal ls down, exhausted and overcome,on the ground beside
the fi re in the even ing, having lost everything.
art a}: Rwandan? we: 2 1: 1 a : 13mm}: 1 s ea : 1must1
( ml alderw a sps . ( 1311 1 3116761 1mm: 1 3 31611
afi amfi a ufi fimw'
fi f fi fi fi fl fl fl fi h i fi h 1
swi n a atquu u za 1'
asu 1msfi'u au 1w 1
"
331151
yo vah senanir mah até gah asya , To him who as the general ofJ. . .L
raj-a vratasya prath amé ba your great throng, as k ing has
b hfiva , become the first of your host e
tasmai k rh om i ,‘na d h ané ru stretch f orth my ten fingers
adhm i ‘I withhold nomoney— this is truth
dasaham p raci s ,‘tad rtam va I say
’
dami
yo vah : no specific die is meant, the express ion only. implying a
chief,in the abstract
,of the total number of dice played with .
dasa k rnomi p r il eih : I put the ten (se. that is , Istretch out my two hands . p raci s : A . pl . f . of p réfi c , used predicatively (198 , tasmai : dat. of advantage (200 B 11a d h ana
1 902 Q
194 THE GAMBLER (x . 34,1 »
runadhmi : that is,
‘I have no money left for you these words in
sense come after p r é ci s , expressing what i s impl ied by that gesture .
rtam : predicative, I say this as true (198 ,
was“
5 5 1: afi fi lrélma “
QR: 1311 1616 1: 1a fm 1m1m 1
wh i ne-7 1 33 117611113 ” fafi mwen as'maim n
as mat: filifl'
é l na'Emu a= 1mat: 1fi lms 1 Tfi l 1 sum 1
7151 F6: E'
s Rimmed: 11 a?“331 1 13 1 as 1 l ll 1m 1
3123: 11
ak sa l r m5 d ivyah ; k rs1m i t
k rsasva ;
vi tte ramasva , b ah li manya
manah ;
tatra géva'
h , k i tava , tatra jay é'
l :
tan me vi cast e Savi té yam
aryab .
This stanza is spoken by the gambler , who in a—c quotes the advice
of Savitr . d ivya s : 2 . s . inj. of d iv p lay with m il (p . r a
masva : with loc. (204, 1 a) . tatra cattle and wi fe can be regained
by acquir ing weal th . caste : 3 . s . _pr . of oak s . me : dat. (200 A c) .
ayam : as actual ly present. aryas : noble, as upholder of moral law.
«13 fuel $ 1351 first3535711 i t faw 1“
93135111 1 ed 155571 1a : 1
m a l sh’
t d utul fu gsgu mmzm
'
l'
td ml‘
cnwfin gmy
f-
cl ah‘
vjuq fdaamt tfilg fi1 1 a : 1 a 1 m3: 1 tr
auma I
such shimufitah aha 11 s t irs : 1
am: 13 1mmusfita‘
i 1a 135113 1
14 m itram k rh ud hvam k halu,mr Praymakef riendship, begracious
late. no . to us. Do not forcibly bewitch us
mil no gh or é h a caratabh i d h r withmagic power. L etyour wra
snu .
‘Play not with dice ; p ly thy
tillage ; rejoice in thy p roperty,
thinking much of i t there are thy
cattle, 0 gambler , there thy wif e
this Savitr here, the noble,revea ls
to me.
196 PURUSA [x. 90,1
s ahas raé i rsa &c. : that is,having innumerable heads, eyes , and
feet, as representing al l created beings (cp. sah asrak sas : of the
very numerous Bv. eds . formed with sahasra this and sah asra
argha are the only ones With irr . accent (cp . p . 455,10 e) . d asangu
1am : probably on ly another way of expressing that h is s ize was
greater even than that of the earth . ati sth at : ipf. of etha stand .
s s‘
sfl fi afifi
W an na!“
Purusa evé darnsarvam
yad bh fi tam yac ca b havi am .
utamrtatvasy é sano ,
yad annenatir é h ati .
Purusa is coextensive with the whole world including the gods .
b havy am a late and irregular cadence. amrtatvasya : of the
immortals,the gods . yad : there is some doubt as to the construction
of d the paral lelism of aty at isth at in 1 d and of city ar i cy ata in 5 0
indicates that Purusa is the subject and yad (the gods ) the object,
and that the former exceeds the latter annena , that is , by means of
sacr ificial food . The words have also been interpreted to mean : who
(the gods) grow up by (sacrificial) food ; or,and of that which grows by
food, that is, creatures other than the gods . I n these interpretations
the meaning of ati does not seem to be sufficiently brought out.
3na ming ! nfsm QflTfi i‘t l"
a s ! 1 s tem 1
a’
Twm’
f’s f mu wrin wmr’
mm gtm l
mfi sq firs t agarfi l mi : 1a s : 1firs t 1 agnfit
faurg’
mg fi figfir11 fau na 1as ! 1 spgdm fi rst 11
3 etavan asya mah ima, Such is his greatness, and more
atojy éyams ca P firusah . than that is Purusa. A fourth of
gigs : 1na 1w 1 saq 1
flmgam flma maimsm a gs ss sh tatau
mu stats 1 arrasfi sfa 11
Purusa is this a ll,
-
that has been
and that wil l be. And he is the
lord of immortality, which he grows
beyond through food.
x. 90, 5] PURUSA 197
pad o ’sya vi éva bhutan i ; him is all beings , three-fourths
tripad asyamf tam d ivi . of him are what is immor tal in
heaven.
etévan asy a : irr. Sandhi for etavaih asya (occurring also in x . 85,
45 : putran a Sign of lateness,this being the regular post
JVedic
Sandhi atas : equivalent to an ab . after the cpv. (201,jyayamé ca : on the Sandh i
,see 40 a . P firusas a metrical
lengthening for Purus as (cp. the Pada text) to avoid a sequence of
four short syl lables , cp . 5 b. amftam : equivalent to amrtatva.
tr ipad fi rd hva l id a i t Purusah ;
pad o ’syehab h avat punah.
tato visvar'
i vi ak ramat
saé ananaé an é abh i .
l i d ai t (3 . s . ipf. of i go, p. 130) to the world of immortals. iha
in this world. punar : that is , from h is original form . tatas : from
the earth ly quarter . vi ak ramat ab h i : distributed himsel f to,
developed into. saé ana-ana éan é : an imate creatures and inan ima te
things ; this cd. represents the latest stage of Dvandvas in the RV.
(186 A 1,end).
l
fiI
a
fimsfi wfi; i i“: 1a ma? mafi a ?!
fi smmsfl éu sm'
fimstun
mi n m mmw amgafi fihmt: 1 fi ds 1fi 1w ma 1
mam fi rfii mfiw
With three quarters Pura sa
rose upward one quarter of him
herecame into being again. Thence
he spread asunder in a ll d irections
to what eats and does not eat.
amia 1fi sm 1wsma 1
fi sn dz l wfii mfi u
nz 1 araz 1wfii 1wfm 1
ammqfitmmfi sfi i q rz n
198 PURUsA [x.
5 tasmad V i ra l ajayata , F rom him Virajwas born, f romVirajo ad h i P fi rusah. VirajFa rusa . When born he
s é jato'
aty ar i cyata reached beyond the earth behind
p asead b h iimim atb o purah . and also bef ore.
tasmad : from the undeveloped quarter of Purusa. V iral : as
intermediate between the primaeval P urusa and the evolved F arusa ;
cp. x. 72,4 . Ad iter Dak so ajayata , Dak sad u A d i tih p ar i f rom
Adi ti Daksa was born,and f rom Daksa Aditi. On the Sandhi
,see
p . 3, n . 2 . With e d cp. 1 c d . ath o : 24 .
i aflf fimsfafli mmfi mwfiq'wh
6 yat Purusena h avi sa
d eva yajnam atanvata ,
vasanto asyas i d ajyam ,
g ri sma i dhmah, sarad d h avih.
Here the gods are represented as offering with the evolved Purusa
an ideal human sacri fice to the primaeval Furasa . atanvata : 3 . pl .
ipf. A. of tan stretch ; this vb. is often used figuratively in the sense
of to extend the web of sacrifice to carry out, perform . d h avi s : 54 .
‘9 a as sféffi than
girls?maxim : 1
351 shrewd
m agma "
7 tam yajfiam b arb i g i p rauk san
Purusam jatam agratah
aw z 1W 1Wfi a 1W 1
u’
l'mz l rmz lm l sfi z n
When thegodsp erformed a sacri
fice with Purusa as an oblation,
the sp r ing was its melted butter,
the summer its fuel , the autumn its‘
oblation.
m 1aw 1 afifd 1u 1 i fim 1
atria l enamwas”na n a m a .
mmu ardun m’
z‘
t n
That Purusa, born in the begin
ning, they bespr inkled as a sacrifice
200 PURUSA [x. 90, 9
9 tasmad yajfi at sarvahuta From that sacr ifice comp letely
fcah saman i jajr‘
i ire ofiered were born the hymns and
chandams i jajfi ire tasmad ; the chants ; the metres were born
yajus tasmad ajayata . f rom i t the sacr ificial formula
was born f rom it.
f eas : the Rigveda. saman i : the Samaveda . jajfi ire : 3 . pl . pf.
A. ofjan beget. yajus : the Yajurveda . This is the first (impl icit)mention of the three Vedas . The AV. was not recognized as the
fourth Veda ti l l much later.
so am t 3 13mm
3131 sffi'iiméa: 1
wait it a in’
t na na
na nama 3131161191: 11
10 tasmad asva ajayanta
y é k é ca ubh ayéd atah .
gavo h a jajfi ire tasmat ;tasmajjataajavayah .
y é k é ca : whatever animal s besides the horse,such as asses and
mules,have incisors above and below. ajavayas a pl . Dv . (186A
Dvandvas are not analysed in the Pada text.
m l gim fi a'
gu
s tunt alaW 1 s tar“1F4 1 s la in
gq fs fia afi ars as’
m fimw mfi wm fimm a g nat e fi 1 s g rfi1
’
1urfi 1s fi fi rfitu
1 1 yat Purusam viad ad huh, When they divided Purusa, intok atidhavi ak a lp ayan ? how many p arts did they dispose
muk h am k im asya ? kau b ahd? him ? What (did) his mouth (bekaurd pad a ucyete come) ? What are h is two arms ,
his two thighs, h is twofeet ca lled ?
m ien vas t: 1warms 1
3 131 1 31 1 131121131
3 : 1
met: 1 3 1 s ti ff 1amttu“d l 511m: 1 3 13 13 1
5
1: 11
F rom tha t arose horses and a ll
such as have two rows of teeth.
Cattlewere born f rom that ; f rom
thatwere born goats and sheep .
x.
‘
90,13]
‘
PUR‘
USA 201
vi -ad adhur : when the gods cut up Purusa as the victim ; here
the Padapatha again (see note on vi ii . 48 , 2 a , 10 c) accents the prp.
in a subordinate clause (p. 469,20 B) . k au : the dual ending an for
the normal 5. before consonants (cp. note on x. 14,10 a) ; ka and
pad a before ii : 22. ucyete : 3 . du. pr . ps . of vac sp eak : Pragrhya ,26 b.
stamina 3611111111
mg an: 1
b rahmano ’sya muk h am asi d ,
b ahfi rajaniah 151111111 ;fi r ii tad asya yad vai éyah ;
p ad bhyam éfi d rd ajayata .
In this stanza occurs the only mention of the four castes in the
RV. b rahmano ’sya : Sandhi accent, p . 465, 17 , 3 . rajanyas
predicative nom . after a ps . (196 b) . k rtas attracted in number to
rajanyah, for k rtau (cp . 194, yad vai éy as : the periphrastic use of
the rel . (ep. 7 d and 8 d) , l it. his two thighs became that which was
Va isya . p adbhyam : abl . of source (77, 3 a, p . 458,
W t" min? man
1 cand rama manasojatas ;cak soh s iiryo ajay ata ;muk h ad i nd r as ca Agn is ca,
.L
p ranad V ayur aJayata .
mauz 1ws1 1asla 1mm 1
3 1s; {fih ( rant: 1
ws rfitmma sn wm’
isn
wsm 1 §g zman-
1171 11
His mouth was the Brahman,
his two armsweremade thewarrior,
his two thighs the Va isya from
his twofeet theSudra was born.
W i tt: 1was : 1 51m: 1
and : 1gift: 1 3 15mm1
as imd u m wfi mm
mun?“apa: 1warns 11
The moon was born f rom h is
mind ; f rom his eye the sun was
born ; f romhi s mouth Indra and
Agni , f rom h is breath Vayu was
born.
202 PURUSA (x. 13
Note that cand ra-mas i s not analysed in the Pada text. cak sos
ab . of cak su used only in th is passage the usual cak su s ; in the
Funeral Hymn (x. 16 , 3) s iiryas and cak sus, vittas and {1t are
also referred to as cognate in nature .
98 amtwrfigwfr’
fi 3 11111: 1 3 111511 1w-‘
dfi'fim
15111111 313: snails 1 that: 1 afi: 1 1111 1 3 1111111 1
11311M a : sham vacuum 11131: 1 fza': 1 31121111 1
11211 611111 stamina 11 111111 1 sham1“
1 1611611111 11
14 nab hya as i d antari k sam ; F rom his navel was produced
si r sn é d yauh sam avartata ; the air ; f rom his head the sky was
p ad b hyam b humi r , d isah sro evolved fromh is twofeet the earth,trat f rom his ear the quarters thus
tath a l okafii ak a lp ayan . they fashioned theworlds .
nab hyas : ab. of nabh i inflected according to the i dec . (p . 82 a ).
si rsnas : ab . of si rsan (90, 1 a p . 458 , sam avartata : this vb .
is to be suppl ied in c cp . ad h i sam avartata in x. 129, 4 . ak alp a
yan : ipf. es . of k ip ; they (the gods) f ashioned.
<111m a tswfim as 1“
as 1 3 1mm fi xed: 1
fa : as s tud : 1 ta : 1an 1unseat: 1 am: 1
2611 113131 dawn 2111: 1 2111 1 111111 1Hanan 1
na'
‘i’fl‘i 3 15m IH
'
flWUw 11
15 sap tasyasan p ar id hayas ; Seven were his enclos ing sticks ;
tr ih sap ta sami dh ah 11 1 11311 ; thrice seven were thefaggots made,
d evayad , yajfiam tanvana, when thegodsp erf orming the sacr i
ab ad hnan Purusam p aérim . fice bound Purusa as the victim.
p ar i d hay a s : the green sticks put round the sacrificial fire to fence
it in , generally three in number . sapta'
. as a sacred number .
tanvanas : ep . 8 b .
‘
ab ad hnan : 3 . pl . ipf. of b and h ; cp . purusena
h avi sa in 6 a and tam yajfiam Puru sam in 7 a b . p aéum : as appo
s itional acc.
204 RATRI [ 11 .127, 1
1 Ratr i vi ak hyad ayati Night approaching has looked
purutrad ev‘
i ak sabh ih forth inmany p laces with her eyes :
V1eva ad h i ér iyo’dh ita . she has put on a ll glories.
vi ak hyat : a ao. of k hya see (147 a asy ati : pr . pt. f. of
a+ i go (95 a) . d evi accent, p . 450
,b metre
, p . 437 , a 4 . ak sabh i s
99,4 ; the eyes are stars . ad h i ad h ita : root ao. A. of d ha p ut
(148 , 1 a) . é r iyas (A . pl . of sri ; 100 b, p. 87) theglories of starlight.
s fnhm 3111611 611 1 1111 1 61111: 1 61111611 1
fi afii §6§1§sttz 1 13113 61: 12611 1 3 111 6161:
6:1’
1fi1611 6111111 1111: 11 afifi tm 1 61m? 1 6111: 11
2 aurv ap ra amartia The immortal goddess has p er
nivato d evi udvatah vaded the wide space, the dep ths ,
jy é tisa badh ate tamah . and the heights : with light she
dr ives away the darkness .
5 ap r'
as : 3 . s . s ao. of p rafi ll (144 , d evi : cp. 1 b . jy é tisawith starl ight.
3fi nm tmg a’
t fa : 1 s’
1 {fit 1a s ivu 6113 11 1
611126 1161111 1 1161611 12611 1 65111 61611 1
are; 1111111 6111: 11 611 1 161 1s1 < f11 1s11111 1 a11z 11
3 nir u svasaram ask rta The goddess app roaching has
Usasam d evi ayati turned out her sister Dawn ; away
ap ed u h asate tam ah. too will go the darkness .
n i r ask rta : 3 . s . root ao. of k r do ; the s is here not or iginal
(Padapatha ak rta ), but is probably due to the analogy of forms such
as n i s -k uru it Spread to forms in wh ich k r is compounded
with the prps . par i and sam (p ar i sk rnvanti , par i sk rta , samsk rta) .
U sasam : Dawn here used in the sense of daylight (dec .
,83
,2 a ).
n i r u ap a i d 11 in the second clause the pcl . is used anaphorical ly
(p. 221, with Special emphasis (id ) on the second prp.,
and the
x . 127, 6] 112117111 205
darkne_
ss wi ll also be dispel led by the s tarl ight (cp. 2 c). hasate : 3 .
s . sb . A . of the s ao. of 2 . ha goforth
8 111 611 6161 61s t 6161
fi f 11 611113 13win
61 6111111 6161: 11
4 s it no adya, yasya vayam
ui te yamah u avik smah i ,
vrk sé n a'
. vasating vay ah .
p. 294, b a vb . has here to be supplied, the most natura l one
being hast come, from ayati in 3 b. yasyas to for tvam yasyas ,
a prs. prn . often being put in the rel . clause.
‘
y éman : 10 0 .
m avik smah i : s ao. A.,wehave turned in vasatim : governed
by a cognate vb . to be suppl ied, such as return to. vayas : N . pl . of
vi bird (99 , 3 a) .
11 61161161 s 1f611161
fi rHai ti fi t nfnut: 1
fi f fimrtfisgfiifi:
5 h i gramaso avi k sata ,
ui p advanto , n i p ak sinah,
u i éyenasa é cid arth inah .
r 0 .L o
m awk sata : 3 . pl . A . s ao. of V l é enter. gramasas vi llagers.
n i note the repetition of the prp. throughout, in place of the cd. vb
a common usage.
611616113616156161 616111 1311161 13361 1
qfi § 3fi 1 61'
61611 156161 1fi 1
6111111 61: 31111 11
61 1 6 1611 61: 1351111 1 3157 "
111 1 61: 1 6 131 1 616 11z 1 616161 1
13 1 13 1 6111161 1 3113 11113
311 1 61 1 3 1111111 1 6161: 11
So to us to-day thou (hast ap
proached), at whose app roach we
have come home,as birds to their
nest upon the tree.
1 61161111: 1a re-
11161 1
1 11111 6151: 1fi t 1 fi nd : 1
1 12161111: 1 fa r-
1 1wtfia‘
: 11
Home have gone the vi llages ,
home creatureswith feet, home those
with wings, home even the greedyhawks.
206 RATRI [x. 127,6
6 yavaya vrk i am vfk am , Ward of the she-wolf and the
y avaya stenam ,urmie ; wolf , ward ofi
”
the thief , 0 Night ;ath a nah su tara b h ava . so be easy for us top ass.
yavaya : es . of 3111 sep arate ; this and other roots ending in u, as
wel l as in i, r, may take Guna or Vrddhi in the es . (168 , 1 but the
Padapatha invariably g ives y avaya ; the final vowel is metrical lylengthened (in b it is long by pos ition before st) . vrk yam : accent
,
p . 450,2 b. atha final metrical ly lengthened (cp . p.
9 3 11 111’
f1fi1‘ar111 13 111 111 1111111111 1“
ea—611swarms 1 m a 1 16113111161 1 a is le 1
1361was 6111161 11 1361: 1 samsta 1 6116161 11
7 up a ma p é p isat tamah ,The darkness, thickly painting,
k rsnam, viak tam asth ita black
, p alpable, has approachedme :
I'
Isa rn é va yataya 0 Dawn, clear it of like debts.
up a asth i ta : 3. s . A. of root ao. of stha stand. p é p isat : int. pr .
pt. of p iepaint, as if i t were material . usas : Dawn , as a counter
part of Night, is invoked to exact remove the darkness from Rati r,
as one exacts money owing. In hymns addressed to a particular
deity, another who is cognate or in some way associated,is not
infrequently introduced incidental ly. yataya : es . of yat .
c s d'
fi m fi fi tt 3 11 13 1 111 1161 1 6 11 1 61611 11 1
3111161 g'fsaféa: 1 3111163 1$1311: 1Q 6] : 1
10 161E1161 61 1617 1311 11 1 1161 1 11111111 1 61 1 16111111 11
8 ( ma te gaivak aram , L ike kine I have delivered up to
vrn i sva,dph i tar d ivah , thee a hymn— choose it 0 daughter
Ratr i , stomam najigyuse . of heaven, 0 Night like a song of
p ra ise to a victor.
up a 11, ak aram (1 . s . root ao. of k r) I have driven up for thee my
song of p raise, as a herdsman del ivers up in the even ing the cows
which he has herded s ince the morning ; cp . i . 1 14,9,l'
i p a te stoman
208 HYMN OF CREATION [x. 129, 1
form of the 3 . s . ipi . of as be ; the rarer form occurs in 3 b . no for
na'
. 11 vioma : the final vowel metrical ly lengthened (cp .
p. 440,4 B) . p aras : adv. ; on the accent cp. note on ii . 35 , 6 0 .
aavar ivar : 3. s . ipf. int. of vr cover (cp . 1 73,3) what did it cover
up concea l or conta in ? kuh a : where was it ? k asy a sarman : who
guarded i t ? k im : here as an inter . pcl . (p . amb h as : cp. 3 b,
and TS.,ap e v3 i dam agre sal i lam as i t this (universe) in the beginning
was the waters,the ocean.
aamfi rfigfi a afi m gegzm mfiauqqa'
mm afifi
=1 ar'
g 35111116 1313 : 1 =1 1 ( 19 1i : 1 1 31113351 1ne w 1
madame awn $1211‘
fl fifi'
fi lw att ! e ast 1F11 1m 1
amtma a at : fa)“amd 11 HEIT
'FL 1s 1 31am1 =1 1 at : 1 fawn
an 1m 11
2 na mr tyur asi d, amf'tam na There was not death nor im
tarh i . mortality then. There was not the
na ratr ia ahna as i t p rak etah. beacon of night, nor of day.,That
an i d avatam svadhaya tad one breathed , windless, by i ts own
ek am . p ower. Other than that there was
tasmad dh anyan na p arah k im not anything beyond.
canasa .
r atryas : gen . of ratr i (p . ahnas : gen. of ah an (9 1,an i t : 3 . s . ipf. of an breathe (p. 143
,3 a) . tasmad : governed by
anyad (p. 317 , d h a for h a : 54 . any a'
n na : 33. p aras : cp .
note on 1 b . asa : pf. of as be (135,
3 ai rW'
lfl fim 13 31351 7111: 1ancfimaltar 1W 'w’
v‘
z'1
ta’
a‘aarms s am gem s mfi aq 1 Hffi ’i l Rita 1 3 11: 1
fi amfilfsfi 21111111
adamalfsma iafié q 11 qfifi 1 3 1115 1 afi sfizatu 21a 1
“
aridmads : 17161 1" fem 1m an 1Gabi ll
111129, 4] HYMN or“
CREATION 209
3 tama asi t tamasa gfi lham agre ;
ap rak etam sal i lam sarvam a
idam .
tuchy é nabh ii ap ih i tam yad asi t,tapasas tan mah inéjayataik amf
gfi lham : pp . of guh hide (69 e,cp. 3 b y, p. 3 and as : 3 . s .
ipf. of as be (p . 142,2 b) ; this form is also found twice (i . 85 , 1 . 7)
alternating with as i t . b is a J agati intruding in a Tristubh stanza
(cp . p. 445,f . n . abhu : the meaning of this word is il lustrated
by a-babhuva in 6 d and 7 a . mah ina mah imna(90, 2, p .
mafi a? ufiaémfix
wad m é’ta l
aa‘
rafi adfit fi t fifi
gt? n'
ci’
tszn'3161211 a i m 11
kamas tad agre sam avarta
tad hnmanaso r é tah p rath amam yad
as i t .
satobandhum asati n ir avind an
h rd i prat’
isya k avayo man i sa.
adh i sam avartata : 3. s . ipf. A. of vrt turn, with sam come into
being ; ad h i upon makes the verb transitive come upon, take posses
s ion of . tad that tad ek am in 2 c,the unevolved universe. One
of the two prps . here i s placed after the vb . (cp . 191 f; and p. 468 ,
20 A a) . yad : referring to kamas is attracted in“
gender to the
predicate n . retas . satas : they found the or igin of the evolved
world in the unevolved. p rati - isya : the gd . in y a has often a long
final vowel (164, 1 ) which is always short in the Padapatha. ma
ni sa: inst. of f . in a (p.
1902
Darkness was in the beginninghidden by darkness indistinguish
able, this a ll was water. That
which , coming into being, was
covered with the void, that One
arose through the power of heat.
W u nm w’
fi l w l wafim
a sh
3171s : 1 1 a : 1m m 2131 1 3 116131 1
t1az 1 swimwdfm fi : I'
fl fW ‘t l
a? 1ufd si izt1mini : 1 fi lm 11
Desire in the beginning came
upon that, (desire) that was the
first seed of mind. Sages seeking
in their hearts with wisdom found
out the bond of the existent in the
non-existent.
210 HYMN or CREATION [x. 129. 5
11fiw'
fi f fai l-
eh t fim’
i’
m
5 tirascino vitato r aém i r esam
adhah svi d asi Sd , upar i svid
as i 3 t
retodhaasan,mah iména asan ;
svad b'
aavas tat, p rayatih p aras
tat
raéml s : the meaning of this word here is uncerta in ,but it may be
an explanation of bandhu in 4 c :'
the cord with wh ich the sages
(referred to by esam) in thought measured out the distance between
the existent and non -existent,or between whatwas above and below ;
cp . vi i i . 25,18
, par i yo r aémina d ivo antan mame p rth ivyah whowith a card has measured out the ends of heaven and earth cp. also the
expression s iitram v i tatam (in AV.
“
x . 8,37) the extended string with
reference to the ea rth . as i t : accented because in an antithetica l
sen tence (p. 468,19 B The 1 is prolated, and that syllable (and
not a) has the Udatta, as in the final syl lable of a sentence in ques
tions (Pan ini vi i i . 2, the second question upar i svi d 21 8 1 3 1: is
quoted by Pan in i (vii i . 2 , 102) as coming under th is rule,but wi thout
accent. retod has and mah imanas are contrasted as male and
female cosmogon ic pr inciples , to wh ich correspond respectively p ra
yet i s and svad b a . In TS. iv. 3,1 1
,1,mention i s made of trayo
mah imanah connected wi th fertil ity. svadh é : this is one of the
five examples of a N . f. in a left uncontracted wi th a
'
following
vowel : it is probable that the editors of the Samh ita text treated
these forms as end ing i n an, whi le the Padapatha gives them w
Visarjani ya , doubtless owing to the greatly increas ing prevale
the nominatives in a.
fars'
fi : 1 tw i n: 1 1 115mmam: 1fem3 1161320 Buff l fa fl l
Wfll w( a wn 13 1mmmeant: 13 1mm151m 1W it 1was : 1Ut ah "
Their cord was extended across
was there belowor was there above?
Therewere imp regnators , therewere
powers there was energy below,
there was impulse above.
212 YAMA [x. 135, 1
YAMA
Three hymns are addressed to Yama , the chief of the blessed dead .
There is also another (x. wh ich consists of a dialogue between him and
his sister Yami’
. He is associated with Varuna ,Brhaspati , and especial ly
Agni , the conductor of the dead, who is cal led hi s friend and his pr iest.
He is not expressly designated a god, but only a. being who rules the dead .
He is associated wi th the departed Fathers , especial ly the Afi gi rases , with
whom he comes to the sacrifice to drink Soma .
Yama dwel ls in the remote recess of the sky. In his abode , wh ich i s the
home of the gods , he is surrounded by songs and the sound of the flute.
Soma is pressed for Yama , ghee i s offered to h im , and h e comes to seat
h imsel f at the sacrifice. He is invoked to lead his worshippers to the gods,and to prolong li fe.
His father is Vivasvant and h is mother Saranyu. In her dialogue with
h im Yami speaks of Yama as the only mortal and elsewhere he i s said to
have chosen death and abandoned h is body. He departed to the other
we i ld,having found out the path f or many, to where the ancient Fathers
passed away . Death is the path of Yama . His foot-fetter (padb isa ) i sspoken of as pa ral lel to the bond of Va runa . The owl (uluk a ) and the
pigeon (k apota) are mentioned as h is messengers, but the two four-eyed ,
b road-nosed,brindled dogs, sons of Saram
'
a (sarameyau ) are his regular
emissaries . They guard the path along which the dead man hastens to
join the Fathers who rejoice with Yama . They watch menz ,and wander
about among the peoples as Yama’
s messengers They are besought to
grant continued enjoyment of the l ight of the sun .
As the first father of mankind and the first of those that died , Yama
appears to have origina lly been regarded as a mortal who became the chief
of the soul s of the departed . He goes ba ck to the Indo~I ranian period, for
the primaeval twin s , from whom the human race is descended , Yama and
Yami , a l e identical with the Yima and Yimeh of theAvesta . Yama h imsel f
may in that period have been regarded as a k ing of a golden age, for in!
the Avesta he is the ruler of an earthly, and in the RV. that of a. heavenly
paradise .
x . 135. Metre : Anustub h .
afi sh? 351611?
23 : estate as : 1
stat i t fi wfi l: fimr
firm? a tEs ra 11
strain ga 1gsw rfi 1
23: 1m ass 1W : 1
3 14 1 71: 1fi=1mfiii 1 firm
15 1mm and 1
’
éwfi1 11
x . 135,3] YAMA 2 13
1 yasmin vrk sé supalaé é
d evt samp i b ate Y amah,
atra no vi épatih p i té
puranéfi’
n anu venati .
yasm l n : the 10 0 . is often used in the sense of bes ide, near (Op .
203, samp i b ate : drinks Soma wi th. atra : with metrically long
final vowel (cp. 433, 2 A). nas : our i . e . of me and the other
members of the family. p i té : my deceased father. puranénancient ancestors ; Sandhi , 39 . anu venat i : that is
,associates with
them .
2 Hfi m‘
i’
fi fths warmfi t’
é flfi a 1
whatuwuigm at“! ww ’f l
=
{11mmafar 1m aamaeri aggzjgv
‘
vu afi 1w 1aafi fitn
2 purané i‘
h anuvé nantam ,Him seeking the friendship of
carantam p apayamuy é , the men of old, f aring in this evil
a sfi yann abby acak asam way, I looked upon disp leased for
tasma asp
'
rh ayam punah . him I longed again.
In this and the preceding stanza a son speaks of his father who
has gone to the world O f Yama . amuya: inst. s . f . of the prn .
ayam used adverbial ly with shi ft of accent (p. with this is
combined the inst. s . f . '
Of the adj. p apa sim ilarly used,the two
together mean ing in this evi l way, that is , going to the abode of
the dead . asfi yan : being displeased that is , with him,opposed to
asprh ayam , I longed for him,that i s, to see him again . acak asam
ipf. int. of k as, with shortening of the radical vowel
31m 1 astu raw
was nas tam: 1 “
w a it 1wit h 1a stu}: 1
651151fires : mat i nastam fired: 1mamwfiwafi i tests 11 anima l 3 1rd 1fi sts 11
Beside the fair- leaned tree under
which Yama drinks together with
the gods, there our father, master
of the house, seeks thefriendship ofthe men of old.
2 14 YAMA [x. 135,3‘
3 yam , k umara , navam rath amr r l .
acak ram manasak rnoh,0 I r A
é k esam VIsvatah p rancam ,
ap asyann adh i tisth asi .
In this stanza (and the next) the dead boy is addressed he mounts
the car which he imagines is to take h im to the other world. aca
k ram : perhaps because the dead are wafted to Yama by Agni . é k a
and vi évatas are opposed though it has but one pole, it has a front
on every si de . ap aéyan : because dead .
8 21 3'
t m 1 3m t 1n 1=s1éfiaz 1
l N I
farm: 1 aft 1
fi s tmgmé tia attmnh wfim l wafia l
Hfifi fi mart-stair 11 mm( a : 1 arts 1 3111s 11
4 yam ,k umara, p ravartayo The car
, 0 boy, that thou didst set
t ath am vip rebh ias pan , roll ing forth away f rom thep riests ,
tam saménu prévartata , af ter that there rol led f orth a chant
sam i to navi ah itam . p laced f rom here upon a ship .
The departure of the dead is fol lowed by a funeral chant. pra
avar tayas : 2. s . ipf. cs . of vrt turn ; accent, p. 464, 17 , 1 p. 469, ,8 ;
analysed by the Padapatha , as p ra avar tayas ; cp. note on v i i i .
48,2 a . anu p ra avartata : 3 . s . ipf. A. of vr t : accent, p . 464
,17
,I
p . 466,19 p. 468 , 20 a . v iprebh yas : the pries ts officiating at the ,
funeral ; abl . governed by par i (176, 1 a ) ; Sandh i , 43, 2 a . sam
é -h i tam : accent, p. 462,13 b. navi : the funeral chant is placed on
a boat as a vehicle to convey it from here (itas) to the other world.
strum wz lw t q lm 1
W ah fa'
t adflfl l W mn fi mw fiammz fanga fit gmg am fiamamw raumm
q qsi éh a‘ut l wfiaa n
Thenewcar, 0 boy, thewheel less,which thou didst make in mind
,
which has onep ole, but f aces in all
directions,- thou aseendest s eeing
it not.
216 YAMA [x. 135,7
{waterwe? mask {m 1 are 1w e 1 area: 1
we afifii : utte rs : 11 m l vfizsfirz 1 fifteen: 11
7 i dam Y amasya sad anam Th is is the seat of Yama that is
d eva-manam yad ucyate . ca l led the abode of the gods. This
iyam asya d h amyate nalir . is his flute that is blown. He i t is
ayam g i rbh ih par isk rtah. that i s adorned with songs.
The boy here arr ives at the abode of Yama . s éid anam note that
the vowel of this word is always short in the Pada text, the com
pilers of which seem to have regarded i t as a metrical lengthening ;
s é d anam occurs about a dozen times in the RV.,beside the much
commoner sad anam . nalis : with s in the nom . (100, I a) . There
is one syl lable too many in c (cp. p . 428,2 a) . c ayam Yama. par i
sk rta s : note that the Pada text removes the unoriginal s (p . 145,
f . n . 1 ; cp. note on x . a) . g irbh i s : dec. 82 ; accent,
p . 458,e 1 .
VATA
This god , as V iita , the ordinary name of wind , is addressed in two short
hymn s. He is invoked in a more concrete way than his doublet V ayu, who
i s celebrated in one whole hymn and in parts of others. Vata’
s name is
frequently connected with forms of the root va ,blow,
from which i t i s
derived . He is Once associated with the god of the ra in -storm in the dual
form of V ata-P arjanyé , wh i le Vayu i s Often simila rly l inked with Ind ra as
Ind ra -V ayfi . Vata is the breath of the gods ; Like Rudra he wafts
h eal ing and prolongs l i fe ; for he has the treasure of immorta l ity in his
house. His activity is chiefly mentioned in connexion with the thunder
storm . He p roduces ruddy l ights and makes the dawns to sh ine. His
swiftness often suppl ies a comparison for the speed of the gods or of
mythical steeds. His noise i s al so often mentioned .
x . 168 . Metre z °Tr Istubh .
<1was: a samewe arts 1a 1"
s f-
sewn ( its 1
visits nastam shit: 1 "
( am eta 1 s wam "
as: 1EN : 1
fgfi gwiwsmfit s tern fgfilmfi 1arts 1wamfit1swams tilt Q
'fii gfigm i gne fi 11 3 711 {fitma 1 3&n 'W '
"
astu 11
x . 168,2] Vii ’l‘A 2 17
1 Vé tasya nu mah imdnam ra (I wil l ) now (proclaim) the
th asya greatness of Vata’
s car its sound
rujann eti , s tanayann asya goes shattering, thunder ing. Touch
gh é sah. ing the sky itgoes p roducing ruddy
d ivi spr‘
g yati arunéni k rnvann ; hues ; and it also goes a long the
u to eti p'
rth ivyarenum asyan . earth scattering dust.
mah imanam : the vb . can eas ily be suppl ied, the most obvious one
bei ngp
ra vocam according to the fi st verse of 1 . 32 , Ind rasya nu
VIryani p ra vocam , and of i . 154 V i snor nu k am vi ryani p ra
vocam. rujan : sim ilarly the Maruts are said to Spl it the mountain
with the fel ly of their cars (v. 52,
and their sound is thunder
(i . 23, stanayan : used predicatively l ike a finite vb . (207) oreti may be suppl ied. arunén i : al luding to the ruddy hue of
l ightning, with which the Maruts are particularly associated. asya
accent, p. 452 . uté : 24 . p rth ivya : inst. expressing motion over
(199 ,
s em en-
g amerfas t smm tfi rmfimrdm fi swtn
fi wwfi mfié a sfifltu m l m l flwfi‘
rt l mtflrt l m
arfit: smut i s in?
W 1 fl awusher ( int 11 arfii : 1 urges 1 HSI’fl'
R 1 as : 1
wa fi a‘ssn aetfl sn tmi n
sam pr é rate aa'
atasya vi stha'
. The hosts of Vata speed on
einem gach anti samanam na together af ter him‘
they go to him
yosah. as women to a festiva l. The god,
téb h ih sayuk sarath am d eva the king of all this world, uni ted
7737 3 133 , with them, goes on the same car.
r r I r 1
asya VI svasya bhuvanasya raga .
sam p ra irate : 3. pl . pr .A. of i r ; p . 468,20 a . visthds : though the
derivation is vi -sth e (not analysed in the Pada text), the meaning is
uncertain. It is probably the subject with which yoses are com
VATA [x. 168,2
pared, the sense being : the rains follow the storm wind (ap iim sak ha
in 3 c), and accompany him on his course. s arath am : an adv. based
on the cognate acc. (197, i yate : from 1 go according to the
fourth class,from which the pr . forms iyase , i yate , i yan te , and the
pt. iyamana occur ; 0 is a J agatI Pada .
3wa ft-
21 nfwfirfi dmah wa rt s 1ufwsfir’
: 1 i de m: 1
a fa fi afi aam r‘
é t l a 1fi 1 1 faa’
fi 1 aaaa 1 an 1ws
amt es tw earwarm
a? tea m: stem11 3 111111“Ge t 1m a n: 1marsh
armamaraz q éu wt l sfi n
an tar ik se p ath ibh ir Iyamano , Going a long his p aths in the air
na'
, n i vi é ate k atamac can éh ah . he rests not any day. Thef r iend
apam sak ha prath amajé rté’
tva, of waters, the first-born, the holy,
kua svijjatah, kuta é. b ab h fi va where p ray being born, whence
has he ar isen
p ath ibh i s : inst. in local sense (199 , iyamanas : see note on
2 c. ah as : ace. of duration of time (197 , 2) cp. also 4 b and the
Padapatha. apdrnSak ha : as accompanied by rain (cp. note on 2 a) .
p rath ama-jds : 97, 2. rtava : 15 e. k va kfia (p. jatasas a finite verb cp. x . 129 , 6 b . kuta é. b ab huva what is
h is origin (cp. x . 129,6 d) on the use of the pf. cp. 2 13 A a .
« N
swan garwtafi hwm warn i arflttr l uéw
w as sid e as 1151: 1 asu aam aria 123 : 1 11s : 1
EfiflT{ ft aft-
fi t =1 ted that: 1 {F1 1 WEI 1 311113? 1 a I
as main sfi mt 17
612111 11
4 atmé. d evanam , bhuvanasya
garb h o ,
y ath avaéam carati d eva esah.
s tar 1
a§ 1mata 1 sfas i 1fi1€m 11
Breath of the gods , germ of the
wor ld,this god fares according to
his wi ll. His sounds are heard,
VOCABULARY
F in i te verbal forms are here given under the root from wh ich they are derived,
as al so the preposi tions wi th wh i ch th ey a re compounded , even when separated
from them . Nom inal verba l forms (parti cip les , gerund s , gerund ives , infin i tives ) ,on th e other h and , appear in thei r alphabetica l order .
ABBREVIATIONS
A.= accusative. A= Atman epada, m iddle voice. AA.
= Ai tareya
A ranyaka . ab . ablative. acc. accusative. act. active . adv. adverb ,adverbi al . ao. aor ist. Arm .
= Armen ian . Av. Avesta , Avestic.‘Bv .
Bahuvr i hi compound . cd compound . cj. conjunction . cog . cognate .
corr . correlative . cpv. comparative. causative . D. dati ve . dat .
dative . dec . declens ion . dem . d emonstrative . den . denomi native .
der . derivative . Dv. Dvandva compound . ds . desi derative . d a . dua l .
cmph . emphatic, emphas iz ing . enc. encl i ti c. Eng. Engl i sh . f . fem in ine .
f t. future . G. gen i tive. gd . gerund . gdv. gerund ive . gen . gen iti ve .
Gk . Greek . G0 . Goth ic. gov. govern ing compound . 1 . in strumenta l .
ij. interjecti on . ind . ind icative . iudeo. indecl inable. inf. infin i ti ve.
i nj. i njunctive. inst. in strumenta l . i nt . inten s ive. inter . in terroga
t ive . ipf. imperfect. ipv. imperative. i rr . i rregular. i tv. i terative .
K . Karm adharaya compound . In . mascul ine. m i d . m idd le . L . loca
tive . Lat Latin. lc . locative . Li th1
: Li thuan ian . N nom ina
t ive . n . neuter . neg. negative . nm . numeral . nom . nominative .
0 G. O ld German . 0 1. O ld I r i sh . OP. O ld Persi an . op . optative.
ord . ord inal . OS. O ld Saxon . 0 8 1. O ld Slavon ic. P. Parasma ipada ,
active voice . pcl . particle . pf. per fect. pl . p lura l . poss . possess ive .
pp. past passive participle . ppf . p luperfect. pr . presen t. prn . pro
noun . proh . proh ibi tive . prp. prepos i tion . prs . person , person al .
ps. passive . pt. partic iple red . redupl ica ted . ref. reflexive. re l .
relative . r t. root. s ingular sb . subjunctive . sec. secondary .
sf . suffix . Slav. Slavon ic. spv. super lative . syn . syntactica l . Tp .
Ta tpurusa compound . V . vocative. vb. verb, verbal . voc. vocative .
YV . Yajurveda .
a , pm . root that in a-tra , a- th a , ak - tu, m . ointment ; beam of l ight (clear)a - smai , a-sya. ni ght, x . 14
,9 [afijanoint] .
ams a tta in , v. as’
né ti , asnut é : see as’
. ak s -a, m . die for playing , pl . d ice, x.
amh -as , n . d i stress, troub le, i i . 3 ; 34,2 . 4 . 6 . 7 . 13 [perhaps eye
I i i . 59,2 ; vi i . 71 , 5. spot] .
a k a-an , n . eye (weak stem of ak s i ) , x.
127,1 .
a-k s i ya -mana , pr . pt. ps . unfa i ling, i .154
,4 (2 . k s i destroy] .
akh k h al i -k f tya, gd . having madea croak ,
vi i . 103,3 .
A g -n i,m . fi re, i i . 12 , 3 ; i i i . 59 , 5 vi i i .
48 , 6 ; x . 34,1 1 god of fi re, Agni , i .
1—7,9 ; 1 i i . 35 , 15 ; v . 11 , 1 - 6 ;
vi i. 49 , 4 x . 15,9 . 12 ; 90, 13 [Lat
i g-ui - s
,Slav. og
agn i -d ag dh a, Tp . cd . burnt with fi re, x.
15,14 [pp . of d ah burn ] .
ag ni -duta , a . (Bv . ) having Agni as a
messenger, x . 14, 13 .
ag n i -svetta, cd . Tp . consumed by fi re,x . 15, 1 1 (pp . of svad taste well] .
ag -r a , n . f ront beginning ; top , x. 135,6 ;
l c . agre in the beginning, x. 129 3 . 4 .
ag ra -tas , adv. in the beginning , x. 90,7.
a -ghn -y é , f. cow,
v. 83 , 8 [gdv. not to be
s la in,from h an s lay] .
ank us- I’
n,a . having a hook
,hooked
,at:
tractive,X . 34 , 7 [ank u s
'
a hook] .
I . ring -a , n . limb , i i . 33, 9 .
2 . anga, em ph atic pcl . gust, only, i .x . 129
,7
angara , m . coa l,x . 34
,9.
Ang i ra , m . name of an ancient seer,iv.
51 4 .
Ang i r as , m . pl . name of a group of
ancestors, v. 1 1, 6 ; x . 14 , 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 ;
s .,as an epi th et of Agn i , i . 1 , 6 ; v.
1 1,6 [Gk . dyye
- s
ac bend , I . P. acati . 1'
1d draw up , v .
83 , 8 .
a-cak ra, a . (Bv . ) wheelless , x . 135,3 .
a-ci t , a . (K . ) unthinking , thoughtless, vi i .86
,7 .
a -ci t-e , dat. i nf . not to know, vi i . 61 , 5 .
ao ci tti , f . (K . ) thoughtlessness , v i i . 86 , 6 .
a -ci tra, n . darkness,obscur ity, iv. 51
,3 .
a-cy uta , pp . (K. ) not overthi own,un
shakable, i . 85 , 4 .
a cyu ta -cyfi t , a . (Tp . ) moving the immovable, I i . 12 , 9.
ach a , prp w i th acc .
,unto
,vi i i . 48 , 6
ajdrive, I . P . djati [Lat. ago‘lead
‘d rive Gk . d'yw,‘l ead
a drive up , v i . 54,10 .
ud d i ive out,11 . 12
,3 ; iv. 50
,5 .
aja-m ayu , a . (Bv. ) bleating l i ke a goat,v i i . 103
,6 . 10 [may d ,
m . bleat] .a -jara ,
a . (K. ) unaging , i . 160, 4 [jgu aste away] .
[ad hvara
a-jasra , a . (K. ) eterna l, I I . 35, 8 [unf a i ling jas be exhausted] .
ajavi , m . p l . Dv. cd . goa ts and sheep , x .
90,10 [aja+ avi ] .
a -jur -
y é , a . unaging, iv. 51 , 6 [jur wasteaway] .
afij, VI I . P . anak ti anoint ; A . ank té
a noint oneself, vi I i .anjas -a, adv. stra ightway, vi . 54, 1 [ inst .
of anjas ointment wi th gl id ingmotion] .
anj-i , II . ornament,i . 85
,3 ; VI I I . 29 , 1
[afijanoint] .a-tas , adv. hence
,x. 14
,9 ; ab . f rom
that,iv. 50, 3 ; than tha t, x . 90 , 3 .
ati ra tra, a . (celebI ated ) o't ern1ght, V 11
103,7 [ra tr i night] .
atk a , m . robe,i i . 35
,14 .
aty -etavai , dat. in f. to p ass over,v. 83;
10 [ati i go beyond] .a- tr a , adv. here, i . 154 , 6 ; I I . 35 , 6 .
a-tra, adv . then,vi i . 103 , 2 ; there, x.
135,1 .
Atri , m . an ancient sage , VI I . 71 , 5 .
a -th a , adv . then ; so, vi . 54 , 7 .
Ath ar -v an , m . pl . name of a gl oup of
ancien t pr iests , x. 14 , 6 .
a-th a, adv. then, vi i i . 48 , 6 ; x . 14,10 ;
129 , 6 ; so, x. 127, 6 .
atb o ,adv. and a lso, x . 90 , 5 [ath a + u ] .
ad , eat, I I . P. atti , i i . 35, 7 ; x. 15 , 8 . 1 1 .
12 [Lat. edo, Gk . 3601, Eng. eat] .a. d ab dh a , pp . (K. ) uninjured , iv. 50, 2
[d ab h harm] .A d i ti , f. name of a goddess , VI I I . 48 ,
2
[unb ind ing, f reedom,from 3 . d a bind] .
ad d h a ,adv. ti uly, x. 129 , 6 [ in th i s
manner : a d this d h a] .a -dya, adv. to- day, i . 35 , 11 iv. 51 , 3
4 ; x . 127,4 ; 135 , 5 ; now,
x. [perhaps a -dyavi on this
day] .
11-111 1, m . i ock,i . 85, 5 [not sp l itting : d r
p ierce] .adr i -dug dh a , Tp . ed . pressed out with
stones,iv. 50, 3 [pp . of duh mi lk] .
ad h a -ra , a . lower,i i . 12 , 4 .
adh as , adv. below,x. 129, 5 .
ad hi , prp . wi th lo. ,upon, 1. 85, 7 ; v.
83 , 9 ; Vi i . 103 , 5 ; wi th ab . f 1om,
x . 90, 5 .
edny -ak sa , m . eye-witness ; sur1ey01 , x .
129, 7 [having one’
3 eye up on] .adh vara, m . sacrifice, i . 1 , 4 . 8 ; iv.
ab b i ti ]
ab b i t i , f . atta c ,k i i . 33
,5
a t -vrta , pp. adorned,1 . [ 1 . vr
cover] .a-b h v-a , a . monstrous ; n . force, 1 1 . 33
,
10 ; monster, iv. 51,9 [non-existent
,
monstrous -b h fi be] .a-many a -man a
, pr . pt. A . not thinkingunexpecting, i i . 12, 10 [man think] .
a-marty a , a . (K. ) immorta l, vi i i . 48 , 12f. a, x. 127 , 2 .
a -mi tra , m . (K . ) enemy, i i . 12 , 8 [m i traf r iend] .
am i ta -varna , a . (Bv. ) of unchanged colour,iv. 51 , 9 .
ami -va, f . disease, i . 35 , 9 ; i i . 33, 2 ;vi i . vi i i . 48 , 11 [am harm, 3 . s .
am i -t i ] .
amu -y-a , inst. adv. in this way, so
,x .
135,2 [ i IIst. f. of amu this use d in
the inflexion of ayam ] .a-mfi ra , a . (K. ) wise, vi i . [notf oolish mfi ra] .
a -m f ta,a . immorta l m . immorta l being ,
i . 35 , 2 ; vi i . 63 , 5 ; vi i i . 48 , 32; 11 .
wha t i s immorta l, i . 35, 6 ; x . 90,3 ;
immorta li ty, x. 129 , 2 [not dead , mrta,
pp . of mr die ; cp . Gk . a’
q or os im
mor ta l
amr ta - tva, n . immorta li ty, x . 90,2 .
ambh -as , n . water , x. 129 , 1 .
a-yajvan ,m . (K. ) non- sacrifi cer, VI I .
61,4.
a-y -am , dem . prn . N. s . In . this, i i i . 59 ,4 ; vi i . 86, 3 . 8 ; v i i i . x. 34,
here) ; he, i . 160 , 4 . x.
a -ya s , a . nimble,i . 154, 6 [not exertrng
oneself . y a s y as heat oneself ] .a rapas , a i i . 33 , 6 ; x.
15,4 [rap as , n . i nfi rmi ty, injury] .
dram -h r ta , pp. well -p rep ared , x. 14,13
[made ready] .ar -am , adv. in readiness ; wi th k r do
service to vi i . 86 , 7 .
a-rati , f . hosti lity, i i . 35 , 6 ; iv. 50,11 ;
vi i i . 48 , 3 ; x. 34 , 14 [non-
giving, nig
gard l iness, enmity] .a -ri , m . niggard , enemy, gen . aryas , I I .
12,4 . 5 iv. vi i i . [having
no wea lth : r i ra i ; 1 . ind igent ; 2 .
niggard ly] .s r i sta , pp. (K . ) uninjured , V i . [r i sinjure] .
ar -una, a . f. 1 , ruddy, x. 15,7 ; n . ruddy
hue, x. 168 , I.
ar -u sa, a. ruddy, i . 85, 5 ; vi i . 71, 1 .
a -rend , a . (Bv. ) dustless, i . 35 , 11 [rendm . dust] .
ark -a, m . song, i . 85,
sing] .ar c sing, p raise, I . arcati . sam p ra ise
uni 1 ersa lly, p f. anrcé , i . 160, 4 .
arc ant, pr . pt . s inging, 1 . 85
,2 ; vi i i .
arna -va, a . waving, vi i i . 63, 2 ; m . flood,i . 85
,9 .
ar-th a , n . goa l , vi i . 63, 4 [what is gonef or : 1
°
go]arth -in , a . greedy, x. 127
,5 [having an
object, needy] .ar -p aya , cs . of r go.
33,4 .
arya, a . nob le, V I I . 86, 7 x. 34, 13 m .
lord,i i . 35, 2 .
Anya-man ,m . name of one of the
Adi tyas , vi i . 63 ,6 .
ar van t , m . steed , i i . 33, 1 ; vi i . 54 , 5
[speed ing z r go] .arvak , adv . hither, x. 15
,4 . 9 ;
wards,x. 129 , 6 .
arvanc, a . huherward , i . 35, 10 ; v. 83 , 6 .
arh ant , pr . pt. worthy ,i i . 33
,103.
av help , I . P. avati , i . 85 , 7 ; i i . 12 , 14 ;35
,15 ; iv. 50
,9 . 11 ; vi i . 49 , 1
- 4 ;61, 2 ; x. 15 , 1 . 5 ; qui cken , v. 83, 4
ava -t a , m . well, i . 85 , 10 ; iv. 50,3 [ava
down] .a -vadya, n . blemish, x. 14 , 8 [gdv. not to
be pra ised, b lameworthy] .ava-n i
, f . r iver, v. 1 1 , 5 [ava down] .ava -p aé yan t , p r. pt. look ing down on
vi i . 49, 3 .
ava-ma, spv. a . lowest ; nearest,i i . 35,
12 ; latest, vi i . 71 , 3 [ava down] .ava -
yatf , m . appeaser, vi i i . 48 , 2 .
ava- ra,opv. a . lower, x. 15 , 1 ; nearer
,
i i . 12, 8 [ava down] .av -as , n . help ,
i . 35 , 1 ; 85 , 11 i i . 12 ,9 i i i . 59
,6 x . 15 , 4 [av help] .resting p lace, x. [un'ava - s ana , n .
bind 1ng, givrng rest : ava sa s i
2 ; x . 15,9 [are
fi d ra ise up ,i i .
af ter
avas tat , adv. below,x. 129 , 5 .
ava s -y I'
I , a . des iring help , i v. 50,9 .
a -va ta, a . x. 129 , 2 [va tawind] .
aV -i 11 .
a -v1ra , a . (Bv. ) sonless , vi i. 61 , 4 [vi réhero] .
a -vrk a, a . (K. ) f riend ly, x. [ 1101harming . vfk a wolf ] .
avyath ya] 225 [53°
ata
a -vyathya, gdv. immova ble, i i . 35,5
[vy ath waver] .as
’
reach , obta in, V. as’
n é t i , a s’
unté , i . 1 ,3 ; 85 , 2 ; i i . 33, 2 . 6 ; i i i . 59 , 2 ; vi i ,103
,9 .
ab h i atta in to (ace ) , i . 154 , 5 .
°ci ts-man ,
m . rock,i i . 12
,3 [Av. asman
‘stone Gk . tire/1 01111 anvi l
aé -va , m . horse,i i . 12
,7 35, 6 ; iv. 51 ,
5 ; v. 6 ; V i i . 71 , 3 . 5 ; x.
11 ; 90, 10 [Lat. eguu-s‘h orse
’
,Gk .
Ta r o OS. éhu] .asva -magh a , a . (Bv. ) rich in horses , vi i .
[m agh a bounty] .A é v -in , In . d a . horsemen
,name of th e
twin gods of dawn,v i i . 71 , 2 . 3 . 6 .
a stan ,nm . eight, i . 35 , 8 .
a s be,I I . R : pr . 2 . a
’
s i , i . 1,4 ; i i . 12,
15 ; 33 , 3 ; 3 . asti',i i . 33,
vi i . 71,4 ; 86 , 6 ; x . 34
,14 ; p l .
1 . smas i , vi . 54,9 ; vi i i . 48
,9 ;
3 . san t i , i . 85, 12 ; x . 90,16 ; ipv.
astu , v . 11 , 5 ; vi i . 86 , 82; x.
san tu , vi i . op. sya rna ,3 ; iv. 50, 1 1 ; v i i i .
13 ; ipf . 3 . a s , x. 129,3 ; a s i t , x . 34
,
2 ; 22 .
a san ,x. 90, 129
,52 ; pf . asa ,
vi i . 86,4 ; x . 129 , 2 ; asur , iv . 5 1
,7 .
ap i be or rema in in ( lo. 1 °
sy am a , i i i .
59 , 4 ; x. 14,6 .
par i be around , celebrate, 2 . p l . s th a , VI I .
103,7
p ra bep re-eminent, ipv. a s tu ,i i i . 59
,2 .
fits - at , pr . pt. 11 . the non- existent,X. 129
,
1 . 4 .
a - sas’
cat , a . (Bv. ) inexhausti ble, i . 160 ,2
[having no second, sa é cat sac follow] .as - i ta , (pp .) a . black , iv. 51 , 9 .
a- sammr sta , pp . (K . ) uncleansed , v . 11 .
as -u , m . life, x. 14 , 12 ; 15 , 1 [ 1 . a s
exist] .
asu -trp ,a . (Tp . ) life-stea ling, x. 14
,12
[trp delight in] .asu -n i ti , f . sp ir i t-gui dance, x. 15 ,
14 .
asu-ra , In . d ivine sp iri t, i . 35, 7 . 10 ; V.
83,6 [Av . ahura] .
asur -ya, n . divine dominion,i i . 33, 9 ;
35,2 .
asfi yant , pr . pt. d ispleased , resentful, x.
as ta , 11. home, abode, x 8 ;a sma, prn . s tem of 1 . prs. p1. ; A.
asman us,VI I I 48 , x. 15, 5 ; D.
a smab hyam to us,i . 85
,12 ; X . 14,
12 ; asme to us, i . 160, 5 ; i i . 33, 12
Ab . asmad f rom us,i i . 33, 2 ; vi i . 7 1
1 . 2 ; than us,i i . 33, 1 1 ; G . asma
k am of us, v i . 54,6 ; L . a sm é in or on
us,i i . 35, 4 ; iv. 50, 10 . 11 ; vi i i . 48 ,
10 ; asmasu 0 11 us iv. 51 , 10 .
a -sm in ,L . of prn . root a
,in this
,1 1 . 35 ,
14 ; iv . 50, 10 ; X . 14 , 5 .
a-smera , a . (K . ) not smi ling, I I . 35,4 .
a -smdi , D . of prn . root a ,to him
,i i . 35
,
5 . 12 f or him,X . 14, 9 ; unaccented ,
asma i to or f or him,i i . 12 , 5 . 13 ; 35 ,
2 . 10 ; vi . 54 , 4 ; V i i . 63, 5 ; X . 14,9 .
11 .
a - sya, G. of prn . root a , of this, 11 . 33,9 ;
X . 129,6 ; 168, 2 ; unaccented , asy a
his,of him,
its,of i t, i . 35 , 7 ; 154, 5 ;
160,3 ; i i . 12 , 13 ; 35, 2 . 6 . 8 . 11 iv.
50,2 ; vi . 54 , 3 ; vi i . 86, 1 vi i i . 48
,
12 X . 34, 4 . 6 ; 90, 33
. 4 . 6 . 122. 15 ;129
,7 ; 135 , 7 ; 168 , 1 .
as -yant , pr . pt. scattering, X. 168,1 [as
throw] .a -svai , D. f. of prn . root a , to that, 1 1 .
33,5 .
ah say : pf. 3 . pl . ahur , I I . 12 5 v. 11 ,6 ; VI I . 86 3 ; X .
°ah a,emph asi zing pcl . , indeed , i . 154 6
v . 83, 3 ; vi i . 103 , 2 .
ah an ,11 . day, vi i i . 48 , 7 X . 129 , 2 .
ah am , prs . prn . ,I,vi i i . 86
,7 ; X . 15
,3 ;
34,2 . 3 . 12 .
ah ar , 11 . day, V I I . 103, 7.
ah as , 11 . day, X . 168 , 3 .
a -h a sta, a . (Bv. ) handless , X . 34,9 .
ah - i,m . serpent, i i . 12 , 3 . 1 1 [Av. aEi ,
Gk . t’
xi-s Lat . angui -s] .
a-h rnan a , pr . pt . A . f reef rom wra th [h i°
be angry] .
A , prp . with ab . f rom,11 . iv . 50 ,
3 ° 10 ; w ith L .,in,1 . i i .
8 ° i i i . 59 , 3 ,vi i i .
a , pel . quite, very, i i . 12, 15 ; with D.,
v i i i
a -g ata , pp . come,VI I . 103
,3 . 9 [gam go] .
a -gam - i sth a , a . sp .v com1ng most gladly,X . 15
,3 .
ag
X
a s , n . s in, V l l . 86,4 ; X . 15, 6 [cp .
Gk . o’
ixyos
a c-y a , gd . bend ing, X. [5+ ac
bend] .a -jata , pp . p roduced, x. 129 , 6 [jangenerate] .
5j-ya , n . melted butter,X . 90 , 6 [5-afij
anoint] .5n i , m . axle end , i . 35 ,
6 .
5-tata , pp . extended,X . 135 6 [tan
stretch]a - tasth i vam s , red pf . pt . havingmounted,i i . 12
,8 [5 + sth 5 stand] .
5t-m5n ,m . breath , X . 168 , 4 [O ld Saxon
d thom breathA d i ty 5, m . son of Aditi , i i i . 59 , 2 . 3. 5.
5p obta in, V. P . 5pn6ti ; pf . 5p a , iv . 51 ,
7 [Lat. ap - iscor‘reach ap
- ere
5 -b h i s , I . pl . f . of prn . root 5 ,with these
,
V . 83,1 .
5 -b h 1’
1, a . coming into being, X. 129 , 3 .
5m5, a . raw,unbaked
,i i . 35
,6 [Gk . (bud- s
raw
5 -
y at-1
, pr . pt. f . coming , X . 127, 1 . 3
[5 1 i go] .5yas - 5 , a . f . 1 , made of iron, vi i i . 29 , 3
[537 5 8 iron] .5y
H
- Ii , a . active ; m . l iving being, morta l,i i i . 59
,9 [ i go] .
5-
yud h -a , n . weapon , VI I I 29, 5 [a + y a dhfight]5y -us
,11 . span of l ife, vi i . 103 , 10 ; vi i i .7 . 10. 11 ; x . 14
,14 [activity
i go] .5rany5 , a . belonging to the forest, X . 90
,8
[5rany a] .5-r6h ant , pr . pt. sca ling, i i . 12, 12 [ruhmownt] .
5v1’
s , adv. in view,w i th k r , make mani
f est, v. 83,3.
554 1 , a . swif t, vi i . 71 , 5 [Gk .
é é u -h éman ,a . of swif t impulse,
i i . 35,1 .
5 - s5m , gen . p1. f . of the prn . root 5 , ofthem
,iv . 5 1, 6 .
5s - i na , i rr . pr . pt . A .
,sitting, x. 15, 7
[5 s sit] .5-hi ta , pp . p laced in ( lc. vi i i . 29
,4 ; X.
wi th 8 5m p laced upon ( lc.
X. 4 [d h 5 put] .5-huta , pp. to whom oflering is made, v
I go, I I . P. ém i , X . 34,5 é ti , iv. 50
, 8 ;X . 34
,6 ; 168 , 1
2; y 5nti , vi i . 49, 1 ;
app roach vi i i . 48 , 10 5y an , p r .
sb . pass, vi i . 61 , 4 atta in , vi i . 63 , 4 ;
pf. iyfi r , X . 15 , l . 2 .
5nu go af ter , v i . 54, 5 ; f ollowvi i i , 63, 5
5p a go away, X .
ab h i come upon . ipf. 5y an ,.
V1 1 . 103 , 2 .
5va app ease : op. i y 5m , vi i . 86 , 4 .
5 come, i i . 33, 1 ; v . 83, go to, x
( ma 5 come to (ace. I . 1 , 7 .
fi d r ise, vi i . 4 ; ipf. a i t ,
X . 90, 4 .
1’
1p a approach , VI I . 86,3 ; 103 , 3 X .
14 , 10 34 , 10 flow to,i i . 35 , 3 .
p 5r 5 p a ss away , pf . iyfi r , X . 14,2 . 7 .
p 5r i Surround , i i . 35 , 4 . 9 .
p r5 go forth, i . 154, 3 ; X . 14, 7 .
5nu p r5 goforth af ter, vi .v i d isperse, X . 14 , 9 .
s5m flow together , i i . 35 , 3 ; unite, VI I ,103
,2 .
i ch 5-m5na , pr . pt. A . des iring, X . 34,10
[ i s wish] .i -t5s , adv. f rom here
,X . 135
,4 .
1’
ti, pcl . thus , i i . 12 , 5
2; vi . 54 , 1 . 2 ; X .
34 , 6
i t th5, adv . thus, 11 °
,truly, i . 154,
i - d , emph as izing pcl . just, even,i . 1 , 4 .
6 ; 85, 8 ; 154 , 3 ; i i . 35, 8510 ; iv. 50,
vi i . 86, X.
34 , 5 . 7 . 8 . 13 127,3 [Lat. id
i - d -5m , dem . pm . 11 . thi s, i . 154 , 3 ; II .
12,14 ; i v. 5 1
,1 ; v .
X . 14, 15 15,2 ; 129
,3 ; 135 ,
7 ; this world , v . 83, 9 here,v i . 54,
g[ 1 11] .
i - d 5 u im ,adv. now
,i .
i d h kindle, VI I . A ind d lié .
s5m kindle,3. p l . ind h ate , I I . 35, 1 1 ;
pf. i d h i r é , v. 1 1 , 2 .
i dh -m5 , m . fuel, X . 90,6 [ i dh kindle] .
ind -u , m . drop , Soma , v ii i . 48 ,2 . 4 . 8 .
12. 13 . 15 °
,.pl iv. 50, 10 ; vi i i .
I nd ra , m . name of a god , i . 85, 9 ; i i .—15 ; iv. 50, 10 . 11 ; v . 11 , 2 ; v i i .
49,1 ; vi i i . 48 , 2. 10 ; X . 15 , 10 ; 90,
13 .
ind r - iv5, 11 . might of I ndra,i . 85
,2
[Ind ra] .-nv go, I . P. I
’
nva ti [ secondaI y root
from 1 go accO I d ing to class v . . i -nu] .sam br ing, i. 160, 5 .
im5, dem . p rn . stem ,th is, A. m . im5m ,
i i . 35,2 ; X. 14 , 4 ; 15 ,
6,N . 111 . pl .
imé , v i . 54,2 ; vi ii . 11 . im5,
i i . X . 15, 4 ; im5n i , vi i .71
,6
ubj] 228 [et5
ubjf orce, VI . P . ,ubj5ti .
n i r drive out, i . 85, 9 .
ubh 5 , a . both, i . 35, 9 X . 14 7 [cp . Lat.
am bo, Gk . a
’
y-cpm both ’
,Eng . bo- ih] .
ub h 5-y 5 , a . p] . both i i .
ub h ay5-d at , 5 . having teeth on both jaws ,X .
ur- Ii , a . f urv - 1 , w1de, I 85 , 6 . 7 ,154
,
2 ; Vii . 61 , 2 ; X . 127 , 2 [Av .
voura,Gk . ez
’
ipzi-s] .
uru -k ram5 , a . (Bv . ) wide-striding, i . 154 ,5 [k r5ma , m . stride] .
uru -g 5y 5, a . (Bv. ) wide-
p aced , i . 154 , 1 .
3 . 6 ; vi i i . 29 , 7-g5y a ga i t from g 5 go] .
uru-c5k sas , a . (Bv. ) f ar—seeing, vi i . 63,4 [c5k sas , n . s ight] .
uru -vy5cas , a . (Bv.) f ar - extend ing, i .
160 , 2 [vy5ca s , n . extent] .uru -s
’
51nsa , a . (Bv. ) f ar -f amed , vi ii . 48,
4 [ é 5rnsa , m . p ra ise] .urn - syn , a . f reedom-
g iving, vi i i . 48,5
[from den . uru - sy a put in wide space,rescue] .
uru -nas5 , a . (Bv. ) broad -nosed , X. 14,12 [un i n é s nose] .
urv iy5 , adv . widely, i i . 35 . 8 [ in st f . of
urvi wide] .urv -1
,f. earth
,X . 14
,16 [ur I
’
I wide] .u é 5nt , pr . pt. eager, V i i . 103 , 3 ; X . 15
,
8 2 [va é desire] .U s 58
,f . Dawn
3,i i . 12
,7 ; vi i . 63, 3 ; 71 ,
1 ; X. 127, ; pl . iv . 51
,1—9 ; 1 1
[ 1 . vas shine
3°cp . Gk . rjws (for ans
Lat . aur -ar- a] .u sr5-y 5m an , a . (Bv . f aring at daybreak ,v i i . [usr5 matutina l, y5man ,
n .
course] .
a sr -I’
v5 , f . cow,iv . 50
,5 [f . of u sr - I
’
ya
ruddy from u s -r5 red] .
I] , enc . pcl . , i i . 35 , 3 ; iv. 5 1,2 [metr i
ca l ly l engthened for u ] .
-t i’
,f . help , i . 35, 1 vi i i . 48
,15 ; X . 15 ,
4 [av f a1 our ]fi ru ,
m . du . th igh, X . 90,urj, f . vigour , strength, vi i . 49 , 4 ; X . 15 , 7.
urj5y an t , den . pr. pt. gathering strength ,i i . 35 , 7 .
I‘
I rdh -V5 , a . up r ight, i i . 35 , 9 upward , X .
90,4 [Gk . 6p96-s
‘ for 6p9-f é -s ; Lat.
a rduu- s‘lofty
I'
I rd hv5m ,acc . adv. upwards , i . 85 , 10 .
u rmy 5 , f. night. X . 127,6 .
ur -v,5 n . recep tacle, i i . f old, herd ,
iv. 50, 2 [ 1 . v? cover] .
R go, V . P. rné ti , int. 5l ar ti arise,VI I I .
48, 8 [Gk . op vv
-
p t‘sti r
abhi penetrate to i .
p r5 send forth, I I I . I’
yar ti , v i i . 61 ,pk -V an ,
m . p1. name of a group
2
oi
ancestors , X. 14,3 [singing from are
sing] .f k -van t , a . s inging, jubi lant, iv. 50
,5
[are sing] .f c , f . stanza
,1 1 . collection of hymns,
Egveda ,X . 90, 9 [are s ing, pra ise] .
I°c5s -e , dat. inf . W i th
'
p r5 , to p ra ise, V i .
61,6 [are p ra ise] .
I°- I;I5, n . debt
,X . 127
,7 .
yn5 -v5n , a . indebted , X . 34,10 [rn a
debt] .
I°~ t5 , n . settled order
,i . 1 , 8 ; iv. 51
,8 ;
truth,X . 34
,12 [pp . of r go settled] .
r t5 -j5ta -saty a , a . punctua lly true, i v. 51,
7 [ true as p roduced by esta blished order] .rta -jn5, a . knowing r ight, X .
r ta -y I
’
Ij, a . yoked in due time,iv. 51 , 5 ;
vi i .
rta - sp r é , a . cherishing the rite, iv.
rt5-van ,a . holy, i i . X . 168
,3 °
p ious, vi i . f. -var i observingorder
,i . 160, 1 .
p -tfi , In . season, V I I . 103, 9 [f ixed timefrom I
°
go] .y -té , adv . prp . with 5 b . ,
without,11 . 12
,
9 [ loc. of I°t5] .
XtV - ij, m . mini strant,i . 1 , 1 [ytfi -i- IJ
y ajsacrifi cing in sea son] .I°d f1d 5ra , a . comp assiona te, I I . 33
,5
wholesome, Vi i i . 48 , 10.
rdh thrive, V . P . rd hn é ti .
5nu bring f orward , 0p . 2 . s . rdh y 5 s ,vi i i . 48
,2 .
f dh ak , adv. sepa rately, V I I 61 , 3 .
Eb b - Ii, m . p1. name of th ree d ivine
artificers , iv. 51 6 [sk1 lful , from rabhtake
I’°s - i
,m . seer , i . 1 , 2 ; iv. 50 1 X. 14 , 15 ;
90,7 .
p s.-ti , f . spear , i . 85 , 4 [Is thrust] .r s -V5, a . high, lof ty, vi i .
'
6 1,3 ; 86 , 1 .
E-k a ,mm . one, i . 35, 6 ; 154 , 3 . 4 V l l .
103, 64; vi i i . 29, 1
- 8 . 10 ; X . 14,16 ;
129,2 . 3 [prn . root
ek a -p ar5, a . too high by one,X . 34
,2 .
é k esa , 5 . having one pole, x . 135,3
[ i 535 + pole of a car] .e -t5, dem . prn . stem
,this : n . et5d ,
I I I .
59,5 ; acc. m . et5m this
,X . 14, 9 him
,
é taéa] 229
X . 34,4 ; in s t. eté n 5 , V . 83 , 6 ,
n . p l .
et5, X. 15,14 ; In . p l . eté these
,vi i .
103,9 [prn . root e + t5 th i s] .
é ta - é 5 , m . steed of the Sun,V II . 63, 2
[ é ta sp eed ing, from i go] .et5-V 5 nt , 5 . such
,X . 90, 3 [prn . et5
this + sf . v 5 u t] .e -na ,
enc. prn . stem of 3 . prs . he,she
,
i t : acc. enam him,i i . 12 , 5 ; i i i . 59 ,
3 ; vi i . 103, 2 ; X . 168,
2 ; acc. p l . en 5n them,vi i . 103 , 3 ;
gen . du . enos of them two, vi i . 103, 4
[prn . root e] .é n VI I .
en5, in st . by i t, x. 14,4 ; adv. th ither
,X
14,2 [ inst. of p i n . root
e bh i s,I . p l . with them
,X . [prn .
root
e-b hy a s , D. pl . to them,X . 34
,8 [prn .
root
e-v5, pcI. thus,just, i . 1 , 3 i i . 12,1 iv.
Vi . 2 ; X . [prn . root
e“;
op . 180] .e -v5 ev5) , adv. thus ,just, i i . 33 , 15 ;iv. 50
,8 [prn . root e] .
e 85, dem . prn . : N . s . m . es5h thi s,X
ne,1 1 12
,15 ; vi i . vii i .
29,6 ° f. esa thi s X . 14
,2
,she
,X . 34 ,
2 [ from prn . root e
e - s5m, G . pl . m . of them
,i . vi i .
103,52 . 6 ; X . 34
,5 . 8 ; 129 , 5 [pr .n
root
O k -as , n . a bode, iv. 50,8 [wonted p lace
no be wont] .6j-as , n . might, i . 85, 4 . 10 ; 160, 5 [uj
vaj°cp . Lat. augus
- tu -s‘m ighty
august
0 35 -y 5m 5n 5 , den . pr . pt. A . showing one’
s
strength, i i . 12 , 1 1 [ éjas ] .6j opv . 5 . mightier, i i . 33, 10.
6 8 5 -dh i, f . p lant, V. 83
,1 . 4 . 5. 10 ; vi i .
[5v (a ) s - 5 nurture (av f urther)d h i hold ing, from ah 5 hold] .
K5 , inter . prn . who? i . 35,7 ; X . 129
,6 ;
135,53 ; G . k 5sy 5 ,
X 1 ; du.
k 5u , X . 90,112 ; wi th
o’
ci d : I . k é na
c id by any, X. 15,6 ; pl . N. k é ci d
some, vi i i . 103 , 8 .
k a -k fi bh , f . p eak , i . 35, 8 .
k a -tam5 , inter . prn . which (of many) ?i . 35
,7 ; iv. w i th can5 any, X
[Lat. quo- tumu - s] .
l
l
k ati d h 5 , adv. into howmanyparts X . 90,1 1 [k 5-t i how many Lat. quot] .
k a adv. when vi i . 86 , 2 ; wi th
can 5 , ever, vi . 54 , 9 [ 11 5 whok 5n i k r5 d 5 t , in t . pr. pt. bellowing, iv.
v. 83 , 1 . 9 [k ran d roar] .5n - iy 5ms , opv. younger , vi i . 86, 6 [cp .
k an -y 5 , f . girl ; Gk . k awo s‘n ew ’ for
k aui o-s] .
k am , pcl . , i . 154, 1 [gladly z cp. p . 225,
k 5r -t5 ve , dat. inf . of k g do, i . 85, 9 .
k alma l i k - in ,a . radiant
,i i . 33, 8 .
k av -I’
, m . sage, v. 11 , 3 ; V i i . 86,3 X .
129,4 [Av . kavi k ing
k avi -k ratu , a . (Bv. ) having the intell igenceof a sage, i . 1 , 5 ; v. 11 , 4 .
k avi - tam ,opv. a. wiser
,vi i . 86 , 7 .
k av i -é ast5, pp . (Tp . ) reci ted by the sages,X . 14
,4 .
k av -y 5 , a . wise,X . m . p1. name of
a group of Fathers,xX 14
,3 .
k aé5, f . whip , vV. ,SS 3 .
k5m -5 , 1 1 ; X. 34,6
129,4 [k am desire]
k é s’
. appear, int. 0 5k as i ti .
5 bh i look upon ,X . 135
,2 .
k i t5 v5 , m . gambler , X . 34 , 3 . 6 . 7. 10. 1 1 .
13.
k i -m , inter . prn . what? V I I . 86, 2 . 4 ;vi i i . 48 , 3
2; X. 90
,1 1 ; 129 ,
12 ; W i th
can 5 anything, X . 129, 2 [Lat. qui -s,gut
-d] .
k i la , adv . emphas izing preced ingword,
indeed,i i . 12
,15
k i r - I’
,In . singer, i i . 12
,6 [2 . k r com
memorate] .k u-car5 , a . wandering a t wi ll
,i . 154
,2
[k u , inter . prn . root where? = anywhere
cara from car f are] .ku - t5s , inter . adv . whence ? x. 129
,62
168 , 3 [prn . root where
k u -m 5r5 , m ,boy, x. 135 , 3 . 4 . 5
i i . 33,12 .
kum5r5-d esn 5 , a . (Bv. ) p resenting gif tsl i ke boys , X . 34
,7 [d esu5 , n . gif t from
d 5 give] .k u l -y5, f . stream, v; 83, 8 .
kuv- i d,inter . pcl . whether ? 1 1 . 35
,1 . 2 ;
iv. 51,4 [k u i d : cp . p .
i -h a , inter . adv. where ? i i . 12 , 5 ; X.
129 , 1 [k n sf . h 5 dh 5 cp.
p .
k r make, V. k rné t i , k rnuté , iv . 50 , 9 ;
v. 83,3 ° hold, X . 34
,12 °
ra ise
k rnvé nt]
(voice) , 8 ; pr . sb . 3 . s . k rn5vat , VI I I .
48,3 3. pl . krn5van , iv. 51
,1 vi i .
63,4 ; 2 . pl . A . k rn I
’
I d h vam ,X . 34 ,
14 ; i pv. k rnuh i,X . 135
,3 ; pf. cak r
m 5 , v i i . _86 , 5 ; X . 15 , 4 ; cak rur , V I I
A . cak r é , X . cak r5te ,vi i i . 29 , 9 ; cak r i r é , i . 85, 1 . 2 . 7 . 10 °
ft. k 5 r i sy 5s i , i . 1 , 6 ; root ao. 5k ar ,i i . 12
,4 ; i i i . 59 . V . 83
,10 ; 5k r 5 n ,
x . 3 . p l . A . 5k r 5 t5 , vi i . 103, 8 ;X .
m a , x 6 ; 5 0 . ps . 5k 5r i , vi i . 61 , 7
[cp . Gk . k pa t'vw ‘
accompl ish’ Lat.
creo create
I'
I p a 5 drive up f or : r t. 5 0 . 5k aram , x .
127, 8 .
5V I’
s makemanifest, V. 83,3 .
n i s turn out : rt. 5 0 . ask r ta , X . 127 , 3 . Kh an - i -tr im a , 5 .p roduced by digging, vi i .
k rnv -5n t , pr . pt. making ofi ering, vi i . 49,2 [k h an d ig] .
103, 8 ; X . 168 , 1 [k I
°make] . k h 5lu , adv. indeed , X . 34 , 14 [p .
k r -t5, pp . made,i . 85
,6 ; i i . 12 , 4 vi i . kh 5 -t5, pp. dug , iv. 50 , 3 [kh an d ig] .
61, 6 ofi
’
ered ) X . 90,12 . 15 ; 135 , k h y 5 see : no present 5 5 0 . 5khy at .
6 ; n . lucky throw, X . 34 , 6 [Av. kereta , ab h i p erceive, vi i . 86 , 2 .
O l d Pe I sian karta‘made v i survey, i . 35, 5. 7 . 8 ; X . 127, 1 .
k f t5 , I'
. i i .
k r -tv 1 , ,cr d . having made, X . 15 , 12 .
k ré 5,a . poor, i i . 12, 6 [k rs
’
grow lean]k i‘s
’
ana , II . pearl, i . 35 , 4 .
k r s draw,I . P. k 5r sati , v . 83 , 7 ,
VI . P.
kr s5 ti ti ll,X . 34
,13 .
k rs- i , f . fi eld , X . 34 , 13 [k rs ti ll] :k rs -t i
’
, f . pl . p eop le, i . 160, 5 ; i i i . 59 , 1
[ti llage, settlement : k rs ti ll] .k r s -n 5, 5 . black
,i . 4 . 9 ; X . 127 7
.
f . I , vi i . 71 , 1 .
k l p be fi t, I . k 5l p 5 t i , cs . k 5 1p 5y 5 t i ,-te
arrange, X . 15 , 14 .
v i d i sp ose, X . 90,11 . 14 .
k et- Ii , In . banner,v. 11 , 2 . 3 vi i . 63 , 2
[c i t appear : G0 . ha idu- s
k é vata , In . p it, vi . 54 , 7.
k é s’
a , m . bucket, V . 83 , 8 well (of 5 car) ,v i . 54
,3 .
k r -5 -tu ,m . p ower , i i . 12 , 1 wisdom
,V i i .
61,2 [c
° do] .
k r an d bellow. I . P. k r5nd 5 ti .
abh i bellow towards,v. 83 , 7.
k r5n d - as,11 . ba ttle array, i i . 12 , 8 [ ba ttle
cry : k r and shout] .k ram s tr ide
,I . P. k r5m 5 t i , A . k r5m
a te .
vi stride out, pf. cak r ame , vi i i . 29 , 7 .
ab h i v i spread asunder , develop into ipf.
5k r 5m 5 t , X . 90 , 4 .
k r i d p lay , I . k r i l a ,x. 34 , 8 .
k ru dh be angry, IV. P . k rfi dh y ati ; red .
5 0 . inj. cuk rud h 5m5,i i . 33 , 4 .
k va, i nter . adv . whe1 e i . 35 , 7 I I . 33,
7 ; iv . 51 , 6 ; X . 168,3 ; wi th sv i d
whoknows where X [pronouncedk i
’
i a] .k sa -tr5 , n . dominion
,I . 160
,5 [k sa
k s i rule] .k sam f orbear , I . A . k s5m5 te .
a t bemercif ul to i i . 33, 1 . 7 .
k s i dwell,I I . P . k s é ti , iv. 50, 8 .
5dh i dwell in i . 154 , 2 .
k s iy -5n t , pr . pt. dwelling, i i . 12 , 1 1 [k s idwell] .
k s é -ma , m . possession ,VI I I . 86
,8 [km
k s5y 5 ti possess] .
G an -5 , m . throng, iv. 50 , 5 ; X . 34, 12 .
g ab h - i r5 , a . p rof ound , X . 129 , 1 [g ab hg 5h p lunge] .
gab h i r5-vep as , a . (Bv . ) of deep insp ira
tion,i . 35
,7 .
gam go, I .
°
g5ob at i , -te to i .
4 ; X . 14,13 ; root 5 0 . 3 . pl . 5gman ,
vi i . 1 . pl . ag anma , vi i i 48 , 3 .
1 ] [Gk . Bab/w,Lat . venzo, Eng. come] .
5 come,i . 85
,1 1 ; I oot 5 0 . ipv .
g ah I’
, vi . 54, 7 ; X . 2 . p1. g at5 ,X . 15
,4 ; 3 . g 5m 5 n tu , X . 15 , 5
2. 11 go
to X . 168 , 2 .
s5m go with (in st ) , a 5 0 . cp.,vi . 54,
2 ; uni tewi th x . 14 8 .
g5m -a -d h y 5 i , d at . inf. (of gam) to go, i .154
,6 .
gar ta -s5d , a . (Tp . ) s itting on a car-seat,
i i . 33 , 1 1 .
g 5rb h - 5 , v . 83,1 . 7 ;
x l. 6,8 4 [g rbh receive] .
g 5v -y I‘
I ti , f . pasturage, X . 14, 2 [Bv.
having nurturef or cows : go] .g5h -5 n 5 ,
a . unfa thomable, X . 129 , 1 [g 5h
p lunge] .
g5 go, I II . P. J Ig5ti .
at app roach, v i i . 71 , 4 .
5 come : rt. 5 0 . ag5t , i . 35,8 .
p 5r i go by (acc . root ao . i i i i. g 5t , I I .
33,14 .
ab h i regard , i i i . 59 , 1 vi i . 61,1 .
p r5 cs . cak s5y 5 i llumine, vi i i . 48 , 6 .
V i revea l,X .
o5k s -u , n . eye, X. 90 , 13 [oak s see] .
o5k s - ,us n . eye, vi i . 61 , 1 ; [oak ssee
cat I . P . c5t5 ti cs . c5t5ya
drive away, i i . 33, 2 .
catur -ak s5 , 5 . (EV. four -eyed , x. 14 , 10.
11 [ 5 11 8 5 5k s i eye] .catus p5d , a . (Bv . f our f ooted iv. 51 ,5 [catfi r four , Lat . quattuor, G0 .
fidwor] .
catv5r im s5, ord . , f . 1 ,.
fortieth , i i . 12 , 11 .
0 5 -115 , pcl . and not, V i i . 86,6 .
can d r5-m5 s , m . moon,X . 90, 13 [K . ed .
br ight (can d r5) mooncar f are, I . c5rati , -te , iv . 51
,6 . 9 ; vi i i .
X .
ab h i bewitch,
14.
5 approach, iv .
X
51, 8 .
p r5 goforward enter,vi i i . 48 , 6 .
abh i s5m come together , vi i i . 48 , 1 .
car5-th a , n . motion ,activity, iv . 51 , 5
[car f are] .c5r - 5 n t , pr . pt. wandering, X . 34
,10 ;
f ari ng, X. 135,2 .
car - i - tra,n . leg, vi i i . 48 , 5 [car move] .
c5r -m 5 n , n . skin,hide
,i . 85
,5 ; v i i .
63, 1 .
carsan i -dh i - t , 5 . (Tp . ) supporting thefolk ,i i i . 59
,6 [carsani , 5 . active
,f . f olk
dh p -t supporting] .
ca-ru,5 . dear
,i i 35
,1 1 [can gladden ;Lat .
cd -ru- s
ci -k i t-V5m s , red . pf. wise, vi i .
[ci t think] .
ci t perceive, I . c é tat i , -te ; pf . ci k é ta , i .
35,7 sb . cik etat , i . 35 , 6 cs . ci t5y 5
stimula te, iv. cet5y 5 cause to
th ink , vi i . 86, 7.
5 observe : pf . c i k eta , VI I . 61 , 1 .
c i t -r5 , 5 . br i lliant,iv. 51
,2 ; n . marvel
,
vi i . 61 , 5 .
ci tr5-b h 5un , 5 . (Bv. ) of bri lliant sp lendour,i . 35
,4 ;
c i tr5 -é ravas , 5 . (Bv. ) having bri lliantfame spv.
-t5ma of most bri lliantf ame,i . 1
,5 bringing most bri lliantf ame, i i i .
59,6 .
c i d , enc. pcl . just, even ,i . 85
,4 . 10 ; i i .
quid] .cek i t- 5n a
,int . p l . pt. f amous, I I . 33, 15
[c i t p erceive] .
cod - i - tf , m . furtherer, i i . 12,6 [cud
impel ] .ey5v - 5 n a , a . unstable, i i . [cyu move] .
ey5v -5n a , m . name of 5 seer, V i i . 71 , 5
[pr . pt . of cyu move] .cyu waver, f a ll, I . cy5vate .
p r5 cs . cy 5v5y5 overthrow,i . 85
,4 .
C h and seem,I I . P. ch 5n tti ; pf . ca
ch5ud a , vi i . 63, 3 ; seem good, p lease,3 . s . 8 5 0 . 5ch 5m, xX.
ch 5nd - as,n . metre
,X 14
,16 ; 90, 9 .
ch 5y5, f . shade, i i . 33, 6 [Gk . c la d] .
J 5gat , n . wor ld,i . 35
,1 [pr . pt . of g5 go] .
j5gm - i, a . nimble
,sp eeding, i . 85, 8 [ f rom
red . stem of g am go] .jajn 5n 5 , pf . pt. A . having been born ,
X .
[jan generate] .jan generate, cr
l
ea te, I .j5n 5 ti °
pf .j5j5n 5 ,i . 160 , 4 ; jajn i r éwere bor n
,X . 90
,92 . 10 ; i s 5 0 . 5jan i
sta has been born,i i i . 59
,4 V. 1 1 , 1
red . 5 0 . 5jij5 n 5 s hast caused to grow, V .
83, 10 cs . jan 5y 5 generate, i i . 35, 13 ;x. 135
,5 [O l d La t . gen- 6 generate
Gk . ao. é - ‘YGV- é -MUV] ;p r5 be
,p rol ific, IV. A . j5y 5 , 1 1 . 33 1
35,8 .
j5n -5 , m . mankind,I I . 35
,15 ; in . 59 9 ;
iv. 5 1,1 v . 1 1 , 1 p1. men , peop le, i .
35,5 ; i i . 12 , 1
—14 ; i i i . 59 , 1 . 8 ; iv .
vi i . 63,
X .
[jan genera te ; cp. Lat. gen-us,
Gk . yév 0 3,Eng. kin] .
jan5y -5 n t , cs . p i . pt. generating, i .j5n -i
,f . woman
,i . 85
,1 .
j5n - i -man, n . birth
,i i . 35 , 6 .
jan n . genera tion, vi i . 86 1 [jangenerate] .
j5y -an t, pr . pt . conquer ing ; m . victor, X
34,7 [ji conquer] .
j5r -5 nt , p r . pt. aging, old, X . 34,3 [ji
"
°
waste away Gk .
°
ye’
p- OV1
’ ‘old man
jar -5s , m . old age, Vi i . 71 , 5 [ji° wasteaway ; cp . Gk .
°
yiipa s‘ ‘
old age
jar - i tr , m . s inger,i i . 33
,1 1 [ji
°sing] .
j515s 5 , a . cool ing, i i . 33, 7 .
j515s 5 -b h es5ja , a . (Bv. ) having cool ingremed ies
,vi i i . 29
,5 [ bh es 5j5, II .
remedy] .j5 lp - i
, f . idle ta lk, chatter, VI I I . 48 , 14
[jal p chatter] .jas be exhausted , I .j5sa ; pf . ipv.jajast5mweaken
,iv. 50
,1 1.
j5] 233 [tan
j5 be born, IV. A . j5y 5 te is born ,V. 11 , 3
°'
n
83, 4 ; X . 90 , 5°
, j5yas e art born , v .
,
1 1’
6 ; ipf . 5j5y 5 t5 was born , X . 90,9 . 12 .
132 ; 129 , 3 ; 135 , 6 ; 5j5yanta , X . 90,10.
j5gr -v i, a. watchful, v . 11
,1 stimula ting,
X . 34,1 [ from red . stem of 2 . gr
wake] .
j5- t5, pp . born, 11 . 12 , 1 ; X . 90, 5. 7 ;168 , 3 ; fin ite vb .
,were born, X . 90
,
10. 13 ; 11 . what is born, i i . 33, 3 [j5 beborn] .
j5t5-ved as , a . (Bv . ) having a knowledge ofbeings , X 15 , [V é d -as , n . knowledge
from V i d know] .
j5n -u , n . knee,X . 15, 6 [Gk . yév
-v,Lat.
genu , Go. kniu,Eng . knee] .
j5y a -m5na , p I . pt . being born, iv.
[j5 be born] .j5 -y5, f . wif e, X 34
,2 . 4. 10 . 11. 13 [j5
be born] .j5r - ih - i , f . courtesan , X. 34
,5 [having
paramours : j5r5] .J 5hus - 5
,m . name of 5 proté gé of th e
Asvin s,v i i . 71 , 5 .
jI conquer , I . j5y 5 ti ft. jesy5m i , X . 34,
ps . jiy ate , i i i . [when 5 c
cented th i s f0 1m appear s i n the RV.
as jIyate , i . e . i t i s then pr . A . of jy a
overpower] .v i conquer
,I I . 12
,9 .
s5m win,iv . 50 , 9 .
ji g i -Vam s, red . pf . pt. having conquered
,
i i . 12 , 4 ; X . 127, 8 [ji conquer] .jihm5, 5 . transverse athwart
,i . 85
,11 ;
p rone, i i . 35 , 9 .
ji r5- d 5nu ,a . (Bv. ) having quickening
gifts, V . 83, 1 .
jiv-5, 11 . living world,iv. 51 , 5 [Lat.
viv-o-s] .jiv5s-e , d at. in f . to live
, vi i i . 48 , 4 with
p r5 to live on, X . 14 , 14 .
jus enjoy, VI . jus5 , vi i . 71 , 6 ; 86 , 2° X .
15, 4 . 13 °
pf . sb. juju san , VI I 61 , 6 ; i s
5 0 . sb . jé s i sat , i i . [cp . Gk . yevw,Lat. gus - tus
,G9 . kiusan, Eng . choose] .
ja s -5n5 , pr . pt. A . enjoying , Vi i i . 48 , 2 .
jI’
I s ta , pp . (wi th sh i fted accent) accep ta ble
,i i i . 59
,5 [ju s enjoy] .
ju ,IX
_. P . jun5ti speed , Vi i . 86
,7 .
jr , I . A . j5r 5 awake, be active, iv. 51 , 8 .
jé h a-m5na , pr . pt. A . gasp ing ; X . 15,9
(i eh ya w]jn5 know
,IX. j5n 5 ti , xX. ,
34 4 [cp . Gk .
é ‘w -V,Lat . co -
gno sco, Eng. know] .
v i ps . jfi 5y 5te be d istinguished , iv.
jm5, f . earth, gen . jm5s , iv. 50, 1 .
jy5-y 5m s,cpv. more, X . 90, elder , V I I .
86 , 6 [jy 5 overpower ; Gk . Bid‘force
jy é - s th a , spv. highest, i i . 35 9 chief , VI I .
86,4 [ spv . ofjy 5 ] .
jy é t-i s , 11 . light, iv . 50, 4 ; 51 , 1 ; V I 11 .
48 , 3 X . 127 , 2 [jyut dy nt shine] .
T5, dem . prn . ,tha t ; he, she, it n . t5a
that, i . 1 , 6 ; 35 , 6 ; 154 , 2 . 5 . 6 ; i i .
35,11 . 15 ; iv. 51
,10. 1 1 vi i . 8 6, 2 .
3 . 4 ; 103, 5 . 7 X . 34,12 . 13 ; 90 , 12 ;
129 , 2 . 3. 4 ; 135, 5 ; m . A. t5m him,
i i . 33, 13 ; 35, 3 . 4 ; iv . 50 , 1 . 9 ; vi .
54,4 ; that, X . 90
,7 ; 135 , 4 ; I . t é n a
with i t,vi i i . 29 , 4 . 10 wi th him, X . 90,
7 ; I . f . t5y 5 wi th that,i . 85 , 11 ; D.
t5smai to him,i i i . 59
,5 ; iv . 50
,8 2 ;
X . 34 , 12 ; f or him,X . 135, 2 ; to that,
vi i i . 48,12 . 13 as such) X . 4
f or that, vi i i . 48 , 10 ; ab . t5sm5d f rom
h im,X . 90
,5 . 8 . 93 . 103 ; than that
,X .
129,2 G . t5sy 5 of him,
i i . 35 , 9 i i i .
of tha t, vi i i . 48 , 8° X . 15 , 7 ; du.
m . t5u these two,X . 14 , 12 ; f . t é these
two,i . 160
,1 . 5 ; D. t5bhy 5m to those
two, X . 14,11 ; p1. N . m . té they, i . 85 ,vi i i . 48 , 5 ; X . 15, 3 .
13 ; those, X . as such ,X . 15
,4 . 7 ; f . 1358 they, Iv 51
,8 °
,those,
iv. 5i,
n . t5those
,i . 154
,6 ; i i . 33, 13 ; X.
tam those i . 85, 12 ; X . A . t5u°
those that,X . 90, 8 ; I . té bhi s wi th
them,i . X . 15, 8 . 14 ; f . t5bh i s
with them,X . 168 , 2 ; G. t é s5m of them,
X. 14,6 ; L. t5su in them,
1 1 33,13 .
tam s shake.
ab hi a ttack : pf. tatasr é , iv. 50,2 .
t5 t5 n -v5m s , pf . pt. having spread, VI I .
61,1 [t5u stretch] .
t5- t5 s , adv. thence,X. 90, 4 so
,X . 135, 6
[prn . root t5] .t5- tr a
, adv. there, X. 34,13 [prn . root
t5] .
t5-th 5 , adv. thus,X . 90
,14 [prn . root
t5] .ta d5n im ,
5dv. then,
root
t5] .tan extend perform,
VI I I . t5n6ti ; ipf.
5tanvat5 , X . [cp. Gk . r avvpa c
stretch Lat. tendo ‘stretch
abh i extend over : red . pf. sb . ,i . 160
,5 .
té nay a]‘
ava s lacken (A . i i . 33,14 .
a extend to (ace . i .
amu a extend over,viii . 48
,13 .
thi n -ay a , n . descendan t, i i . 33, 14 [tanextend] .
tan -u, f. body, i . 85 , 3 ; i i . 35 , 13 ; iv.
51,9 viii . x.
34,6 ; self , vii . 86, 2 . 5 (p1. ) [ tan
s tretch : cp . Lat. ten -u- i -s,Gk . r av- zi
Eng . th in] .tanv and, pr . pt . A . p erf orming, x.
[tan extend] .tap burn, I . tap a ; pf. tatép a. i tp a ins,X .
,34 1 1 °
, p s . tap y é te , i s d is tressed , x .
34,10 [ cp . Lat. tep—
‘
é re‘be warm
t é p -an a ,a . burning, x . 34
,7 [tap burn] .
tap -a s , 11 . hea t,x . 129 , 3 [Lat . tep
-or] .
tap -t é , pp. hea ted,vi i . 103 , 9 [tap burn] .
tam- as , n . darkness , iv. 50,4 ; 51 , 1 . 2 .
3 vi i . 63,1 ; 127
,2 . 3 . 7 ; 129,
32 [ tam f a int] .
tam i s - i c -i’
,f. p ower of darkness , vii i . 48 ,
1 1 [tam i s tamas + i c i
tar a . speed ing onward, vi i . 63, 4 [ticross ] .
t é -rh i , adv. then,X . 129
,2 [prn . root
t5] .té va , gen . (of. tv é m ) of thee, i . 1 , 6 vi .
54,9 ; viii. 48 [Av . tava , L ith .
tavé] .tav - é s , a . mighty, ii . 33 , 3 ; v. 83 , 1 [ tnbe s trong] .
tavas - tama , spv. migh ti es t, i i . 33, 3 .
tav - i s -i,f. migh t
,i . 35
,4 [tav i s tav
as,11 . might] .
té sk ara,m . th ief , viii . 29 , 6 .
ta sth i -vam s,pf. p t. act . having s tood
,i i .
[ s th e. s tand] .tap ay -i s p i
’l , a . causing to burn,x . 34
,7
[ from es . of tap burn] .tfiy -fi
,m . thief , vi i . 86, 5 s tay l
’
i cp .
ste mi thief ] .tig -md, a . sharp , vi ii . 29 , 5 [tn be sharp ] .t iraé c-1n a , a . a cross
,x . 129
,5 [ti r é s ] .
ti r - é s, p1 p a cross
,vii . [ti
°cross ;
AV . tarb ; cp . Lat. trans ‘cross ing
’
,
N. p r . pt ] .
ti si, nm . f. of tr i three , N. ti sr é s 1 35
,
6 ; i i . 35, 5 .
h i, pcl . indeed , vi i . 86 , 1 [prn . root tu
in tu-é m] .tuch -
y é , 11. void , x . 129 , 3 .
t i’
i bh y a , D . of tvam ) to thee, v. 11,5 [cp .
La t. ti bi ] .tfi bh y am , D . (of tvam ) f or thee , iv. 50
,
[ tr i sadh asth é
3 ; v . 1 1,
thee,vii . 86
,
3 ; by thee , vi i . 86 , 8 .
tur - t’m, a . eager
,vii . 86
,4 [tur tv ar
sp eed] .tuv i -jat é , pp . high- born
,iv. 50
,4 [tuvi
from tu be strong] .tfi v i s -man t , a . mighty, i i . 12, 12 [tuv - i s
,'
n . migh t from tu be s trong] .
typ be p lea sed , IV . P. tppnoti cs .
tarp é y a sa tisf y , i . 85 , 1 1 [cp . Gk .
r e'
pirco] .tr s thirst
,IV. tr sy a
° pf. t5trs f1r , x . 15,x 9 [cp . Gk . T époopa t
‘become d ry’
,Lat .
torreo ‘scorch ’
,Eng . thirs t] .
trs -n é.j, a . thirs ty, i .ti sya van t , a . thirs ty, vi i . 103, 3 [trsyath irst] .
t? cross,VI . tir é .
p r é extend , increase ( fam ily) , vii . 6 1 ,p rolong (l ife) , 103 , 10 ; i s ao. ,
viii . 48 ,4 . 7 . 1 1 .
v i run counter to x . 34, 6.
te,enc . dat. (of tv ém ) , to thee, i i . 33 , 1 ;i i i . 59
,2 viii . 48 , 13 ; x . 127, 8 ; f or
thee,i v. 50
,3 ; gen . of thee, i . 35, 1 1
i i . 33,
v. 1 1 , 3 ; vi . 54 ,9
,vii i . 48 , 6 . 7. 9 ; 12
4 [AV . toi,Gk .
tok - ai , m . ofi'
sp i ing, chi ldren , i i . 33, 14 ;vii . 63
,6 .
tm an ,self , vii . [cp . atm é n ] .
ty é , dem . p rn . ,n . ty é d tha t, iv . 51 , 1 ;
p1. tya, those , viii . 48 , 1 1 .
‘
tras tremble, I . tras s [Gk . Tpe'a),Lat.
térreo fr ightenn i s sp eed away. vi i i . 48 , 1 1 .
tré protect, IV. A . trayate°
s ao. 0p .,
v i i .
tra tr , 3 . protecting, viii . 48 , 14 [a sprotect] .
tr1'
,nm . three, i . 35 , 8
° 154,2 . 3 . 4 ; viii .
29,7 [Gk . Tpt Lat . tri OI . tri , Eng .
tr i k ad ruk a ,111 . pl . three Soma va ts ,
14 , 16 [k ad ru ,f. Soma vessel] .
tr i d h a tu , a . (Bv .) having three parts,threef old , i . 85 , 12 ; 154 , 4 .
tr i -p ancfis’
é , a . consisting of three fif ties,x. 34 , 8 .
tr i p ad ,a . (Bv. ) consisting of three -fourths ,
x . m . three
tr i -vand h ur é , a . three sea ted , vi i. 71 , 4 .
tr i - 8 1 d h as th é , a . (Bv. ) occupying threesea ts
,i v 11 . threefold a bode, v 1 1
,
2 [sad h a-sth a , n . ga theu ng-p lace]
durgé ]
d ur -
ga, n . hardship , vii . 61 , 7 [ dus + g ag am go] .
dur -m ati , f. i l l-wi ll, i i . 33, 14 [du s i l lmati thought] .
d a va s -y a , den . p resent wi th (in st ) , X . 14 ,1 [d 1
’
i vas , n . gif t] .d ug -k i t , m . evi l- doer
,V. 83, 2 . 9 [du s
k r do t] .d fi -stuti , f. i ll p ra ise, i i . 33, 4 [d us i ll
stut i pra ise] .duh mi lk
,II . P . d é gdh i ; s ao. duk
s ata , w ith two acc. , i . 160 , 3 .
d uh - i - tf , f. daughter , iv . 51 , 1 1 ;X . 127
,8 [Gk . Ovyo
'vrnp, G0 . dauhtar] .
d fi -d ab h a , a . (Bv. ) hard to deceive, vi i.86
,4 [dus d 5b h a deception] .
d i1 -t5, m . messenger , V. 1 1, 4 ; 83, 3 ; X.
14,12 .
d 1’
i r5d ,ab . adv. f rom f ar, i ii . 59 , 2 ; V.
83,3 [d 1
‘
i -r5,a . f ar] .
d fi r é -arth a , a . (Bv. ) whose goa l is d is tant,vii . 63 , 4 .
d r p i erce int. d ard ars i , ii . 12drti , m . wa ter -skin, V. Vii . 103
,2
[d r sp li t ; cp . Gk . Bs’
pw, Eng . tear] .
d r s’
see : pf. d ad ré e is seen , V i i .
d r éay e , dat. inf. to see , x . 14,12 .
d rs -tv5y a , gd . having seen, X .
d rh makefirm,I . P . d rmha ° ipf. 5d rm
h at,i i . 12
,2 .
d ev -5 , m .
32 . 8 . 10 .
15 ; iv.,
5o
9 ; v. 1 1 , 2 ; V i i . 61,86
,72 ; viii . 29, 2 . 3 . 7 ; 48 , 3. 9 .
14 ; X. 14 , 32
. 7 . 14 ; 15 , 34,
8 ;168
,2 . 42 [celestia l flom d iv heaven] .
d eva-tr5, adv. among the gods, X . 15 , 9 .
d eva -mama, n . a bod e of the gods . X .
135,7 .
d eva -
yd , a . d evoted to the gods,i . 154 ,
5 .
d eva -van d a, a . god-pra ising , X . 15,10
[vand greet] .d ev5-h i ti , f. divine order
,viii. 103 , 9
[d evd god + h i ~ ti , f. impulse from h i
imp el] .d ev -1 , t. goddess, i . 160 , 1 ii . 35 , 5 ; iv.
51,4 . 5 . 8 . 11 ; vii . 2 . 3 . 4 ; X .
127,1 . 2 . 3 [f . of d ev - é. god] .
d os5-va str , m . (Tp. i lluminer of gloom,
1. [dos5 evening vas -t i° from vas
shine] .d aiv -y a , a . d ivine, i . 35, 5 ; viii . 48 , 2 ;
coming f rom the gods,1 1 . 11 .
d ivini ty, i i . 35 8 [ 11 om d eva god] .Dyava-p r th iv 1 , du . (Dv. ) Heaven and
160,l . 5 ;
vii i . 48 , 13 ; th e par ts of th e cd .
separated , i i . 12, 13 .
d y u-mat , adv . br i lliantly, V . 1 1, l [ 11 . of
d yn -m an t , a . bright] .
d yn -mna, n . wea l th,i1i . 59
,6.
dvd , m . heaven, N. dyau s , iv. X .
i i . 12 , 2. 12 ; i i i . 59 , 1 ; N. p1. f. dyavas ,Lat. di em] .
d y é t - ana , a . shining,viii . 29 , 2 [ dynt
shine] .d rav - ina , n . wea lth
,iv . 51 , 7 [movable
property,from d ru run] .
d ru run,I , d rava .
ati run p ast X . 14,10 .
d rug -dh a,,n . misdeed
,vi i . 86, 5 [pp. of
d ruh be hos ti le] .
d r 1’
1h , f. ma li ce , i i . 35 , 6 m . avenger, V1 1 .6 1
,5 .
dva,nm . two
,i . 35
,6 V1 11 . 29 , 8 . 9 [Gk .
Eva),Lat. duo, Lith . du
,Eng . two] .
dvad a é a,a . consis ting of twelve, m . twelve
month,Vii . 103, 9 .
dvar , 1. du . door , iv. 51, 2 [cf . Gk . Ovpa ,Lat . f ores , Eng . door ; perhaps fromd hvr closewith loss of asp i rate throughinfidence of dva two
,as having two
folds] .
dvi -ta , ( inst. adv. (doubly) as well,V11 .
[d v i two] .d v i -pad ,
a . (Bv. ) twofooted , iv . 51 , 5
[Gk . 61- 110 5 Lat. bi -ped
dv i s ha te, II . dv é sti , X . 34 , 3.
dv é s - as , n . ha tred,i i . 33 , 2 [dv i s ha te] .
Dh an -a ,n . wea lth
,money, iv. 50 , 9 ; x.
34,10. 12 .
1 . d h dn -van , n . waste land , i . 35 , 8 ;deser t, V , 83, 10.
2 . d h an -V an ,n . bow,
d h am blow,I . P. d h amati , ps. d h am
yate , x. 135,7.
v i blow asunder , iv,50
,4.
dh am -ant , pr . pt . blowing , i . 85 , 10.
d h ar -m an , n . ordinance,law
,i . 160
,1
x . 90, 16 [ that which hol ds 0 1° i s
establ ished : d h r hold] .1 . d h ap at, III . d
i
ad h ati , v. 83 , 1°
,supp ly
with bestow,i pv.
d h eh i,x . 14
,11 ; d h atta, i . 85, 12 ;
i i . 12,5 ; x. 15
,7 ; d ad hata , x.
2 . d ha] 237
7 d ad h atana , X . 15, 11 ; d h attém ,
iv. 51,l l d ad h an tu , Vii . 63, 6 p er
f orm,ipf . dh atta ,
i . 85, 9 ; bestow, s
ao. sb . dh fisath as , i . 160, 5 esta blish,X . 129
,7 ; d s . des ire to
bes tow, d i d h i san ti , i i . 35, 5 ; support,d i dh i sam i , 11 . 35 , 12 [Gk . 7
'l077ui ] .
ddh i put on (acc . ) pf. d adh i re , i . 85 ,2 ; ao. adh i ta , X . 127
,1 .
a deposi t , root ao. sb . dh as , v. 83, 7.
u i d eposi t, r oot ao . dh atam ,Vii . 71 , 5 ;
ps . ao. adh ay i , viii . 48 , 10.
p ar i put around , V i . 54,
p ra putf rom (ab . in to (l c . vii .v i impose . pf. d ad h ur , 1v 51 , 6 °
,d ivide
,
ipf. ad ad h ur , X . 90,
can as accept glad ly, i i . 35, 1 .
pur as p lace a t the head , appoint Purohitapf. d adh i re , iv . 50, 1 .
2 . d h 5. suck, IV. P. d h é ya , ii . 33, 13 ;
d ha -m an , n . p ower , i. ord inance,
Vii . 61,4 ; 63, 3 [d h a put, es tablish] .
dh aray é t-k av i , a . (gov. ) suppor ting thesage
,i . [d h ar é y ampr . pt. cs . of
d h i° hold] .dha-ra , f. stream,
i . 85, 5 ; V . 83 ,6 [d h av
d h i sana , f. bowl , i . 160, 1 .
d h i , f. though t, i . 1 , 7 ; iv. 50 , 1 1 .
d h'
i think,III . d i d h ye .
a think to oneself , a di dhy e , X.
d h i -r a , a . thoughtf ul, vi i i . 48 , 4 ; wise, i .160
,3 ; intelligen t
,Vi i . [dh i
think] .dhun é t i , a . (Bv. ) having a resoundingga i t, iv. 50 , 2 [ahuna i ti ] .
dh i’
i r , f. pole (of a car ) , vi i . 63, 2 vi ii .48
,2 .
d ha -ma, m . smoke, V. 11,3 [dh il agi ta te ;
Gk . Lat. f umu- s] .d h ii r -ti , f. ma lice, viii . 48 , 3 [d hvi
°
injure] .dh r suppor t, fix firmly : pf. d adh é ra , i154 , ii i . 59
,1 .
dh p s-nfi , n . adv . f orcibly, X . 34 , 14 [d h ysbe bold
,dare] .
d h e-nfi , f. cow, i . 160, 3 ; i i . 35, 7 [yielding mi lk : d h e suck] .
d h rfi -ti , f. s eduction,vii . 86 , 6 [dh ru
d hv i° injure] .
1 . N5 , pdl . a s,like , 6 ;
7 . i i 33,1 1 °
,iv. Vii .
86,52. 7 ; 103,
’
22. 3 . 7 ;
[nas
V1 1 1 . 48,5 . 6 ; X. 127, 4 . 8 ; 168
,2
2 . net, n eg. pcl . not, 5 . 9 . 10 ; 33 , 9 .
i i i . 59,24 ; iv.
vi . 54 , vi i . ,6 l 53 ;
6 ° 103,8 ; viii. 48 , 10 ; X . 14
,2 ; 15 ,
132 ; 34, 2—5. 12 ; 2 .
3 . 4
nak t-am , acc. adv. by night,V11 . 71 , l .
2 X. 34,10 [stem nak t , cp . Lat . nox
noct- s] .
na-k satra , 11 . s tar ; day-star,V11 . 86 , 1
[mi ]: night -i- k satr é , dominion rulingover nigh t] .
n ad - i,f. stream,
1 1 . 35,3 [nad roa r] .
na-p at , m . son,i i. 35, 1 . 2 . 3 .
13 ; grandson, X . 15,3 [Lat. nepot
‘nephew
nap tr , m . (weak stem of n é p dt) son
gen . nap tur ,i i. 35
,1 1 dat . nap tre ,
i i . 35, 14 [na-p i tr having no f a thernephew gran dson
nab h -as , n . sky, V . 83, 3 [Gk . ve’
cpos,OSI. nebo] .
n am bend,I . nama ; A : 11 . iv.
50,8 ; before (dat . ) , X . 34, 8 ; in t. nan
n am i ti bend low,v . 83, 5 .
p rati bend towards : pf. nanama , 1 1 .
33,12 .
h am -a s,n . homage , i . 1 , 7 1 1 . 33 , 4 . 8 ;
35,12 ; i i i . 59 , 5 ; i v. 50 , 6 ; V . 83, 1 ;
vii . 61,6 ; 63, 5 ; 86 , 4 X . 14
,15 15 ,
2 34, 8 [ 11 am bend] .
nam as -y é , den . adore,11 . 33
,8 [namas
homage] .n amas -ya, a . adora ble
,1 11 . 59
,4 .
nar -ya , a . man ly, i . 85, 9 .
naV -a, a . new,
iv . 51,4 V11 . 61
,6 ; X .
135,3 [Gk . Ve
’
o- s,Lat . novu-s
, OS] .
novu , Eng. new] .Nava -gv -a , m . an an cien t pr iest , iv. 51
4 p1. a fami ly of anc ient pr iests,X
14,6 [having nine cows : gu g é ] .
nav -y as , opv . a . renewed,V. 11 , 1 [Lat.
nov- ior] .1 . nas
’ be lost, IV. P . nas’ya ; ao. n eé at ,vi . 54 , 7 .
2 . n as'
rea ch,I. 11555 .
V i rea ch , i i . 35 , 6.
11 53, f. nigh t, Vii. 71 , 1 .
n ag - ta,pp. los t V i . 54 , 10 [n as
’ be lost] .n a s , prs . pm A . us , i . 1 , 9 35
,11 2 ;
86 8 , vi i i .48
,6 . 8 15 c ; X 34
,
n ah ] 238 [path ik ft
14 ; to us , X . 127,4 ; D.
,i . 1 , 9 a ; 85 ,
12 ; 160 , 5 ; i i . 33 , 15 iv. 50 , 2 ; V.
83,5 . 6 ; vi . 54 , 5 . 10 ; vi i . 63
,62 ;
vi i . 86 , 8 ; 103 , 10 vii i . 48,8 . 9. 12 . 14 .
15 a ; X . 14,2 ; 34 , 14 ;
135 , 5 ; G . of us, i i . 33 , 4. 13 V . 11 , 4 ;83 , 6 ; vi . 54
,5 86 , 5 ; vi ii . 48 . 42 . 7.
9 ; X. 6. 7 ; 135, 1 .
nah bind,IV . u5by a .
s5m kni t together : i rr . pf. 2 . pl . an 5h a ,vi ii
115 n5 not,X . 34 , 8 .
n5k a ,n . fi rmament, i. vi i . 86
,1 ;
X .
11 511,f. flute , X. 135 ,
n5th - i t5 , pp . d is tressed,X . 34
,3 [wi th
seek a id] .n 5d y 5, m . son of s treams , i i . 35 , 1 .
u5d h ~ am 5na , pr . pt. A . seeking a id,sup
p lian t, i i .n5u5 , adv . separa tely, ii .n5b h i , fi navel
,X .
115 man , 11 . name,ii . 33, 8 ; 35, 1 1 ; vi i .
103,6 .[Gk ova/1a , Lat. nomen
,G0 .
namo, Eng name] .
n5r i , f. woman, i i . 33,5 [from n5r
man] .n5saty a , m . d a . epithet of the Asvins,Vii . 71 4 [ 11 5 asaty 5 not untrue] .
n i -k f t -van,a . decei tf ul, X . 34 , 7 [11 1 down
k r do] .n i -c i t5 , pp. known
,i i . 12
,13 [n i + ci
note] .n iny 5 , 11 . secre t, V i i . 61 , 5 .
u i tod in , a . p iercing, XX . 34 , 7 .
u i -d r5, f. s leep , vi i i . 4 8,14 [ i i i + d r5.
s leep ; cp . Gk . Sap La t. (tor-mic] .u i -d h i , m . treasure, vi ii . 29 , 6 ; deposi t,X . 15
,5 [u i down d h i d h 5.put] .
ii i -d h ruv i , a . p ersevering, v i i i . 29, 3 [n id h ruvi fi rm] .
i i i -p a d 5, m . va lley, v . 83,7 [n i down
+ p5d a , m . f oot] .n i r -5y ana , 11 . exi t
,X . 135
,6 [n i s out
5y -ana. going . i go] .u i -V 5t , f. dep th , X . 127 , 2 [n i down] .u i -V é é an i , a . caus ing to rest
,1 . 35 , 1
[from cs . of n i V i s' cause to turn in] .
n i - satta , pp. with 5 , having sat down in( lc. X
v
l 5,2 [n i + sad sit down] .
n i - s5d y 5 , gd . having sa t down,i i . 35
,10 ;
X . with a ,X .
n i - s i nc-5nt , pr. pt. pouring down, v. 83 ,6 [ s ic sp r inkle] .
n i sk5,m . necklace
,1 1. 33
,10.
n i s -k rt5 , n . appointed p lace, X . 34,5 [pp.
a rranged : n i s out k r make] .u i lead I . n5y a ; 2 . pl . ipv. ,
X . 34,4 .
s5m conjoin wi th ( inst . vi . 54, 1 .
n i c 5, adv . down,X . 34 , 9 [ inst. of nyanc
downward] .m
’
i,adv. now, i . 154, 1 1 1 . 33 , 7 iv. 51,
9 ; X. 34 , 142; 168 , 1 ; inter . pol.
pray ? vii . 86, 2 [Gk . mi, OI . nu, 0 G .
nud push, VI . nud 5 pf. 3 . p] . A . nu
nud ra , i . 85 ,p r5 push away : pf. V 11 .n ii , adv. n 1
'
1 now,Vii . 63
,6 [OG . nu] .
nu -tana ,a . p resent, i . 1 , 2 [nu now] .
nu-n 5m , adv. now, iv. 51,1 ; vi i . 63, 4 ;
vi i i . 48,3 ; X. 15 , 2 [nu now] .
nr , in . man, pl . N. n 5ra s , i . 154,
5 ; v . 1 1 , 2 . 4 vi i . 103, 9 [Gk . dvfip,dvdpds] .
nr - c5k s as , a . (Bv. observer of men,V 11 1
,
15 ; X . 14,11 [nr man + c5k sa s
look] .nr -p 5ti , m . lord of men, V11 . 71 , 4 .
nr -mn5 , a . manliness,va lour
,i i . 12 , 1 [cp.
nr -m5nas manly] .ne -tf , m . guide , i i. 12, 7 [u i lead ] .n é n 5 + u a lso not, Vi . 54 , 3 .
n 5u , f. ship , X . 135,4 [Gk . r a il- s
,Lat .
ndv- i -s] .ny -afi c
,a . downward
,v. 83
,7 [u i
'
down-a.fi c
ny -up ta ,pp. thrown down, X. 34 , 5 . 9
[n i vap strew] .
P ak s - in , a . winged,X . 127
,5 [p ak s5 , m .
wing] .p5c
-ant , pr . pt. cooking, 1 1 . 12, 14 . 15
[p ac cook, Lat. coquo for pequo, OS ] . 3 .
s . p etelu] .
p 5fi ca , 11m . five, 1 11 . 59, 8 [Av . panca ,
Gk . Lat. quinque] .p 5n - i
,m . niggard
,iv. 5 1 , 3 [p an bar
ga in] .p at f ly, I . p 5ta , X . 14 , 16 ; cs . p at5ya
f a ll , V. 83,4 [Gk . fl éT-G- Ta l fl i es, Lat.
p et-o] .
p 5t- i , m . lord , pl . N. p 5tay as,iv. 50 6
s] .
p 5th , m . pa th , vi i i. 29 , 6 ; X. 14 , 10 [cp .
Gk . 1ra°
r o- s ] .p a th - i
,m . p a th , i . 35, 1 1 ; X . 14
,7
168,3 .
p ath i -k r t, m . pa th-maker, X . 14,15 [k r -t
making : k r determ ina tive t] .
p i é ] 240 [p rath 5
p i é adorn, YI . p im é 5 : pf. p ip i é fi r , vi i .103
,6 ; A . p ip i s
'
e , i i . 33 9 .
p i -t5 , pp . drunk, vi i i . 48 , 4 . 5 . 10. 12.
p i y ii sa , m . n . mi lk,i i . 35
,5 [p i swell] .
p utr5 , n1 . son,i . 160
,3
,v . 1 1
,vi i .
103,3 X . 15 , 7 ; 34, 10.
p 1’
1nar , adv. aga in ,vi . 54
,10 X . 14
,8
90,4 ; 135, 2 ; ba ck, X . 14
,12 .
pun a r-h 5n , a . s triking back‘,X. 34
,7 .
pun 51i 5 , pr. pt . purifying, vi i . 49, 1 [p 11purify] .
p ii r , f. ci tadel, i i . 35, 6 {p r fill] .pfi ram -d h i , f. reward ; iv. 50
,1 1 [ a . d h i
bestowing (reduced form of d h 5 ) a bundance
, p fi r-am
pur5s -t5a,adv . in the eas t
,iv. 51
,
8 ; f orward , v . 83, 8° before, vi i i. 48 ,
15 ; in f ront. X . 135,6 .
pur5, adv . f ormer ly, iv . 5 1 7 .
pur 5-n5 , a . , f. 1 , anci en t, iv . 51
,6 ; 111 . pl .
anci ents,X . 135
,1 . 2 [p u r5jormerly] .
puru- t5ma , a . spv . mos t f requent, i v. 51
1 [pu rfi ,Gk . rroAv
puru- tr5, adv . in many p laces , X . 127 1
in many ways , vi i . 103, 6 .
p uru -rup a , a . (Bv. having many f orms,i i . 33
,9 .
P fi ru - sa , m . the p rimaeva l Ma le, X . 90,
1 . 2 . 4 . 6. 7. 11 . 15 .
purus5- t5 , f. human f ra i l ty, X . 15,6 .
p ur é -h i ta , pp. pla ced in f ron t, m . domesti cp ri es t, i . l , 1 ; v . 1 1 , 2 [pur5s + h i t5,pp .
'of d h 5 put] .
p ur é -h i ti , f. pri estly service,Vi i . 61 , 7 .
p us-Q5, 11 . (p1. ) earn ings, ii . 12, 4 [pp .
of p us thr ive] .pus
o tgi , f. earnings, ii . 12 , 5 ; p rosp eri ty,vi ii . 48
,6.
p li pur ify, IX . punabi , i . 160, 3 .
p i n pp. ful l , i . 154 , 4 ; vi i . 103 , 7[p f fi ll : cp . Gk . wohk oi ‘many ’
,Eng .
full] .
purusa , m . metr ical for puru sa , X . 90,
3 . 5 .
pur-va , a . f ormer , i . 1 , 2 ; being in f ront,iv. 50
, 8 ,early, anci ent X .
15,2 . 8 . 10 ; 90, 16.
pfi rva -j5, a . born of old , X . 14,15 [j5 be
born] .purva-b h5j, a . receiving the pref erence , iv .
[b h aj sha re] .p urva-su , a brurging f orth fir st, i i . 35, 5 .
p urv5h n
early ah na 5h an day] .p fi rv -y 5, a . ancient, i . 35, 11 ; X. 14, 7 .
P fi s -5n , m . a solar de i ty,vi . 54, 1
—6 . 8
10 p rosp erer [pu s thrive] .p p take across
,III . P. p ip arti ; i pv . p i
p rt5m , vii . 61 , 7 II . P. p 5r s i ipv . ,
ii . 33,3 .
pm mix,_VI I . p rn5k ti .
s5m A . p rnk té , mingle, V 1 1 . 103, 4 .
p rch 5 -m 5na, pr . pt. A . asking oneself, X
[p rach ask] .p r t a h 5 , f. ba ttle, 1 .
p rth iv - 1 , f . earth,i . 35
, 8 ; 154, 1 1. 12,
2 ; i i i . 59 , 1 . 3 . 7 ; iv. v . 83
4 . 5 . 9,vi i . X .
,168 1 [ the broad
one p r thvi , f. of p r th l’
i from p rath
sp read ] .p f é -n i , a . speckled , i . 160 , 3 v11 . 103, 4 .
6 . 10.
P r é n i -m5tp , a . (Bv. ) having Préni a s a
mother,1. 85
,2 .
p f s at - i , (pr . pt. ) f. spotted mare, i . 85,4 . 5 .
p r s ad-5jy 5, n . clotted butter,X .
pr‘
s -ant , (p1 . pt. a . variega ted,iv . 50, 2 .
p r fi ll IX . p rn5tsi , ii . 35, 3 .
5- fi ll up , v . 1 1,5 ; vi i . 61 , 2 .
p é p i é at , pr . pt . int . thi ckly painting, X127, 7 [p i s
’
pa int] .
p é s -a ,m . p rosp eri ty, i . 1 , 3 [pu s thrive] .
p ra-k et5, m . bea con, X . 129
,2 [p r5
ci t appear] .p rach ask , VI . p reh 5 , 11 . 12
,5 v1 1 . 86
,
3 [ sec. root : p ra é + ch a°
cp . La t.
posco porc- scoandp rec- ,
or 0 G.forse- on] .
p r
i
a -j5 , f. ofi sp ring , i i . 33, 1 °
p l . progeny,8 ; men, v. [cp . Lat .
p
l
ro-
gen- ies] .
p raj5—vant , a . a ccompanied by ofi spr ing,iv. 51 , 10 .
p r ati -k 5m5m ,adv. at p leasure, X . 15
, 8[k5ma desire] .
p r5t ijan -ya , a . belonging to adversaries,i v. 50, 9 ; 11 . hosti le force, iv. 50
,7
[p rat i -jan5, m . adversary] .
p rat i d ivan ,m . adversary a tp lay, X . 34,
6 [d iv p lay] .
p rat 1-d os5m ,
adv. towards eventide , i . 35,10 [ d os5 evening] .
p rati -b 1’
1dh yam5na , pr. pt. awaking towards (acc. i v. 5 1
,10.
p rati mana , 11 . ma tch, i i . 12 , 9 [ countermea sure : m5 mea sure] .
p r 5- t i r -am ,ace . inf . to p rolong, V 11 1 . 48 ,
10 [ tr cross] .p ra
- tu 5 , a . ancient, i v. 50,1 [p r5
bef ore] .
prath ] 241
p rath sp read out, I . A . p r5th a ppf . p a
p r5th at , Vi i. 86 , 1 .
p ra-th am 5, ord . fi rst, i. v .
vi . 54 , 4 ; X . 14 , 2 ;129
,4 °
,chi ef , i i . 12 , p ra- tam5fore
most ; OP. f ra - tama] .
p rath ama -j5, a . first~born, X . 168 , 3 [j5jan ] .
p rath am5-m,adv. first, iv. 50 , 4 .
p r a -d i é , f. control, ii . 12 , 7 [d i s’
point] .p ra -b odh 5y an t , cs . pr. pt. awakening
,
iv . 51,5 [b ud h wake] .
p r5 -y ata , pp. extend ed , 1. 154 , 3 ; ofi ered,X . 15, 12 [y am stretch out] .
p r5-y ati , f. impulse , X . 129,5 [y am
extend] .
p r5y as -vant , a . ofi ering obla tions,i i i . 59 ,
2 [p r5y -as enjoyment from p r i p lease] .p ra -yoti
‘
,m . warder vii . 86
,6 [2 . yu
separa te] .p ra -v5t
,f. slop e , downward p a th , i . 35 3
height,X . 14 , 1 [p r5 f orward] .
p rav5te -j5, a . born in a windy p lace, X .
34 , 1 [p ra-v5t5 +ja jan] .
p ra-v5s5 , m . traveller
,vi ii . 29
,8 [p r5
+ vas dwell away from home] .
p r5-vi s iga , pp . having entered , vi i . 49 , 4[v i é enter] .
p ra- sarg5 , 111 . d ischarge
,vi i . 103
,4 [ srj
emi t]p ra - sav i tf , m . rouser
,vi i . 63
,2 [ 8 11
s timula te] .p r5- si t i , f. toi ls , X . 34
,15 [ s i bind] .
p r5 - Saba , pp . aroused , vi i . [ 8 11 impel] .
p ra- star5
,m . s trewn grass
,X . 14
,4 [ sti
°
s trew] .p r 5 fill [extended form , p r
-5,of p r fill] .
5 pervade, s ao . 5p r5s , X . 127,2 .
p r5nc, a f. p r5c 1 , forward , X . 34 , 12 ;
f a cing, X . 135, 3
p r 5115 , m . brea th,X . 90, 13 [p r5 -Mm
breathe] .
p r5- i ri s , f. ra iny season,vi i . 103 , 3 . 9
[vrs ra in] .p r 5vr s -5 , a. ,
.f 1 , belong ing tothera ins, v1 1103
,7 .
p r5-vep a . dangling , X . 34
,1 [p r5
+ v ip tremb le] .
p r iv-5, a . dear , i . 85 , 7 ; 154 , 5 ; ii. 12 ,15 ; viii . 48 , 14 ; X . 15
,5 [p r i p lease] .
P h al i g 5, cave, iv, 50, 5.
Bad -d h 5, pp . bound , X . [b an d hb ind] .1 902
[b ru
b an dh bind , ix. badh nat i'
z ipf. 5b ad h
n an ,X . 90
,15 .
b 5udh -u , a . akin,i . 154
,5 ; m . bond
,X .
129,4 [b andh bind] .
b ab h rfi , a . (ruddy) brown, 1 1 . 33, 5. 8 . 9 .
15 vi i . 103 , 10 ; vi ii . 29 , 1 ; X .
1 1 . 14 .
barh 5na magic power, X . 34, 7 [bphmake big] .
h arm-35d , a . (Tps
. ) s i tting on the sacrificia l
grass,X . 15, . 4 [ fo i
° b arh ih 8 5d
s ad sit] .b arb i s -
ya, a . placed on the sacrificia l grass,
X . 15 , 5 [b arb i s ] .
b arh - i’
s,11 . sacr ificia l grass, 1. 85 , 6 . 7 v.
X . 14 , ;5
b ah many, 11
b 5dh drive away, I . A. b5dh ate , X . 127,
2 ; i nt. b adhad h a press apart, vi i .
61,4 .
5p a drive away, i . 35 , 3. 9 ; 85 , 3 .
b 5h m . arm,i . 85 , 6 ; d a . X: 90
,11 . 12
[AV . bdzu, Gk . m'
jxv- s , 0G. buog] .
b ib h y -at , pr . pt. f earing, X . 34,10 [b h i
f ear] .b ib h r -at , pr . pt. bearing , V 1 1 . 103, 6 [b h rbear] .
b i l -ma ,n . shavings ,
_1 1 . 35 , 12 .
budh-5n 5, ao. pt . A . waking,iv . 51 , 8 .
bud h -n 5, m . n . bottom,X . 135, 6 [Lat.
fundu- s] .b yh -5t , (pr . pt. ) adv. aloud
,1 1 . 33
,15 ;
b rh -5n t , a . lof ty , i . 35 , 4 ; v. 11,1 ; V11 ..
61,3 ; 86, 1 ; X . 34
,amp le,
5 ; n . the grea t world,X . 14
,16 [pr . pt.
of b 1°h make big] .
t a s -p 5ti , 111. Lord of p rayer , name of
a god , iv . 50, 1 . 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 10 . 1 1
X . 14 , 3 [b i b -as prob . gen . b rh 5s
cp . b r5hmanas p 5ti ] .b odh i , 2 . s . i pv . ao. of bh fi be, 1 1 . 33, 15
[ for bh fi - dh i ] .b r5h -man
,n . p rayer , 1 1 . 12 ,
14 V11 . 61,2 . 6 71
, 6 ; 103 , 8 [b ph swell] .b rah -m5n , m . pr iest, iv . 50
,8 . 9
Brahmin,ii . 12 , 6 [b ph swell] .
br5hman5,m . Brahmin , vi i . 103, 1 . 7 .
8 90,
‘
12 .
b ra v -5nt , pr . pt. ca ll ing V1 11 . 48 , 1
[b r ii sp eak] .
ruv - 5n5, pr . pt . sp eaking, 11 1. 59 , 1 [b rfi
sp eak] .
b ra sp eak , II . b rav i ti,i . 35 , 6 sb .
b ravat , vi . 54, 1 . 2 ; tell, op . X. 135,5.
Bhakg5]
5d h i speak f or (acc. ) 1 35,11 X .
15,
fi p a A . imp lore, iv. 51 , 1 1 .
Bh ak s -5 , m . draught,X. 34, 1 [bh ak - s ,
sec. rootconsume from bh aj partake ofbh aj p artake of X . 15
,3 ; s ao.
,
vii i . 48,1 . 7 .
b h ad -r5 , a . ausp icious , i . 1, 6 1 1 . 35,15 ;
i i i . 59,4 ; iv. 51
,7 ; X . 14
,6 . 12
[p ra iseworthy bh an d be p ra i s ed] .Bh ar -a t5, m . p1. name of a tribe
,v.
1 1,1 .
bh 5r -ant , pr . pt. bear ing, i . 1 , 7 [ bh r bear] .
bh 5v -y a , a . tha t wi ll be , f uture, X. 90, 2
[gdv. of b hu be] .bh 5 shine
,II . P. bh5t i .
5va shine down, 6.
v i’
sh inef orth , i i . 35, 7 . 8 ; v . 11,1 .
b h i d sp li t, VII. b h in5tt i [Lat . find-o] .v i sp lit op en, i . 85, 10.
bhi s5k -tama , m . spv. bes t healer,
4.
[bh i s5jhealing] .b h i s5j, m . physician, ii . 33, 4 .
t f ear, I . A . bh 5yate , 8 ; i i . 12,13 ° pf. b i bh5y a , v . 83
,2 ; s ao.
5bh ai sur , viii . 48 , 11 .
b h i m5, 5 . terrible, i . 154, 2 ; ii . 33, 11[b h i f ear] .
bhur quiver, i nt. j5rbh ur i ti , v . 83,5 .
b hfiv -ana , n . crea ture, i . 35, 2 . 5 . 6 ; 85,8 ; 154, 2 . 4 ; 160, 2 . 3 ; i i . 35, 2 . 8 ;v i i . 61
,1 ; world , ii . 33, 9 ; v . 83
,2 .
4 iv . 51, 5 ; X . 168 , 2 . 4 [bh ii be] .bh iJ. become
,be, I . bh 5va , i . 1 , 9 ; v. 83
,
7 . 8 ipv.
,X . 127, 6 ; pr . sb .
,v iii . 48
,
2 ipf . 5bh avat, v 11, 3 . 4 ° X. 135,5 .
6 ; come into being, X . pf. b abhuva ,
ii . 12, 9 ; vi i . 103, 7 ; X. 34,12 ; pf; op . b 5 bh uy5t , iv. root
ao. ,vii i . 5b h 1
‘
1van,vi i . 61
,5 ;
root ao. sb . b h uv 5n i , vi i .
ipv . b hu tu ,iv. 50, 11 [cp. Gk . (pv-w,
Lat. f u- i t] .abh i be sup er ior to (acc. ii i .5 ar ise
, pf . , X . 129 , 6 . 7 ° 168,3
5v i s appear , vi i . 103, 8 .
s5m do good to viii . 48,4 .
bh fi -t5 , pp. been , X . 90,2 ; 11 . being
,X
b h u -man , 11 . earth , i . vi i . 86,1 ; X . 90
,1 . 14 [cp . Gk . (pfi-
pa‘growth
b hu -r i,a . grea t, ii. 33, 9 ; much , ii . 33,
12 ; adv. grea tly, 6 .
[mad acy ii t
b h fi r i a . (Bv.) many-horned,i .
154,6 .
b hur -ui , a . angry, V 1 1. 86, 7 .
b h us strive, I . P. bhusati [extended formof b hu be] .p 5r i surpass ,bh r bearf I I I . b ib h 5 rt i , 1 1 1 .
hold,iv. 50, 7 ; viii .
[Gk . (pe'pw,
Lat. f ero, Arm . berem,OI .
berim, Go. baira] .v i
’ I . b h ara , carry hi ther and th ither, v.
1 1, 4 .
Eh ig -u,-m . p1. 5 fami ly of ancient
priests, X. 14,6 .
b h esaj-5, a . hea ling, 11 . 33 , 7 ; n .medicine,
remedy, i i. 33, 2 . 4 . 12 . 13 [b h i s5jhea ling] .
b h 6g -a , m . use, X . 34 3 [b huj enjoy] .b h oj 5 , m . libera l man ,
iv. 51,3 .
bh éj-an a , 11 . f ood, v. 83 , 10 [b h uj enjoy] .
bh y a s b h i fear, I . A . b hy 5sate , 1 1.
bh r 5jshine, I . A . bh r5jate .
vi shine f orth , i . 85, 4 .
bhr5ja -m5na , pr . pt. A . shining, v1 1.
b h r5-tr , m . brother,
4 [Gk . ¢pa rwp,Lat . f ra
'ter,OI . brdthir, Go. brothar ,
Osl . bratru] .
Mah ,m5mh be grea t
,m5mh ate and
m5b e (3.
s5m consecra te,V I I . 61 , 6 .
magh 5-vant , m . li bera l pa tron, 11.[magh -5 bounty . mah be grea t] .
mag h é n i , a . f. bounteous, iv . 51, 3 [ f . ofmagh 5van ] .
manduk a , m . f rog, V1 1 . 103 , 1 . 2 . 4 . 7 .
10.
math-1135, pp . kindled by f r iction, V111 .
48 , 6.
m ath -y 5-m5na , pr . pt . ps . being rubbed,
v . 11 , 6 .
ma d rejoice, I . m5d a , in i . 85,1 ;
154, 5 in 154,4 ; x. 14
,3. 7 ;
wi th ( ins t ) , X . 14,10 ; be exhi lara ted ,
viii . 29, 7 dr ink wi th_exhi lara tion, vi i .
49,4 ; cs . m 5d ay a , A . rejoi ce, X . 15
,
14 in ( in st) ,X . 1. 85
,
6 ; wi th ( in st ) , X . 14 , 5 ; gladden, X .
34,l [Gk . ya bdw, Lat. madefi ‘dr ip
m5d -a , m . intoxi ca tion, i . 85, 10 ; V 1 11 .
48,6 .
mad a -cyfi t , a . reeling w i th intoxica tion 1
85,7 [cyu move] .
mi t5] 244
m i -t5, pp . set up , iv. 51 , 2 [m i set up ] .m i t-5-jfiu , a . (Bv. ) fi rm-kneed
,i ii . 59
,3 .
M i - tr5 , m . a sun god ,i ii . 59 , 1—9 vi i .
61,4 63. 1 . 6 ; n . f ri endship , X . 34
,
14 .
M i tra -V 5runa,du ed .Mi tra and Varuna
,
i . 35,1 ; 63 5 .
mi damage, IX . m in5ti [cp. Gk . 11 1 vv-w
,
Lat. mi nu o .]5 diminish
,i i .
p r5 infr inge, vii . 63, 3 ; 103, 9 ; vi i i .
mi d h -v5ms, a . bounteous
,ii . 33, 14 ; VI 1 .
86,7 [unred . pf. pt. , probably from
m ih ra in] .fi k h a , n . mouth
,x . 90
,11 - 13 .
muc release,VI . mufi c5 : ppf. 5mumuk
tam ,v i i . 71
ud be merry, I . A . m é d a .
p r5ti exult, v . 83,9 .
1n1°
g -5, m . beast i . 154,2 ; i i. 33, 11 .
m1°jwip e , II m5rj1n i .
s 5m rub br ight,i i . 35, 12 .
m 1 d be gra cious,VI . 1111 15, 1 1. 33, 11 . 14 ;
vi i i . 48,9 ; x. 34
,14 cs . mr15ya , id .
,
viii . 48,8 .
m1 l ay -5ku , a . merciful, i i . 33, 7 [mrd be
gra cious] .m 11- i k 5, n . mercy, vi i . 86, 2 ; viii . 48 , 12[m 1 d be gracious] .
m1°-ty 15. , m . d ea th
,X . 129
,2 [m1
° d ie] .m1 é touch , VI . m1°s5 .
p
°
5r i embrace , X . 34, 4 .
m1°s be heed less
,IV. mp sya .
5p i f orget, vi . 54 , 4 .
me , enc . prs . prn . D . to me, vi i . 63, 386
,3 . 4 ; X . G . of me, i i . 35 , 1 ;
vi i . 86, 2 ; viii . 29 , 2 [Gk .,uoc] .
m aujavat5 , a . coming f rom Miljavant, x .
34,1 .
Y 5, rel . prn . who, whi ch , tha t : N. y 5s , 1.
160, 4 ; ii.7 . 9—15 ; 7 ; ii i . 59 , 2 . 7 ; iv. 50 ,
vi i . 61 , 1 ; 63,1 . 3 °
vi i . 71 , 86 , 1 ; viii .X . 14
,5 ; 129 , 7 ; f. 50,
3 ; n . y 5d ,i . 1 1 35 15 V 1 1 6I
2 °X. 15, 6 ;
12 ; 3 . 4 ° 135,7 ; with k im ca
wha tever, v. 83
,9 ; A . y 5m ,
i . 1 , 4 ;1 1 ; V1 11 48 1 ;
3 . 4 ; I . y é na ,i . 160
,5 ; i i. iv .
51,4 f. y 5y 5 , iv. Ab . y 5sm 5d ,
i i . 12,9 ; G . y5sy 5 , i . 154, 2 ; ii . 12,
l . 74. 142 ; 35, 7 ; v. 83 , 43; vi l . 61 ,
2 X . 34,
-4 ; f. y5sy 5s , X . 127, 4 ; L .
y 5sm in , iv. 50,8 ; X . 135 1 da . y 5u ,
X . 14 , 11 ; p l . N. y é , i . 35, 11 ; 85, 1 .
4 ; iv. 50,2 X . 14 , 3 . 10 ; 15, 1
—4 . 8
10 . 132. 142 90,7 . 8 ; with k é wha t
ever,X . 90, 10 f. 3753 , vi i . 49 , l . 2 . 3 ;
n . y5n i , i i . 33 , 13 y5, i . 85, 12 ; ii .33
,133 ; iv . 50, 9 vi i . 86, 5 ; A . m .
y5n , X . 14 , 3 ; 15, 132; G . f. y5s5m ,
v i i . 49,3 L . f. y5su ,
iv. 51, 7 ; vi i .
49,44 ; 61 , 5 .
y ak s -5 , n . mystery, V1 1 . 61 , 5.
y ajsa crifice, I . 37515 ; ipf. 5y ajanta , X .
90, 7 . 16 .
y aj-at5, a . adorable, i . 35, 3 . 4 1 1 . 33 , 10
[Av . yaza ta ; from y ajworship ] .y aj-5th a , m . sacrifice
,v . 11 , 2 [y aj
worship] .
y5ja-n15na ,m . sacrifi cer, vi . 54, 6 [pr .
pt. A . of y ajworship ] .y 5j-u s , n . sacrificia l f ormula , X . 90
,9
[y ajworship ] .
y aj-ii 5 , m . worship , sa crifice, i . 1 , 1 . 4 ;ii . 35
,12 ; iv . 50, 6 . 10 ; v. 11 , 2 . 4 ;
V 1 ] . 7 ; X . 13 ; 13 ;
90,7- 9 . [AV .yasna , Gk .
y ajfi 5-k etu , a . (Bv . ) whose token is sacr ifi ce, iv . 51 , 11 .
yajd 5-manman , a . (Bv. ) whose heart i sset on sa crifice, vi i . 61 , 4 .
y ajfi - iya ,a . worthy of worship ,
holy, 1 11 .
59 , 4 adorable, X . 14 , 5 . 6 [yajii 5worship ] .
y at array oneself , I . y 5ta : pf. i . 85 , 8 ;cs . y 5t5ya marsha l , s tir , i ii . 59, 1 ;clear of , X . 127
,7 .
y 5-ta s , adv. whence, X . 129, 6. 7 [prn .
root y 5] .y 5-ti , prn . how many, X . 15
,13 [prn .
root y 5] .y 5-tra , rel . adv. where, i. 154 , 5 . 6 ; vn .
63,5 ; viii . 29, 7 ; 48 , 11 ; X . 7 ;
90,16 [prn . root y 5] .
y 5-th 5 , rel . adv. how,X. 135 , 5 . 6 ; so tha t,
i i . 33, 15 unaccented iva like , viii .29
,6 [prn . root y 5] .
yath 5-vaé 5m ,
adv. according to (thy, h i s )wi ll, X . 15
,14 ; 168 , 4 [v é s
'
a,m .
wi ll] .y 5- d ,
cj. when, 1. 4 . 5. 7. 9 ; iv . 51 ,6 ; v. 83, 2
—4 . 9 ; vi i . 103, 2—5 ; X . 34 ,
5 ; 90, 6 . 11 . 15 ; in order tha t, vi i . 7 1 ,4 ; so tha t, v i i . 86 , 4 ; s ince , i . 160, 2 ;if , viii . 48 , 9 [n . of rel . y5] .
y5d i v5]
y5d - i v5,cj. whether, x. 129 , 7 or
,or els e
,
i bid . [y 5-d - i if, rel . adv. v 5 or ] .y -5nt , pr . pt . going , vi i . 61 , 3 [ i go] .
y am extend , bestow,I . y 5eh a , iv. 51 , 10 ;
v. 83 , 5 pf. A . y em ire submit toi i i . 59 , 8 s ao. bestow on i i . 35 ,152 .
5d h i exte nd to (dat. 1 . 85, 12 .
5 guide to (lo. root ao. inj. y amat , X .
u i bestow,iv. 50 , 10 .
p r5 present a share of (gem) , X . 15 , 7.
vi extend to, i . 85 , 12 .
Y am -5 , m . god of the dead , 1. 35 , 6 X .
14,1—5 . 7- 16 ; 15, 8 ; 135, 1 . 7 .
yaé -5s , a . glorious, i . 1 , 3 ; iv. 51 , 11 ;viii . 48 . 5 .
y ahvi , f. swif t one, 1 1. 33 , 9 35,14 .
375 go, II . y 5ti , . i . 35, 33. 10 ; vi i . 49 3
X . 168 , 1 .
5- come,i . x. 15
,9 .
( ma 5 come hi ther,vii.
5 fi p a come hi ther to,vii . 71
,4 .
p 5ri p r5 proceed around , iv. 51 , 5 .
y 5tay5j-jana , a . (gov. cd . ) s tirring men,iii. 59 , 5 [y 5t5y an t , pr . pt. es . of y at
a/rray oneself + J5na man] .y 5tu
-dh5n a , m . sorcerer, i . [y 5t1’
1 ,
m . sorcery dh 5na p ractising from dh 5
put, do] .y5 ma , m . course
,iv. 51 , 4 [375 go] .
y5-man , 11 . course, i . approach, X .
127 , 4 [ 375 go] .yu separate, III . yuy é t i , 11 . 33
,1. 3 vii .
71 , 1 . 2 s ao. departf rom i i. 33 .
9 ; es . y av5y a save f rom,viii . 48 , 5 ;
y 5v5ya ward of ,x . 127, 6
2.
yuk -t5, pp. yoked , vi i . 63, 2 [yujyoke,Gk . ( evk r d- s, Lat. iunctu-s
,Lith .
jankia-s] .ya k t5-gr5van ,
a . (Bv. ) who has to workthe s tones, ii . 12, 6 .
yujyoke , VII.yunak t i pf. yuyujé ,X . 34, 11 rt . ao. 5yugdhvam , i .
85,4 .
p r5 yoke in f ront, i .yfi dhy a -m5na , pr . pt. A . fighting ; m .
fighter, i i. 12 , 9 [yud h fight] .yfiyudh -i
,m . warr ior
,1. 85, 8 [ from red .
stem of yudh fight] .yuva-ti , f. young ma iden, 1 1. 35,
'
4 . 11 [ f.of y fivan youth] .
yfiv-an ,a . young, ii. 33, 11 m . youth, 11.
35,4 [Lat. iuven- i -s] .
yav-5m , prs. prn . N. you two, V11. 71, 5 ;
dat. yuv5b h y 5m to you two, vi i . 61, 1
y fi am ] .
y uva-yfi ,
a . addressed to you, vi i . 71 , 7 .
y fiy -5m , prs . prn . pl . N. you, iv . 51 , 5
vi i . 61, 7 ; 63, 6 ; 71, 6 ; 86, 8 [ fory fi s -5m
,Av . yil l
‘, yil iem, Go. gas] .
y é g -a , m . acquis i t ion,vi i . 86
,8 [yuj
yoke] .y éj-ana , n . league , 1. 35 , 8 [yoking fromyujyoke] .
y é -ni , m . womb, ii . 35, 10 abode,iv. 50,
2 ; X . 34,1 1 receptacle, v iii . 29, 2
[holder from yu hold] .y é s -5 , f. woman, X . 168
,2 .
y é s , n . bless ing, i i . 33, 13 ; X . 15 , 4 .
R amh has ten,I . r5111h a °
cs . ramh 5ya
cause to speed , i . 85, 5 .
rak s protect, I . r5k sa , 1 1 ; 160, 2 ;iv. 50
,2 ; vi . 54
,5 vii i . 48, 5 [Gk .
ak e’
fw‘Wa1 d
r5k s a -m5na, pr . pt. A . protecting, V11 . 61 ,
3 [rak s protect] .rak s 5s , m . demon
,i . 35
,10 ; v. 83, 2.
rak s - i - tf , m . guardian, X . 14, 11 [rak sp rotect] .
ragh u -p 5tvan , a . (Tp . ) flying swif tly, i
85, 6 [raghfi swif t : Gk . éh axé - s] .
raghu -sy 5d ,a swif t-glid ing, i . 85, 6
[ragh fi swift sy and run] .r5j-as , 11 . space, a ir , i . 35, 4 . 9 ; 154, 1
160,1 . 4 X . 15
,2 129
,1 [Gk . ZpeBos ,
Go. riqiz -a] .r5n -y a , a . glor ious , i . 85 , 10 [ran rejoi ce] .r5-tna , n . gif t, treasure, i . [r5 give]ratn a-d h5, a bestowing treasure 1
r5-th a , m . car, i . 35, 2 . 4 . 5 ; 85, 4 . 5 ;ii . 12
,7 . 8 ; v . 83 , 3 . 7 ; vi i . 71 , 2
—4 ;viii . 48 , 5 ° X . 135, 3 5 ; 168 , 1 [1
°
go] .
r5th -y a , a . belonging to a car,i . 35
,6 .
rad d ig, I . r5d a :.
pf. rar5d a , v i i . 49, 1 .
radh -r5, a . rich,i i . 12 , 6 [r 5d h succeed ] .
ranah make subject, IV. P. r5dhy a : red .
ao. i i . 33, 5 .
5p -as , n . bodi ly injury, i i . 33, 3 . 7 .
ram set at res t,IX . r amn5ti : i pf. ii . 12 ,
2 ; I . A. r5ma rejoi ce in ( lo. X . 34, 13.
ray-i
,m . wea lth, i . 1 , 3 ; iv. 50,
viii . 48,13 ; X .
11 [p1obab1y from r i reduced form
of r 5 give] .r 5v -a , m . roar
,iv. 50
,1 . 4 . 5 [ru cry] .
aé -mi,m . ray, 1. 35 , 7 ; cord, X. 129
,5 .
r5 give, II . r5ti ° 2 . ind . r5s i ipv. i i .
r5j] 246 [v5d ant
33,12 III . i pv. 2 . pl . rar i dhvam , v.
r5jrule, over (gen . I . P. rajati ,r5j-an ,
m . king,1 . 85 , 8 ,
i i i . 59,4 ;
9 °vi i . 49
,3 . 4 ; vi i i . 48
,
7 . 8 °X . 14, 1 . 4 . 7.
168,2 [r5jru le, Lat . rego
r5j-ant , pr . pt . ruling over (gen . i . 1,8
[r 5jrule] .
r5jan-ya, a . roya l ; m . warrior (ea i l iestname of the second caste) , X. 90
,12 .
r5tr i , f. night,i . X. 127, 1 . 8 °
129,2 .
r5dh -,as n . gift, blessing, 12
,14 [r5dh
gra tify]r 5ah o d é y a , n . bestowa l of wea lth, iv. 51,3 [d é ya , gdv. to be given fl 0 111 (15 give] .
r i release,IX . r in5ti , i i . 12 , 3 .
5nu flow a long,i . 85
,3.
ri e leave,VII . P . r in5k ti , vi i . 71, 1 [Gk .
M ina), Lat. linquo] .
5ti extend beyond : ps . ipf . 5r i eyata , X90
, 5 .
r i s, f. injury, i i . 35, 6 .
r i s be hur t,IV. r i sy at i , vi . 54, 3 ; a ao.
i nj.
, vi . 54 , 7 . 9 injure, viii . 48 , 10 .
r ih kiss , II . r é dh i , i i . 33, 13 .
ruk -m5, m . golden gem,vi i . 63, 4 [rue
shine] .
rue shine , I . r é ea ; cs. roc5ya cause tosh ine
,vi i i . 29 , 10 .
rue -5n 5, rt. ao. pt . A . beaming, iv.
51,9 .
rujburs t, VI . P . ruj5 : pf. ruréja , iv.
50,5 .
ruj-5nt , pr . pt. sha ttering, X. 168 , 1 .
Bud -r5,111 . name of a god , i . 85, i ; i i .
33,1—9 . 11—13. 15 ; p1. sons of
Rudra,the Maruts
,i . 85, 2 [rud cry,
howl] .rud h obstruct
, .VI I . runaddh i , run ddh é ,X . 34, 3.
5p a drive away : r t. 5 0 . arodh am , X .
34,3.
rfi é -an t , pr . pt. gleaming, iv. 51, 9 .
ruh grow,I . r 6h ati , r é h ate .
5ti grow beyond (ace. X .
5 rise up in (ace. v i i i . 48 , 11 .
rup 5, 11 . f orm,x. 168
,4 ; beauty, i . 160, 2 .
re-nfi , m . dust,X. 168 , 1 [perhaps from
r i run disperse] .r é tas , 11 . seed
,v. 83 , 1 . 4 ; X . 129
,4
[r i flow] .reto d h5, n1 . imp regnator, X . 129, 5 [rétas seed dh 5 p lacing] .
reb h -5, m. singer,VI I . 63
,3 [r i bh s ing] .
rev5t , adv. bountifully, i i . 35, 4 [n . of
rev5u t] .re ov5t-i , f. wea lthy, iv. 51
,4 [f . of
rev5n t] .re-v5ut , a . wea lthy, V111 . 48 , 6 [rewea lth] .
r é d as - i , f. du. the two worlds heavenand earth ) , i . 85 , 1 ; 160, 2 . 4 ; i i12
,1 vi i . 64
,4 86
,1 .
r5i , m . wea lth,vi . 54
,8 ; V11 . 86
,7 ;
viii . 48 , 2 ; G . r5y5s , viii . 48 , 7
[bestowa l from r 5 give ; Lat. re-s] .Rauh in5, 111. name of a demon ,
ii . 12 , 12[metronym ic z son of Ro
’
hini ] .
L ak -s5, 11. stake (at play) , 11 . 12,4
[ token, mark l ag a ttach] .l ok -5, 111 . place, X . 14 , 9 ; world, x . 90,14 [bright space rok -5 ligh t ; cp . Gk .
Acune- s ‘wh ite ’
, Lat. lune, lac- is] .
V ag-m
’
i , m . sound,V11 . 103, 2 [vac
sp eak] .vac utter
,III. P. vivak ti ,
5 0 . 0p . 1 1 .
35 , 2 ; sp eak, ps. ucy 5te, X . 90,11 ;
135,7 [Lat . voc-d re
5dh i speak f or viii . 48 , 14 .
p r5 p rocla im,i . 154
,1 ; vii . 86, 4
declare, x . 129, 6 .
v5c-as , n . speech, v . 1 1 , 5 [vac speak ;
Gk . enos] .vaeas y- 5, f. eloquence,v5j-ra , m . ,
thunderbol t 1. V111 . 29 , 4
[vajbe strong ; Av . vazra‘club
v5jra -b 5hu , a . (Bv . ) bearing a bol t in hisarm
,i i . 12, 12 . 13 ; 33, 3 .
v5jra -h as ta , a . (Bv. ) having a bolt in hishand
,ii . 12 , 13 .
vajr -in , m . bearer of the bolt, v1 i . 49, 1 .
vats5, m . calf , vii. 86, 5 [yearling from*vatas , Gk . Fe
'r os year, Lat . vetus in
vetus-tas ‘age
vats -1m a,f. - i , accompanied by calves,
v i i . 103, 2 .
vad speak, I. v5d a , 11 . 33, 15 ; op . 1 1.
x . 34,12 .
5eh 5 invoke,v. 83, 1
5 utter,i i . 12 , 15 ; v111. 48, 14.
p r5 utter forth, i s ao.,av5d i sur , vn .
103,1 .
s5m converse about (acc. ) with ( inst ) ,vii . 86
,2 .
v5d -ant, pr . pt. sp eaking, vn . 103, 3 .
6 .
'
7 .
v5c] 248
v5e , f. voice, vi i . 103 , 1 . 4 . 5 6. 8 ; X . 34 ,5 [vac sp eak ; Lat. vox voc s] .
v5j confl ict, i . 85, 5° booty, ii . 12 ,
15 ; vi . 54, 5 [vajbe strong] .v5ja -y 11 , a . desirous of ga in , i i .
v5j- l’
n , a . victorious, X . 34, 4 [v5j5 ] .v 5n5, m . pip e, 1. 85, 10 .
v5-ta , m . wind,v. 4 ° X . 168
,1 . 2 . 4
[v 5 blow °
,c .p Lat. ven tu-s
,Gk . a 1
’
77 77is}
v5m , enc . prs . prn . du A . you two,i v.
vi i . 61 , 63; 63, 5 ; 71
,1 ;
D . f or you two,vii . 6 1, 2 . vi i . 71
,
4 ; G. of you two, 1. 154, 6 ; iv . 50, 11
vi i . 61, 1 ; 4 .
V 5-m5 , n . wea lth,vi i . 71
,2 [v 5 van
win] .v5yav-y 5 , 5 . rela ting to the wind
,aeria l
,
v5 -yfi , m . wind, X . 90,13 [v5 blow] .
5r -y a , gdv . desirable,1 . [vr choose] .
v5vas at , pr . pt. int. lowing, iv. 50, 5
[V 5s'
low] .v5vrdh -5n 5 , pr . pt. A . having grown, X .
[vrd hO
grow] .V551, f. axe, vi i i . 29
,3 .
v5sar-5 , a . verna l,v i i i . 48
,7 [ *vasar
spring ° Gk . cap, Lith . vasara] .v5s -tu , n . abode
, i . 154 , 6 [vas dwellGk . Fa a
'r v] .
v i, 111 . b ird
,i . 85
,7 ; vii i . 29 , 8 ; pl . N.
V5y as , X . 127,4 [Av. vi Lat . avi
v i k r5man a , 11 wi de strid e, i . 154 , 2 ; X .
vi -cak ram 5n5, pf. pt. A . having strodeout, i .
v i -car san i , 5 . a ctive,i . 35
,9 .
v 1’
j, pl . stake at play, i i . 12 , 5 .
v i -tata , pp . extended,X . 129
,5 [ tan
s tretch] .v i -tar5m , adv. f ar away, ii . [cpv.
of prp . v i away] .vi ta-155, n . p rop erty, X . 34
,13 [pp . of v i d
find , a cqui re . acqui si tion] .1 . v i d know
,II . P . v é tti °
pr . sb . know of(gen . i i . 35, ipv. v i d d h i , vi ii . 48 ,8 pf. v é d a , vi ii . 29, 6 ; s . 2 . vé tth a ,X . 15
,13 ; 3 . v é d a , X. 129
,62. 72 pl .
1 . V i dm5 , X . 15,13 [Gk . ema
,1?e
AS. ic wdt,wé wi ton ; Eng. I wot Lat.
vid -e'
re‘see
p r5 know, X . 15,13.
2 . v i d find , VI . v ind 5, vi . 54, 4 ; X . 34,39 ; pf, o
v ived a , X . 14,2 ; a ao. , v. 83,
10 ; vi i i . 48 , 3 .
5nu find out,i i . 12, 11 ; v. 11, 6
[vi év
a s ao. win hi ther,X . 15
, 3 .
n i s find out,X . 129
, 4 .
v i d - 5th a , m . d ivine worship , i . 85, 1 1 1 .
12,15 ; 33, 15 ; 35, 15 ; viii . 48 , 14
[v i d h worship ] .vi d yut , f. lightning, 11 . v. 83, 4
[v i af ar d yut shine] .v i d -v5m s
,unred . pf. pt. knowing , VI 54 ,
1 [Gk. paws] .v i d h iv .
vi . viii . 48,
X .
168,4 .
p r5ti pay worship to, V11 . 63, 5 .
v i d h -5nt , pr . pt. m . worshipper, 1 1 35, 7 .
vi d h5na , n . task,iv. 51 , 6 [d is-posi tion
Vi prp . d h5u 5 from dh 5 put] .v i p reh -am , acc. inf . to ask
, vi i . 86 , 3 .
v i p ra , a . wise,iv. 50, 1 ; m . sage,
1 1 °vi i . 61 , 2 ,
X . 135, 4 [ insp iredv ip tremb le wi th emotion] .
v i b h 5t -1 , pr . pt. f. sh ining f orth iv. 51,1 . 10 . 11 [ b h 5 shine] .
vi bh i d ak a , n1 . a nut used as a d ie for
gambl ing, vi i . 86, 6°
,X . 34, 1 [probably
from v i -b h i d sp li t asunder , but themeaning here appl ied
_i s obscure] .
vi b h r5ja -m 5na , pr . pt. A . shining forth,v i i . 63, 3 [b h r5jshine ; Av. brdza i ti
beams Gk . ph e’
yw‘fiame
v i -mad h y a , m . midd le,iv. 51
,
v i -rap é 5, m . a bundance,iv. 50, 3 [vi
rap s’
befull]V i -r5j, m . name of a divine beingidentified with Purusa
,X . 90, 5
2[f ar
ruling] .vi r 5 - s5h , a . overcoming men, i . 35 , 6o
v i ra -sah for v i ra 85h ] .V i ruk -man t
,m . shining weapon, 1. 85, 3
[rue shine] .vi -r ii p a , 5 . having different colours, V 11 .
103, 6 [rfi p 5, n . f orm] .Viv5s -van t , 111. name of a divine being ,v. 1 1 , 3 ; X . 14, 5 [vi + vas shine
vi é,f. settlement, X . 15
,2 ; abode , V1 1 . 61
,
3 ; settler, i . 35, subject, iv. 50, 8 .
v i s’
enter,VI . v i55 .
5 enter , iv. 50, 10 ; V I 11. 48 ,111
'
come home, go to rest, X . 34,3 ; s av i k smah i , X . 127, 4 ; es .
ves’
5ya cause to res t,1. 35
,2 .
v i é -p 5ti , m . master of the house, X . 135 , l .
v i é va , pm . a . a ll,
’
i . 35, 3 . 5 ; 85, 3 . 8 ;154
,2 . 4 ; i i. 7 . 9 ; 33, 3. 10 35
,
2 . 15 ; i ii . 59, 8 ; iv . 50,7 ; v. 83, 2 . 4 .
'
vi év5tas]
9 ; vi i . 5 . 7 ; 6 ; X .
90,3 ; 127, 1 ; 168 , 2 .
vi é v5- ta s,adv . on ei ery side, i . 1 , 4 vi ii.
48 , 15 ; X . 90, 1 in a ll directions , X .
135,3 .
v i éva -d5n im , adv . a lways, iv. 50,8 .
vi 5v5-d eva , a . [Bv. ] belonging to a ll the
gods,iv. 50
,6 .
vi s’
v5-p suya , a . laden wi th a llf ood, vii. 71 ,4 [p suya from p s5 eat] .
v i év5-r 1‘
i p a , a . (Bv .) omniform,i . 35, 4 ;
i i . 33, 10 ; v . 83,5 .
v i s'
v5 a . benefici a l to al l, i . 160,1 . 4 [55m p rosperi ty + bh 1
‘
1 being f or,conducing to] .
vi s’
v5-h a , adv. a lways, ii . 12 , 15 vi ii.48 , 14 ; -h 5 , id. ,
1. 160, 5 for ever, i i .35
,14 .
v i é v5h 5 , adv . a lways , i. 160, 3 [vi év5a ll days] .
v i éve d ev5s , 111 . pl . the a ll-gods,vii . 49
,
4 viii . 48 , 1 .
v i s work, III . vivesti : pf. v iv é sa , ii .
35, 13.
vi -s i ta , pp . unfastened , v . 83, 7 . 8 [v is i bind] .
vi su -na, a . vari ed inf orm,
viii . 29, 1 .
V i suci , a . f. turned in various d irections,11 .
33,2 [ f . of vi sv-afic] .
v i -s igh5 host x. 168,2 .
V i s -suu , m . a solar deity,i . 85 , 7 154
l . 2 . 3. 5 ; X. 15,3 [vi s be a ctive] .
v i sv -ai‘
i c , a . turned in a ll directions, X .
90, 4 .
v i -s arg 5, m. release,vii . 103, 9 [vi + s i
°jlet go] .
v i -s5rj5 n a , n . crea tion,X . 129
,6 [vi s i
°jlet go] .
v i -systgi , f. crea tion, x. 129, 6. 7 [vi spjle t go] .
v i sr5sas , ab . in f. f rom breaking, viii . 48,5 [v i sras f a ll] .
vi -h 5yas , a . mighty, viii . 48 , 11.
vi gui de, II . vé ti , i . 35, 9 .
fip a come to v . 11,4 .
v i -r5, m . hero, 1. 85, 1 i i . 33,1 35
,4
[Av. vi ra, Lat. vir , OI. f er, G0 . wa ir,
Lith . vyra ,v i r5-vat-tama
, spv. a . most abounding inheroes
,i . 1, 3 .
v i r5-vant , a . possessed of heroes , iv . 50, 6 .
v i rfi dh , f. p lant, i i. 35, 8 [vi asunder
+ rud h grow] .v i r -yh , n . heroic deed , i . 154
,1 . 2 ;
heroism, iv. 50,7 [vir5
[vfsny5vant
1 . vr cover , V. vrn é t i , vrnute .
5 in t. ipf .“c
a v ar iva r conta in, X . 129,1 .
v i unclose,
avran ,i v.
2 . v i° choose
,IX. A . vrn i te , i i . 33, 13 v.
11,4 ; X . 127 , 8 .
vpk a , m . wolf , X . 127 , 6 [Gk . Avk o- s,
La t. lupu s,Li th . vi lka -s
,Eng. wolf ] .
vrk -1 , f. she-wolf , x. 127,6.
v1°k t5~b arb i s , a . (Bv. ) whose sacr ificial
grass is spread , i i i . 59, 9 [vyk t5, pp. of
vi°j b arb i s , q .
Vpk- s5, m . tree
,v. 83
,2 X . 127, 4 ; 135,
1 [vpk s impler form of vraé c cut,
f ell] .vi
°jtwis t, VII . v1°n5k ti , vrnk té .
p 5ri pass by, ii . 33, 14 .
vyj-5na , n . circle family, sons) , V11 .
61,4 [ enclosure_ = vpj] .
vrn5n5, pr . pt. A . choosing, v . 11 , 4 [vrchoose] .
vr t turn , I . A . v5rtate roll,X . 34, 9 ;
es . var t5ya turn, 1 . 85, 9 .
5 es . whir l hi ther,vi i . 71 , 3 .
n i s cs . roll out X . 135,5 .
p r5v , cs . set rolling,X. 135, 4 .
5nu p r5 roll forth af ter, , X . 135, 4 .
s5m be evolved , X . 90, 14 .
5d h i s5m come upon, X . 129,4 .
V r -tr5, 111. name of a demon , 9 ;n . f oe
.(pl . viii. [ encompasser
vr cover] .
vr tv5, gd .,having covered
,X .
vrdh grow,I . v5rdh a , i . 85, ii . 35
,
11 ; cause toprosp er, iv. 50, 11 increase,
pf. v 5v1°dh 1i r , X . 14,3 cs . vardh 5ya
s trengthen,v. 1 1, 3 . 5 .
vydh-é , dat. in f . to increase, i . 85, 1 .
vys rain,I . v5rsa rain : i s 5 0 . 5vars i s ,
v.
ab h i rain upon, ao. V11 . 103,3 .
vf san -vasu , a . (Bv. )'
of mighty wea lthiv. 50, 10 [vr s an bull] .
vf s an , m . bull , i . 85, 154,3. 6 ;
i i . 33,13 35
,13 ; iv. 50, 6 ; v.
(w ith 5éva. sta llion ) ; vi i , 6 1 , 5 ;71
,6 ; s ta llion , vi i . 71 , 3 [Av. aréan
,
Gk . s
vrsa-bh 5, m . bull, i . 160, 3 ; 12
33,4 . 6 8 . 15 ; v. 83 , 1 ; vii .
vpsa- l 5 , m . beggar, x . [ li ttle man] .v i
‘
sa-vr 5ta , a . (Bv. ) having mighty hosts,i . 85, 4 [visan bull, sta llion] .
vp s -bi , f. ra in, v . 83 , 6 [vys ra in] .vf sny5 -van t , a . mighty, v. 83, 2 [vi snya.manly strength, from vi san bull] .
ved ana]
ved - ana , 11 . possess ion, X . [v i d f ind ,acquire] .
ved h -5s , m . d isposer , ii i . 59, 4 [vi d hworsh ip , be gra cious] .
ven long,I . P. v é nati .
5nu seek thefri endship of , X . 135,1 .
vol h f , n . vehi cle, vi i . 71,4 [vah draw
+ ti°
; Av. vastar ‘draught an ima l’
Lat. vector] .
v5i , pcl . , ii . 33, 9 . 10
V a i r ii p5 , m . son of Vi rupa , X . 14,5.
V a ivasvat5, m . son of Vivasvan t, X . 14,1 .
v5i s’
ya , m . man of the third cas te,X . 90
,
12 [ belonging to the settlementv5 i s
’
v5nar5, a . belonging to a ll men,ep i
thet of Agn i , vi i . 49 , 4 [v isv5-nara ] .vy -5k ta , pp . distinguished by14
,9 pa lp able , X . 127
,7 [vi + afij
adorn] .vyao extend , III . P. v ivy ak ti .
s5m roll up , ipf. 5v ivy ak , vn . 63, 1 .
vy ath waver , I . vy5th a , vi . 54 , 3.
vy 5th a-m5na , pr . pt. A . quaking,i i .
12,2 .
vy ii stgi , f. daybreak, vi i . 71 , 3 [v i + vas
shine] .vy - é man , n . heaven
,iv. 50
,4 X . 14
,8 ;
129,1 . 7 [vi oman of doubtful ety
mology] .vraj-5, m . pen, f old , iv . 51
,2\ [v i
°jen
close] .vra-t5, 11 . wi ll, ordinance
,ii i . 59
,2 . 3 ;
v . 83, 5 ; viii. 48 , 9 service,vi . 54, 9
[v i°choose] .
vrata -c5rin , a . p ractising a vow,V1 1 . 103 ,
1 [c5r - in , from car go, practise] .vr5ta , m . troop , host, X. 34 , 8 . 12 .
35 111 8 pra ise, I . 55111 8 5 , VI I. 61, 4 [Lat .
censeo] .55ms-ant , pr . pt. praising, ii . 12 , 14 ;iv. 51 , 7.
55 135, 11. hundr ed,i i . 33
,2 ; V1 1. 103, 10
[Gk . é k ar é -V, Lat. centum,G0 . hund] .
55m-t5m5 , spv. a . mos t benefi cent, i i . 33,2 . 13 ; X . 15, 4 [55m , 11 . hea ling] .
é aph 5-van t, 5 . having hoofs, v . 83, 5 .
55 b 5l a , a . brindled,X . 14
,10 .
55m , 11 . hea ling, i i. 33, 13 ; comfor t, v .
1 1,5 ; viii . 48, 4 ; hea lth , X . 15, 4 ;
prosp eri ty, vii i . 86, 82 .
é 5mb ara , 111. name of a demon,ii .
12,1 1 .
55y -5na , pr . pt. A . lying, i i . 12, 1 1 ;vii . 103, 2 [ é i lie] .
[ éumbh
shining pa th (cog.
é ar5d , f. autumn, 11 . 12,1 1 v i l . 6 1
,2 ;
X . 90,6 .
55r -u, f. arrow, 11 . 12 , 10 V11 . 71
,1 [Go.
ha iru-s] .s’
5rd h -an t , pr . pt. arrogan t,1 1 . 12
,10
[s’
rdh be def iant] .55r -man , n . shelter
,i . 85
,12 ; v. 83
,5 ;
X . 129, 1 [Lith . szd tma -s
‘helmet’
,
0 G. helm helmets’
5v -a s , 11 . p ower, v. 11, 5 [511 swell] .é aé am- 5n5, pf. pt. A . having p repared(the sacr ifice) , i . 85, 12 ; i i . 12 , 14 ;s trenuous
,iv. 5 1
,7_ [55m toi l] .
é as’
ay -5n5 , pf. pt. A . lying, v11 . 103,1
[51 l ie] .s’
5s’
-van t , a . ever rep eating i tself , many, 1 1 .12
,10 ;
-vat, adv. f or ever, i . 35, 5 [ fors5 + §van t , or ig. pt. of 511 swell
,Gk .
d- ira VT
5511135, 111 . teacher, V11 . 103,5 [55 k be
a ble] .é 5 s order
,II . é5s ti , s
’
5ste .
51:1u ins truct,vi . 54
,1.
ab h i gui de to vi . 54, 2 .
s’
ik -van f lame ii. 35,4 .
é i k s be helpfu l, p ay obeisance,I . é i k sa ,
i ii . 59,2 [ds . of s
’
a lg be a ble] .é ik sa-m5na (pr . pt. m . learner, v11.103
,5 .
8 1ti -p 5d , a . (Bv. ) whi te-footed , i . 35, 5 .
é i th ir5, a . loose ; n . f reedom,vii . 5
[Gk . k aOapé - s free,s 1v5, a . kind
,x. 34
,2 .
é i s’
u , m . chi ld,i i . 33
,13 [s
’
u su ell,cp .
Gk . k ue'm] .
S i s’
riy -5n5, pf. pt. A . a biding,v . 1 1, 6
[s’
ri resort] .é i -t5, a . cold , X . 34, 9 [old pp. of s
’
y 5
coagula te] .é i rs - 5n , 11 . head
,X . 90
,14 [é ir (a ) s head
+ an ; cp . Gk . hope-r;
‘headé uk -r5 , a . shining
,i . 160
,3 ; bright, 11 .
33,9 ; iv. 51
,9 ; clear , i i . 35, 4 [511 0
be bright,Av. sux- ra flaming
é fi c-i , a . bright, i . 160, 1 bright, i i. 35, 8 ;iv. 2 . 9 ; v. 3 ; vii i . 29, 5 °
clea r, vii . 49, 2 . 3 ; pure, i i . 33, 1335
,32 [ éuc shine] .
51’
1b h , f. bri lliance ;iv.
_51
,6 .
é ubh -5y a , A . adorn oneself ; i . 85, 3 .
é ubh -r5, a . bri ght,i . 35
,3 ; 85 , 3 ; iv.
51, 6 [ é ub h adorn] .é umb h , adorn, I . A . é fimbh ate .
p r5 adorn oneself, i . 85, 1 .
sadh amad a] 252 [s5d ana
s adh a -m5d a , m . joint f east, X . 14 10
[ cc- revelry sad h 5 sah 5 together] .s ad h 5- sth a , n . ga thering p la ce, i . 154,1 . 3 .
s an gain,VIII . P . s an é t i , vi . 54 , 5 .
s an 5ya , a . old,iv. 51 , 4 [ from s5n a ;
Gk. éuo s, OI . sen, Lith . senas ‘old
s 5ut , pr . pt . being, XX .
,34 9 [ as be ; Lat .
(prae) -sentsang
-d f é , f. sight, ii . 33 , 1 .
s ap t5 , 11m . seven, i . 35, 8 ; i i . 12 , 3. 12 ;X. 90, 15
2[Gk . ém-d
,Lat. sep tem,
Eng .
seven] .sap t5 -r aém i , a . (Bv. seven-reined
,1 1 . 12,
12 °seven rayed, iv. 50, 4 .
sap t5sya , a . (Bv . seven-mouthed,iv. 50
,
4 ; 51, 4 [s ap t5 + 5 sy 5 , n . mouth] .s5p -ti , m . racer, i . 85, 1 . 6.
sa p r5th as , a . (Bv. renowned,i ii .
[accompanied by p r5th as , n .
6f ame] .
sa b5dh a , a . z ea lous, v i i . 6 [b 5dh 5m . stress] .
s abh5, f. assembly hall,X . 34 , 6 [OG.
s ippa‘kin ship
,AS . sib] .
sam5 , a . level,v. 83
,7 [Av. hama equal
’
,
Gk . (Bud-s, Eng. same, cp . Lat . s imi - li -s] .
sam - 5d , f. ba ttle, i i . 12 , 3 .
s5m - ana , n . f estival, X. 168 , 2 [comingtogether] .
saman5, adv. in the same way, iv. 51, 82
[ inst .,w i th shift of accen t
,from
s 5mana being together] .sam5n5 , a . ,
f. 1, same, i i . 12, 8 ; iv. 51 ,9 ; vii . 86, 3 ; unif orm,
vii. 63, 2 common
,i i . 35, 3 vii . 63, 3 103
,6 .
sam5n5-tas , adv. f rom the samep lace, iv.
51 , 8 .
sam - fd h , f. f aggot, X. 90, 15 [s5m + i dh
kind le] .samud r5-jyesth a , a . (Bv. ) having the
ocean as thei r chief , vii . 49 , 1 [samud r5, m . collection of wa ters 1137 6sth a , spv. chief ] .
samud r5rth a,a having the ocean as
their goa l , vi i . 49, 2 [5rth a , m . goa l] .s am -f dh
, f. unison,vii . 103
,5 [ s5m
1°dh thrive] .
8 5111-p 1 k ta , pp . mixed wi th X . 34,
7 [p 1 0 mix] .sam -p fcas , ab . in f. f rom mingling wi th,i i . 35, 6 [p 1 0 mix] .
s 5m bh 1°ta , pp . collected
,X . 90, 8 [bh 1
°
bear] .
sam raj, m . sovereign king,viii . 29 , 9 .
s a -y 1
’
1j, a . uni ted wi th ( inst ) , X . 168, 2 .
s a -r5th am , adv . (cog . on the samecar , wi th ( inst ) , V . 11 , 2 ; X . 15
,10 ;
168, 2 .
s5r -as , n . lake,V1 1 . 103
,7 [81
°run] .
s aras -1 , f. lake, vi i . 103, 2 .
s5rg -a , m . herd , iv. 51 , 8 [ s1°jlet loose] .
s5rt -ave, dat. inf. tof low, i i . 12 , 12 [S1f low] .
s1°
p creep , I . P. s5rp ati .
vi slink ofi'
,X 9 .
sarp ir -5 su ti , aa . (Bv. having melted butteras their draught
,viii . 29
,9 [sarp 1
’
s (froms1
°
p run melt) 5 -suti brew from 8 11
p ress] .
s5rva , a . a ll , VI ] . 103,5 ; X 14
,16 90
,
2 ; 129 , 3 [Gk . fil m-s 5A-Fo- s,Lat.
salvu-s‘Whole
s5rva-v i ra , 5 . consis ting entirely of sons,
iv. 50,10 ; X . 15
,11 .
sarva -h fi t , a . (Tp. ) comp letely offering, X .
90,8 . 9 [hu-t : h u sacrifice+ deter
m inative t] .sa l - i l 5, 11 . wa ter, X. 129 3 sea
,V11 . 49 ,
1 [ 3 5 1 8 1°flow] .
Sav-i -tf , m . a solar god , i . 35, 1—6. 8
10 ; vi i . 63 , 3 ; X . 13 [Stimula torfrom 8 11 s timula te] .
sas sleep , II . P. s5st i,iv. 51 , 3.
sas -5n t , pr . pt . s leep ing, i v. 51, 5 .
sah overcome,I. s5h a , X. 34
,9 [Gk . é
’
xw,ao. co (e)x-ov] .
s5h -as , 11. might, iv. 50, 1 ; v. 1 1,62 [ sah
overcome] .
sa h 5sra , nm . a thousand,X. 15, 10 [Gk .
xtluoz, Lesb ian xe’
AAzoi from xéoho] .sah 5sra -p 5d , a . (Bv. ) thousand -f ooted , X .
90,1 [p ad f oot] .
s ah 5sra -b h 1 sti , a . (Bv. ) thousand-edged,i . 85, 9 [b hrs -tl
' from b hrs h rs stickup
sah 5]sra -5i rsan ,
a . thousand -headed, X .
34,14 .
sah asra -s5v5, m thousandfold Soma -p ressing, vi i . 103, 10 [s 5v5, m . pressingfrom su p ress] .
sah asr5k s5, a . (Bv. ) thousand -eyed , X . 90,1 eye 5k s i ] .
s5-h 1‘
1 ti , f. joint p ra ise, 11 . 33, 4 [h fi tiinvoca tion from h 1
'
1 ca ll] .8 5 bind
,VI . sy 5t i .
vi d ischarge,i .
85, dem . prn . N. s . i'
. that, iv. 50,11 ; V11 .
86,6 ; as such so
,X . 4 .
s5d -5 n5 , 11 . sea t, X . 135 , 7 [ sad s it] .
s5d h 5rana]
s5dh 5rana , a . belonging jointly, common ,vi i . 63, 1 [sa -5dh5rama having the
same supp or t] .s5dh -n , a . ,
good X . 14,10.
s5dh u -
y5, adv. s traightway, v .
S5dh -y5,m . pl . 5 group‘of divine beings ,
s 5n - as a . br inging ga in, i i i . 59 , 6 [sanga in] .
s5n -u ,n . 111 . back, ii . 35 , 12 .
s5-man , n . chant,vii i . 29 , 10 ; X . 90, 9 ,
135 , 4.
S537 a-k a , n . arrow, ii . 33, 10 [sui tablef orhurling : s i hur l] .
s 5ram ey 5, m . son of Saramd,X . 14
,
10.
s5s’
an5naé an5, n . (Dv. ) ea ting and non
ea ting things,X . 90 , 4 [ sa -aé ana anaé
s i rnh 5 , m . lion,v. 83, 3 .
s i c pour, VI . sifi c5, i . 85, 11 [OG. sig-u
‘dr ip Lettic sik-u fa l l ’
of water] .ni pour down , v . 83
,8 .
s i d h rep el, I. P. s é d h ati .
5p 5 chase away, i . 35, 10 .
s in d h -u , m . river,1. 35, 8 ii. 12 , 3 . 12 ;
Indus,v. 11
,5 [Av. hind -u- s] .
s i sv i d 5n5, pf. pt. A . swea ting,V1 1 . 103,
8 [svi d p ersp ire : Eng . swea t] .s im , en c . p
’
rn . pcl . him &c.,i . 160
,2 .
8 11 p ress , V. Sun é ti , sunut é , V . 14 , 13
[Av. hu] .
adv . well, i i . 35 , 2 ; v. 83 , 7 ; vi i .
86,8 [Av. hu OI . su
sir-11 1 135 , pp. welt-made, i . 35 , 11 85, 9
well prepared, X . 15 , 13 ; 34, 11 .
su -k r5tu , a
vi i . 61,2 [k r5tu wisdom] .
suk ratu -y5, f. insigh t, i . 160
,4 .
su -k satr5, a . (Bv .) w ield ing fa ir sway,i i i . 59
,4 .
su -k s i ti , f. saf e dwelling, ii . 35, 15.
su-g5 , a . easy to traverse,i . 35
,11 vi i .
63,6 .
su-j5nman , a . (Bv. ) producing f a ircrea tions
,i . 160, l .
su -t5 , pp . pressed , viii . 48 , 7 X . 15,3 .
sfi -tasga , pp. well-f ashioned , ii . 35, 2
[tak s f ashion] .
sut5-soma, (Bv. ) m . Soma -
presser, i i .
12,6 .
su t5r a , a easy top ass , X . 127, 6 .
su -d 5ms a s , a . (Bv . wondrous,i . 85
,l
[ d 5r1l sa s wond er] .su -a5k sa , a . (Bv. ) most ski lful, v. 11, 1 .
very wise, v. 11 , 2 ;
[suvit5
su-d5nu , a . bountiful, i .61
,3 .
su - dfigh a , a . (Bv. ) yield ing good mi lk, i i .35
,7 [d fi gh a mi lking : dugh duh ] .
sfi well -es ta blished , iv . 50,8
[d h i ta , pp . of d h 5 put] .su -d h f s -tama , spv. a . very proud, i .160
,2 .
su -n i th 5, a . (Bv. ) giving good guidance ,i . 35
,7 . 10 .
sunv -5n t , pr . pt. press ing Soma , ii . 12,vi . 54
,6 [ su p ress] .
su-p 5th a , n . f a ir pa th , vi i . 63 6 .
su -p arn5, a . (Bv. having beautiful wings ;m . bird , i . 35, 7 .
su -
p al 5s’
5, a . f a ir- leaved,x . 135, 1 .
su -p é é as , a . (Bv. ) well-adorned , 11 . 35,1 [p é é as , n . ornament] .
su -p rak et5, a . consp i cuous , iv . 50, 2 [prak et5, m . token] .
su -p raj5, a . (Bv. ) having good ofi sp ring,iv. 50, 6 [p raj5] .
su -pr5ti k a , a . (Bv. ) lovely, vi i . 6 1,1
[having a fa ir countenance p r5ti
k a ,
su -pr5n i ti , a . (Bv.) giving good guidance,X . 15, 1 1 .
su-p rap 5n5, a . (Bv. ) giving good dr ink ;11 . good drinking p la ce, v. 83, 8 .
su -b h 5g a , 5 . having a good share, opulen t ;genia l
,vi i . 63 , 1 .
su -b h fl , 5 . excellent, ii. 35, 7 [S15 well +bhu being] .
sd-b h 1°ta , pp . well cheri shed , iv. 50 , 7 .
sfi -mak h a , 111 . grea t warr ior , 1. 85, 4 .
su-m ati , f. good ewi ll, i ii . 59, 3 . 4 ; iv.
50, 11 ; viii . 48 , 12 ; X . 14, 6 .
su -m5na s , a . (Bv. ) cheerf ul, v i i . 86, 2[Av . hu-manah wel l-disposed cp .
second par t of eé -uevfis] .sv-mfl ik a , a . (Bv . ) very gracious, i . 35,10 [m1 1i k 5
,n . mercy] .
su -medh 5s , a . (Bv. ) having a good understanding
, wise , v i ii . 48, 1 .
su -mn 5, n . good-wi ll,ii . 33, 1 . 6.
sum n5 -
y l’
i , a . kind ly, vii. 71, 3 .
su -rab h i , a . f ragrant, X . 15,12 .
sfir 5 , f. liquor, vi i . 86 , 6 [Av. hura] .su -r é tas , a . (Eva) a bounding in seed , i .160
,3 .
su-v5rcas , a . (Bv. ) f ull of vigour , X . 14, 8 .
su -v5c , a . (Bv. ) eloquen t, v i i . 103, 5 .
suv - i t5, n . .welf are, v . 11 , 1 well +i t5, pp . of i go : oppos i te of d ur
85, 10 ; V11 .
suvid 5tf a ]
su -v i d 5tra , a . bountiful, X . 14, 10 ; 15,3 . 9 .
su-v‘
ira , a . (Bv. ) having good champ ionsstrong sons
, 12 ; i i . 12,15 ;
vi ii. 48 , 14 .
su -vu y a , n .
“hos t of good champ ions, iv.
su f. song of pra ise, i i . vii .[ sfi + rk t i from are pra ise,
su -v1°j5na , a . (Bv. ) having f a ir abodes, X
15,2 .
su- é ip ra , a . (Bv. ) f a ir- tipped , i i. 12, 6 ;33
,5 .
su-s’
é va , a . most p ropi tious, i ii . 59 , 4 . 5
vi ii . 48,4 .
su - sak h i , m . good f riend , vii i . 48 , 9[ s5k h i f r i end] .
su-stgu ti , f. eulogy, ii . [ stuti p ra ise] .su - s
'
gfi bh , a . well-p ra i sing, iv. 50,5
[ s tubh pra ise] .su -h 5va , a easy to invoke , 1 1 . 33 5
[h 5va invoca tion] .sfi , adv. well
,v. 83
,10 [ i
t 8 5
2
well1] .
su -n5r5 , a . bountiful, v i ii . 1 [Av.
hunara] .s i i -nfi , m . son , 1. 1 . 9 ; 85, 1 viii . 48
,4
[Av. hunu,0 G. sunu
,L i th . sunu
,Eng .
son] .sup 5y an5, a . (Bv . ) giving easy access
,
easi ly access i ble,1. 1
,9 [ 8 11 up5y an a] .
sur -a , m . sun , vi i . [sv5r ligh t] .sur i , m . p a tron , i i .sur -
.ya , m sun ,1 30 7 9
33 1 °v ii . 6
,1 1 ;
v iii . 29,10 ; X . 14
,12 ; 90, 13 [ sv5r
ligh t] .8 1
°flow, III . s i sarti .
fi p a p r5 stretchf or ih to, i n t. 3 . sa sarsr -e ,
ii .s1
°jemi t,VI . s1
°j5ti [Av. herez a i'
ti] .5va d ischarge downward
,ii . 12
,12 cas t
ofi'
,vi i . 86
,5 .
l’
i p a send forth to (ace. i i . 35,1 .
s1°
p -r 5 , a . extensive , iv. 50, 2 [s1°
p creep] .s é -n5 , f. missi le
,i i . 33
,11 [s i d is
char ge] .sen5 -n 1 , m . leader of an army, genera l,X . 34
,12 .
s é -ma , m . jui ce of the Soma p lant, i . 85 ,10 ; i i . 12 , 14 ; iv. 50
,10 ; vi i . 49 , 4 ;
vi i i . 48,3 . 4 2. 7—15 ; X . 14
,13 ; 34 , l
Soma sa cr ifice, vi i . 103, 7 [ su p ress
Av. haoma ] .
s oma -p 5, m . Soma drinker,ii . 12
,13 .
s oma-p i th 5, m . Soma draught,X . 15
,8
[p i th 5 from p 5 drink] .
som -in , a . soma -
p ressing, V11 . 103, 8 .
s om -y 5, a. Soma - loving,X . 14
,6 ; 15 , l .
5 . 8 .
saumanas -5, 11 . good gra ces , 111. 59 , 4 ;X . 14
,6 [ su-m 5nas] .
sk an d leap , I. P. sk 5nd ati , int. inj.k 5n i sk an , VI ] . 103, 4 .
sk ab h 5y a , den . prop , es tablish , 1. 154, 1[ from sk abh ,
IX . sk ab hn5t i ] .sk 5mbh -ana , n . prop , suppor t, i . 160, 4 .
stan thunder, II . P. cs . stan5y ati , id. ,
v . 83, 7. 8 [Gk . ar e’
vw
s tan -5th a , m . thunder, v. 83, 3 .
s tan5yan t , pr . pt. thundering, v. 83,2 ;
X . 168, 1 .
s tanay i -tnfi , m . thunder, v. 83, 6 .
stabh or stambh p rop , support, IX .
stabh n5 t1 , 1 1 12, 2 .
vi prop asund er,pf. tastambh a
,iv . 50
,
1 ; vi i . 86, 1 .
st5v -5na , pr . pt. A . ps . being p ra ised ,i i . 33
,11 [ stu p ra ise] .
s th i -r5, a . fi rm,i i . [ sth 5 s tand] .
stu pra ise , II. st5uti , i i . 33, 11 v . 83,l
p r5 pra ise a loud, i . 154 , 2 .
stu -t5, pp . p ra ised , i i . 33, 12 .
sh iv -5nt , pr . pt. p ra ising, iv. 51,7 v1 .
54 , 6.
ste-n 5, m . thief , X . 127,6 [ s t5 be
s tea lthy] .s to-tf , m . p ra iser , vi . 54 , 9 ; v11 . 86, 4
[ stu pra ise] .s té -ma , m . song of p ra ise, 1 1. 33, 5 V11 .
86, 8 ; X . 127, 8 [ stu p ra ise] .s té ma -tasga , a . (Tp . ) f ash ioned into
being the subject of ) pra ise X .
str l , f. woman, X . 34 11 [Av. siri ] .
s th 5 s tand,I . t i stgh a
° pf. ta stb a r , i .35 , 5 ; r t. ao . s . 3 . 5sth 5t , i . 35, 10 ;iv. 51
,1 pl . 3 . 5sth ur , iv. 5 1, 2 [Av.
Gk . 70 1m“, Lat. s is to] .5ti extend beyond , X . 90, 1 .
5d h i ascend,X . 135, 3 ; s tand upon, 1.
35,6 .
5p 5 star t of ,V111 . 48
,
abh i overcome, iv. 50, 7 .
5 mount,i . 35
,4 ; mount to (ace . ) , i . 85 ,
7 ; occupy, i i. 35 , 9 .
1’
1 d ar ise,v.
1’
1pa app roa ch, rt. ao . a sth i ta , X.
127, 7 ,
p 5ri surround,pf. tasthu r , 1 1. 35, 3 .
h 5stavant]
h 5st5 -V ant , 5 . having hands , X . 34,9 .
I . h 5 leave,III . P. J
'
ab5ti .5V 5 ps . h i yate , be_ lef t behind , X . 34, 5 .
2 . h 5 go away, III . A. jih i te .
5p 5 depar t, vi i . 71,1 3 . 8 . Sb . s . 5 0 .
h 5 sate,X . 127
,3 .
fi d sp ring up , v. 83, 4 .
h i , cj. f or , i . 85, 1 ; 154 , 5 ; 160, 1 ; 11 .
35, 1 . 5 . 9 ; iv. 51 , 5 ; viii . 48 , 6 ;since , vi ii . 48 , 9 ; X . 34
,11 p ray, X
14,4 .
h ims,injure
,VII . h in5sti injure i s ao.
inj. , X. [probab ly 5 ds . of h amstrike] .
h i -t5, pp . p laced, v. 11,6 [ later form of
d h i ta from d h 5 put ; Gk . 061 6 s set] .h i -tv5y5 , gd . leaving behind
,X . 14
,8
[ 1 . h a. leave]h im5, m . winter, ii . 33, 2 [Av. z ima
,
Os l . z ima Gk . 6vo -x1110 s
subject to bad storm s‘horr id
h iran -y 5 , n . gold ornament, ii .h i rany a-d5
,a . (Tp . giver Of fgold , i i .
h i rany a -p 5n i , a . (Bv . ) golden-handed
,i .
35, 9 .
h iranya -pran ga , a . (Bv. ) having a goldenpole , i . 35, 5 .
hi rany 5-y 5 , a . golden,i . 35, 2 ; 85, 9 ;
i i . 35,10 viii . 29
,1 .
h i rany a -r i i p a , a . (Bv. ) having a goldenform,
i i . 35,10 .
h i rany a -v 5 1 n 5 , a . (Bv. ) golden-coloured,
i i . 35,9—1 1 .
hi ra
gy a
- é am‘
i , a . (Bv. ) having golden p ins,i . 5
,4 .
hi rany a -sarnd ré , a . (Bv . ) having a goldenaspect, i i . 35, 10 .
h i ranya -h a sta , a . (Bv. ) golden-handed , i .35
,10 .
h i rany 5k s5, a . (Bv. ) golden- eyed , i . 35, 8[ak s5 5 k s i eye] .
h i d. be angry, I . h é d a : pf. J 1h i 15 , X .
34,2 .
h i -n 5, pp . f orsaken, X . 34,10 [11 5 leave] .
h u sacrifice , of er, III . juh é ti , i i i . 59 , 1X . I4
,IS—15.
5 of er, i i i_.h i
'
i ca ll, _I . A . h 5vate, 11 . 12 , 8 . 9 33
,5 ;
VI . A. huv é , vi i . 61 , 6 ; 71 , 1 ; X .
14,5 .
h 1° be angry, IX. A . h rn i te, 11 . 33,15;
wi th vi i . 86,3 .
h 1’°d , n . hear t
,i i . 35
,2 ; v. 11 , 5 ; v1 1 .
86,8 ; viii . 48, 4 . 12 X . 129
,4 [Av.
zard] .h id -ay a , n . heart, x . 34
,9 .
h e-ti , f. dart, i i . 33 , 14 [h i imp el] .h e -t i
’
i , m . cause : ab . h eté s f or the sakeof , X . 34
,2 [ impulse z h i imp el] .
h é -t1°
, m . invoker,i . 1
,1 . 5 ; v . 1 1
,2
[h i ca ll] .h otr5 -vi d , a . (Tp . ) knowing obla tions , X.
15, 9 [h é - tr5 , Av. zao- thi a ; cp . Gk .
xii- 1 115 pot
hv5 ca ll,IV. hv5y 5 , i . 35 14.
v i ca ll d ivergently, i i . 12 , 8 .
GENERAL INDEX
The letters a,b,0,(1 fol lowing the references to hymns indicate the first,
second, th ird, and fourth P5da respective ly of th e stanza .
Accent, in Sandh i : 11 686’v 5 , v i .
8 5 n5v é’
gue , i. 1 , 9 ; br 5hmanc‘
)’sya ,
X . 90, 12 a ; Svari ta fol lowed by
U‘z
’
d5 tta : nv‘
an t5r , vi i . 86, 2 ; kv é
d 5 n im , i . 35 , 7 0 ; tanv5 s5s’
uj5n ah ,
X . 34,6 b ; vapusye 11 5 , i . 160, 2 0
°
Ud5 tta changed to Svari ta : té’var
d h anta , i . 8 5, 7 5 ; in compoundsDvandvas , dy5v5 p1°th iv1 , i . 35, 9 b ,
160,2 °
,Karmadh5 rayas, su
-5v 5n ,1.
b ; 5 sa'
é ca nt , i . 160,2 ; 85
m5k h5 sas , i . 5 k s i yam5n 5 ,i . 154 , 4 b ; su tas tam , 1 1 35, 2 5 ; 5h i tam , v i ii 29 , 4 °
, Tatpurusas, P ar
j5uy a -jinvi t5m , vi i . 103 , 1 c ; d ev5
h i tim , vii . 103, 9 a ; k avi-85 8 158 , X .
14,4 c ; Agn i -sv5t t5 s , X . 15 , 1 1 5 ;
ek ap ar5sy 5 , X . 34, 2 0 Bahuvri l i is ,su-p arn5s , su -n i th 5s , i . 35 , 7 a b ; aren5vas , i . 35, 11 b su -d 511i s asas , i .
b ; h i 1°a11y 5k s5s , 1. 0 ;uru -vy5cas5 , i . 160, 2 a 5s
’
u-h em 5 ,su -p é s
’
asa s , i i . 35, 1 c d 5n -5g 5s , v83,2 0 ; v i é v5-caks5 s , urn -0511 85 8 ,
V 1i . tr i -v andh ur5s , vi i . 7 1,4 b ; su -s akh 5 , V111 48 , 9 d ; governing compounds
, y5va y a’
j-j5 nas , i i i .b ; i n declens ion , nady 5s , ii .
35,3 b ; d 5d h 5 t , i . 35 , 8 d ; g rnat é ,
i i i . 59 , 5 b ; n i dh i n5m ,vi i i . 29 , 6 ;
b 5 h5 n5m , ii . 35, 12 ; p rth ivy5s , 1i .a ; 160 , 1 a ; i n syn tax . at
beginn ing of sentence,ii . 35 , 12 c ;
v. 83 , 4 a b 7 a ; vi i .63
,4 d ; 71 , 2 d 86
,1 d ; vi ii.
48,6 b . 8 5 ; X . 15
,4 b ; 34, 4 d . 14 5 ;
wi th kuvi t, i i . 2 b ; iv . 51,4 5 ;
of cd . verb , i . 35, 9 0 ; v. 83,4 a b ;
sh ift of, j5 stam , 1 ii . 59,5 0 ; d i
d 1 k su, vii . 86 , 3 a ; vi8v5 . 160 ,
1 a . 5 0 ; e5tur iv. 51, 5 d ; amuy5,X . 135
,2 b .
1902
Accusative,double
,11 . 35
,1 iv.
51,1 1 b ; of goa l , X . 14 , 13 0 ; of time
,
vi i . 103, 1 a ; X . 168 , 3 b .
Agn i , descr iption of, pp . 1—3 ;29
,2 .
Ahura Asura,mean ing of
,i . 35 , 7
in Avesta,pp . 1 19
,124 .
Al l i teration,X . 14 , 7 a b . 9 .
Ambiguity, intentional , V11. 103, 8 0 .
9 d .
Amb iguous form : 55111 8 5 , 2 . s . i pv. or
1 . s . sb . ; vi i . 61 , 4 5 .
Amred i ta compounds . d iv é d ive , i . 1,3 . 7 ; grh é -grb e , v. 11 , 4 b ; v5ne
vane , v . 11 , 6 b°
g5tre g5 tre , viii .48
,9 b ; p i h a -p i b a , see note on X.
14,7 .
Anaphor ic repeti tion : Agn i s , v . 11 , 4 ;5rh 5 n , ii . 33 , 10 ; ay 5m sam , i i . 35,15 a b ; iy 5m , vi i . 71 , 6 ; 5va , vi i . 86,5 ; 11 , X . 127, 3 ; k 58 , X . 135 , 5 ;b h y am , v. 11
,5 ; tvam , V1 11
té , X . 15,5 ; h i , X . 127, 5 ; P 5 85,
54,5 °
, M i tt 5s , i i i . 59, 1° ma , 11 33, 4 ;
X . 135 , 2 . 3 (y5r1i kum5r5) ; y5s , i i .1
, y 5sya vraté , v. 83 , 5°
, y5su ,
Vi i . 49 4 ; y é , X . vi , i i . 33, 2 ;s5m ,
x. 14 , 8 hv5y 5m i , i . 35, 1 U se
of 85 , i . 1 , 9 ; v. 1 1 , 6 of t é , X . 15, 7 d .
Angi ra ses , description of,viii. 29 , 10.
Antithes is : p racy 5v5y anto aeyut é , i .b ; é k o tr ibh i s , i. 154
,3 d ;
1
é
i
ko vi s’
v5,i . 154, 4 d ; p 5re 5vare ,
8 b ; sam5n5m n5n 5 , i i . 12 ,8 0 d ; 8 5m 5 p 5 , 1 1 35, 3 5 ; ji hm5n5m urdhv5h , i i . 35, 9 b ; jig1
°t5m
jajas t5m ,iv. 50, 1 1 ; 5sar11m1
°stah
du8 k1 t5h, v .
0 d ; 5yajv5 n5m yajn5m 5 nm 5,
v ii . 61, 4 c d ; k 1°sn
i
1°arusaya , vi l 71 ,
1 b ; 50 e t5y 5 d aci tah , vii.sam5u5m vi r5p 5h , vii. 103
,6 0 ;
vi ii.
5m5 rtyo m5r ty 5n ,viii . 48
,12 b ; s5t
é k am , X . 14,16 b ; n i 05 up 5r i , 5
h as t5so h 5st5 -v 5 nt5m , §i t5h n i r d ah
an t i, X . 34
,9 d ; é k a v i é v5t5 h ,
X .
135, 3 0 .
Anti thetica l accent, i . 35, 9 c ; 85 , 7 b ;i i . 35
,3 5 iv. 51 , 11 (1 (0 5 v. 83
,
4 a b ; X .
Anud5tta s fol l owing a Svari ta,
un
marked,vii . 61
,2 .
Aorist, character istic use of,vi i i . 29 , 3 .
A pas Waters, descr iption of , pp. 115- 16.
Ap5r11 n5p5 t, desor1ption of, pp. 67—8 .
Appos ition , adjective in , i . 85 , 12 b ;substant ive in
,X. 90
,15 d .
Asvins , descr iption of,pp . 128 -30 ; viii .
29,8 .
Asp i ration ,in itia l , i i . 1 2, 10 b (s )
v . 1 1,4 0 (h ) ; vi . 54 , 10 b (h ) ; v 1i .
103,10 b (h ) ; v i i i . 48 , 10 b (h ) x .
5 (h‘; 15, 12 b (h ) ; 90 , 6 d (h ) ;
129,2 d (h ) ; loss of
,i . 160
,3 d
(duk sa ta ) .Asyndeton
,i . 1 , 3 a ; 35 , 10 c ; 85 , 9 d ;
160,5 b ii i . 59
,9 5 ; iv . 50 , 1 1 d ; vi i .
61,4 5 ; 63 . 1 0 . 4 d . 6 b ; 71 , 1 d ; X .
15,4 d ; 127, 6 5 ; &c . &c.
Atr i s,p. 152 .
Attraction, of antecedent, v. 50, 8 X .
15,6 ; 127, 4 b ; of case, vi ii . 48 , 5 c ;
x. 14,2 c ; of gender , i . 35 , 6 5 ; 154 ,
5 0 ; X . 129 , 4 b ; of num ber , X . 90,12 b ; of number and gender , X . 90
,
8 0 .
Autumns years of l i fe, v i i . 61 , 2 .
Avesta , pp. 44,67
,79
,1 16
,1 19
,124
,
135,154
, 171 , 2 12 .
Bird, sa id of Savi tr , i . 35, 7 a .
Byhaspati , description of, pp . 83—4 .
Br5hmanas,r itua l of
,vii . 103
,8 .
Cadence,t rocha ic (of G5yatr i ) , v i ii .
29,7.
Caesura,irregular long° syl lab le after ,
i . 35 , 8 b d ; v. 1 1, 3 0 ; a fter thirdsyl lab le
,vii . 61
,1 d h iatus after
,vi i .
71,6 a ; a preced ing 0 not shortened
before 5 , i . 35, 1 1 d .
Case -form retain ed in compound,11 .
33,2 a ( tv5
Castes in RV. ; only men tion of,p . 195 .
Cerebra l ization,
of 11 in externa l
Sandh i , i i . 33, 3 c (nae) vi i i . 48 , 4 d7 0 ( 9 5 s ) in in ternal Sandh i,
v. 83 , 8 d (suprap é nam ) ; x. 15,11 b
(su -
p ran i tay as ) of s : i . 85,5 c vi
sy anti ) 6 a (ragh u -syad as ) 154 ,2 b (g i ri -s tha s) ; i i . 33, 4 b (dustut i ) ; iv . 50, 3 b (n i s edur ) ; vii .103
,7 c (pari 8 c (s i svi d ana s )
viii . 48 , 9 b (u i sasatth a ) 9 d ( susakh a ) in a l l the above cases theSandh i is annu l led in the Pada text .
Change from sing. to p l . , syntactica l ,iv. from 2 . to 3 . prs.
,i .
ii . 33,1 from 3 . to 2 . prs . , i . 85 , 4 ;
i i . 12,15 ; 35 , 6 a b ; vii . 103 , 5 d .
Cognate acc. ,i . 154 , 2 a iv. 6 e : v.
c ; _ vi i . 49, 4 b ; vi ii . 29 , 1 b . 7 a ;x . 14
,10 d ; 15, 10 b ; 34, l 3 a ; 135 ,
2 c .Col lective use of singular
,c
(arvat) . 3 a (ja ta ) ; vi i . 103,2 a
( enam) . 4 c (manduk as ) . 1 0 . 6 d . 8 3.
(vac)Comparative pcl . to be supplied , W I .
103. 1 b. 7 a .
Compound . fi rstmember '
l n Pada text ,unchanged
,iv. b (vrsa11 -vasu ) ;
i n tei preted in the RV. i tself, x. 15,
12 a (jataved a s ) .Concord , of s
’
atam , 11 . 33,2 of sah as
ram ,x . 15 , 10 0 ; vii i . 48
,l o
(yam for yad ) ; iv. 51 , 9 c (m . adj.with f. noun ) .
Contraction,irr. secondary , V11 . 86 , 4 d
(turé yam) .Creation, hymn of, pp. 207- 11 .
Dative,of advantage
,11 . 35, 7 d ; v.
11 , i d ; x . 34,6 d ; final
,i . 85 , 9 c ;
i i . 12 , 9 ; v. 1 1 , 1 b. 2 d ; vii .86
,7 d viii . 48 , 10 d .
D ice hymn,x . 34 , pp . 186 95 .
Dissyl labic pronunciat ion of longvowel s, i . 35
,8 b ( tri ) ; ( 1
(tredh a ) . 3 a ( susam) ; v1. 54 , 10 a(p aras tad ) V I ] . 63, 6 a (nu) ;
(jyesth am ) viii . (n i d h i nam )Doubtful interpretation , 1.
154 , 6 b (aya sas )(makh a) 0 (dh i sage ) i i . 12 ,1 b (p aryabhusat ) . 3 b (ap adh a )33
,12 a b ; 35 , 4 a (asmera s ) . c (sik
vab h i s ) . 5 c (k r ta s ) . 6 (a—d ) . 9 d (y ahV i s ) . 14 d (a tk a i s ) ; iv. (a d )
.
b (vay f ma ) . 4 d (sap ta sy e) vi i .
(1. 5 ; 7 1 , 4 d (v i é vap snyas ) ;a (d i d rk su) 6 a (d h rfi ti s )
15,4 d . 11 d ; 127
,6 a ; 129 , 6 d
( ath a ) ; 15 4 b ,vii . 86, 5 b (cak rma)
°
x. d 8 0 (na ) . 14 a
(mrl ata )° 90
,3 b
6 a (y avay a )° b (vy oma) ;
0 ( atra) in cds. and der ivat ives : 4 (abh 1 -vr tam ) ; 160, 1 b(r ta -vari ) ° i i . 12 , 4 c (jig ivan ) ; v ii .71 , 3 b (sumnayava s )
° 63 . 2 a (p rasav i ta ) °
X . ,34 10 0 (rna -va )°
(uruLocative , absolute , vii . 63, 5 c ; 103,3 b ; of the goa l , i . 1 , 4 ; v. 11
,3 d ;
of time,vii . 103, 9 c . 10 d .
Long reduplicative vowel , i . 154 , 4 d ;i ii . 59,1 h (d adh ara) ; i i . 33, 12 (n a
nama) °0 ( d i d ivamsam )
° 4 d(d i d ay a ) . 7 b ; v i i i . 29 , 6 a (p ip ay a ) .
Loss of accent , i i . 35, 1 a b ( asma i,
a sy a) ; vi . 54, 4 a ( asma i) ; vii . 63,5 a (a smai ) ; viii . 29, 6 (y ath a ) .
Maruts,description of
,pp . 21—2 .
Metre,irregular, i . 35 , 9 d i l l . 59
,2 d
7 c . 8 0 ; iv. 12,4 0 ; b ; 50,
2 0 ; viii . 29, 5 ; x . b . 4 a ;mentioned in the RV. ,
.
p . 175 .
Anustubh : v . 83 , 9 ,vi i . 103
,1 x .
1—7 ;Pada redundant by one syl labl e, x
90,4 a ; 135 , 7 c .
Gayatri : i . 1 , 1—9 ; i ii . 59 , 6—9 ; vi .54
,1 - 10 ; x . 127 , 1
—8 .
J agati : i . 85 , 1—4 . 6—1 1 160,1—5 ; iv .
50,10 ; v . 1 1 , 1
—6 ; 83, 2—4 ; viii . 48 ,5 ; x . 15 , 1 1 34
,7 Pada in Tr istubh
stanza,i . 35
,3 a ; v . 83
,10 0 ; vii .
103 , 8 ,
129 , 3 b ; Pada wi thTr istubh cadence ,9 d ; stanzas in Tristubh hymn ,
iv . 50, 10 ; v. 83 , 2—4 .
Tr istubh , i . 35 , 1
6 ; l i . 33 1 15 ; 35 , —1 15 °
i ii 59 1 5 iv. 50, 1
v. 5—8. 10 ; vii . 49 , 1—4 61 , 1—7
63. 1—6 ; 71 , 1—6 86, 1—8 ; 103 ,
2—10 ;v i ii . 48 , 1 - 4 . 6—15 ; x . 14 , 1—12 ; 15 ,1—10 . 12—14 ; 34 , 1
—6 . 8 14 ; 90, 16 ;129
,1 - 7 ; 168 , 1
—4 ; Pada in J aga tis tanz a
,viii . 48 , 5 c ; Pada defective
by one syl lable , x . 14 , 5 c . 8 d , bytwo syllables, x . 129 , 7 b , redundantby one sy llable
,x . 129 , 6 b .
Dvipada (J agati Gayatri Pada) , viii .—10.
O bjective genitive,
1 1 .
x . 34 , 3 d .
12,
7 d .
11
Brhati,x . 14, 15 .
Metronym ic, irregular,(Danu) .
M idd l e i n passive sense,i . 35
,10 d ;
154,2 a ; 160, 4 d . 5 a ; i i . 33,
vii . 61,5 b .
M ithra i ii the Avesta,p . 119 .
M itra , description of, pp . 78—9 .
M itra-Varuna , description of, pp . 118
19 ; viii . 29, 9 .
Na ighantuka , 1 1 . 12, 14 . 15 ; 35 , 9 .
Nasal iz at ion of a fi nal vowe l at the endof an inte1 nal Pada
,i . 35
6,6 a (upa
sth arh é k a) vii i . 29 , 6 (y ath amesa)
°
. 34 , 5 c (ak ratamé m‘
id ) .Natura l ph ilosophy
,start ing point of
,
p . 207 (x .
Niruk ta , i i . 12, 3 . 14 .
Nomina tive for vocative,iv. 50
,10 a .
Numerals,syntax of
,ii . 33
,2 ; x . 15
,
10 c.
Pada text , its trea tment of the pcl . 11 ,vi . 54
,2 ; of vocat ives i n 0 , i i . 33, 3 b
(Vajrabah o ) . 15 a (b ab hr o) viii . 48 ,2 c . 15 c ( ind o ) of Pragrhya vowels
,
i . 35 , 9 b (e , i ) ; i . 160 , 1 b iv.
50,10 b x . 168
,1 d (ut6 ) ; of
fi na l etymologica l r,i . 35
,11 a (Sa
‘vi tar i ti ) i i . 12, 4 b (akar i t i ) vi i.
86,2 b ( antah) vii i . 48, 2 a ( antar
i ti ) ; of interna l 8 before k, vi i . 1034 c (k an i sk an ) ; of suffixes : i . 1 , 1 c160
,2 c iii . 59
,6 c -tama) ; vi 1i . 48 ,
1 b - tara ) vi i . 103 6 d ; x. 15 , 9 a- tra) vii . 103 , 3 c (gd .
-tya) ; i i . 35 ,4 c ; iv. 51 , 9 c d -b h i s ) ; i v. 50
,7 d
(den .-ya ) x . 15 , 6 a ; 129, 4 d (gd .
-ya) of certain long Samhita vowelsi . 35 , 8 b (cy avay a
b) ; b (p ra
x . 135, 7 ( sad an am)° 1 b (r ta
vari ) i i . (jig iva n ) i i i . 59, 6 8.(cars an i d b f tas ) ; vii . 63 , 2 a (p ra s avi ta ) ; x . a (ta trsur )
° x . 34, 10
(rnava ) ; i ts restoration of lost asp irate
,i . 160
,3 d (d uk sata)
° i ts re
mova l of Sandh i in cds .,i . 154 , 2
(g i ri -s th a s) °x. 15 , 11 b ( sup ran i
tay a s) ° i ts trea tment of dual compounds , i . 35, 1 b (m i travaru11au) ;160
,1 a (d yava -p r th iV 1 )
°X. 14, 8 b
( i st5 its non analysis of certa in cds. , i . 35, 9 b ; v . 83 , 8 c( dy5v5-p rth iv1 )
° i . 154 , 2 b (hu-car5) .
4 ; ii . 35 , 7 b ( svad h5) ; i i . 12 , 4 c
(5d a t) ° i i . 33 , 3 ,viii . 48 , 8 a (svasti ) ;
i i . 33 , 5 c ; viii . 48 , 10 a ( rdud 5r a )°
iv . 50,1 (t asp 5ti )
° x . 90 , 13
i
a
( candr5m5s )° 135
,2 a (v i sth5s ) °
5 (m5nasv5n )° its analysi s
1
of
sv5v5n , i . 35, 10 b its irregular aocen tuation of cd . augmen ted verbs ,vi i i . 48 , 2 a (p r5 5g 5 8 ) . 10 0 (h i5dh 5y i ) ; x. 135
,4 a (p r5 5vartay as ) .
P511 in i, p . 210 .
Pantheism,starting point of, p . 195.
Parenthetica l P5da,x . 127
,8 b.
Parjanya,description of, p . 104 .
Partitive gen itive, i . 160, 4 a ; i i . 33, 3 b .
4 d ; vi ii . 48, l a ; x . 15, 3 d .
Perfect w ith present sense,i . 85 , 3 b
(d ad h i re ) . i i . b (jagh5na) °
d (tas th ur ) . 13 d (v ivesa )' i ii .
b (d 5d h 5ra ) . 7 b (b abhuva ) .8 a (yemi re ) ° x . 34, 11 a (tat5p a ) .
Periphrastic use of rela tive,x . 90
,7 d .
8 d . 12 0 .
Person , syntactical change of, i . 85, 4 c(3 , 5 c (2 . viii. 48 , 5 b c(2 . to 3 .
P i sch el,iv. 51
,1 (p.
Pitara s , descript ion of, p 176 .
Play on words,p . 174 (yam ) .
P1 agrhya vowels : i , i . b (d yav5p rth iv1 )
°5 b c (d y5v5prth i
V i , rt5var i , d h 5ray5t-kavi , suj5nmani , d en ) . 4 b e (r6d asi , r5j
o
as i ) .5 a b (mah i ni , d y5v5p r th iv i ) ° i i . 12 ,8 a (k r5nd as i , samy at1 ) . 13 p r th 1
v i )° v. 83
,8 c (dy5v 5 -p r th iV 1 ) , vi i .
11 : iv . 50, 10 b
(vrs anvasu)° vii. 61, 2 c ( suk ra tfi ) .
3 b e : i . 35,9 b (ub h é )
160,1 a c (té , dh i s5ne ) . 2 c ( sudh r s
tame , v apusy é ) . 5 a (t é , grh 5n é ) .5 d (a smé ) ° ii . a d (v ihvay ete ,
h avete) . 13 a (n amete) ; d( asmé ) ; 35 , 4 c ( asm é ) iv. 50, 11 b( asm é ) vii . 61 , 3 c (d ad h 5th e ) viii .48 , 10 c (asm é ) ; x . 90
,4 d (s 5s
’
an 5
na é an é ) 0 : ii . 33,3 b (vajrab 5h o) ;
viii . 48 , 2 c . 4 a ( i nd o) ° 1 d(ut6 ) ; not shortened in pronunciation before vowels : i i . 12v i i . 49
,3 b (saty 5nrté ) .
Pravargya ceremony, vi i . 103, 8 .
Quantity , interch ange of, i . 35, 6 b iv.
51,2 d ; vii . 49 , 2 0 . 3 c .
Sampras5 rana , i i . 12 ,8 (h i). for hv5) .
Sandh i,1 . of vowels : artifi cial , v . 83,
6 c (e 5 e) irr. , i i . 12, 5 a (s é ti )
Predicative adjective,1 1 . 12
,2 . 4 ; 33 ,
2 d ; iv. 50 , 7 d ; v. 83, 3 d . 7 0 ; vii .61
,4 c ; x . 34
,12 d 2 ; (nom . ) with ps .
,
x . 90,12 b .
Preposition,fol lowing vb .
,i . 85 , 3 c .
6 0 . l 0 b . 12 b ; i i . c ; iv. a .
7 b . 9 a ; v . 11 , 2 d ; x . 34, 14 b ; 90,4 d 129
,4 a 168 , 2 fol low ing
participle,x . 34 , 6 d ; separa ted from
vb . ,i . 35 , 7 a . 9 c d . 1 1 d 85 , 1 a . 2 d .
4 a . 5 a . 6 a . 7 b . 9 d ° i i i ii .59 , 4 c ; iv. 50, 4 d ; 51 2 c ; vii . 616 a ; 63 , 5 0 ; x . 15 , 9 c ; 34 , 2 d . 3 a
,
127,l d . 5 a . 7 a . 8 a separated from
infin itive,vii . 61 , 6 c ; of é ompound
vb . repeated,1 1 . 33
,2 c d i ii . 59 , 7 c
vi i . b ; x . 51 , l a b ; 127 , 5 b e ;accentuation of compounded
,iv. 51 ,
5 c ; vi i . 71,2 a . 4 0 ; x. 14
,14 d ;
15,2 0 .
Present used in past sen se,i . 85
,9 c .
Principle clause for relative,i i . 12 ,
5 b . 8 d .
Prolation of vowel,x . 129 , 5 b (5 si 3 t ) .
Purusa hymn,pp .
Pfi san, description of, p . 111 V111 .
29,5 .
E5tri , goddess of Night, description of,p. 203 ; hymn to , pp. 203—7 .
Reciproca l generation,x . 90 , 5 a b .
Reduplica tion,irregu lar
,viii . 48
,5 b
(an 5h a ) .Refra in , of stanzas, 11 . 12, 1 d
—14 d v .
83,3 d—4 (1 ; v i i . 49
,1 d—4 d ; of
hymns, i i . 12 , 15 d ; 33 , 15 d ; 35 ,15 d ; iv. 50, 6 d ; V1 1 . 61 , 7 d ; 63 ,6 a—d . 6 d ; 71, 6 a—d ; 86 , 8 d
° 103,
10 d ; viii . d ; x . 14, 5 d
Re lative clause,antecedent in
,N . 50 ,
7 b . 8 d principal c lau se in place of,
ii . 12 , 5 a . 8 d .
Rhythm,abnorma l , i . 160, 5 d ; x . 90
,
2 b . 6 a . 15 a see also Metre,i rregu
lar .Roth
,1. 35, 10 ; 154 , 6 j1 1 . 35 , 9 .
Rudra , d escription of, pp . 56 - 7 ; V1 11 .
29,5.
between P5das , resolved a a ,11 . 33
,
7 0 . 10 a i i i . 59 , 4 0 ; v. 83 , l 0 a ; vii i .29
,1 a . 3 a ; x . 14 , 4 a ; 15 , 4 0 ; 34 ,
1 1 a ; 90 , 13 0 ; 129 , 6 0 ; 5 5 , i . 35 ,2 0 ; i i . a i , x . 14 , 8 a ; 15 ,6 a ; a u , i . a r
,vii . 103 , 9 a ;
vi ii . 29,l a ; x. 90, 1 0 . 3
V
a ; 5 5 , i .85
,7 a ; i . 160
,l a ; 5 u ,
iv. 51,
2 0 P5da in itia l a re stored e a, i .1 , 9 b ; 85. 9 d ; i v. 50
,10 b ; X . 14 ,
2 d ; 0 a,i . 35 ,
1 1 b ; i i . 35 ,13 d ; i ii . 59 , 6 b iv . 50,
l 0 d ; v . 1 1,4 d ; vii . 86 , 4 d . 5 b ;
103 , 3 d ; viii . 29 , 2 b ; 48 , 12 b . 13 b ;x . 14
,9 b ; 15 , 8 b . 12 b ; 34 , 10 d .
2 . of sem ivowels : a t the end of aP5da resolved before vowels : y a
,i .
154,4 a ; v . 83 , 6 0 ; v ii . 86, 7 a ;
V 1i i . 48,2 a ; y u ,
x . 14,13 0 ; 15,
8 0 . 1 1 0 ; v a ,i . iv.
x . 15,5 0 ; v e , x . v r
,vi i .
3 . of consonants : r before r , i . 35,11 0 ; i i . 33 , 2 a . l 4 a ; v . 83,0 Vi sa 1janiya before k , i . 85 , 6 0 ;35
,1 d : s before k , i . i i .
2 d ; vi i . 8
before p , v. 1 1 , 6 d ,x . 135, 4 b ,
t before i . 85, 3 , 11 before t , vi .54
,9 a (P u san t5va) ° x . 90
, 8 0 ( p aé un t 11 before 0 , x . 90, 8 0 (t5ms
c ak r e ) ; n before é , i . 35 , 5 ° ii . 12 ,10 b ; iv. 51 , 2 d . 7 d ; v . 11 , 6 b ; 5n
i i . 12 ,4 5n before vowels becomes 5m ,
i i . 33,4 &c . ,
irregularly l ema ins. x .
90,3 a (et5v5n a sya ) ° 5n at the end
of a Pada befo1 e vowel s rema ins,1.
11. 12,10 a . 12 a ; x . 90
,8 0 ;
before t at the end of a P5da remal ns,
ii . 33,6 a .
Savi tr,d escription of
,pp. 10—1 1 .
S5yana , i . 154 , 2 . 3 . 6 ; 160 , 3 . 4 ; i i .
12,1 . 3 . 8 . 12 . 14 ; 33 , 5 . 6 . 8 . 9 . 10.
12 ; 35 , 9 ; i i i . 59 , 1 ; iv. 3 . 8 ;v . 83 , 6 ; vi . 54 , 3 ; vii . 86 , 1 ; vi i 1 .29
,10 x . 14, 3 ; x . 12 .
Secondary root, i . 160 , 5 d ( i nv‘Sel f ’
exp1 essed by tm 5n in RV .,V I I .
63,6 b ; by tanu ,
V i i . 86,2 a . 5 b .
Sepa i a t 1on of members of Devat5dvandvas , i i . 12 , 13 .
8 110 1 ten ing, of e and 0 before a : i . 35,
11 0 ; 85, 3 a . 6 d ; 160,
3 d . 5 d ; 1 1. 12 , 3 0 . 7 d . 8 b . 9 d . 11 0 ;0 . 11 d ; 35, 8 5 ; i ii . 59 , 2 a ; iv .
5 ; 51 , 2 b. 3 0 . 4 b ; vi . 54, 1 h .
86 , 6 b .7 0 . 8 0 ;
103 , 3 d . 4 5 ; viii . 48 , 8 d . 11 c . 12 d ;x . 14, 1 d . 2 5 . 5 d . 12 0 . l 4 a ;34
,—d ; 90, 5 b c . 6 0 ; 127,
4 a . 5 a ; 129 , 6 a . 7 c d ; 135 , 6 b ; of5 be fore r
, i . 160, l a ; of 1 before a ,
x . b ; b,before 11 , 2 h,
before 5 , 3 b ,of radical vowel
,ii. 35
,
3 0 ; iv. 50, 5 d of dual 5,vii . 61 , 1 a
(V aru na ) . 7 a (d eva ) ; of inst . 1, viii.48
, 8 5 ( svasti ) .Slurred pronunciation of long vowel , i .154 , 3 a 1 d (tr é dh5) °
VI I .
63,6 5 (nu ) .
Singing,characteristic of the Angi
rases,viii . 29 , 10 .
Singular,f0 1° plur. noun , i . 85, 10 0
(v5n5m ) 11 . 33, 1 (5rvat i ) changefrom to plur. , iv. 51 , 11 0 .
S ix earths,p. 175 .
Sociat ive sense of inst . , X . 14,3 a b .
5 a b . 10 d ; 15, 8 0 .
Soma,description of
,pp . 152—5 ; viii .
29,1 .
Soma sacrifice,V 11 . 103 7 . 10 d .
Stanzas syntactical ly connected , i . 1 ,7 . 8 ; 85 , 4 . 5 .
Steed , ruddy of heaven,i . 85
,5 0
of the Sun,V I I . 63
,2 d .
Steeds of the Maruts, i . 85, 4 d .
Strong form for weak,1. 85, 12 0 (y an
ta ) 1 b (yuyoth 5 s ) . 3 d (yuy od h i ) ; i i i . 59 , 1 d (juh ota ) ; vii .71 , 1 d (y uy otam ) ; x . 14
,14 h (ju
h ota) . 15 b (juh ota na ) ; 15,7 d
(d ad h 5ta ) . 11 d (d ad h é tan a ) .Subjunctive and injunctive , whenidentica l in form ,
distingu ished bym5, i i . 33, 4 a .
Suffixes trea ted l ike second member ofa cd . ,
i . 160, l b (rt5var i ) . 3 a ( p av i trav5n ) , &c .
Supplied , word to be, 111 . 59, 7 0 ; v.
vi . vii . 6 1, 5 a . 7 d
vii i . x . 14 , 2 d . 5 0 ; 15 , 13 a ,
34, l 0 b ; 127 , 4 a 0 ; 168 , 1 a . 4 0 .
Surya, description of, p . 124.
Sutras,vi ii . 29 , 8 .
Svarabhakti vowel , 11 . 33, 1 3 . 5 - 7.
9 11 (End ara ) ° iv . 50, 11 a ( I ndara) ;
Svar i ta, independent, 11 . (abh iti ) ;
